Home

ATLAS.ti 6 User`s Guide and Reference

1. 301 Usersdefined content sci eame etna Ea anna a rede rens t de T a Dea bro f o d ds ete ed PER D due er Aly 302 Inspecting Content Explaining frequency count and number of quotations listed Clustering quotations ertet e etta ec prt eee n die d e vt rta rote A E ALO bath 305 C Coefficient ics QUE OF AN BG oa p dy Colored Circle n Passive View zu Data EXPOrk e a ica DER RTF O dae E T E E Excel quantitative Application DE Codes Primary Documents Cross Tabulati0N ooonnnnnnnnninnnnnnnonnancnnnnnicnn nc canaria How to create a Codes Primary Documents Table sssssssssssseesseeene eene ca Exporting the Entire data set teret eee cem d T A a ecce A E ta LA e ca C TR E eda Preparing tables to compare sub groups of data s Calculating Inter Coder Reliability using CAT eenrrerretrrerrst rers erret senes Standard combpaltlsOni x tidie deeem Areri A ESA see pro repre i ENAA dey ERR ea tuk DAR an EA PEENE NEE ENE eee AA A LI e LRL Further reSOurceS A Network Views Nodes and Links Directed and Non Directed Links et Strong and Weak LINKS derepente te e rfr pedet li dad nd re derriere ee a
2. lt TransformMod oldSel 1 10 1050 10 newSel 1 10 afterOldSel 1051010 beforeOldSel 1052 9 gt lt TransformMod oldSel 1 10 1 10 newSel 1 10 afterOldSel 2010 beforeOldSel 1052 9 gt TransformMod oldSel 1 10 1 10 newSel 1 10 afterOldSel 1 11 beforeOldSel 1052 9 gt lt LOGS gt As user there is no need to understand the content of a log file or even to open it You just need to know that it is there and that it s best not to touch it If you delete a log file and it cannot be rescued from the recycle bin you have lost the coding for this document The only option that remains then is to disconnect the document from the HU newly assign and recode it Best practice rules Rule No 1 Always edit from within ATLAS ti Editing a document outside ATLAS ti e g in Word jeopardizes the congruency of the coding as ATLAS ti will not know where changes have been made Therefore ATLAS ti will not able to adjust its record of coded segments If the HU were to load such a document many or all codes would be misaligned i e unusable To avoid such a situation the HU always checks the size and modification date of a document before it is loaded If a mismatch is found the document is not loaded and you see only a blank HU editor However since it would be very restrictive if ATLAS ti did not allow you to rescue such a document there is an option to reset the last access information
3. 246 Sup r families in PD Family Tables 2 eerta enter ede Pei enr tede rider dne e ded ente deer 247 Preparing and Importing a PD Family Table coin 2 ertet nter nere rt nire re trt eere tnn ania elec un 248 Exporting a PD Family Table Code Familie Sireni 2 tet eret Dette ettet rem erf det pe cd tee pet dator tese este testet Nee Creating Code Families from Network Views coimas etre re mere Ed P a FR HA Lig edd n Red na Sa Code Families add Analytic Power in Queries PB and Code Farilies in SPSS Jobs 24 eco ten a ep lec n nc cir pe cod bte o Memo Families 2 3 2 ert ara a Gites ene epp e Ee RON Erie EN des ca Working with Nerio od eot tone d dee dtc setis eto sr dcs 254 Difference between Metros and Codes decore atte eed ed e n e ce pU dap des e te REIR UP A nd 254 How Memos and Comments Differ s aate aes e E RE RC ec wink capi IR E Ee e PR tO ve pinea des eta reddes 254 Memo Content perrito or EE PRO TET IIO HE UR eH OE ETE TUER VO DG ORE LET OE ECCE RO TERRE NN 255 The Memo Editor 255 Greate a free memo suce e acia e a eo e EET CE OG RHET IC DR OA ER EU EO ERO RO TU PC EA DDR 255 Attaching Memos to Data Segmentos d etae dedita esta shi edel d cde dec a dena clle t br dle did denti twine cele et 256 Greate a memo for a data Segment ir treated AEAEE ENEA NE e a D dede loea e a Coe eer ia Ez 256 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL 12 Attach a me mo
4. Figure 147 Effect of a code filter in the margin area ALL Fitters from the main menu A third option is to double click on the filter To take the filter out double click on the family again or select Extras Rese field in the Object Manager while holding down the Ctrl key Filters do not affect Network Views Even if you have set a filter Network Views still display all their nodes Removing Families Open the Family Manager for the relevant object type F Select the family to be removed F Click the Delete button or select menu option Fawius Derete Famiy Removing a family does not remove any of the contained items ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH VARIABLES PRIMARY DOCUMENT FAMILIES 245 Working with Variables Primary Document Families Along with sharing all the characteristics of code and memo families PD families have some additional characteristics PD families as PD Families can be used to define the scope of a query when used as global variables can be attributes supplementing codes For instance if the PD families female and used in queries age group 1 21 30 were assigned to a number of interviews one can then and SPSS jobs formulate queries like Show me all quotations from interviews with females between the ages 21 to 30 coded with coping or power For a step by step instruction see Restricting Code Queries to Sub Groups on page 287 In SPSS jobs PD families a
5. EE name of suspect Kelly 1 1 Z name of suspect Kosmiski 8 2 SE name of victim 14 4 Figure 234 Import nodes window F Select the objects to be imported into the Network View F Click Import ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 329 The imported objects are placed along the upper left corner of the Network Editor You can either distribute them manually by moving each node with the mouse or you can place them automatically by mis using the option Layout Semantic Layout Selecting Nodes and Links Selecting nodes is an important first step for all subsequent operations targeted at individual objects within a Network View Such operations have their corresponding menu commands in the main menu of the Network Editor To select a single node Move the mouse pointer over the node to be selected The mouse pointer changes its appearance F Click the left mouse button The selected node will be displayed inverted F All previously selected nodes are deselected To select multiple nodes method 1 F Hold down the Cra key on your keyboard Select a node as described above Repeat steps 1 and 2 for every node to be selected To select multiple nodes method 2 marquee selection This method is very efficient if the nodes to be selected fit into an imaginary rectangle Move the mouse pointer above and left to one of the nodes to be selected
6. P13 3 The Ripper Revealed mp3 41 P14 Transcript The Ripper Revealed 0 P17 Victims location of murded m Figure 144 Adding members to a family Watch the member list being populated with the items you have just assigned Another way to add members is to drag them from an Object Manager the Object Explorer or the margin area into the member s pane ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL FAMILY LIFE 241 Removing Members Open the Family Manager for the relevant object type Select a family F Select one or more items in the list pane for members selected family The items are only deleted from this family and not from the Click the Remove Items button to remove the selected items from the system If you want to remove one item at a time you can simply double click on each item If you delete objects that belong to a family somewhere else they will be removed automatically from all their hosting families Assigning Families to Objects The option Epit Famutes Assicn Famities is another way of adding members to a family This option allows you to easily assign suitable attributes to objects either selected in the Family Assigner or an Object Manager Assigning Families to Objects in the Family Assigner Open the Family Assigner Eoit Fames Assicn FAMILIES Select an object in the example below it is a primary document in the top pane and then the appropriate famil
7. eddie irent nid eed etin ei le e Fete tete de end aii 285 What You Cannot do with S per CodeS cites Laas anne otim citer qe cc d eer aan a et hen d dido Ec dc 286 Snapshot Codes is How to create a snapsholL acecatesaetece cce tb rr t a d TC DR AT ET TET AL TUE CENH ES TCO ERI E ERN cna Enric Es 286 Restricting Code Queries to SUD Groups iii ta avance a HG HP C TE FO HEBR a s 287 Combining group of documents to restrict SearchelS oonninninnicninanicnonannnananacn canon narnia anar nan 288 Tora Ez UT td dali add iii dni ltda Using Super Families Possible Family Combinations Combining Families using Boolean Operators derit tpi inen dt ne dtr e daa c teases a ea ra kd a 292 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL 13 Combining more than two families 5 2 2 rete renean d on Mien pce bt Poi i nad nid vo irt ce ve rae a Ea 293 Creating a complex query step by step rene tine ab edt ena b ace nre ERR e ca a ed C ec d 293 Creating a complex query as a Sequence iecit a ttt ee a Denies 295 Create a Snapshot from a Super Family 1 1295 Additional Query Tool Functions 296 Stack Management 296 More FOCO A ie 296 Co occurrenc TO0 S 2 2 don tute tii a eo o t D te qs 299 How to open the Co occurrence Tools 299 The Co occurrence Tree Explorer 299 The Co occurrence Table Explorer 300 Me nlmE
8. 17 3 Picture Object expands 8 8 Stride s body was discovered close to 01 00 in the Po 17 4 Picture Object expands 9 2 Only ten minutes later 1 45 am her mutilated bod Pu 17 5 Picture Object expands 10 11 Kelly s body was discovered shortly after 10 45 am Po 2 4 It is my pleasure to escort you shown in GE map 16 6 Victims Circle GE snapshot Figure 281 Hyperlink Manager When double clicking a link a pop up menu is shown You can choose to display the source or target quotation The content of the linked quotation is then shown in a pale yellow window If you click into this window the linked quotation is shown in context Creating new Relations for Hyperlinks The Relation Editor has already been discussed in the context of code code links see The Relation Editors on page 344 The relation editor window for hyperlinks looks the same and can be handled in the same way as the relation editor for code code relations It only displays a different set of relations To open it select Networks Reteation Epitor Hvyrer Links from the main menu ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SPECIAL TOOLS 373 Special Tools In this chapter a collection of miscellaneous tools is presented that do not fit well under any of the other chapters Included are tools to search for words in all objects and fields to explore the components of a HU in a hierarchically manner and to remove redundantly coded
9. M 37 ilum 37 Main Steps in Working with ATLAS Us usq ise ertet perta n atre Rd Rt cR bo PEN HER Rote dE EROR SR P EIFE RGE 38 Data and Project Mariagement scettr i n 39 The One Folder Setup For Single Users and Teams sse tnit teet tnetr instet tdmen etaim antennis 39 Working with Internal Documents for smaller projects containing only text files ssssssseees 40 TOS PROCESS p ERE 40 Data Level Work ve les sts Medi is epe Te ded sepe aded edet 41 Conceptual Level Work m 41 General Steps when Working with ATLAS ti esses enmrenennrenrehrrhrtre rre rrr eterni nnns etes e nns 42 Main Workspace The HU ECO Ra eia te te to eme dd c dut ee 43 OVETVI W lora mean Components of the HU Editor Title Barz xx cei cte seh renda dct trc o tet a caa oe bees bc ted b rende pa RS Deed AETHER Tool bars The Main Tool Bar 1 The Edit Tool Bar 2 The Primary Document Tool Barletta e duit Object DropsDownrLists 4 5 oce ott teet DER en d chats en tpfe ride des tiir E a S 45 Primary Document Pane hiciese 45 Paragraph Number Area 6 dfe oe ie ene er cede prts bor e i eee na ede e te ETSAIA VEOSTE te eed deuda 45 MargimArca l
10. Traverse Links is the same as menu option Include Subterms Reports for Code Combinations via the Query Tool When clicking on the printer button in the query tool you can print the list of quotations resulting from your selected combinations of codes and code families either in full length or in list format Before creating the output selected quotations can be excluded see Output on page 281 e A space and paper saving output is the no meta option Hist QueryTool Poor Man s Reporter List Include Comments Full Content Check options below to specify output MEE A gt Flindude query details Full Content Include Comments a Clip quotation contents V Separate quotations with an empty line Y Include source references V Remember options for next run OK Cancel Figure 306 Output using No Meta Save space and paper A source reference is provided if you select this option but it only uses one line It is displayed at the end of every quotation ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 399 ION DN een ae A eee aol ERIN a 6 quotation s found for Query Infix Notation letter authenticity Clipped quotation content to number of characters full length Because so many hoax letters were received by Scotland Yard the press and others it is not known definitively if this was an authentic letter written the Whitechapel
11. 3427452444 3427452467 w w w w w w w w w w C9 C9 PO PRO mln ojojojojajajojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ejojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo oejojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo fojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo pjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo Pjojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo 3427452482 Y Figure 321 Data matrix in SPSS after running the syntax file ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT 420 Name Typ Spaltenf Dezim Variablenlabel _Wertelabels Fehlende Wer Spalten Ausrichtung Mefiniveau 1 CASENO Numerisch 6 0 Kein Kein 8 Rechts Metrisch 2 PD Numerisch 6 0 Primary Doc Kein Kein 8 Rechts Nominal 3 QU Numerisch 6 0 Q Index Kein Kein 8 Rechts Metrisch 4 SL Numerisch 8 0 Start Line Kein Kein 10 Rechts Metrisch 5 Sc Numerisch 8 0 Start Column Kein Kein 10 Rechts Metrisch 6 EL Numerisch 8 0 End Line Kein Kein 10 Rechts Metrisch 7 EC Numerisch 8 0 End Column Kein Kein 10 Rechts Metrisch 8 T Numerisch 10 0 Creation Date Kein Kein 12 Rechts Metrisch 9 K1 Numerisch 1 0 date of murder 0 NO ein 4 Rechts Nominal 10 K2 Numerisch 1 0 historic context 0 NO ein 4 Rechts Nominal 11
12. ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL PROJECT BACKUP AND MIGRATION 130 fr Q Copy Bundle Document Selection So Documents not in bundle Bundled documents f Name Path Size Type m Name Path Size Type e 3 investi C Program 519 pdf D Site Seco C Program 167 gra E S WH 1 Jack t C Program 52 0 ric WIA victime_1 C Dranrsm asa rir 4 1 Jackt C Program 798 audio i2 Victim C Program 3 02 video 2 3_The Ri C Program 6 88 audio L us Total size of 0 selected documents 0 Byte Total size of 16 bundled documents 4 04 MB plus size of HU 1004 50 KB totals 5 02 MB Documents which cannot be bundled Report Name Path Conflict 16 documents will be bundled 3 documents excluded by user A total of 3 documents are excluded pp m r Cancel Figure 63 Copy Bundle Pack amp go Documents not included in the bundle The user can specifically exclude documents that should not be in the bundle e g unchanged or even non editable large documents e g video audio files that have already been carried to the target system via other means or with a previous Copy Bundle Bundled documents This list displays documents that will be included in the bundle Documents that cannot be bundled This list displays documents that are excluded by the system because of an irresolvable
13. M Mini Manual tccscs O NN Full Manual and How To Documents 430 Bs aso RE A DD TERN 431 Getting SUPOTE se RN NN 432 Frequently Asked Questions 432 FOFUETI neret lid 432 Mailing List Archive 432 Troubleshoolg tit e e teet shee cotta lass reb a tfta e et Lp e a IR ea ae 433 Help with Data Management Problems ethernet a n teda eren de de Dee i te d e EE E D Ted dad 433 Documents cannot be accessed 433 Embedded Objects Cannot be Activated Cannot Enter Edit Mode for Primary Documents us Of Bugs arid NUISANCES rece ice de dieti pere ie ee dece Pe enacted cepe REP CUEecar et etie Ca Pe Hd pe d rad ca SARAS AN CA M M M No Buttons in Main Toolbar a Internal Etror M essage gie tec eria qnc noc tenebre de Uc net bd v cnc a prac eda n epe DE E Rez a soo nail Service Packs amp Patches Live Update degere etre PR UL ue rene de Rene one 436 To run the software as administrator for VISTA and Windows 7 users eee eene ennnne nee rnn nene s nennen nnn 437 Live Update Settings Manual installation of service packs ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL 18 About this Manual This manual describes the functions and concepts of ATLAS ti Methodological approaches to qualitative data analysis or text interpretation will not be discussed in these pages It is not req
14. N New GoogleEarth PD Create GE Snapshot 3D Figure 114 Creating snapshot PDs A new PD is created The naming convention is as follows If selecting a quotation in the Quotation Manager and creating a snapshot based on that view the name for the PD will be Google Earth SN SN for Snapshot If selecting a quotation from the Google Earth sub tree in the Places Panel the name that is shown there is used with the prefix GESN Thus if you have given your quotation a unique name and want to use it as name for your PD snapshot then it might be preferable to select the quotation from the Places Panel If you prefer neither of the two standard options you can always rename the newly created snapshot PD The source files for the snapshot PDs are jpg they are stored in the same folder as the HU and their name starts with GES plus a two digit letter number combination This feature is only available if GE has already been started Repeated entries If you close ATLAS ti and restart while GE is still open GE creates a new feature hierarchy for each HU You can either manually remove the feature tree from the GE places panel or close it and let ATLAS ti start it for you by loading a Google Earth PD ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 199 Coding Techniques Make code names as succinct as possible The coding procedures described in this section do not fully encompass the complexity o
15. P 3 case 3 rtf 0 P 1 case 1 rtf 0 P 4 case 4 rtf 0 P 2 case 2 rtf 0 Figure 155 Created PD families after import Exporting a PD Family Table If the documents have already been assigned exporting a PD Family table is quite handy as a first step in preparing a table for import This way ATLAS ti creates the columns documents Name Path and Origin for you and you do not have to retype the file names The table can be exported even if no family has yet been created Select Documents MisceLLANEOUS Export PD Famity Taste from the main menu This option is also available in the PD Family Manager from the Families menu or the context menu You are prompted for a separator value Click OK if you use the default value t f you use a different value change it accordingly F Next select the output format e g xls and click OK Finally specify the output target as usual see Output Destinations on page 391 for details For example select Fie amp Run for the table to be opened in Excel or OpenOffice Cal immediately ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH VARIABLES PRIMARY DOCUMENT FAMILIES 252 Code Families Code families in the ATLAS ti framework are simply named sets of codes In ATLAS ti the term code family is used to sort codes into named sets or groups For example if you have four categories that are types of actors you can group them into a code family Four members of
16. MM 238 Using Families when Merging Hermeneutic Units sessssssssssssseeeennneeteetnennnneneenenrenetnrtr ene tre trenes ia Gremium MERERI Components of the Family Manager TO Openia Family Mana Be OR Creating Familjes att nee sabes ent domita epica adress tec be dier utenti anh eder ben avy rsen tacts dea naan anon eet Adding Members Removing Members Assigning Families to Objects sss Assigning Families to Objects in the Family Assigner 4 Assigning Families to Objects in Object ManagelS ooonnniinininnnnnnnnoninnncnrnicran cnn Creating Families from Selected Items Accessing quotations Writing a Comment for a Family Creating or Editing a Family Combent 2 ceret itae tote deepest bedient cte Gate denda frag ba DAL Using Families aS Filters rte ca tie etienne tad rc Panem eder t E ei dL ea Pe tee rae ER Ee oe Access the Filter Options via the Main Menu Filter Items using th Family Mana gel ised ccc cdi tent ime eter hd iet cr ri a d Pa n fod c RB e E nere cea Removing Families dai n Son tete esu bad hana tail ee ba ir ater note Lut pet ae dert dte ea tetto doc Working with Variables Primary Document Families 245 PD Family Table vicum tuc 245 Type of Variables srodni
17. The Mini Manual a special condensed version of the full manual you are currently reading summarizes the most important information that you need to get started and for your day to day work Highly recommended reading ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL APPENDIX 430 Full Manual and How To Documents http manual atlasti com Find information on network installation tips and tricks and special instructions on how to work with specific type of documents Video tutorials http tutorials atlasti com If you like to learn via video tutorials we offer a range of short videos on the following topis Features and Interface Getting started on a project Coding Visualizing Working with Network Views and Hyperlinks Library http library atlasti com The library contains a list of white papers by various authors mostly ATLAS ti trainers and consultants extracted from past newsletters Submissions are always welcome Knowledge Base http kb atlasti com Search the knowledge base for immediate questions you may have related to licenses installation update procedures trouble shooting or use related questions A quick search may already provide the answer without having to dig for an answer in the full manual Social Media YouTube http youtube atlasti com You find a growing number of video tutorials on the ATLAS ti YouTube channel So far videos are available in English and Spanish other to come Faceb
18. reason suspe a investigation t reason suspect I resson suspect Bl reason suspect date of murde Figure 201 Co occurrence Explorer Table View To produce such a table select Toots Co occurrence Toots Taste ExPLORER Using the default settings a c coefficient is immediately displayed see figure 207 as well In figure 201 above you only see the frequencies of how often each pair of codes co occurs The reason for this is to explain the content and handling of the table step by step You find more information on the c coefficient below on page 305 The entry n a indicates that the pair of codes does not co occur anywhere in the data material not applicable Toolbar ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS update table after changing filters 302 display of passive overview r export to Excel cluster recalculate sorttable display c coefficient change color for cells Figure 202 The co occurrence explorer toolbar User defined content If you have not set a code family as filter all co occurrences for each pair of codes will be displayed This potentially results in a huge table Therefore in the columns to the left of the table you can select the codes that should be listed in the columns and rows This produces more purposeful tables In the first column select the codes to be displayed in the columns using the usual Windows sele
19. A Create Link Source TE Create Link Target Rename Show Links Ctrl RB Unlink Codes 2 Edit Comment X Open Network View X Delete Speak Figure 12 Pop up menu for a quotation The commands are tailored to the objects under the cursor at the time the context menu pops up ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 49 The Object Managers IEEE The advantage of drop down lists is that they save space To provide more efficient access to the objects listed in the drop down lists the lists can be displayed in a detached window These windows are called Object Managers because they not only allow access to the objects but provide many more options and functions Like many other tools that can be invoked from the main editor an Object Manager is a child or dependent window of the main editor Child windows have some common properties They are closely related to their parent window here the HU editor and changes in either the child or the parent window are usually broadcast between them like the selections of objects They can be resized and positioned independently of their parent window They are minimized when the parent window is minimized and they are restored with their parent window They are closed when the parent window is closed However child windows do NOT move with the parent window Roll up Mode On low resolution screens Object Managers c
20. ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 408 When using this style sheet you need to export the full content of quotations Select the third option in the XML export window before creating the HTML file Quotation Nr 87 Source 1_Jack the Ripper Story rtf Has Comment no Quotation Nr 5 Source 3 Investigation Suspects pdf Has Comment yes Comment Does not fit the profile Quality style of correpondence unlikely given educational background numerous orthographical mistakes despite college education Quotation Nr 8 Source 3 Investigation Suspects pdf Has Comment no Quotation Nr 9 Source 3 Investigation Suspects pdf Has Comment no A man named James Thomas Sadler seen earlier with her was arrested by the police and charged with her murder and was briefly thought to be the Ripper himself Montague John Druitt 15 August 1857 1 December 1888 3 was born in Wimborne Minster Dorset England the son of a prom local physician He was educated at Winchester College and New College Oxford He graduated from Oxford in 1880 and two years later was admitted to the Inner Temple He was called to the bar in 1885 and practised as a barrister and a special pleader until his death 4 John Pizer 1850 1897 was a Polish Jew who worked as a bootmaker in Whitechapel Michael Ostrog 1833 1904 was a Russian born professional con man 3 He used numerous aliases and disgui
21. ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 161 Repeat the above work flow until all data are coded and analyzed Benefits of this approach Facilitates team work All documents are shared no file duplication is necessary Team members can work simultaneously at the same data source files but not at the same HU Modifications to a document are propagated to the HUs of other team members Drawbacks Requires that all team members have access to a shared drive Team members can only work at locations that provides access to the shared drive Option B Working with the Textbank Folder the TBPATH setup The TBPATH setup allows the HU files to be stored in a folder AWAY from the document folder hierarchy e g on each individual computer The computers of all team members however need to be in the same local area network Examples Documents are stored on a central server with shared access Users work on several independent projects using some shared documents as well as data material that is only relevant for their respective projects Documents are stored in a location that does not allow the user full write access e g on a CD ROM or on a server with restricted access permissions Therefore the user cannot create a HU in the document folder Project Setup Tasks of the Project Administrator As above any of the team members can take on the role of the project administrator Thus one perso
22. E discusses E 3 5 87 Figure 267 A hyperlink chain ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 363 When creating this chain the quotation 2 3 served as a source quotation and was linked to the target quotation 3 5 In order to continue the chain the target quotation 3 5 became the source quotation and was linked to the new target quotation 8 7 A hyperlink star connects many quotations from one source quotation 8 3 gt y e S contradicts live link GE PER 10 5 8 6 15 4 S S E 2 lt a 11 154 11 61 Figure 268 A hyperlink start When creating a star there is one source quotation and multiple target quotations In the above example the source quotation is 8 6 which is linked to five target quotations via a number of different relations Hyperlinks in the Quotation Manager In list views All hyperlinked quotations can easily be recognized in the Quotation Manager linked All source quotations are marked with an opening angle bracket lt all target quotations are quotations with a closing bracket gt If a quotation is both source and target as prefixed with the case when creating chains then both brackets are used as prefix lt gt angle brackets ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 364 The margin is erner Street 3 murder 346 397 16 2 Buck s Row 1 murder 103 152 lt gt 16 3 Hanbury Street 2 murder 84 135 itre
23. Open the Document Manager F Select one or more PDs Start to drag the PD s A dashed bar appears at the current list insertion point F Drop the PDs when you reach the desired location for the documents Set the sort criterion to ID by clicking on the ID header for an optimal feedback of the renumbering procedure Renumbering all Primary Documents This option becomes useful after you disconnect several documents from a HU When disconnecting PDs from an HU previously assigned IDs e g P 1 are not released This results in gaps in the sequence of PD numbers You may ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 83 remove these gaps by renumbering all PDs in the HU using the Renumber All feature F Select Documents MiscenLaneous Renumeer Aut from the main menu It is not necessary to renumber PDs in ATLAS ti Doing so can give reports a cleaner appearance However if you plan to merge HUs it is essential that PDs have matching IDs Loading and Navigating Primary Documents Loading Primary Documents Whenever the content of a PD needs to be displayed printed or searched it accesses its data source file memo and loads the content This request is often triggered indirectly e g by displaying or printing a quotation For performance reasons documents are only loaded once they are cached unless this option is turned off The following lists a few procedures that directly or indirectl
24. 170 The first step is to merge all sub projects The project administrator can proceed as explained above in the section If documents are not edited on page 168 After all HU files are merged the project administrator can make the necessary changes to the documents in edit mode The project folder then contains the new Master HU the documents and log files for all modified documents In order for team members to easily recognize the updated project folder add the current date to the name of the project folder As some or all data source files were modified the project administrator can a store the new project folder on a shared drive or b send the new project folder as WinZip or WinRar file to team members or c send a copy bundle file The old project folder can be moved to a backup folder Tasks of team members after merging Either download the latest version of the project folder from the shared drive If a shared drive is not available the project administrator sends a WinZip WinRar or copy bundle file of the newest project version This file needs to be unpacked or installed see page 131 The old project folder can be deleted see Backup all below Rename the new Master HU file contained within the new project folder by adding your name or initials to the file name F Continue to work on the project Backup all After each work session each team member copies the HU file or if documen
25. ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SORTING AND FILTERING 384 Sorting and Filtering The main strengths of a computer clearly lie in sorting and retrieving data For such techniques to be deployed successfully however the data itself must have attributes by which it can be meaningfully ordered and filtered A variety of attributes can be used for filtering and sorting data Many entities within an HU can be filtered for example primary documents codes memos and quotations Sorting and filtering primary documents codes memos and quotations can help you gain deeper insight into your data Sorting and filtering can be accessed via the HU editor s menu or the Object Managers menus The columns in the Object Managers report views may also be used for sorting Some options for sorting and filtering are common to all objects while others are dependent on the object s type Sorting Sorting is available via the Object Managers columns and the main menus of the HU Editor and the Managers Sorting in Object Managers Click the header Sorting is conveniently available in all Object Managers via the list headers to sort the while in details view clicking on a header button sorts the list in either items Click ascending or descending order again to reverse the sort amp Primary Doc Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage II 62 Documents Edit Miscellaneous Output ew SP X Es Clickto sortin ascend
26. ES Figure 288 Display of codes that are linked via symmetric or asymmetric relations ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SPECIAL TOOLS A 378 Associated memos if applicable are displayed under the code branch Expanding Super Codes allows access to the various parts of a query Below you can see the expanded branch for the Super Code name of suspect Cohen Reasons for being suspected see figure 289 When double clicking on the entry Co occur the two codes that are part of the query are displayed Clicking the plus sign to expand the tree shows all associated codes the six codes that were linked to the code name of suspect Cohen and the eight member codes of the code family Reason for being suspected a name of suspect Cohen Reasons for being suspected 0 e COOCCUR H amp name of suspect Cohen 6 6 amp amp 3 Reason for being suspected 8 Figure 289 Display of super codes Expanding the Memos branch displays all memos and then the memos associated with other memos On the next level all associated codes are shown When expanding the Family branches on the first level all existing families are shown On the next level all members are displayed Below the members all objects that are usually associated with the type of object can be expanded i e as described above quotations underneath PDs codes connected to other codes and so on In case you have created Super Families the operators us
27. Reserch diary 49 RO1 Did views or arguments change between 0 O Susanne F 48 RQ2 Causes of the economic crisis 3 0 Susanne RQ3 Future consequences of the economic cris 0 48 RQ3a Consequences immediate 4 6 Susanne RO3b Consequences long term E 5 Susanne b F Consequences individual 5 4 Susanne RO3d Consequences how to deal with the crisis 2 O Susanne 4 m Individual Consequences From the blog data it is apparent that the common person is feeling the effects cf the financial crisis It has resulted in job losses in having to sell ones house or even in having it foredosed People talked about feelings of fear insecurity beeing worried and scared being frustrated and depressed On the other hand the crisis had motivated many to return to their Christian faith and to lock out for non material securities Some even reported that they live a healtier and better less stressful ife now because the crisis had forced them to work less It is tco early to say but a possible consequences of the financial crisis could be a shift in values away from materialistic values Figure 25 Memo Manager Single click selects a memo The content of the memo is displayed in the text pane 61 Single click pause single click or F2 activates in place editing of memo titles Double click opens the memo editor This behavior can be changed to activate the quotation ass
28. lt p gt conversing outside 29 Hanbury St at approximately 5 30 am If lt p gt lt p gt correct in her identification it is likely that Long was the last lt p gt Figure 316 Excerpt of a raw XML file Three different style sheets were independently applied to this XML file using the XML converter to generate completely different representations from the same source It is important to notice that these representations work independently of ATLAS ti That is they live exclusively in your Web browser This adds a huge new repertoire of applications to your tool chest since you can modify the supplied style sheets to your hearts content and even create your own style sheets to suit your unique and very specific needs The following assumes some knowledge about XML and XSLT XSLT styles sheets are XML conformant text files As such they can be edited with a simple text editor like the one built into ATLAS ti To edit a style sheet it is best to open the XML Converter tool first which you can select from the XML button in the main tool bar or via the main menu Toots XML ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT Bv Sib Export HU to XML Apply Style Sheet 411 Figure 317 Open the XML converter to apply and edit style sheets By pressing the Ebir Stylesheet button you may start editing a selected style sheet However XSLT the language the style sheets are written in although not exactly rocket science
29. 2rence ATLAS ti 6 User Manual Copyright 2011 by ATLAS ti Scientific Software Development GmbH Berlin All rights reserved Version 339 20111116 Author Dr Susanne Friese QUARC Consulting Realization Programming Dr Thomas G Ringmayr www hypertexxt com Copying or duplicating this manual or any part thereof is a violation of applicable law No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including but not limited to photocopying without written permission from ATLAS ti GmbH Trademarks ATLAS ti is a registered trademark of ATLAS ti Scientific Software Development GmbH Adobe Acrobat is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Microsoft Windows Excel and other Microsoft products referenced herein are either trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or in other countries Google Earth is a trademark of Google Inc All other product names and any registered and unregistered trademarks mentioned in this document are used for identification purposes only and remain the exclusive property of their respective owners ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL Contents ADOLUEIIS Manil ses ss eene fo Pe loli Sh ess ehe tl dtt os ce kale ese ete 18 How to Use This Manual cce et e e cies ave E dee t eese ihe oe see stabs een REDE R da SERES 18 Manual CONVENTIONS NOR T 19 Nangoo LOSA HOT A
30. As main category code and subcode names may contain more than one word an empty space is not sufficient to separate the two levels of coding Therefore it is best to use one the of special characters that you find on your keyboard to visually separate levels of coding On the use of Code Families for adding structure to a code list At some point in your analysis you may group codes into families to use them as filters and to facilitate searches However these steps usually follow the process of developing a coding scheme see Family Life on page 237 We do not recommend to use Code Families as a means for adding structure to your code list There are several reasons for it Code Families do not appear in the Code Manager and cannot be assigned to data segments as codes You can also not link them to each other in Network Views You can only display them and visualize the codes that are contained within them All of this hints that Code Families in ATLAS ti have a different purpose Code Families are very handy when it comes to querying data or when creating output You add the codes that you need for a particular query to a Code Family and either use it as an element in a query in the query tool see page 268 or set it as filter to restrict queries to a particular set of codes in the Co occurence Tools see page 299 or in the Codes Primary Documents Table see page 311 Code Families can also be used to reduce certain outputs like
31. Owopo epooopO aounornao nowono Figure 3 Codes Primary Documents Table Team Tools This option can be found under the Codes Output menu See Codes Primary Documents Cross Tabulation page 311 User Administration Manage the ATLAS ti user database through the user administration tool This is a prerequisite for collaborative work but is also useful to individual users through personalizing the login or protecting an HU with a password User Management options can be found under the Extras menu See also the chapter on User Management page 150 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN CONCEPTS AND FEATURES Export 35 Hermeneutic Unit Merger This tool merges different HUs A variety of options to control the merge strategy are offered You find this function under the Tools menu Further information is provided in the chapter Merging Hermeneutic Units page 171 Coding Analyzer The Coding Analyzer is helpful after merging HUs It tests for redundant codes i e codes used more than once for data segments that overlap or are embedded in one another see page 381 RTF There are output options for each of the main objects in ATLAS ti Primary Documents Quotations Codes and Memos You find it under the respective menus You can output a list of primary documents along with their comments all or selected quotations with our without comments quotations by codes via the Codes Output menu a list of all
32. To deactivate a filter either select Firter ALL from the menu or F double click on the filter field while holding down the Ctrl key or select Extras Reser att Fitters from the main menu Filter by Families in the Family Managers When double clicking a family in any of the Family Managers the corresponding objects are filtered to the members of the selected family Double click again to remove the filter ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 390 Generating Output This chapter provides an overview of all output options that are available within ATLAS ti In addition some general procedures common to most output functions are explained Overview ATLAS ti offers numerous options to create output and reports Most output is textual but numeric or graphical output is also available where applicable Network Editor Typical textual reports include sorted and filtered lists of objects like code memos families and quotations Comments can often be included when needed For textual primary documents a near what you see is what you get WYSIWYG output is available including the annotations populating the margin area Output options are available from the menus of the tools e g the HU Editor s menus the Object Manager s and Object Explorer s menus Some tools offer an output button either as the only option e g the Query Tool or in addition to the menus Code Manager The target of an output is no
33. bi directional drag amp drop THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 203 pseudonym given to an unidentified serial killer active in the A apel are piu Se Create Free Quotation sent to the London A Create Link Source 3 Code In Vivo Ctrl Shift V t Create Link Target OF Code by List Ctrl Shift L ere muti lc 2 Quick Coding Ctrl Shift Q e officials at the time of the mur o Speak highlighted Text or surgical knowledge Newspapers v Y cut his era bestowed widespread and endi B c avagery of the attacks and the failure of pe py aste Paste PD Selection entity has never been confirmed the legends surrounding the a combination of genuine historical research folklore and Figure 119 Creating a new code using the context menu A dialog will open Enter the code name and click OK The new code now appears in the Code Manager The coded segment quotation is displayed in the Quotation Manager Make it a habit to write a comment for every new code see Writing Code Comments on page 206 Creating more than one code concurrently When using the Open Coding procedure more than one code can be created at a time In order to do so you need to separate the code names with the vertical bar or pipe character I ASCII 124 Open Coding Enter codes separated by Figure 120 Creating multiple codes at once The entry victimlmodus operandilmedia coverage creates th
34. page 433 How to Edit a Primary Document page 138 Primary Document Manager page 54 or Modifying the Project Setup page 121for possible causes Check the report pane If everything is as it should be click the Create BunbLe button A standard file dialog window opens Enter a name for the bundle file or accept the suggested file name The extension ACB ATLAS ti Copy Bundle is automatically appended F Click Save By default the file is saved in the same folder as the HU file Install a Bundle To unpack the copy bundle file on a target computer it needs to be installed 4 c 3 Install Bundle Choose Unbundle Strateay Migrate Migration installs a HU and its associated PD data sources on another folder or a a should not be overwritten by Restore files induded in Select a strategy created if needed HU Path C ProgramData Scientific Software ATLASH CommonDocuments E gt lExdude HU TB Path C Users Susanne Documents Scientific Software ATLASt TextBank e Selecta location for 16 bundled documents 4 04 MB plus HU 1004 50 KB totals 5 02 MB the HU file r z Name Target Location Use Size Log Modified Type D 2_victim_Mar HUPATH yes 87 06KB 27 06 2009 10 pdf 2_Victim_Mar lt HUPATH gt yes 38 58KB 27 06 10 pdf 3 iil victims locati lt HUPATH gt yes 444 50KB 18 08 2008 18 i Site Second lt HUPATH gt yes 3
35. 6 gm spa G is part of 2 transitive CAUSA N ls cause of l tanstive E Nosti omar CONTRA o A contact 1 smete 132 gie 25 2 Sold Une color MI o Dashed Une Preferred Layout Direction Left gt Right D Right gt Left Up Dow 1 Down gt Up Formal Property Symmetric Asymmetric amp Tronstve Comment The part of relation inks objects not concepts of different abstractional level as does ISA EX Figure 228 The Network Editor and its helpers The Network Editor has two helper windows NWE Toolbox and Alignment Tool that offer convenient support for some tasks The Relation Editor for maintaining the relation database and for creating and editing relations is described in a separate chapter see The Relation Editor on page 344 Network View Characteristics Network Views have certain important characteristics Several different Network Views on the same network are possible Network Views can be given names under which they are stored and accessed inside the HU Network Views can be commented Network Views are displayed and edited in the Network Editor Network Views allow individual layout of the nodes Asa node a single object can be a member of any number of Network Views just like a code can be an element of more than one code family An object e g a specific code can only appear once in any Network View ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY
36. Code Comment 2 A a n n t be eT LT ERE fe n 206 Creating and Editing Code Commernt 4 2 erecta sese H te en n dede e c ir en n t D E Hee tende 206 Writing comments for coded segments ds Setin code Colors ta MP MEER Coding PDF documents ie t ete sati eter dista t fee t o e use ict iit ie ete Coding as usual A Coding embedded images Coding columns of text Coding Image documents nen erepto casey e te tu De x ve cR unu tee Ee Ee dede Coding audio and video documents stie ec ee ii tecti edet eet tie ec reb i ee Step 1 Create an audio or video quotation Step 2 Code an audio or video qUOtaltiOni rni eet on ade ian per ce c ote rn cider ca pr ea PEL SELBE ag 211 Reviewing audio and video quotations 2 sc emere etam ce dii tiec ena si ra den D Edna p e La Era a RR reae edd 211 Unlinking codes Modifying the length ota video quotatiOn teo re cto iere ea tice Pee adicere i d db dai Resetting the filter meet dard needed dcindc loc eta eats ert tint TI sedet ences luct td dc iet cra iade Gv idera ada Describing video quotations to improve outputs Renaming video quotations and creating text output netenrerene trennen serrer sns ins 212 Changing between time and frame referentes ia neironi verme dried codec cene n c nv lied cen rid rae 213 Making use of quotation comments Coding Google Earth documehts 5 eee neret eed ur emere Tr gei ge aie as PESE be ue dines Reviewing G
37. Date and time of last modification ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 59 Code Manager Besides the HU Editor the Code Manager will probably be one of your most r X3 Code Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage I 62 Codes Edit Miscellaneous Output View to Poor Ql xA nno Families y t Name YX role of the media facilitating free riding 1 0 Role of the media YX role of the media aiding investigation 3 0 Role of the media Y ROLE OF THE MEDIA 0 0 Y reason suspected witness 4 O Reason for being suspected ls 3G reason suspected knew victim O Reason for being suspected E l reason suspected killed others 13 1 Reason for being suspected Yi reason suspected fitting the profile 14 1 Reason for being suspected Y reason suspected fiction historic rese 13 O Reason for being suspected 3 amp reason suspected could have been th 15 2 Reason for being suspected Y reason suspected behavioral clues 5 1 Reason for being suspected Y reason suspected attention seeking 4 0 Reason for being suspected Y REASON SUSPECTED 0 0 E reason released theory rebutted 10 O Reason for discharge Y reason released theory disputed 3 0 Reason for discharge 3G reason released never taken seriousty 3 O Reason for discharge z aon come m D Description of the locations where the murders took place Figure 22 Code Manager in d
38. Enter a name for the new Network View A Network Editor opens Import nodes with any of the methods described in the section Nodes below ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 327 To open a Network View on an Object A Network View for an object is created with a selected object and its neighbors Proceed as follows Open an Object Manager e g the Code Manager or the Object Explorer or righ click on an object in the margin area F Select one or more objects with a left mouse click El In Object Managers you can click the network button For an object selected in the Object Explorer select Oren Network View from the context menu A Network Editor opens with the selected object and its neighbors If multiple objects are selected their neighbors are not automatically included in the network view You can import their neighbors in a subsequent step The nodes are initially placed using the semantic layout procedure but can be rearranged manually More nodes can be added to this Network View using different techniques see Nodes on page 327 for details Each time a network is opened on a selected object a new Network View is created There is no need to save it as you can easily display it at any time following the steps above If you rearrange the nodes and want to preserve the new layout or if you add or remove nodes then you need to save it explicitly Network Save
39. Figure 68 Primary document before and after editing Therefore the objective of this section is to inform you about the dos and don ts of editing PDs Inside Editing Primary Documents While the following description is covered in other chapters e g on page 105 this issue is helpful and important to your understanding of editing documents in ATLAS ti One of the most powerful features of ATLAS ti 6 is the possibility to edit PDs or more precisely editing the contents of a PD or editing its data source Some might ask why is editing a PD an issue at all Isn t editing a text a simple thing to implement Understanding the Primary Document HU Relationship Quotations are not much more than a set of coordinates that remember the start and end positions of a text sequence or a video passage an image area etc Quotations are managed and stored inside the HU The actual document on the disk knows nothing of the references ATLAS ti compiles about it What is needed to be able to edit the content of a document and to update the quotations so that they never lose their correct alignment ATLAS ti needs to record every change that has the capacity of misaligned quotations ATLAS ti needs to create a logbook of changes accessible to EVERY HU that uses this PD ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EDITING PRIMARY DOCUMENTS 138 e Itis also necessary to protect the document against editing by more than one user at the same t
40. In order to combine more than two families you can use a simple query to build upon or you can click it as one sequence For the beginner it is recommended to build up to a more complex query step by step Creating a complex query step by step Let s assume you want to create a Super Family containing all female respondents under the age of 25 living in New York This means you want to generate a Super Family based on the overlap of the three families gernder female age group under 25 and residence New York We start by combing the first two families female and under 25 If you had such families you would Double click family gender female Double click family age group under 25 F Select operator AND The stack pane and the query pane now contain the following terms Query c jis J P Jl Recalc Undo Redo AND gender female age group under 25 gender female 8 age group under 25 Figure 190 First step in building a more complex query step by step The display in the query feedback pane matches more or less the way we would express the query in everyday language In the figure above one item is ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 294 displayed in the stack namely the query we just entered We can now incrementally build a more complex query from this query Double click on the family residence New York This pushes the fa
41. In the case of a team project a few more issues need to be considered like working with user accounts and different sub HUs This explained in detail in the section Team Project Management on page 149 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN STEPS IN WORKING WITH ATLAS TI 40 Working with Internal Documents for smaller projects containing only text files The Process Using version 6 2 or higher it is possible to create internal documents This means you no longer have to worry about document references and document locations Your ATLAS ti project consists of a single data file the HU This project setup can be used for smaller projects where the data material is comprised of text documents only As this function was recently added to the software it is difficult to know yet how small is small A test project containing 40 interviews that amounted to a total size of 5 3 MB and 1800 pages of text outside ATLAS ti resulted in a coded HU file of 730k Thus working with 100 internal files should still be ok This approach is also a good option for working with sensitive data material When saving the HU the data material is highly compressed and therefore unreadable outside ATLAS ti In addition the HU can be password protected This should make unauthorized access reasonably difficult This is how it works you generate a new empty text document within ATLAS ti and then you copy and paste the contents that you want to analyze into it
42. O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 Q7 Q8 Proximity Operators The Proximity Operator buttons Proximity describes the spatial relation between quotations Quotations can be embedded in one another one may follow another etc The operators in this section exploit these relationships They require two operands as their arguments They differ from the other operators in one important aspect proximity operators are non commutative This property makes their usage a little more difficult to learn Non commutativity requires a certain input sequence for the operands While A OR B is equal to B OR A this does not hold for any of the proximity operators A FOLLOWS B is not equal to B FOLLOWS A When building a query always enter the expressions in the order in which they appear in their natural language manifestation Another important characteristic for these operators is the specification of the operand for which you want the quotations retrieved A WITHIN B specifies the constraint but you must also specify if you want the quotations for the As or the Bs This is done implicitly by the sequence The code or term that is entered first is the one in which you are interested If B s quotations are requested you have to enter B ENCLOSES A using the query language described below Embedding Operators The embedding operators describe quotations that are contained in one another and that are coded with certain codes B WITHIN A W
43. Open ATLAS ti and select the main menu option Documents Assicn New Text Document Enter a name for the document into the window that opens The document is loaded in edit mode Copy the text you want to analyze and paste it into the primary document Protect the document by quitting edit mode You will find the edit mode button in the second toolbar below the main menu on the left hand side Click on the pen and select the option Save anp Leave Epit Mone Proceed in the same way with all other documents that you want to analyze Save the HU file Make sure that you always create a backup copy of this file and store it at a safe location There are two principal modes of working with ATLAS ti the data level and the conceptual level The Data Level includes activities like segmentation of data files coding text image audio and video passages and writing comments and ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN STEPS IN WORKING WITH ATLAS TI 41 memos The Conceptual Level focuses on querying data and model building activities such as linking codes to networks in addition to writing some more comments and memos Data Level Work Data level research activities include segmenting the data that you have assigned to a project into quotations adding comments to respective passages note making annotating and coding selected text passages or data segments secondary materials annotations and memos to facilitate their later re
44. Team Scenario 2 Teams that do not always or never have access to a shared drive Peter Tom James and Mary work together on a project All four want to code and analyze the documents and would like to work on their laptops at different locations This means that they won t be able to access a shared network drive at all times In addition all four would like to be able to edit the documents they analyze B 8 Tom R Mary Y je v 7 El q S W c 4 b ga S James Figure 88 Team project scenario 2 for teams that want or need to work at different locations This also works if a shared drive is not available and team members are only connected via the Internet PN Figure 89 Team project scenario 2 without a shared drive b A e Yt To realize this project scenario it is recommended to use the HUPATH to assign documents ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 166 Project Setup Tasks of the Project Administrator As was the case for team scenario 1 also here any of the team members can take on the role of the project administrator Create a new folder for the project on your personal computer or on the shared drive Copy all files to be analyzed into this folder or in one or more sub folders see figures 52 and 53 on page 109 Start ATLAS ti and assign the documents Save the HU to the project folder All files are saved to the sp
45. The new GE snapshot has been document Create a 3D stereoscopic image just for a little fun in between 3D imaging is a technique capable of recording three dimensional visual information or creating the illusion of depth in an image ATLAS ti allows you to create such images from a GE document As above click on the drop down arrow beside the Load Document button then select Create GE SnapsHort 3D ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 81 Figure 34 3D cross eye image created from an ATLAS ti GE document Such images can be viewed with 3D glasses but free viewing is also possible To get the 3D effect try the following Move about arms length away from your monitor F Put your thumb on your nose Point at the picture on the screen F Look at the tip of your finger While looking at the tip of your finger notice the picture on the screen If you don t get it right away keep trying After all you re trying to get your eyes to see in a different way Be patient move further away from the monitor if you have trouble If the above does not work for your you find a number of different explanations for free viewing of 3D images on the world wide web Assign KMZ Documents You may also create a PD from an existing document of type KML or KMZ Keyhole Markup Language Simply use the Assign function and select a file of an appropriate type Assign Memos as Primary Documents You can also use memos as PDs
46. Use GREP Search Scope Al Select the fields that should be searched i e the scope Figure 282 First step in defining a query in the Object Crawler Enter a query Regular expressions and search swarms can be used see GREP Search on page 229 and Category Search on page 226 F Select the fields that should be search the so called Search Scope F Click the Select Objects tab to proceed to the next step f 3 ATLAS ti Object Crawler Define Query Select Objects Display Results Objects to be induded in the search 7 All objects E Code Families Hermeneutic Unit PD Families V Primary Documents 7 Memo Families F Quotations E Network Views Y Memos 7 Code Code Links E Codes 7 Hyperlinks Figure 283 Step 2 Select the objects to be searched Select the objects to be included in the search Clicking All objects checks all other check boxes Proceed with the next and last step by clicking the Display Results tab ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SPECIAL TOOLS 375 All objects for which a corresponding match has been found are displayed in the upper list pane The Field column displays the object type in which the match appeared The selected hit a PD in the figure below had its match within the content of the PD The hit itself is emphasized by red colored font and with angle brackets for easy detection c T ATLAS
47. codes By families in alphabetic order A memos Filtering The status bar of all Object Managers displays the current filter and sort setting The default filter criterion is AII 386 Filter setting Sort order Figure 296 Indication of filter setting and sort order in the status bar of object managers It is possible to combine filtering and sorting e g all free codes sorted by the time of their creation ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SORTING AND FILTERING Filters affect a number of procedures 387 The filter options are available in the object menus of the HU Editor Documents Quotations Codes and Memos and from the corresponding Manager s menu The filter field in the status bar offers a few additional options like reversing or removing the filter When a filter is active the background color of the affected lists and Object Managers changes The figure below shows the Filter menu for codes with the current filter set to All which is also the default Codes Memos Networks V Create Free Code Coding Link Code to Sort Id IZ gt s A Toggle Filter Pattern S ed RD E Edit Families Current quotations riLOpen Network Free codes Code Manager Abstract codes Miscellaneous Super Output gt Only todays This month Last month Only mine Co authors Commented codes Families Figure 297 Available filters for codes After setting a filter the background
48. every Friday etc As all HUs are stored in the project folder on the shared drive the project administrator can simply access all sub HUs on the shared drive to create a new Master HU Depending on the way the work is distributed the merge strategy may vary If all team members have access to all documents and a common code list is used then the merge strategy is Same PDs and Codes This strategy also works if team members have added codes to the common code list New codes will be added to the list See Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 171 for more detail New documents should only be added to the Master HU by the project administrator After merging the project administrator saves he new Master HU In order for team members to easily see which is the newest version the date can be added Master project ABC_August 25_2011 hpr6 Figure 83 Master project file after merging All old versions Master and sub HUs of the team members can be moved to a backup folder If the project administrator is a kind soul he or she will once again make copies of the new Master HU one for each team member or ask the team members to make a copy adding their names to the file name see figure 84 below ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 160 Merging Creating a new Master HU and new sub HUs for team members de project folder 13 Master project ABC August 25 2011 hpr6 d a T ii a Project ABC August 25
49. http www miislita com semantics c index 1 html Codes Primary Documents Cross Tabulation Even though a bit hidden a further analysis tool with an emphasis on quantitative output is the Codes Primary Documents Table You find this option under the menu Copes Output The table is available as internal report within ATLAS ti in text format or can be exported to Excel The internal report displays all PDs as columns and the codes as rows The Excel table reverses the table codes are shown as columns and PDs as rows The table contains either a frequency count for each code per document or a word count of the coded segments per code and primary document When creating such a table it is useful to set code families and PD families as filters first Exporting a table that for instance contains 150 codes columns and 40 documents rows is not likely to provide useful information unless you want to use this table as input to a statistical package A useful application is a comparison across different groups of documents for a particular category of codes Thus you are likely to create such a table if you have a certain research question in your mind This will guide you to create the code and PD families you need to construct your query For example You have interviewed 10 women and 10 men in two cities and want to compare location and gender regarding certain issues you have been asking about like their thoughts and feelings ab
50. ic sive rrr ici tr teneret rent ema ed Pe dl e rae Pt eter ded d 417 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL 17 Treatment Of Code Families cote tede acr ecd A C dn caa T eu de 417 Treatment of Primary Document Famili amp s s cicer io hn icc tec rc on e n Preces beta dare 417 Missing Vall P H 418 Creating SPSS OUTPUTS bosco e UM UN f Lm erret A LM PAD ain UU p m ae teh Gd 418 Export amp Importusing AME eite tetris at tede sete Cad i E 420 Exporting and Importing Codes in XML is Exportinig Codes i ater cae a t e a ct i b na Pe vc re PO TE D Ee s 420 ImportingCodes Js om toten cech ies SA tata t eae Atte TN A raha te Anand ee E te een Manan Caste 421 Exporting and Importing Memos in XML 20 421 Exporting MeMOS ocooccoccccccccconononnnonnos 22 421 Importing Memos seeee 422 Exporting the Hermeneutic Unit in XML cian it P eee de d at aci b a E de ru 422 A RR EE P 423 Exporting an HU as HTML Document 1 423 Special Considerations 426 Size of HTML Documents 426 RICK TEX A TN 426 Network View Images itecto ee E EO OU C AA A AA A te tT E 426 To insert Network View images into HTML files sul Export and Import of Documents and their Attributes cece en ence eee eene nnns 428 A Mp LE Useful Resources rore eae ete n ei er hn RE oe e mem The ATLAS ti Website iss ej deo
51. in the data that cannot be found by simple text based search techniques Codes are used as classification devices at different levels of abstraction in order to create sets of related information units for the purpose of comparison e g a concept like Coping Strategy Keep code names brief and succinct Use the comment pane for longer elaborations From a low level tool perspective codes are typically short pieces of text referencing other pieces of text graphical audio or video data Their purpose is to classify an often large number of textual or other data units In the realm of information retrieval systems the terms index indexing or keyword are often used for what we call code or coding The length of a code should be restricted and should not be too verbose If textual annotations are what you want you should use quotation comments instead The technical aspects of coding are described in the section Coding Techniques on page 199 Text Search Tool From simple string matching to sophisticated pattern match GREP and category search all is available in the Text Search Tool see page 225ff Word Cruncher The Word Cruncher counts all words in textual PDs The count can be limited to one PD only or include all PDs ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN CONCEPTS AND FEATURES Memos Families 31 To clean up the count a stop list can be defined to exclude special symbols or common words lik
52. o HA V 2 v 2 C1 is property of C2 Some of these characteristics directly affect the display of links while others affect processing e g search routines automatic layout A link between concepts is displayed in a Network Editor by a line with the relation s label You can choose from three different labels label 1 label 2 and the name used for the menu when selecting a relation The formal attribute affects both the display and processing capabilities of a relation For example All asymmetric relations are symbolized in the Network Editor with an arrow pointing toward the target code Symmetric relations are displayed with an arrow at both ends A typical transitive relation is the is cause of relation if C1 is cause of C2 and C2 is cause of C3 it follows that C1 is cause of C3 Transitive relations also enable the semantic retrieval see Semantic Operators on page 272 The following properties are user definable the two labels and the menu text which can be used as alternative display options the width and color of the line linking two nodes whether a link is directed or non directed and the preferred ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 322 Relations are like styles ina word processor Changing the style will change all occurrences of its usage in this case the links Define your own epistemologica primitives layout direction The
53. point and click language The infix notation is usually easier to read but the postfix notation is far easier to use when creating ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 278 The result of any query isa set of quotations Build complex queries incrementally with immediate feedback after each step queries using mouse controlled direct manipulation user interfaces like Windows An Arithmetic Example Here are some simple arithmetic examples using an RPN calculator Arithmetic expression No parentheses are needed in expressions using RPN notation The precedence of the operators is controlled solely by the order in which operands and operators are entered Creating a Query with the Query Tool The retrieval of quotations with the Query Tool differs from the arithmetic example above by the result in which we are interested We are really not interested in the operands codes code families themselves but in the set of quotations that is the result of evaluating an operand By formulating a query A OR B this is what we really mean Quotations coded with code A OR quotations coded with B Therefore entering the operand code X displays the quotation names which were coded with X in the results list Next you can either view the resulting quotations in context within the primary document or generate a report that contains the full lenght quotations with or without their com
54. power outage or the user copied the project folder while ATLAS ti was still opened If you then open the HU the next time a message pops up telling you that the HU is currently in use by someone and can consequently only be opened in read only mode If you are sure you are the only one using this HU and you have not already loaded it in another window you can treat this message as a false alarm and delete the lok file for the HU in the Windows file manager Saving a Hermeneutic Unit If you haven t saved your work already you will be asked to save the HU when you close the HU Editor If you leave ATLAS ti without saving your work during the last session is lost To save the currently open HU select Fite Save As from the main menu The file dialog opens Select a folder and enter a name for your HU In terms of facilitating project management the best option is to save the HU into the same folder with documents let s call this your project folder If a different folder is shown browse to your project folder and save the HU there Click on the Save button The extension HPR6 is automatically appended to the file name Pending Changes Pending changes are changes in open memo or comment text editors unless you have saved the text and in network editors with modified layout that has not yet been saved If you are currently editing a PD s data source this would also count as a pending change If any pending changes ar
55. with either O or 1 applies or does not apply documents Name Berlin London New York Tokyo P1 Case8 F 1 0 0 0 P2 Case6 F 0 E 0 0 P3 Case10_F 0 0 1 0 P4 Casell F 0 0 0 1 P5 Case50_M 0 0 de 0 P6 Case2 F 0 0 0 1 P7 Case3 F 1 0 0 0 P8 Case4 F 0 0 0 1 P9 Case54 M 0 1 0 0 P10 Casel5 F 0 0 a 0 P11 Case20 F 0 0 0 1 P12 Case22 F 1 0 0 0 Figure 149 By default PD families are like dichotomous variables By following a simple naming convention PD families can be turned into nominal and categorical variables for the use outside of ATLAS ti in statistical and other database applications Let s assume that your respondents come from four different locations To represent this in ATLAS ti you need to create four PD families one for each location Exporting these for families as PD Family table to Excel you get a table as shown above containing one variable per family with the values O or 1 If you prefer just one variable for location rather than four you need to use the following naming convention when creating your PD families VaniaBLE Name VarIABLe VALUE Location Berlin Location London ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH VARIABLES PRIMARY DOCUMENT FAMILIES Location New York Location Tokyo 247 When exporting the PD Family table the result will be as follows documents Name P1 P2 P3 PA P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P 10 Pil P12 Case8_F Case6_F Case10 F Casell F Case50 M Case2 F Case3 F Case4 F
56. 1 om continued 6 19 P21 Site P22 Site Second Second Murder_4 Murder 5 This network view provides a detailed overview of the site where Anne Chapman was murdered The video footage is from 1967 At that time as the speai changed since 1888 The thumbnail images video snapshots are from image documents that have been inserted into the network view Figure 329 A network view image inserted into an HTML output Export and Import of Documents and their Attributes Please refer to PD Family Table on page 245 for details on how to bulk assign a large number of documents and associated families in Excel M compatible CSV format ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL APPENDIX Appendix Useful Resources 429 The ATLAS ti Website http www atlasti com The ATLAS ti website should be a regular place to visit Here you will find important information such as video tutorials additional documentation of various software features workshop announcements special service providers and announcements of recent service packs and patches Quick Tour http quicktour atlasti com To get started we recommend to work your way through the Quick Tour Within 1 5 to 2 hours you get an overview of the main functions and an idea on how to conduct an analysis with ATLAS ti When you are ready to start your own project use the Mini Manual see below as your continuing guide Mini Manual http manual atlasti com
57. 15 0 Yi investigation theory by M Fido 4 4 w result pane Figure 168 The Query Tool window The Query Tool has the following main components 1 The operator toolbar located near the left margin of the window 2 The code family pane in the upper left lists code families to be used in queries ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 270 xs 3 The codes pane below the code family pane contains all current codes set filters do apply 4 The term stack pane in the upper right displays the stack of all expressions entered in the current query If more than one entry is visible there are arguments still waiting to be used in the query The topmost entry is the current query 5 The current query is also displayed in the feedback pane directly below the term stack pane Here a different notation is used one that uses parentheses and resembles the calculator style of entering queries 6 The result of the query is displayed in the results list located in the lower right of the window Above the term stack pane are several buttons for manipulating the stack swapping S or duplicating terms P clearing the stack C etc Close to the results list are two buttons for removing unwanted hits and creating a report In figure 163 you see three other buttons highlighted in green A super code is a saved query see Super Codes on page 282 for further de
58. 2 code ho murder_location 1 0 v E E Instructions Creating a code hierarchy 0 In F Super E P 7 2 Victim Annie Chapman scene of the murder 1967 wmv 3 P7 2 Victim Annie Chapman scene of the murde E 23 E Quotation Manager HU Jack the Ripper stag CO 9 2 X Code Manager HU Jack the Ripper stag E Z Quotations Edit Miscellaneous Output View Codes Edit Miscellaneous Output View icm Name Name z Xt murder location 1 0 Ximurder witness 1 0 Ei sit victim age 1 0 Xivictim economic situation 4 0 Xivictim last hours and death 1 0 Xtvictim marriage children 2 0 a T i EII O rendes innere AL Mem me 2 7 2 Victim Annie Chapman scene of the murder 1967 wmv 001 04 98 Ea lt Quotation gt 0 00 59 66 lt SelEnd gt Sel ng a video file Figure 128 Preparing the screen for codi Currently the time line cannot be scrolled Thus the entire video needs to fit onto it Therefore the recommendation is to cut your audio or video files to a length of about 20 minutes Otherwise the visual presentation of the quotations becomes very tiny and difficult to set In version 7 ATLAS ti will offer a margin area as already available for most other data file formats Then the above described coding procedure can also be use for coding audio and video files To create a quotation move the cursor
59. 2 0 05 2 0 06 3 008 1 005 1 007 5 1 00 Figure 211 Examples of yellow and red circle markers Red circle When the c index exceeds 1 see Out of range on page 306 In addition to the red circle the entire cell is highlighted in yellow Yellow circle An inherent issue with the C index and similar measures is that it is distorted by code frequencies that differ too much In such cases the coefficient tends to be much smaller than the potential significance of the co occurrence For instance if you had coded 100 quotations with code depression and 10 with mother and you had 5 co occurrences ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 308 n dep 100 n mother 10 n dep mother 5 c 5 100 10 5 5 105 0 048 A c index of only 0 048 may slip your eye easily although code mother appears in 50 of all its applications with code depression Looking from code depression only 5 co occurr with code mother If the ratio between the codes frequencies exceeds a certain threshold currently 5 but will be user definable in the future the yellow light goes on in the cell So whenever a cell shows the yellow marker it should invite you to look into the co occurrences of this cell despite a low c index When the mouse hovers over a cell with a yellow mark a pop up displays the ratio of the two codes Orange Circle The orange circle is simply a mixture of the red and yello
60. 347 CC Link Air gt Chemical warfare iis associated with is part of gt 1 is cause of lt gt contradicts isa isa noname isproperty of uw Open Relation Editor Figure 249 Relations When linking codes or quotations select the option Oren Retation Epitor instead of one of the offered relations Or select Networks RELATION EDITOR from the main menu In the Relation Editor select the menu option Epit New REeLation Enter a short unique ID for the relation you want to create The default are capital letters but it is not necessary to use capital letters Just remember that each relation needs a unique ID Based on this information ATLAS ti ensures that none of the relation is overwritten by any other relation Next enter a label 1 a label 2 and the menu text In the Network Editor you have three options to display the name of the relation see figure below As a view option you can either display label 1 label 2 or the menu label If there is sufficient space in the network you can select to display the menu label which is usually longer Choose an abbreviation for labels 1 and 2 asa display option when space is limited Choose a symbol for label 1 a short word for label 2 and a longer name for the menu label Or enter nothing for label 1 an English language name for label 2 and a label in your native language for the menu label Specs Hep Show Tools Show Alignment
61. Always save the HU to the project folder on your individual computer when working on your part of the project Do not change the order of the PDs otherwise there will be a problem when merging the sub projects This means extra work for the project administrator as he or she needs to adjust the order of the documents in each affected HU After an agreed upon time interval either upload the HU or a copy bundle file to the shared drive or send it to the project administrator so he she can merge the various sub projects Whether it is sufficient to upload send the HU file or whether a copy bundle file is needed depends on the permission to edit documents see below Migrating projects to a Second Computer for Team Members If you want to migrate your project to a different computer e g back and forth between a laptop and a PC then you need to do the following When moving the project for the first time Either copy the entire project folder to an external device like a USB stick and move it to the second computer Or create a copy bundle file save it for instance on a USB stick or send it to yourself via email and install it on the second computer see Install a Bundle on page 131 for further detail When moving consecutive times and none of the documents has been edited You simply need to move the HU file back and forth and overwrite the previous version When moving consecutive times and at least one of the documents has b
62. BUILDING TOOLS 4 324 Network Views allow for a flexible but logically consistent display of the network of objects so there are a few constraints to keep in mind If code A is linked to code B using the relation is associated with then every Network View that contains code A and code B will necessarily include the relation is associated with between the two Furthermore as only one link can exist between any two nodes at any given time no Network View will display any other relation between those two nodes If however you want to link code A and B differentely in a different network view then you need to work with dummy or modifier codes These are empty codes i e you have not used them for coding but you need them to modify a relation ent ERE 5 E eode A t aia x context y 5 Figure 229 Using modifier codes for case based network views Node Types The following object classes can be displayed and edited as nodes within the Network Editor The display characteristics of the nodes can be altered in a variety of ways Codes as Nodes Codes are probably the most prominent objects in ATLAS ti networks They provide the main ingredients for models and theories Memos as Nodes Memos in networks are often an important supplement to code networks Several theoretical memos can be imported into a network to map out their relationship The visual layout provid
63. Carl Feigenbaum was arrested in 1894 in New York f investiga 11 25 The 21st Century Investigation that Feigenbaum wa reason s 11 26 Robert Donston Stephenson aka Roslyn D Onston 2 name of Eg 11 27 He arrived as a patient at the London Hospital in 11 28 His accounts about what Kelly is said to have told 4 Carl Feigenbaum appears to be a rather unlikely candidate as the man behind the Ripper murders First there are several discrepancies in the incriminating statements made by William Lawton Feigenbaum s lawyer Yet these statements form the entire basis of Marriot s case There was never actually a confession and the suspect s connection to Whitechapel London in 1888 remains unproven There was also no series of violent murders involving mutilation in Wisconsin The co counsel who knew the suspect dismissed the claims The story quickly disappeared Figure 19 Quotation Manager ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 57 Double click A double click on a list entry displays the selected quotation in context Multiple Selection You can select more than one quotation at a time either to delete them to attach codes to open a network on them or to create output Drag amp Drop By dragging one or more quotations onto other quotations you create hyperlinks Colors The color pattern for quotations follows the same rules as for PDs Quotations that can be
64. Column view shows the most essential information like name how often used linkages to other objects start and end position where applicable ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 52 A single click selects an object a double click executes an associated action for the object View gt Zoom List hides the toolbar comment pane Large Icons and status bar Small Icons List Show Tooisan toggles display of the toolbar Details Wrap Tootsar displays all buttons in multiple Single Column MU rows if needed Zoom List v Show Toolbar Use Grip displays lines between rows in Wrap Toolbar Details view Use Grid Er L blesih pi diti v Edit Labels pit Lagers enables in place editing v Use images Use Imaces toggles the display of item icons Font is er Style Font individually specifies the font used for this list The default font for the list and the Refresh F5 text area can be set in General Preferences Select all items Lepcer Style shades every other row Auto Cotor Move only available in the Code Manager Codes are automatically assigned a color according to their groundedness and density See Auto Color Mode on page 349 for details RerresH F5 refreshes the list display Sevect ALL items is self explanatory Selecting Items in Object Managers Next to thinking clicking will likely be one of the most frequen
65. Comments Code Book Generates an output of all codes with comments including creation and modification date membership in families and number of quotations referenced by each code If you want an output in form of a table use the XML output option and apply the style sheet Modern Codes a report of commented codes See page 406 or further detail Co occuring Codes Outputs the results of the Co occurance Explorer in rtf format see page 309 You can choose to include the quotation list or to output only the list of co occuring codes ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 398 The Output Dialog in the Code Manager BJ When clicking the Code Manager output button see left a dialog opens to allow you to select the characteristics of your output 6 gt ny Output Dialog Header Info Destination Y Indude HU name Text Window V Indude author 5 File Y Indude current date Printer E Indude Code Comments Indude Q Comments E Indude Link Comments Onediner only Code List l Full quotations Code Hierarchy Traverse Links Codes amp Neighbors Codes PT Table Selected Code investigation doubts 12 0 Figure 305 Code Output Dialog Window Additional choices not available as menu options are the exclusion or inclusion of header information and link comments ONeE LINER ONLY Corresponds to menu option Quotation List
66. Corpus RU eroe teca piacere Eden eite le corde ret rd de t OLER E A Eo da a il Theory IMP OTE aes A Team Work i CORCeDESd casco es o crei roer le ro e a a ria Target and Source HUS tct rnt tt te c dk pet i ted eC ERE TR I Er Cr SD ckci eee dete ti etra dbase Det rx ede d ave cR spen Merge ciTA E ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL Howto Merge Hermeneutic Units c er ee ai dicc Ro d AE a ED Rb d EP E A vide era eben es 173 Selecta target and source HU ea tradet Co tiani td aa oen den ccena c tav dete e aon en dae Oa I d a 173 Choose a merge strategy Conflict Resolution for Links iio A ce m tin esee ce I a he cete ce tete tino a aida avails Migration of Gerne ral Features iii ecce cite te ee Hte I Asam ch nre eres eiecit be te rere Pe En RA c ei Special Considerations for Quotations Merging Sealed Codes cart erf ola rh ceste ion d oe eser ate ha cies robe rester olds am Ae eetion wenn m aM rA E A Few Additional Considerations 1 iie de diee ipee icr tede ti digi eie ea aene redo After the Merge The Merge Repo oie ete bust crie c cona addere vol dod db dd e ee e ETC PR gk eH d ar a ag cb e E A OS m Unified Objects Statistical Summary The Data Level Basic FHDEUODS aoo tre ceo te rete en p terti ra pede pis meo e Ud Sig UTE 181 Sure rupi Sd A a a ias 181
67. Creating and working with Textual and PDF Quotations sssssssssssssssssssesseeneeneneen nemen rca nennen 181 Selecting Text Segments m Selecting PDF Segments Creating a free Textu l or PDF Quotation nem hinc ciens ideo eo mee Mids cad d cipe si EE C o E ED are e Eae 183 Creating Quotations Using Drag amp Drop Quotation referentes c e LM eoo ki t ttt eta Ca de dcdit tno Qa due EAE a Do d ode de dtl er nance ebd Activating and Displaying Textual and PDF Quotations ssssssssssssssssseeeeeeneeeereneeennenrtner ener trenttrenetre tenete inet 185 Modifying Textual and PDF Quotations New boundaries match existing quotation Del ting Textual and PDF Quotations acetate ds ede hc ds Deleting Quotation s in the Quotation Manager Creating and Working with Graphical Quotations etnies rete innen Creating Graphical Quotations tectae etam ese tatit te b d dad Pr P ET A t Ed e ea ALERTA TR GER ER EI CAPE Activating and Displaying Graphical Quotations Modifying Graphical Quotatlonis 2 toto terti tse ttc te bh n e su a i ie re Re i d Rcx end nd cep nee E als aiii Deleting Graphical Quotalioris iersinii ice ihi i tare n POP ee ec er D iH f ener aM t n dnce AHSA Creating and Working with Multimedia Quotations The Multimedia Control Window Opening and Closing the Multimedia Control Window sse ennertnetn ertet enr ensi Activating and Playing Audio and Vi
68. D modus operandi others 5 0 lt gt date of murder 13 0 historic context 4 0 _ name of suspect 28 0 name of suspect Cohen name of suspect Feigen name of suspect Kamin A ccs eite Mere f ss Codes Edit Miscellaneous Output ES role of the media aiding investigation 3 0 3 role of the media facilitating free riding 1 0 XX role of the media legend building 9 0 5 role of the media sensationalizing 4 0 background color if a filter is set filter setting is shown in the status bar as well Figure 146 Double clicking on a family in the family manager activates a filter ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL FAMILY LIFE 244 If a family is activated as a filter it is displayed in bold letters in the Family Manager In the figure above the cody family Role of the media has been set as filter In addition the background color in the Object Manager and drop down list changes The active filter is also indicated in the filter field of the status bar in the Object Manager i killer active in the l f London England in entral News Agency by ictims throats were slit organs from three of the that the killer possessed tion had been growing i Y role of the media legend building n the killer because of the the murderer ads surrounding the arch folklore and only the filtered codes are displayed in the margin area es have proposed
69. Editor Networks ReLation Ebiror and select whether you want to open the code code or the hyperlinks relation editor F In the list of relations click on the relation to be edited Change any of the values F Click on APPLY If you open the Relation Editor from within a Network Editor all changes are broadcast to the editor and you see the changes in the display of the affected links When opening the Relation Editor from the main menu all but the preferred layout direction settings are realized immediately in all currently open Network Editors How to create new relations User defined relations are only available for code code or quotation quotation links All other links use hard wired relations like the ones between quotations and codes New relations are stored together with the HU in which they are used When starting ATLAS ti 6 the default relations as defined in the file default rel are loaded This file is located in the user system folder that can conveniently be accessed via Extras Exprorer User System Forper When creating new relations it is suggested that you save these relations to the default rel file If desired different REL files can be created and loaded New relations can be created when linking codes or quotations or independently of any linking activity In both cases entries are created with the Relation Editor ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS
70. Editor s menu or click on the Cut Links button in the toolbar Move the mouse pointer with the rubber bands to the target node F Click the left mouse button Alternatively F Click on one or more link labels Choose Links Cur Links from the Network Editor s menu or click on the Cut Links button in the toolbar Or Move the mouse pointer over a link label Right click and choose Cur Link from the context menu The latter two methods work on first class links only code code or Modifying Links The type of a link e g its Relation can be changed in the Network Editor F Right click on a link label and select Chance Retation from the context menu The relation menu pops up Select a different relation A very efficient way to manipulate first class links is offered by the Link Managers see Link Management on page 344 Selecting Neighbors Neighbors are the nodes linked directly to a node Using this procedure repeatedly selects a complete connected graph which is a partial Network View where every node has a path either a direct link or via intermediate nodes to each other node To select neighbor nodes F Select the initial nodes ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 334 Choose Nobes Setect NeicHgors from the Network Editor s menu or press Crri N on the keyboard To mark a complete connected sub network repeat the previous step until all nodes within
71. K3 Numerisch 1 0 name of suspect 0 NO Kein 4 Rechts Nominal 12 K4 Numerisch 1 We CET Nominal 13 K5 Numerisch 1 Nominal 14 K6 Numerisch 14 ok Nominal 15 K7 Numerisch 1 AE A Nominal 16 k8 Numerisch 1 sete Nominal 17 K9 Numerisch 1 Nominal 18 K10 Numerisch 1 Nominal 19 K11 Numerisch 1 Nominal 20 K12 Numerisch 1 Nominal 21 K13 Numerisch 1 Nominal 22 K14 Numerisch 1 Nominal 23 K15 D ch 1 Nonsinal d 1 d Figure 322 Variable View Export amp Import using XML Codes memos or entire HUs can be exported into the XML format Exporting codes and memos as XML files allows you to transfer all or only selected codes or memos between HUs using the import function If you are looking to merge complete HUs check the section on Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 171 Exporting the entire HU in XML opens up numerous possibilities for individual reports and conversion for other applications Exporting and Importing Codes in XML Exporting Codes The code s name author creation and modification date as well as the query for super codes and their respective comments are included in the export format However no links to quotations or other objects are included You can export all codes or selected codes or all codes that pass the current filter To export all codes or all filtered codes Choose Copes Miscettaneous Export Copes XML from the main menu In the
72. Network Editor Set the fonts colors and the size of the window Arrange the nodes as desired ATLAS ti saves network views in Bitmap BMP or Windows Enhanced Metafile EMF format Choose EMF as format since this is also the default format used by the HTML generator Save the file e g on the desktop and the copy it into the ATLAS ti HTML folder The HTML folder can easily located via Extras ExPLoreR HTML FOLDER Open the HTML file in the Windows Explorer and go to the Network View Choose Network Save as Graphic Fite from the network editor s main menu l section e g by clicking on the link in the table of contents Table of Contents General Statistics Primary Documents Commented Codes Memos Network AS Figure 328 Jumping to the network view section by clicking on the link in the table of contents In addition to the textual information and the network view bitmap you see the image of the saved network view ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT 428 we CT P20 Site Second Murder 3 E continued by Shen By ole E ous F nn A P19 Site 6 16 Second shown by video Murder_2 AE F5 continued by iaa M shown by video 74 MM d Scene of the second murder Chapman in Hanbury Street ES E is m n 6 21 explains change over time Aa AZ e Gm 71 ML houn in GE map E k P18 Site E Second 16 3 Murder
73. Preferences dialog the bigger your HTML file will be This may not be a concern if you are using the documents in house However when making such documents accessible to others via the Internet slow transmission rates may demand a reduced set of output options In lined content included in the web page primary documents may boost the size considerably and therefore transmission times depending upon the size of the documents Rich Text Rich Text formatted documents cannot be included in the resulting HTML code All contents from rich text primary documents including Word files comments or memos are converted to plain text for HTML output Embedded file links to such documents can of course be used When clicking the link the application registered for this file type e g Word is opened or displayed using a plug in inside the browser s window Network View Images Checking the option to include Network Views is not sufficient to display them in an HTML document The graphic files have to be created manually for every network that you want to include By default a network view entry looks as follows Nodes are prefixed with a single letter denoting its type C Code M Memo Q Quotation P Primary Document d RQ1 Suspects who might have been Jack the Ripper This network visualizes the results contained in the Memo RQ1 Suspects who might have been Jack the Ripper This network view was created with a screen resolu
74. Proceed in the same way with all other documents that you want to analyze Save the HU file Fie Save Make sure that you always create a backup copy of this file and store it at a safe location Reference for internal documents Internal documents are referenced as embedded in the PDoc Manager Open your PDoc Manager and look at the column Origin after having created a few internal documents ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT 120 Documents Edit Miscellaneous Output View X ty 2 hi TO Les Q Name f Interview with Dave Embedded Interview with Dave Interview with Ina Embedded Interview with Ina Fieldnotes 15 05 2011 Embedded Fieldnotes 15 05 2011 Interview with Tom Embedded Interview with Tom Figure 58 Path reference for internal documents Project Transfer Simply copy the HU file and move it to a different location As your data is now assigned as internal document there is only one single file that contains your entire project Project Backup Create a copy of the HU file Benefits The project is a single file as no external documents are used As the content is pasted into the new internal ATLAS ti document rather than directly imported from Word file size is reduced The size of the HU file including internal documents is much smaller than the sum of the original Word files tis easy to backup copy migrate or delete the project using Wind
75. T edit doe asta oit t e dade ded e d ER Pedes 119 Project Setup ES Reference for internal documerits tii A A a e 119 Project Transfers a ca ia recette via a Fa b a rat ar a A d ree cd ert dta d nen o AH 120 Project Backup Ice M Ip dere RP TS Modifying the Project Setup a Optimizing Path Ais aos idad rt teo n Be ee to OTHER o a POE D D Hle RE IER CH UR REX UI OD PR EU Be cid ed 121 Changing Absolute Path References to the HUPATH ssssssssssssssseseeeeeene rra rra 121 Changing Absolute Path References to the TBPATH ssssssssssssssssseeeeeenetnetrenennenetnetrenrtrete terret tnet nire tns tree trit tner nins in 122 Adjusting Reference Em TWo Ways to Adjust References cnra tei cesarean dah andes re n des cl tae e edt eee caf E o tee da How ATLAS ti loads Primary Documents PAMPA edite eiie A in te ette e dee eren d te e AT d Pd creo ci t eden s d vs How to create path Mappings cte eto tee tte adit de eer ee e te ta HL e Fe re recent ea To enter a path to be mapped Redirection Fallback DC ii A A M Change Paths for one PD ata Hme sessi ie perse i editae i rege rre tl rdg n te eg en d e tb cu bad SASTRE ga Turning External into Internal Documents ie ee ced d nna eie ded eade ce eed d eee Hn d e eg Project Backup and MIgFaLlOT uou oret ie bdiopedUE Back p COples dero cie beca cet cat cte
76. TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 151 apply when working with ATLAS ti Users defined in ATLAS ti are not necessarily the same as Windows users Furthermore administrative rights assigned to an ATLAS ti user have nothing to do with Windows user rights Adding a New User If you do not intend to use ATLAS ti in a work group environment the only procedure you might want to know is how to modify the default account called Super ATLAS ti knows two classes of users administrators and all others Administrators have more rights than normal users The key rights of administrators are the ability to define new users to install service packs or use the more advanced data source management features Thus in order to be able to create new user accounts you need to be logged as a user with administrative rights By default you are logged in as Super user and this user has administrative rights To create a new user account select Extras User Epitor from the main menu If this option is grayed out in the menu you are logged in as standard user Choose Extras Loain and log in as Super user to be able to access the user administration window In addition to being an administrative user in the ATLAS ti context you also must have administrative rights as a Windows user in order to write access the user database which is located in ATLAS ti s PROGRAM folder below the Program Files folder This folder is usually write protected for non adm
77. The audio video file stops at the end of the marked segment You can also use the association points as navigation device e g to enter at a particular point in the file or to easily jump around Transcribing Audio and Video Files in ATLAS ti Adding and Associating Multimedia Files and Transcripts Below the process of adding a blank transcript file to an ATLAS ti project and the process of transcription is explained step by step Assign the audio file or the video file that you want to transcribe Documents Assicn AssicN Create a a new internal document for the transcript Documents Assicn New Text Document Enter a name for the transcript It is immediately loaded in the HU editor in edit mode Next you need to associated the two files with each other One Hermeneutic Unit can include as many associations as you like one association for each set of associated documents and two documents per set The following combinations are currently supported audio text and video text In order to keep track of your associations each association has an ID and a unique name can be given as well To associate to files with each other Open the Primary Document Manager Documents Primary Doc Manacer Open the Association Editor Apocs Eprr Association ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 91 synchro mode name anchor Figure 41 Association Editor Drag and drop the two documents from the Primary Docum
78. This procedure is only recommended for small to medium size projects without the need to share the documents It allows you for example to apply codes to your analytic notes on the data F Select a memo in the Memo Manager ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION EZ 82 F Select the menu option Miscettaneous Use as Primary DOCUMENT You find more detail on the memo function on page 254 Rearranging and renumbering PDs The ID of a PD determines its position in the list of PDs when in default sort order by name Furthermore it is essential that PDs in HUs to be merged see Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 171 have matching IDs To rearrange PDs to change their IDs use one of the following options Rearrange a selected PD only Rearrange one or more PDs using drag amp drop Renumber all PDs to make the current sort permanent while eliminating gaps in the numbering at the same time Of course all quotations belonging to a repositioned PD are taken along Rearranging a Selected Primary Document Select the PD in the Document Manager whose list position should be changed Choose Documents Miscettaneous Chance Position from the main menu Enter a position number after which the selected document is to be moved Rearranging Primary Documents Using Drag amp Drop Rearranging PDs via drag amp drop is a convenient alternative and lets you rearrange a number of selected PDs concurrently
79. Unit HU and the data They provide access to data sources which are usually files stored on the disks of your computer or a network drive This chapter outlines the steps needed to create select and prepare documents so that they will be suitable to use in ATLAS ti Supported Formats In principle most textual graphical and multimedia formats are supported by ATLAS ti For some formats their suitability depends on the state of your Windows system particularly in regard to what other software is already installed Before deciding to use an exotic data format you should check if this format is available and if it is sufficiently supported by your Windows system For a list of formats that are currently supported as primary documents choose Assign from the documents drop down menu and click the File Type drop down list that appears at the bottom of the window see Assigning Documents via the File Dialog on page 78 Only the formats listed in the drop down list are supported by ATLAS ti To ensure that files are compatible with your system assign a few of your documents as PDs They should loaded and display or play when the source is multimedia correctly Files that might prove problematic are multimedia files using exotic codecs software that enables playing of a certain multimedia file format on your computer and files that rely on RTF converters If a file is listed but cannot be loaded see Help with Data Management P
80. Working with Referenced Documents m Consequences of Accessing PDs via References cirio Reference Typ s Many Paths One Destination cese ca ate Absolute Paths Special Path ima The HUPATH the recommended option Cons DA CONCISO PNE Setting Upa New POE wrrr inasi a Yep SK ROV e Vti dida 112 Objectives inei HE ERO a EN ee EE Project Planning and Setup s Scenario 1 recommended Working with One Project Folder for Single Users and Teams ssssssssssse 114 Scis c E O O NANO Project Set up Project Migration Project Backup 2 Benefits of this approach accade epi erre reco eate di OIE re b et de Cai a cta eee d e X e e E tto d ege Consideration tor team re Scenario 2 Multiple Document Paths SEI M Project Set Up eim rapere taie p e odd e paste quotidie ese n eee ird eee eu asta TERRE ERE NEP RV Project Migration is reed 117 Ben fits of this approach siint hi rnnt re Pre ne ttc ipe n Dre ntn ht d re FC ED a e RC ee ER 118 Dtawbacks tite bei tete n a E nnne 118 Scenario 3 Working with One Project File for projects that use text files exclusively 118 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL Issues to Consider Size and Length of Documents sssssssssssssissssessseenennetn rr 118 Team Capablanca aene sace ie neta rco io a
81. XML Data Sources Select a style sheet from the Style Sheets pane Style sheets are categorized by name converter type and target format usually HTML F Double click the style sheet or click the Convert button Select the amount of content that is needed excluding primary documents including meta information or including full content of quotations as well The HTML document is stored in the XML folder you are not specifically This starts the conversion process which usually creates an HTML document asked where to store it and how to name it Wait until the browser opens displaying the result of the conversion Exporting an entire HU as XML file The ATLAS ti XML export option for HUs can be used for different purposes Forinternal use in the XML converter For external use as a non proprietary format e g to archive data The qualitative data archive in Essex for example uses ATLAS ti s XML format as blue print for their standard See http www esds ac uk qualidata about introduction asp Asa means to import data into other applications that offer an import function like the software QDA Miner QDA Miner offers further quantitative analysis tools like cluster factor and correspondence analysis and thus for some studies it presents a very useful complement to ATLAS ti To export an HU for any of the above mentioned purposes select either the down arrow next to the XML button in the main tool bar and then the o
82. Yi murderer motive 1 1 3 amp murderer serial killer 11 2 murderer_various persons 4 0 Yi murders canonical five 4 6 Z murders more less than five 5 amp murders potentially attributed _ Create Super Code x amp Y REASON RELEASED 0 0 i reason released alibi 7 0 reason released alive long afte Y reason released allegation unp Id Name se 3 88 A man nam mes Thomas Sa 11 3 He was cleared of suspicion when 0 1 On 1 September the day after the 0 XE reason released does not fit ch 1 Ashe was still a atthe ti 0 S reason released lack of evident 1 However Sickert is not considere 0 VS reason released mix un of nan SS n m Adjacency Operator Settings Refresh Codes Scope L Heb Figure 175 Clicking a Boolean Query Step 3 The term stack now contains only one term OR reason released alibi reason released lack of evidence i e the combination of the two codes This term can be used as an operand to further extend the query e g to negate the expression or add some more codes to it But we will stop here for now The feedback pane displays the query in infix notation as we would have entered it into a regular calculator reason released alibi OR reason released lack of evidence The results pane lists 10 quotations You can look at the quotations in the context of the docum
83. a tool button The Main Tool Bar 1 The main toolbar offers many major functions Unless switched off via the Views menu it is always available The Edit Tool Bar 2 The Edit toolbar is available only when an editable Primary Document PD is displayed The tools from the Editing Toolbar can be used after entering edit mode The various options are explained further in the section on Editing Primary Documents on page 136 The Primary Document Tool Bar 3 The PD toolbar is to the left of the PD pane Note that it is disabled unless a document is loaded ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 45 Object Drop Down Lists 4 Below the main toolbar you find four drop down lists that contain the HU s main entities From left to right these are the drop down lists for PDs quotations codes and memos Click into the entry field or the little drop down arrow on the right to select an object Click the button to the left of the entry field to open an Object Manager Primary Document Pane 5 The dominant window pane in the HU Editor is the Primary Document Pane This pane is the central workspace where text or graphic material is reviewed marked coded and annotated It is usually augmented by the Paragraph number pane 6 and the margin area 8 Paragraph Number Area 6 To the left of the text area but still inside the PD pane paragraph numbers can be displayed In fact displayed is a new numb
84. age 7 to 11 are anxious about water as 1 am TOIA nas lobal warming and often lose sieep over it been done in some countries of the world Rasheeda age 13 Nigeria My community was affected by Ep Ever which caused our crops to die and there is no more food security People died our cattle died and the land became a desert evts neg death Kamdoun age 11 Cameroon H Based on the premiss that what chilaren 1 leam todan id ATIQN coded Eea embedded image 1 sarn today will shape v w wav Figure 125 Coding an embedded image within a PDF document Coding columns of text As usual just highlight a section of text within a column ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 209 Empowering children to act Children themselves exhibit a high level of awareness and concern about climate change This in tum affacts their visions of and anxieties about their own future and that of the world in genera A survey conducted in 2005 by the UK Department for Education and Skills DFES now the Department for Childran Schools and Families found that 24 per cant of the 1 000 10 to 12yearo as questioned be eved climate change presented the greatest threat to the world s future A more recent Survey of 1 150 chidren undertaken by UK supermarket chain Somarfieid found that around 50 per cent of children age 7 to 11 ara anxious about global warming and often l
85. and this forces ATLAS ti to load the document Right click on the document in the PDoc Manager and select Data Source Manacement Reset Last Access INFORMATION see also the section Troubleshooting on page 433 You should be aware this does not mean that your codes will magically re appear where you expect them If you have modified a document outside ATLAS ti it will be up to you to go over the document check all codings and adjust them manually if necessary Tedious as this may be you will probably agree that it beats starting from scratch i e re coding the entire document after all Rule No 2 Never delete modify or move the auxiliary log file Deleting a log file is the one single activity that will cause permanent data loss apart from losing your HU file of course All other problems related to data management can generally be solved see page 433 If the log file has been deleted permanently then ATLAS ti has no way of knowing where to display the quotations and codes as the reference information where to attach them has changed ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EDITING PRIMARY DOCUMENTS Saving a former plain text with formatting does not change the file extension An activated embedded Excel table showing the menu and toolbar within ATLAS ti 141 The second best solution in such a case is that you try to rescue an older version of the document from a copy bundle file For this and other reasons we re
86. are only indicated if you activated it e g with a double click in the Code Manager If you start a new session an asterisk replaces the frequency count The reason for this is that a Super Code is dynamic and its density frequency count changes as soon as you modify any of the codes contained in the query of the Super Code For the same reason Super Codes are not displayed in the margin area There is the possibility to create a regular code from a Super Code see Snapshot Codes on page 286 Super Codes can be used in code families Network Views and last but not least as powerful operands in queries allowing you to incrementally build complex queries ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 284 Creating Super Codes To create a Super Code you must have already constructed a query using the Query Tool which is displayed in the term stack Note that because Super Codes are intentional you can also create a valid and useful Super Code with an empty results list which might well change in a later stage of your analysis Click the Super Code button in the query tool between the feedback pane and the result pane 3 amp imurders potentially attributed n Z REASON RELEASED 0 0 B Yi reason released alibi 7 0 38 reason released alive long afte reason released allegation unp Y amp reason released does not fit ch X reason released lack of evident
87. as explained in the chapter on the Network View function see page 318 Describing GE quotations to improve outputs Proceed as explained for audio and video quotations see Describing video quotations to improve outputs on page 212 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 215 More Coding Related Functions This section describes some additional coding related house keeping functions such as creating free codes importing lists of codes and renaming and removing codes Free Codes You can create codes that have not yet been used for coding or creating networks Such codes are called free codes Why Create Free Codes To prepare a stock of predefined codes in the framework of a given theory This is especially useful in the context of team work when creating a base project e To code in a top down or deductive way with all necessary concepts already at hand This complements the bottom up or inductive open coding stage in which concepts emerge from the data e To create codes that come to mind during normal coding work and that cannot be applied to the current segment but will be useful later Creating a Free Code From the main menu choose Copes Create Free Cope or click the Create Code button in the Code Manager A prompter opens as in Open Coding Enter one or more code names and click Such a free code shows the name suffix O 0 no quotations no linked codes Importin
88. build complex families incrementally from existing families using a set of powerful Boolean operators From a technical perspective Super Families function just like Super Codes see Super Codes on page 282 Using Families when Merging Hermeneutic Units A special application of families is used to specify the sets of objects to be excluded in the process of merging Hermeneutic Units see Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 171 Common Procedures Although the handling of families and their members is identical their usage differs between types of families In the following the general aspects of and procedures for working with families are described Thereafter a description of specific characteristics of the different family types follows All procedures for displaying editing and creating families are found in the menus of their object type i e under the Documents Codes and Memos menus The Family Manager sing the Family Manager you can create edit and delete families You can add and remove items family members write comments concerning a particular family or set a family as filter ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL FAMILY LIFE 239 r p it Primary Doc Family Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage II 62 Sax Families Edit Miscellaneous View E Description of Victims 5 79 Investigaton all files 26 08 20 Murder sites all 26 08 20 Murder sites second murder 26 08 20 list of
89. can be useful when you have been adding new objects to a network view for exploratory purposes Use this option with care For this operation no undo option is available The only way to undo a false deletion is to close the HU without saving it and to open the most recent version or backup If you only want to exclude nodes from a Network View do not select Derete None from the node s context menu or Derete Entities from the main menu Select the Remove rrom View option Node and Link Actions Commands affecting selected codes or links are available via their respective context menus In addition as described below type specific procedures are activated when double clicking a node ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS All nodes and links have context menus 336 Actions via Context Menus Context menus can be activated on nodes and links Dependent on the type of the node or link selected these menus will offer specialized options from which to choose When the mouse pointer is over a node or a link related information is displayed in the status window of the Network Editor N a Pod mn Figure 239 The status bar displays information about a node when moving with the mouse over it To open a context menu move the mouse pointer onto a node or link and click the right mouse button Context menu for a code Context menu for a
90. click OK To link a code to many quotations via Drag amp Drop F In the Quotation Manager select the quotations to be assigned to the code Drag amp drop the selected quotations into the Code Manager onto the code Quick Coding Quick Coding assigns the last used code to the current data segment This is an efficient method for the consecutive coding of segments using the most recently used code Select a code in the Code Manager Select a data segment l Click the Quick Coding button or choose Copinc Quick Copine from the menu ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 206 Meaning of colored bars in the margin as much of a struggle for us Because focussing on the upside chubby cheeks Powdthavee gparenthood reasons for deciding pro self delusion ren bring happiness When people are pring or thinking about their current dsome boys or gorgeous looking girls prospective parents know that raising appily about parenthood which is why Figure 122 Meanings of colored bars in the margin As you saw in Figure 105 Activating quotations via its code overlapping codes are displayed in different colors in the margin area These colors help you to distinguish which bar belongs to which code word If you were to add even more layers the next two layers would be displayed in violet and blue After that silver is used again The colors do not contain any information about the differ
91. coded The Ma dere no joy iniy to be ation the bit ike It is not necessary to drop the codes into the selected area You may drop the codes anywhere inside the primary document pane In Vivo Coding Use in vivo coding when the text itself contains a useful and meaningful name for a code In vivo coding creates a quotation from the selected text AND uses the selected text trimmed to 30 characters as the code name If the selected text s boundaries are not exactly what you want for the quotation modifying the quotation s spread see Modifying Textual and PDF Quotations on page 186 is often the next step after creating the in vivo code In Vivo coding can only be applied to textual primary documents To create an In Vivo code Mark the text passage that you want to use as an in vivo code Bear in mind that the code name is created from the text selection s first 30 characters The term in vivo in this Click the In Vivo coding button or choose Cobina In Vivo Covina from the context stems menu from grounded d T theory which If needed change the newly created quotation s boundaries Modifying draws the Textual and PDF Quotations on page 186 for details researcher s attention to In Vivo coding via drag amp drop expressions used by the F Mark the text passage that you want to use for In Vivo coding interviewees themselves Open the Code Manager ATLAS ti 6 USER
92. codes this also counts as a single co occurrence However in the cell drop down list you will find both quotations In fact there are currently no means to discriminate between a single quotation s strong co occurrence and the weak case for two quotations in close proximity The drop down list will display an ordered list of all quotations for all co occurrence events for the pair of codes Take a look at figure 205 above Quotation 11 34 and quotation 11 35 the two codes for reasons suspected are embedded within the larger segment quotation 11 164 coded with name of the suspect Cohen This is shown by the quotation references and if you look at the quotation in the context of the data see figure 206 below The references indicate that the quotes are from a PDF document and can be found on page 7 Quotation 11 35 starts at character 1 and ends at character 196 Quotation 11 34 starts at character 941 and ends at character 1379 Quotation 11 164 starts at character 1 and and at character 1379 If you want to read more on quotation references see page 184 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 305 n last End local has tt X name of suspect Cohen 38 reason suspected behavioral clues he Crimes a RA nuc 11 35 Zohen was used at 7 196 whose names the United States dentity was time for syphilis hers believe that ng man coming M ca 11 164 7 1379 e tendencies w
93. contain images this will increase the size of the HU file considerably ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT 119 Team Capability You can use this scenario when working in teams Then you need to copy the HU file containing all embedded documents and send it or give it to team members The work of the various team members can later be combined by merging the various copies of the HU If you use this scenario for a team project modifying documents is NOT possible If documents are edited you will end up with various versions of them after the merge process The modified versions can only be added to the project but not merged with the original version See Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 171 Project Setup This is how it works you generate a new empty text document within ATLAS ti and then you copy and paste the contents that you want to analyze into it Open ATLAS ti and select the main menu option Documents Assicn New Text DOCUMENT Enter a name for the document into the window that opens The document is loaded in edit mode Copy the text you want to analyze e g from Word and paste it into the primary document Save the document and leave edit mode Click on the Edit button and select the option Save ano Leave Enit Monet Save Only N Discard Chang and Leave Edit Mode Discard Changes Only Figure 57 Save the content of the newly created internal document and quit edit mode
94. converted to association anchors The connected audio file is also imported To import an f4 transcript Store the f4 transcript s and the associated audio file s into one common folder See Scenario 1 recommended Working with One Project Folder for Single Users and Teams on page 114 Do not open or edit the f4 transcripts in MSWord When saving the transcript in Word the time markers used as association points in ATLAS ti may be corrupted Also do not change the file names If you do open the transcript in f4 again and re associate it with the renamed multimedia file Select the main menu item A Docs Fite Import F4 Document A file browser opens Browse to the location where the transcript is stored select it and click on the open button The associated multimedia file is automatically recognized when both files are stored in the same folder If not the file browser opens again and you can select the multimedia file A number of things happen now probably without you noticing it The f4 transcript is added as an internal document The multimedia file is assigned as an external document A new association is created in the Association Editor the two documents are added to this association and the f4 time markers are converted to anchors f4media Just like with f4audio ATLAS ti also imports f4media directly Unlike f4audio f4media does not contain references to the original audio or video document Hence anoth
95. defines a standard way to add markup to documents O y o Figure 308 XML is a uiniversal data interchange format allowing programs to exchange data E If you create an XML output file it can be read by other applications that support XML One main advantage is that the application can define autonomously and completely detached from any display information contained in the document what parts of the structure are to be displayed and what the display should look like This is commonly achieved with the help of so called style sheets Style sheets are a way of prescribing how the content of your XML source file should be rendered This can range from very simple layout commands show all elements of type X in red to quite complex programming logic create an entire website in which each element of type X displays its sub content on a single page along with navigation layout interactive elements ATLAS ti already comes with a number of such style sheets for you to use but also to explore and potentially to expand on by copying and extending their functionality for your specific purposes Once you understand the principle you will see what an enormously powerful and flexible tool has been put at your disposal with these little programs All style sheets are written in XSLT a special language designed for transforming XML content and maintained by the World Wide Web Consortium W3C See also http www atlasti co
96. edit the same document at two different locations one version this includes the coded version as well is lost See Editing Primary Documents on page 136 If you want the benefits of working with rtf files but don t want team members to edit the files set the rtf files in the Windows File Manger to read only file properties Merging A Task for the Project Administrator The project administrator merges the sub projects according to previously agreed time intervals e g in the evenings first thing in the morning every Friday etc If documents are not edited Team members only need to upload or send their HU file f team members have uploaded their HU files to the shared drive the project administrator can start with the merging process right away on the shared drive f team member send their HU files via email then the project administrator needs to save all HUs file to the project folder on his or her computer or on the shared drive before merging Depending on the way the work is distributed the merge strategy may vary See Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 171 for more detail After merging the project administrator saves the new Master HU For team members to easily see which is the newest version the date can be added to the file name All old versions Master and sub HUs can be moved to a backup folder G Master project ABC August 25 2011 hpr6 Figure 91 Master project file afte
97. exported as this potentially results in very large outputs To export the list of co occuring codes select Copes Output Print Co OCCURRING CODES Next you are asked whether to include the quotation lists ID plus name of the quotation F Next select the output destination Editor File Printer ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 310 INVESTIGATION 4 0 2 date of murder 13 0 1 role of the media aiding investigation 3 0 1 investigation doubts 12 0 7 investigation stolen evidence 4 0 2 investigation suspected by whom 37 0 4 investigation theory by M Fido 4 0 3 Jack the Ripper legend 11 1 2 letter authenticity 6 0 2 murder profiling 16 0 3 role of the media facilitating free riding 1 0 2 investigation stolen evidence 4 0 2 investigation doubts 12 0 2 Jack the Ripper legend 11 1 1 investigation suspected by whom 37 0 28 name of suspect 28 0 22 name of suspect Cohen 6 6 3 pa suspect Fei Figure 216 List of co occuring codes in rtf format Excel quantitative You can either export the frequency counts of the c coefficient If the c coefficient is activated then the coefficient is included in the output if not the Excel table shows the frequency of coccurrence By To create an Excel table of either the frequency counts of the c coefficients click in the Excel button in the too
98. from a variety of applications like Word Excel and PowerPoint can be embedded within a PD s data source In fact objects can be embedded in any rich text available in an HU including memos and comments In Place Activation and Editing Embedded objects can be edited like an Excel table or played a video clip without leaving the HU Depending on the object s features the toolbars and menus of the original application can be directly accessed within the ATLAS ti windows For example if you insert an Excel table as an embedded object and double click on it the ATLAS ti main menu and toolbar are replaced ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EDITING PRIMARY DOCUMENTS 142 by the Excel menu and toolbar All Excel functions can be used to modify and work on the embedded table This is called In place activation or editing If you don t have Excel on your computer all you will see is the image of the table but it will not be activated When activating an embedded object it might not open in place but in its original application in a separate window This behavior depends on the embedded object itself and is outside the control of ATLAS ti ma n m 7 5 E oa Trote formateren mog Fem aia SA id ES 5 Snar k z embedded in the ATLAS ti interface li penal kilar E jack the Ripper legenit nee more leas thar fu Figure 71 Activated embedded object How to Embed an Object There are several ways to embed an ob
99. hand side To reload a PD select it from the drop down list by holding down the Ctrl key OR select the menu option Documents MisceLLANEOUS Export SPECIAL T y A 23 1 Hamburg Germany 53 32 44 59 N 9 59 40 57 E injected ATLAS ti d 23 2 London Eye GB 51 30 11 80 N 0 711 76 W j eh placemark 4 23 29 00 N 2 17 39 32 E Figure 112 The ATLAS ti placemark shows the location of the quotation within the GE map Displaying Google Earth quotations The hierarchy of the elements under temporary places in GE resembles the structure of the HU At the top you see an ATLAS ti root folder for each HU in the session Below this folder the name of the HU is repeated and all its ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 196 Google Earth PDs and quotations are created as GE features If you write a comment for a GE quotation or document it will be shown as well Clicking on a quotation s placemark in GE will show a balloon description with meta information like its codes or memos If you have written a comment for the GE quotation it can be shown as well v Places E Roter Platz Moskau Russland a al Mount Saint Helens USA E Ehemaliger Republikpalast Bagdad Irak 7 Manhattan Island USA E Verbotene Stadt Peking China El Reichstag Berlin Deutschland a El Google Campus USA avs Temporary Places VIS ATLAS Google Earth quotations El V amp y G
100. in ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 154 Select Extras Login ATLAS ti Login ATLAS ti User Account team v Automatic Login Cancel ATLAS ti WIN 6 2 Build 26 Figure 79 Login Window F Select a user account from the drop down list Password Note that the password field is grayed out and that you are not required to enter a password If you do want to password protect your user account you need to change the relaxed user management setting see page 156 To set a password for the HU see page Access Rights for the HU below Automatic Login If you are the only person working at this particular computer or on a public computer using a personal Windows user account then the automatic login can remain activated This means the current log in name is also used for the next sessions If more than one user works on the same computer then the automatic log in should be deactivated If deactivated the login window pops up upon start up and the user is prompted to log in Access Rights for the HU To change access rights for a HU choose the option Extras CHANGE ACCESS RIGHTS from the main menu Four options are offered Public read only this choice lets all other users load and view the Hermeneutic Unit it may even be edited e g for training purposes but it cannot be saved to disk Public read amp write default permits other users to have t
101. in the Excel table If you turn single or multiple choice questions into codes you later need to do some automatic coding based on the response choices available in the questionnaire Always remember that ATLAS ti is not a software for analyzing statistical data although it is possible to add information from traditional quantitative questions It might also be a good idea to be already acquainted with the ATLAS ti analysis tools like the query tool and its scope function Query Tool page 268 the co occurence table explorer Co occurrence Tools page 299 and the codes primary documents table Codes Primary Documents Cross Tabulation page 311 before preparing the Excel table for import A general recommendation is to include the following variables from the online survey Variables describing the respondents i e the classical demographic variables like age group gender profession educational level income groups etc Turn those variables into PD families Responses to open ended questions Turn those into coded segments Selected other variables like answers to single or multiple choice questions that are important in relation to analyzing the open ended questions Preparing an Excel Table for Import The following table shows the list of all available prefixes that you can to add to the column headers in Excel in order for ATLAS ti to interpret the cells in various ways Prefixes and their interpr
102. it would display the full set retrieved by the original query To accomplish this task a suppressor code is created which refers to the quotations removed from the hit list Example The original query All quotations coded with Sanity or Health Sanity OR Health yields 4 quotations 1 1 1 2 1 3 and 3 1 From the hit list quotation 1 1 and 1 3 are removed The query is now modified by creating a ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 286 Super codes cannot used for manual coding new suppressor code Q1 referencing 1 1 and 1 3 The original query is modified as follows Sanity OR Health AND NOT Q1 And returns exactly what you want quotations 1 2 and 3 1 Both the Super Code s and the suppressor code s automatically created comment reflect their mutual dependency A suppressor code cannot be deleted before the referring Super Code is deleted What You Cannot do with Super Codes As Super Codes are not directly associated with quotations certain restrictions apply Coding The most important constraint is that you cannot associate them with quotations directly Therefore Super Codes are not presented when doing code by list and drag amp drop onto data selections is prohibited Merging Code Merge operations including Super Codes are also not possible Prevent Cycles If you created a Super Code whose query contains a reference to a code family you cannot assign th
103. killer It did contain information that was compelling enough to lead investigators to publish a facsimile the postcard mentions that two victims were killed very close to one another double event this time Elizabeth Stride and Catherine Eddowes we both killed in the early morning of 30 September and part of Eddowes ear was found detached at the crime scene as a result of facial mutilations thal the killer performed Some authors have argued that the letter was mailed before the murders were publicised making it unlikely that a hoaxer would have such knowledge of the crime however the letter was postmarked more than 24 hours after the killings took place long after many details were known by journalists and residents of the area Police officials later claimed to have identified a specific journalist as the author of this message and earlier Dear Boss letter Though many letters claiming to be from the killer were posted at the time of the Ripper murders the From Hell letter is widely considered by mam Ripper researchers to be one of only a few reasonable candidates to possibly be authentic writing received from the serial killer Modern scholars are divided on which if any of the letters should be considered genuine but the Dear Boss letter is one of three named most pu quus dps appe rni ssa qi Figure 307 Quotation output excluding meta information The Memos Output Submenu List of Memos Prints a l
104. link Code reason suspected attention seeking Code Link ASSO Rename Display Comment Display Coma Edit Comment Edit Comment Flip Link Open Network amp Cut Link Import Neighbors Display Relation Import Cooccurring Change Relation Remove from View Delete Node Cut Link List Quotations Figure 240 Context menus To execute node actions per double click Position the mouse pointer over a node F Double click the left mouse button The table below describes the specific actions launched for the different node types If a comment or a memo s text pops up you can click inside the pop up window to open a text editor ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 337 Families Displays the description comment for the family Network Views Displays the description comment for the Network View Hold down the Ctrl key to open this Network View in another Network Editor Saving a Network View All links that you create are saved as soon as you save the HU file You only need to save a network view if you want to preserve the layout i e the way you have arranged the nodes within the editor If you do not save a particular view you can always open up a network view on an object again and ATLAS ti will arrange the objects according to the default or user defined layout directions For first class relations the user can defined preferred layout directions see the section on the The Relation E
105. map gt E 3 d discusses 13 38 Quotation 19 1 Display Quotation Info Hyper Link 16 5 EXPANDS Rename I Comment Edit Format Insert 1 T segoe Ur 10 P Edit Comment gt DB Se ee 1077 Open Network Here you can explain why you linked the two quotation Unlink Display in Context LE ee Flip Link Change Link Relation Figure 278 Commenting on a link To edit a hypertext link comment using the Hyperlink Manager Open the Hyperlink Manager via Networks Hyper Link Manacer from the HU Editor s main menu F Select a hyperlink Edit the comment in text pane below the link list or open a text editor by clicking the Editor button ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 371 9 Hyper Link Manager stage II 62 hyperlinks E UU Editor button _ pio kor Source Relation Target E Por Mary Jane Kelly live link GE 15 5 Dorset Street Site of fifth murder El 9 16 1 Berner Street 3 murder explained by 8 1 Elizabeth Stride e 116 3 Hanbury Street 2 murder discusses 13 38 3_The Ripper Revealed mp3 P 16 4 Mitre Square 4 murder explained by 9 3 Catherine Eddowes 33 16 5 Dorset Street 5 murder expands 19 1 Site Second Murder Po 16 5 Dorset Street 5 murder live link GE 15 5 Dorset Street Site of fifth murder 17 1 Picture Object expands 5 3 At about 6 40 in the early morning j Here you can
106. means to make such references more flexible This way of treating files results in the following benefits The size of a PD does not affect the size of the HU to which it is assigned This makes it possible to work with potentially large data sets and files Imaging that video files are imported This would very quickly blow up the size of the HU Asingle data source file can be used by more than one HU It may even be assigned to the same HU multiple times Team members can share data files Changes to data sources editing are broadcast to ALL HUs that use the files keeping everyone up to date Starting with Version 6 2 the possibility to work with internal documents was introduced as a new functionality If you only want to analyze 20 or 30 transcripts then this might be an option to consider See Scenario 3 Working with One Project File for projects that use text files exclusively on page 118 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA MANAGEMENT IN ATLAS TI 106 Referencing a Common Procedure ATLAS ti organizes projects into different referenced files This is a common procedure for many professional applications when things get large or complex Two well known examples for systems of referenced files are discussed in this section Example 1 The World Wide Web Way When you click on a link in a Web page your browser loads and displays the linked page target A Web link is really nothing but a reference to anot
107. modified by this procedure A new paragraph was added between paragraph 4 and 5 in the original document As a consequence all quotations that referenced paragraph 5 and beyond needed to be updated to take into account their new position The quotation starting at paragraph 5 before the editing procedure and its associated code have shifted to paragraph 6 A word of caution is in order Even though a number of safeguards are built into the software to prevent misaligned codes or other nuisances after an editing session it is still a good idea to know how ATLAS ti handles edited PDs and to give some thought to the question of how to manage all documents related to an ATLAS ti project see also Project Planning and Setup on page 113 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EDITING PRIMARY DOCUMENTS 137 JACK THE RIPPER Jack the Ripper is a pseudonym given to an unidentified serial killer active in the largely impoverished Whitechapel area and adjacent districts of London England in late 1888 The name originated in a letter sent to the London Central News Agency by someone claiming to be the murderer he victims were women earning income as prostitutes Most victims throats were slit after which the bodies were mutilated The removal of internal organs from three of the victims led some officials at the time of the murders to propose that the killer possessed anatomical or surgical knowledge Newspapers whose circu
108. new name e g hermencr_2 hdb Fires Save as Make the desired changes and save the new data base When you start ATLAS ti the next time the default user data base hermencr hdb is loaded To load the newly created user data base select Fite Loan DATABASE Relaxed User Management The default setting is relaxed user management This feature removes the password requirement for user accounts The default setting can be changed by editing the central configuration file for ALL users ATLAS INI This file can be found in the common application data folder You need Windows administrator rights to be able to modify this file To access the file for modification F Select Extras Exptorer Common APPLICATION Data Make a backup copy of ATLAS INI file Open it with a plain text editor such as Windows Notepad Look for the section lan and set the variable relaxedUserManagement to either enabled or disabled If relaxed user management it disabled users need to enter their account password when logging in Settings in ATLAS INI affect all clients in a networked environment For any changes in ATLAS INI to take affect ATLAS ti has to be restarted ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 157 Team Scenario 1 The team is sharing the same data source files on a shared drive In the scenario depicted below four persons let s call them Tom Peter Mary and Paul all access the same data source f
109. non synchronous mode the documents are independent from each another Moving around in either one of the documents does not affect the other When you switch to synchronization mode associated documents display synchronously i e they are positioned next to each other Since synchronous playback is not useful or desired in all situations synchronization mode can be switched on and off The non synchronous mode is particularly important for setting anchor points In synchronous mode associated multimedia documents follow the movements of the mouse cursor This makes positioning anchors difficult In non synchronous mode it is however still possible to click on an anchor in the Association Editor and jump to the associated data segment Activating and Deactivation Synchronous Mode Synchronous mode can be enabled and disabled via the main menu entry A Docs Synchro Moone and via the F3 key In the Association Editor synchronous mode can be selected via the menu item Association or the Synchro button in the tool bar ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 98 Working with Synchronous Mode Moving the mouse cursors in the text or clicking a text passage causes associated multimedia documents to be repositioned Click F4 to start playback at this position The opposite case i e moving the cursor in the multimedia document causes no cursor change in the text document This would hamper your text work However syn
110. of a and b n_a 1 n_b 1aand beach code exactly one quotation c 1 14 1 1 1 Such a scenario results in the maximum co occurrence of 1 Case 2 q1 is coded with both codes a and b the overlapping quotation q2 is coded with b Figure 209 Out of range example 2 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 307 n ab 2 q1 alone counts for a co occurrence event and the overlapping q1 q2 for another na 1 nb 2 c 2 1 2 2 2 This results in a value of twice the allowed maximum Thus the C index is not appropriate to correctly represent co occurrence in redundantly overlapping texts If the c coefficient exceeds 1 you need to do some cleaning up and eliminate the redundant codes ATLAS ti currently does not correct such redundancies automatically Correcting the redundant overlaps could for example look like this gi ab q2 b q1 2 ab Figure 210 Out of range example 2 normalized We get three quotations q1 coded with a and b q1 2 coded with a and b q2 coded with b nab 2 na 2 nb 3 c 2 2 3 2 2 3 0 67 The result is within the allowed range and it correctly takes into account that of the three possible co occurrence events only two apply To detect and correct redundant coding select Toots Copincs Anatyzer See page 381 Colored Circles Circles with different colors are painted into a cell s upper right corner when certain conditions apply 12 0 23
111. of documents that are not RTF To be able to utilize such documents without having to convert them to RTF ATLAS ti uses converters installed on your system as part of the basic Windows or Office installation In case you cannot load a Word file and you see the message converter missing on your screen then you need to download the latest doc x rtf conversion pack and install it You find conversion packs online free of charge Limitations of working with doc or dox files Doc and docx files need to be converted to rich text every first time they are loaded in any work session If the documents are short you probably don t notice anything because it is quite fast If you work with longer documents may take a few seconds before the document is loaded Doc and Docx files cannot be edited as they are converted on the fly during the process of loading Thus you want to edit documents originating from Word WordPerfect etc you need to convert them to rich text from within their original application before assigning them to an HU If working on a number of different computers different converters may produce different results This can even though very rarely result in misaligned codes ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 75 Save your documents in rich text format rtf prior to assigning them to an ATLAS ti HU Plain Text Of course plain unformatted text documents can always be used includ
112. open each individual HU for synchronization If this is not done prior to merging ATLAS ti will request synchronization during the merge process Depending on the way the work is distributed the merge strategy may vary See Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 171 for more detail After merging the project administrator saves the new Master HU For team members to easily see which is the newest version the date can be added to the file name see figure 87 As some or all data source files were modified by one or more team members the project administrator can a store the new project folder on a shared drive or b send the new project folder as WinZip or WinRar file to team members or c send a copy bundle file Tasks of team members after merging Either copy the latest version of the project folder from the shared drive If a shared drive is not available the project administrator sends a WinZip WinRar or a copy bundle file of the newest project version This file needs to be unpacked or installed see Install a Bundle on page 131 The old project folder can be deleted see Backup all below Rename the new Master HU file contained within the new project folder by adding your name or initials to the file name Continue to work on the project If only the project administrator is allowed to edit documents Team members only need to upload or sent their HU file ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT
113. or PD 9 or PD 10 PFI VARIABLE LABELS PF1 PF Description of Victims Missing Values Missing values are only computed for scaled variables A sequence of blanks depending on the format width of the variable is inserted in the data matrix for any missing value Creating SPSS Output From the HU editor s main menu select Exrras Export ro SPSS The Send Output to dialog window opens Select a target location Next the SPSS Job Generation Window opens see Figure 310 ES SPSS Job Generation Specily Properties kea File Creation Use separate data file Check Separate Data File when the data matrix is to be stored in a separate file in the same directory as the syntax file DATA LIST FILE DAT Create a fresh data file during next rui Check when data quotations codes codings has changed since last run Value Separator The single character used to separate a code name from its value part as interpreted by SPSS e g Horror 3 Create task section PROCESS IF and DESCRIPTIVES Create SAVE OUTFILE instruction Uses the SPS job file name ok cancel hee Figure 320 Property window for SPSS job Use separate file When checked the data matrix is written to a separate file This is mandatory if the size of the matrix exceeds a certain size SPSS cannot handle large data sets within a syntax file For regular size projects leave this option unchecked Spec
114. output quotations and there is at least one comment ATLAS ti asks you whether comments should be included in the output As above you can use the Quotation List output option from the Copes Output menu Coding Google Earth documents Coding Google Earth quotations is similar to coding audio or video quotations Open the Quotation Manager To make it a bit easier to select a quotation set a filter for the currently loaded Google Earth document Quotations Fitter SeLecreo PD Open the Code Manager and drag and drop a code from the Code Manager onto the quotation in the Quotation Manager or vice versa You can also right click on the quotation in the Quotation Manager and select other coding options from the context menu ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 214 When applying a code the quotation count behind the code name increases by one This is all you can see as there is no margin area for Google Earth documents Reviewing Google Earth quotations You can review video quotations via the Quotation Manager or by double clicking on a code that contains GE quotations in the Code Manager or via the Places pane in the GE editor window Unlinking codes Unlinking a code from a GE quotation currently only works via a network view Select a GE quotation in the Quotation Manager and click on the Network View button in the tool bar or right click and select Open Network View Proceed with unlinking
115. pane located below the list pane displays the comment or in the case of memos the text body All text panes are Rich Text compatible The Split Bar The relative size of the list and comment pane can be modified by dragging the split bar between the two panes The cursor changes when the mouse moves over the split bar You can re size the adjacent panes by dragging the split bar to the desired position The Status Bar The status bar s fields display from left to right the number of objects the selected object the filter and the sort option Figure 16 Status bar of primary document manager The status bar above indicates that the Primary Document Manager lists 12 documents none of the PDs is currently selected The filter is set to display only documents from the PD family Investigation and items are sorted by ID For additional information about how to use the status bar for sort and filter related procedures see Sorting and Filtering on page 384 The Pop Up Menus The list and text panes offer context sensitive pop up menus The list pane s context menu contains a portion of the commands available from the main menu for the selected objects The text pane s menu offers standard commands for editing and formatting View Menu View Options are the same for all Object Managers Choose between viewing large icons small icons a list of items or a list of items plus additional information in details view The Single
116. pane at the bottom of the Relation Editor In order to save the new relation select Fire Save from the Relation Editor menu A file dialog window opens The suggested file name is default rel It is recommended to use this file as your standard repository for relations It is possible to create different sets of relations by entering a new file name see Managing Relations below Managing Relations Using the Relation Editor different sets of relations can be created and stored in separate files using Fue Save Retations For instance you could have a set of relations related to argumentation theory or a set based on Grounded Theory relations When starting ATLAS ti the default relation set is loaded i e the file default rel If you have created a new set and stored it in a new REL file you need to load it after starting ATLAS ti To do so open the Relation Editor and choose Fite Loap Retations This adds the new relation set to the already loaded default set If you want to delete relations from the default set or from any newly created set select a relation in the Relation Editor and choose the menu option Fite Derete Retation When you have removed all unwanted relations and want to make the changes permanent you need to save the set select Fite Save RELATIONS Cosmetics Network Display Properties There are numerous options available to alter the appearance of nodes links and even the background
117. periods in a persons life and then did some more fine grained coding within these time periods Then the WITHIN operator comes in handy The same applies when working with pre coded survey data ATLAS ti pre codes your questions then you do some further coding This enables you to ask for instance for all quotations coded with topic x WITHIN question 5 Adjacency Operators The distance operators describe a sequence of disjoint quotations The maximum distance may be specified Possible base units are characters and paragraphs for text milliseconds for audio files frames for video data and pixels for images E FOLLOWS A FOLLOWS B retrieves all quotations coded with A that follow quotations coded with B G E PRECEDES A PRECEDES B retrieves all quotations coded with A followed by quotations coded with B Adjacency Settings To set the distance click on the Adjacency Operator Settings button Then select a base unit and specify the maximum distance ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 277 Infix notation good for reading Postfix notation good for clicking Base Unit Multiplier Text 25 chars Base Unit Multiplier Audio 500 ms Base Unit Multiplier Video 1 frames Base Unit Multiplier Images 10 pixel Figure 172 Adjacency operator settings The Co occurrence Operator Co occurrence is essentially a short cut for a combination of all
118. problem are colored red This indicates a problem with editing You have either modified the document outside of ATLAS ti or have lost or misplaced the log file that is created when editing a document inside of ATLAS ti Rule No 2 Never delete modify or move the auxiliary log file page 140 PDs with an inaccessible data source file are colored If this happens you have either moved the documents to a different location or have renamed them Look at the column Origin in the Pdocs Manager to see where the HU looks for the document For further information see The ATLAS ti Referencing Model page 105 PDsthat can be loaded but are loaded via the fallback path are shown in a dark red color The fallback path is either the HU or the TBPATH See Special Paths page 108 It is advisable to optimize that path settings when this occurs Documents Dara Source Manacement Optimizes Parus The PD Manager Toolbar The toolbar is a convenient alternative to selecting procedures via the main menu The Optimize Parus and the Accessisiiry Report options from the Data Source Management sub menu have only an effect on the currently selected ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 55 document if you select them in the PD Manager When selecting these options from the main menu they are applied to all documents Figure 17 PD Manager toolbar From left to right Assign a new document Toogle The windows e
119. procedures are initiated first Path Mapping is tried then Fallback e Ifa PD s data source cannot be loaded ATLAS ti inspects the mapping file to find a valid substitution for the path that is causing the error e If a mapping file is found and a mapping exists for the original path the program tries to load the file from an alternative path If this does not produce a valid path then the fallback paths are checked which are the HUPATH or the TBPATH If even this last attempt to load the file fails you will see an error message A redirected PD is indicated as such in the status bar at the bottom of the screen Figure 59 Entry in the status bar if a file is redirected Redirection is also displayed in the Document Manager s Location column It shows where a data source file was actually found Origin Location C Users Susanne Organisation Desktop Manifest Oberservational notes rtf lt HUPATH gt Oberservational notes rtf Figure 60 Redirected path information in the Primary Document Manager In the above example the file Observational notes rtf was assigned using an absolute path references C Users etc This was later changed This file and the HU file were moved into a common folder Therefore the file can now be access via the HUPATH If selecting the optimize paths option the reference shown in the column Origin will be changed to lt HUPATH gt Redirection should be used with
120. quotation bar in the margin area Coded quotations can be retrieved by double clicking on an associated code see Code Manager on page 59 for detail Quotations can also be activated from the results pane of the Query Tool see Output of Query Results on page 281 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 186 XX Code Manager HU Jack the Ripp Codes Edit Miscellaneous Output View 502a Qs Corr Name M date of murder 13 0 amp historic context 4 0 E Y amp name of suspect 28 0 hen 6 6 E211 163 David Cohen David Cohen 1865 1889 was a Polish J 6 2948 6 3 11 164 coincided with the end of the murders Described a 7 1 7 1379 13 21 3 The Ripper Revealed mp3 0 04 50 82 0 01 31 34 13 27 3 The Ripper Revealed mp3 0 07 16 10 0 00 07 40 13 34 3 The Ripper Revealed mp3 0 09 58 49 0 00 16 34 M investiga Y amp investigation theory by M Fido 4 0 Figure 105 Activating quotations via its code m A quotation can be activated and displayed from virtually any browser displaying quotations drop down list Object Manager Network Editor Object Crawler Object Explorer etc Modifying Textual and PDF Quotations This feature lets you change the boundaries start and end position of a quotation Activate the quotation if not already selected Select a data segment that you actually want to use as this quotati
121. quotations The Object Crawler Use the Object Crawler to search for text and patterns in HUs PDs and all other entities that make up an HU The search can be restricted to certain facets like name author date comments and content Regular expressions GREP as well as Category Search can be used as search expressions see GREP Search on page 229 and Category Search on page 226 Unlike the Text Search tool the Object Crawler can search through all objects and fields that contain text The Text Search tool only searches primary text documents However it finds all occurrences of the entered search term s and highlights a match at its original location The Object Crawler stops at the first occurrence in an object and highlights the hit in the results pane of the Object Crawler window How To Use the Crawler A Crawler search is a three step procedure starting with entering a query and specifying the scope e g name comment etc and then selecting the object classes to be included in the search and as the third step displaying the results zx From the main menu select Toots Ossect CrawLer or click the Object gt Crawler button in the main toolbar The Object Crawler dialog starts with a page to enter the query and specify the scope ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SPECIAL TOOLS 374 6 3 ATLAS ti Object Crawler B Enter a search term Define Query Select Objects Disp Query
122. redraw of items looking like items are missing Select Extras Prererences GENERAL Prererences and check the option Increase List Refresh This will result in more complete redraws but also increases screen flicker No Buttons in Main Toolbar This problem has been reported by some users As far as we know this problem only appears on some computers when working under Windows XP in Classic Mode user interface elements look as in previous Windows versions The workaround switch to XP mode Internal Error Message Once in a while you might see a message like the following ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL APPENDIX 435 Warning ATLAS ti Internal Error Keyboard Interrupt When reporting this error to bugsreport atlasti com please write down what you were actually doing right now For instructions on how to report an error please consult chapter Trouble Shooting in the ATLAS ti manual or online help Figure 332 ATLAS ti Internal Error Although this is by no means always a dramatic issue you should contact support via the email address provided in the message or through the Support Center at http support atlasti com section Bugs System Report if the same error happens repeatedly When you do it is essential that you supply a detailed description of what you were doing at the time this error occurred coding a text passage deleting a memo etc and what the error looked like any error messages you see We need
123. released lac 3 amp INVESTIGATION 4 0 38 investigation_doubts 12 0 EC investigation stolen evidence 4 0 d investigation_suspected by whom 37 0 Figure 196 Context menu of the codes pane The context menu for the term stack pane resembles the stack function buttons described above ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 298 Reason for discharge Display Term AND name juspect Fei Swap Push 4 Undo Redo Clear Stack 3 Recalc Figure 197 Context menu of the term stack pane The results pane s menu offers information about the neighbors codes other quotations memos embedding embedded or co occurring codes of a selected hit A further option offers the possibility to remove the selected hit from the results list to create a report or to create a PD family based on all PDs included in the results Id Name Size Start Density 3 88 A man named James Thomas 1 36 3 p 3351 11 3 He was cleared of suspicier lt G3 11 4 Kosminski does meet so US E3 11 5 Montague John Druitt 15 A 11 6 On 1 September the day af 117 However others think him ES 11 14 As he was still imprisoned a 11 16 The Sun newspaper sugges 11 28 His accounts about what Ke 11 32 He was named as a suspect 0 186 6 2759 2 4 m j b 1587 RY Display Neighbors Embedding codes Embedded codes Co occurring Codes Remove from Hit List Create
124. result when using the built in tool for a single PD ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 266 3 ATLAS ti Word Cruncher 2 0 Figure 164 Word Cruncher output when using the internal tool When all words are counted a message pops up informing you that the Excel file can now be opened and where it is stored si worse sisted Created a matrix of 3 522 words by 12 PDs 42 264 cells Saved as file Jack the Ripper_stage I 62_WPDMat xls in folder C Users Susanne Documents Scientific Software ATLASti WordCruncherResults Ckick OK to open file in Excel Cox Figure 165 Wordcrunch finished Of course you need to have Excel installed to be able to see the result ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 267 2 o o b o o o e B le 0 3 o v o o 9 1 H 1 c c D A MERRY b gt gt o o o o e 1 0 o 3 b 11 4 o o o o o o o e AARON o 5 o o o o o 0 a 0 7 ABBERLINE 9 1 o 9 T 2 2 c 2 c c 4 ABSERLINES o E o o o 0 o e 1 o o 3 ABDOMEN o t o 2 i o 1 4 1 0 6 10 ABDOMINAL 0 1 b o o o 1 1 0 o 11 ABOUCTED D E o o 9 o o B c c c 12 ASF o E o o o o o o 9 1 o 11 ABAITY o o o o 0 0 o 0 1 0 0 14 ABE 0 o b o o 1 o 1 o 0 0 15 ABORTION o o o o 7 t c i o o 16 ABORTIONS o gt o o o o o o 1 e o 17 ABOUT b 13 3 10 4 3 2 13 7 2 o 14 ABOVE o o o o 1 o 1 2 1 o 1 19 ABRAHAM D o o o T e B T 2 c c Y ARASON o EJ o o o 1 o
125. segments Quotations for a single code or a combination of codes quotations displayed in the context of their primary documents or quotations sent to a report The simplest retrieval is by activating a code in the Code Manager with a double click Activating a quotation for a code Quotations are A straightforward method is to display quotations in context textual and activated graphical quotations will be selected in the document when activated A differently in multimedia quotation begins to play when selected context depending on When you select a code in the code drop down list or double click an item in the media type the Code Manager the following happens depending on how many quotations are coded to that code If there is only one quotation If there is only one quotation for the selected code it will be activated immediately If there are more quotations e gt Use the next and previous button in the Code Manager to browse through all quotations for a selected code If more than one quotation is associated with the code they are offered in a pop up list Selecting one of the quotations activates and displays it in context city name of victims 14 4 A fourth letter acini mec 4 0 Some sources list another letter dated 17 September 1888 i Wetter date np 14 0 a the first message to use the Jack the Ripper name YCE ES E TET e investigation doubls X
126. selected document in order to better see what is going on Quotations Fitter SeLecreo PD ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 191 primary doc title quotation name start of segment end of segment lenght of segment Sneak skip and current position preview move create quotation xim repeat mark segment end playipause mark segment start Figure 109 The multimedia control window The Multimedia Control Window The title bar displays the name of the selected primary document together with some information about the media contents e g length stereo vs mono recording quality etc Below the title bar are three info fields that display the name of the selected quotation the start and end position and its length The position data is displayed in hours minutes seconds milliseconds for video files you can also choose to display the position in frames The track bar represents the entire length of the audio or video file The slider shows the current position To navigate audio or video files you can move the track slider push the skip and move buttons or use the right and left cursor keys The toolbar provides the following options from left to right ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 192 a MA Play Pause Stop Repeat Loop Sneak Preview Move back Skip forward Selection start Selection end Clicking on this button will toggl
127. server Working on Project xy Lara hpr6 Se Ter Working on Project n E Working on Project xy Agnes hpr6 Working on Project xy Mandy hpr6 Figure 74 Editing in a team situation It is Monday morning at 9 a m Peter Tom and Agnes are currently working on the ATLAS ti project Agnes works with PD4 She reads through it codes it and writes a few memos Peter now also wants to look at the document He loads the document into his HU checks a few things and codes a few more data segments Then he continues to work on P5 Agnes continues her work on P4 While reading through it she recognizes that some places are not anonymized and wants to correct it In order to do so she enters edit mode She can however only do so if no one else is currently viewing the document If this were the case the following message pops up Please check other open HUs close all other PDs referencing this data source and try again Figure 75 Editing is only possible if no one else is viewing the document As this is not the case Agnes can enter edit mode While Agnes is editing the document Tom wants to do some work on P4 He can however not load the document Instead he sees the following message ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EDITING PRIMARY DOCUMENTS 147 f B Document Server Warning i The data source document name and path is currently modified in another HU editor While being edited a data source
128. some caution because every additional alternative to find a matching document increases the probability that you will actually end up accessing the wrong document same name different folder and different revision This is a problem if you have edited a document and saved various versions in different locations You should try to make sure that ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT If you can avoid Path Mapping altogether great But there are a few situations where it might be necessary 124 older documents are not accidentally and erroneously referenced because of too many mapping alternatives A much safer way to handle references is to change the original reference to match the actual location in other words CHANGE PATH Path Mapping Path mapping works as follows A precondition is that the user has defined path mappings using the mapping tool described below If a document reference cannot be resolved ATLAS ti looks into the mapping table for optional replacement paths for the one that does not work More than one replacement path can match a single path All replacement paths are tried in the order they were defined If a valid replacement is found it will be used Mapping affects the complete hierarchy below the map entry For instance if an invalid path z tb is mapped to c textbank path z tb projectX and then path c textbank projectX would be tried in addition unless a more restrict
129. special paths HUPATH TBPATH Pros The HU always finds its PD files as long as subfolders and files are not moved independently of the HU s folder Portability Moving projects is simple just copy the folder containing the HU file and the assigned documents Team work This is in most cases also the easiest setup when working in teams Special path TBPATH The customizable TBPATH Textbank Path has the following objectives tis the default folder opened whenever you assign documents save HUs etc e Itis a convenient location including subfolders in which to store your project s documents To emphasize that this special path is user relative it is set to the following default location after the installation of ATLAS ti TBPATH My Documents Scientific SoftwareNATLAStiNTextbank This location was selected because the My Documents folder is a location that belongs to the user currently logged in under Windows The user has all required permissions to work on items in this folder In cases where more than one user on a specific computer needs to access files from a central repository this path variable should be set to a location that is outside the user s private folder hierarchy e g C ATLASti Data The loation for the TBPATH can be set under Extras Prererences GENERAL PREFERENCES PATHS JB General Preferences General HU Editor Margin Fonts Storage Paths Te
130. that better fit your requirements different languages domains etc To manage categories three options are available Click the Options button in the Text Search window for this menu Load Categories Save Categories Ck Delete Category Figure 138 Accessing the search library in the text search tool Load Categories opens a file dialog window showing existing search library files like searchbib skt or srchbib skt If you select a library in the file dialog window the categories from that library are added to the currently loaded categories Save Categories stores the currently loaded and newly created search categories in the default library file srchbib skt or a new file If you choose a new name be sure to give the file the extension SKT as in dutch skt To clear the internal database of search categories before loading new ones use the option Delete Category This opens a multiple selection list window Choose one or more categories to be removed from the internal database of search categories You can use the standard Windows techniques for multiple selections using the Ctrl Alt or Shift keys in combination with the left mouse button GREP Search GREP is a well known tool in the UNIX environment The original GREP tool printed each line containing the search pattern hence the acronym GREP Globally look for Regular Expression and Print In ATLAS ti the results of a GREP search are not printed l
131. the basic proximity operators except FOLLOWS and PRECEDES A CO OCCURRING WITH B Find all quotations that co occur with B in whatever way The procedures used for calculating co occurrence for two codes is also used in the Network Editor when importing co occurring codes into a network view See Import Co occurring Codes on page 339 The Query Language Queries are built step by step from operands and operators using the principle of Reversed Polish Notation RPN This sounds complicated but it is actually quite easy See for example http en wikipedia org wiki Reverse Polish notation RPN invented by Polish mathematician Lukasiewicz does not require parentheses to control the priority of operators nor does it require any other characters like commas periods etc Every click produces a meaningful result and it is impossible to create syntactically wrong queries Operands First Operators Next The most important point to understand about RPN is the order in which operands and operators of a search expression are entered Using RPN operands codes code families are entered first followed by one or more operators This is an unusual method for most of us who are familiar with notations where operators are placed between the operands as in 3 5 Most calculators use this type of notation also called infix notation Two aspects must be distinguished how we read expressions and how we formulate them with a
132. the codes that you are interested in set it as filter e g Copes Fiter Fawiues gt and than run the Co occurence Tree or Table Explorer see page 300 A third option is to reduce the number of codes displayed in a Codes Primary Documents Table see page 311 by setting a Code Family as filter This is often combined with setting a PD Family as filter as well This way you export just the data you want to focus on instead of producing a large Excel table that contains all documents and all codes PD and Code Families in SPSS Jobs In addition to being used within ATLAS ti PD families as well as code families are used when creating SPSS jobs Both PD and Code Families are a way to aggregate data in SPSS see SPSS Export on page 413 for further detail ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH VARIABLES PRIMARY DOCUMENT FAMILIES 253 Memo Families Memo families are useful for sorting and filtering your written reflections about the project Memos can be separated by type such as theoretical or linguistic see Working with Memos on page 254 The procedures for creating and handling memo families resemble those for code families ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH MEMOS 254 Working with Memos Possible uses for memos To take methodological notes As a bulletin board in team projects As a project planning device As a primary document To create code lists A comment is a part of anoth
133. the entry lt HUPATH gt in front of each document if the optimization process was successful Changing Absolute Path References to the TBPATH The same principles work for documents stored in the TBPATH hierarchy This means you store your data either directly in the Textbank Folder not recommended or in subfolders within the Texbank Folder recommended The HU file is stored at a different location this can be anywhere To access the Textbank Folder select Extras Exptorer TextBank FOLDER To set the location for the Textbank Folder select Extras PREFERENCES GENERAL PrerereNnces tab Paths gt Textbank Paths Adjusting References The very concept of external references assumes that the locations of data source files are not changed after they have been assigned to the HU However some situations make it necessary to update invalid references to PDs Redirection of hanging references becomes an issue when an existing project needs to be adapted to an altered environment computer or network or if such a modification is in preparation System modifications are fairly common occurrences such as moving folders to disks with more available space or moving to a new computer altogether From your project s view this is also a modification These cases are similar in that absolute paths to documents which worked well before now no longer point to the correct document files It now becomes necessary to give these pr
134. the partial Network View are highlighted Selecting or deselecting all Nodes To select all nodes or deselect all selected nodes select Noves De Sevect ALL NoDes from the Network Editor s main menu or press Ctrl A on the keyboard Inverting the current selection To invert the current selection press Ctrl I or select Nopes Inverse SELECTION from the Network Editor s main menu This will select all unselected nodes and deselect all previously selected Moving Nodes By moving nodes to different positions you can modify an initial layout created by the automatic layout procedure For precision placement of nodes use the node alignment procedure To open it right click on the background of the network view editor and select Suow ALIGNMENT Toors Alignment illt 255 Figure 238 Alignment tools in the network view editor Do not forget to save the Network View and the HU itself at the end of the session if you want to make the new layout permanent To move a single node Move the mouse pointer onto the node to be selected F Hold down the left mouse button Drag the selected node to its new position To move multiple nodes Create a multiple selection of nodes as described above Hold down the Crret key and drag the selected nodes to their new position ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 335 To move nodes with the arrow keys Select one or more nodes using the se
135. the special lt HUPATH gt In order to be able to access the data you need to store the HU file and the documents in on common folder All following columns Enter variable names and values i e the document families into the subsequent columns Novels ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH VARIABLES PRIMARY DOCUMENT FAMILIES 249 Categorical variables For all categorical variables use a hash as the lead character as in Profession Gender etc Enter the values as string Missing values Missing values are indicated by a zero 0 and used for documents not assigned to any family If a field name or value contains characters resembling the separator for categorical variables you need to enclose the name or value with quotation marks If the HUPATH setup as the easiest and most flexible project setup suits your needs then an Excel table ready for import could look like this documents Name Hgender profession reading novels P1 case 1 rtf male teacher 0 P2 case 2 rtf male police T P3 case 3 rtf female teacher 1 P4 case 4 rtf female teacher 0 P5 case 5 rtf female police 1 Figure 152 An Excel table ready for import as PD Family table You simply enter the consecutive numbers for PDs the document names and the variables Save the table as native Excel tab delimited xls xlsx file or in csv format Open ATLAS ti From the main menu select Documents Assicn Import PD Famity Taste This option is also
136. this information to diagnose the problem but also user feedback is an integral part of ATLAS ti s evolution and improvement For more information on how to send an error report see the following section Reporting Bugs Most errors that occur during the operation of ATLAS ti are displayed and written to a special log file named ERROR LOG This text file is located in the user system directory The contents of this file can only be interpreted by the developers of the program and is of no use for others If you file a bug report you might be asked to send a system report including this file to a specified support e mail address The error report contains the following The ERROR LOG file e The System Report which you can view via Extras System Report Disptay System Report The user s configuration file USER INI The ATLAS ti configuration file ATLAS INI The list of files in ATLAS ti s program folder The list of files in the user s system folder The information in the package contains technical information needed for the technical support personnel to analyze and respond to reported problems Except for the content of the ERROR LOG the system report and two INI files no other file content is transferred To send an error report from the main menu select Extras System REPORT CREATE AND Mai Report A message informs you that the report has been created and which files it includes Click OK ATLA
137. ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 403 Style Sheets The real power of the XML standard is unleashed by applying so called style sheets In fact an entire style language the eXtensible Style Language XSL or more specifically XSLT is dedicated to creating useful little programs and even full blown applications on the basis of XML structured data You do not have to learn the XSLT language to use the XML Converter with the provided style sheets However to create your own reports browsers and converters some knowledge of the language is necessary A Hermeneutic Unit exported to XML can be converted into a wide variety of other representations by using style sheets Individual reports conversions into other programs input formats or creating clickable viewer versions of your HUs are among the options available The default XML folder browse conveniently via Extras ExPLorer XML Forner hosts some examples of such style sheets waiting to be explored or modified to suit your own needs or tastes The XML converter can be viewed as a kind of plug in interface for user written programs or macros The ATLAS ti XML Converter is a convenient tool for user created reports converters and viewers It displays all XML and XSL files located in the default XML folder If you change the default XML folder under Extras GeneraL PREFERENCES Patus and want to continue to use the provided style sheet samples you nee
138. ti Object Crawler ejl Define Query Select Objects Display Results Recale 7 matches Name Type Author Date Field Pos Size I Essay An examin Memo Susanne 20 0 content 11046 6 4 Essay Jack the Ri Memo Susanne 20 0 content 419 6 I Instructions Wor Memo Susanne 21 0 content 4462 6 mp 4 1 Jack the Ri Primary Susanne 11 0 comment 103 6 6 6 6 j P 3 1 Jack the Ri Primary Susanne 110 content 259 Ej 9 2 Victim_Cat Primary Susanne 11 0 content 2 979 E p11 3 Investigati Primary Susanne 110 content 4 2029 late 1888 The name originated in a gt letter lt sent to the London Central News Agency by someone claiming to be the murderer The victims were women earning income as prostitutes Most victims throats were slit after which the bodies were mutilated The removal of internal organs from three of the victims led some officials at the time of the murders to propose that the killer possessed anatomical or surgical knowledge Newspapers whose circulation had been growing during this era bestowed widespread and enduring notoriety on the killer because of the savagery of the attacks and the failure of the police to capture Figure 284 The Object Crawler s result pane The results list can indeed be used like an Object Manager in a variety of ways Double clicking a hit in the results list activates the object For instance doubl
139. ti desktop shortcut ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 65 Double click on an existing Hermeneutic Unit HU in the Windows Explorer Or you can create a fresh HU via a folder s context menu s New Hermeneutic Unit entry If you started ATLAS ti directly not by selecting a project you will see the ATLAS ti Welcome Wizard see below which offers four options to start a session o 3 Welcome to ATLAS ti Please choose Open Hermeneutic Unit from Picklist D Open last used Hermeneutic Unit Create a new Hermeneutic Unit Just continue E Dont display this screen again Figure 29 ATLAS ti Welcome Wizard The wizard is not displayed if you select an existing project to start the session Open Hermeneutic Unit from Picklist If you choose this option you can select from a list of recently used HUs If this is the first time you open ATLAS ti you are offered the sample projects Open last used Hermeneutic Unit loads the most recently used HU In order to start a new project select the option Create a new Hermeneutic Unit Select Just continue if you want to close the wizard and return to the HU Editor or select of the other options and click OK If you make no selection in the Wizard it will time out and close automatically after a minute You can always get it back by choosing Open WeLcomeWiz from the HU Editor Herp menu Logging In By default i e when first ope
140. to a start position on the time line Click the button Mark selection Start see figures 109 and 129 below ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 211 Position the cursor at the end point of the quotation Click on the Mark selection End button F Then click on the Create Quotation button lenght of quotation on time line ie Chapman scene of the murder_1967 wmv 0 01 04 98 CON 0 00 10 23 0 00 15 87 0 00 05 64 1 click to create quotation click to set start possum click to set end position Figure 129 Creating a video quotation A new quotation is listed in the Quotation Manager The default name for audio and video quotations is the document name Each quotation can however be renamed see Describing video quotations to improve outputs below Step 2 Code an audio or video quotation To code the video quotation drag and drop a code from the Code Manager onto the quotation in the Quotation Manager or vice versa You can also right click on the quotation in the Quotation Manager and select other coding options from the context menu When applying a code the quotation count behind the code name increases by one This is all you can see as there is no margin area yet Reviewing audio and video quotations You can review video quotations via the Quotation Manager or after retrieving them via their codes Double click on a code in the Code Manager OR Ri
141. unless you color them Code Manager Toolbar Figure 23 Code Manager toolbar From left to right Create a new code Toogle The windows either is display always on top default or is closed when you click somewhere else Open text pane for writing comments in a full fledged text editor When double clicking a code a list of linked quotations is opened Click the forward and back buttons to review the list Opena network view on the selected code Delete selected code s Create output Various View options Open the Code Family Manager Code Manager Columns Name Grounded Density Families Author Created Modified Figure 24 Code Manager Columns Name Code name e Grounded Code frequency or groundedness i e the number of quotations to which the code is applied Density Number of links to other codes Families Name of code family if the code has been added to a family Author User who created the code Created Creation date and time ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR Memo Manager Modified Date and time of last modification The Memo Manager lists the HU s memos Memos created or modfied today are listed in bold font The text pane displays the content of the selected memo Fr 4 Memo Manager HU financial crisis June 08 June 09 stage 2 coding Memos Edit Miscellaneous Output View i Ph 9 Pl x Edo t
142. user related information is removed when leaving the ATLAS ti session The lok file on the one hand provides information that the file has already been loaded once see Content Caching below and supports the editing process in team situations ATLAS ti allows more than one user to access a data source at the same time However when you switch into edit mode it might reject the editing attempt in case another user is already editing it first come first served If the other user forgets to exit edit mode left ATLAS ti running and went away on a long vacation you might be informed that User X has been editing the file for 23 days Well either this is really the case or a LOK file could not be updated or removed because of a crash during an edit session If you happen to know that there really isn t anybody editing the document you can simply delete the LOK file for the document in the project folder to gain write access to the document For more details on editing primary documents see page 136 Content Caching By default the content of PDs is cached i e kept in memory unless this option has been switched off in GENERAL Prererences The benefit of caching is that the time a document requires to be ready for use is greatly reduced whenever its content is accessed more than once e g when auto coding text passages The drawback of caching is that a larger amount of internal memory is needed when loading many large documents
143. which might in turn create performance issues on systems with insufficient memory Caching can be turned off completely but you can also empty the cache periodically by choosing menu option Documents Data Source Manacement Clear Cache With caching turned off repetitive operations like auto coding will be significantly slowed down Navigating within Primary Documents The available navigation options depend on the media type of the selected PD ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 85 Navigating within Textual Primary Documents Textual PDs allow for a variety of options to display different parts of the text You can scroll up and down using the mouse wheel The arrow keys and other navigational keys can be used to move through the text e Jump to specific line paragraph numbers using the Go ro PanacRaeH button to the left of the PD pane You may also zoom the content via the Zoom PD button in the vertical tool bar see left To reset the view to 100 hold down both SHIFT CTRL key while you click on the Zoom button You find a selection of predefined sizes in the Size tab in the bottom right of the ATLAS ti window 40056 200 150 125 15 1 50 Q Zoomin Q Zoom Out Default Figure 35 Setting the display size of primary documents Some additional notes on displaying and navigating PDF Documents You can view PDF documents page by page or select to view continuous pages If your P
144. 0 Change the width and click Apply Close the Network Preferences window ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 359 V Full image for PDs Width E Box for quotations Box for Primary Documents Box for Memos Figure 263 Preference settings for thumbnail PDs Close and reopen the Network View in order for the changes to take effect The figure below shows an example network view including thumb nail images and hyperlinks Hyperlinks are explained next see Hypertext E E e a A wa Ea Ej wem E e P cottieued LM centi row try E 3TT le 7 120 She Second Murder 3 327 See Secosd Murder 5 Pai Ste Second hunder 4 contine by jT E PLE Ste Second Murder 1 919 Ste Second Murder 2 Figure 264 Network View including thumb nail images of image PDs and hyperlinks ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 360 Hypertext A network with text or other media as nodes is often referred to as a hypertext The original sequential text is de linearized broken down into pieces that are then reconnected making it possible to traverse from one piece of data to another piece of data regardless of their original positions The procedures described so far have focused on the creation of code networks Direct linking of data segments quotations to other data segments offers similar flexibility in choosing and defining relations Almos
145. 1 and the data source e g file text 7 rtf is associated with this PD at the same time This distinction between a PD and the actual data source is explained in more detail in Data Management in ATLAS ti on page 105 More than one data source can be assigned as a PD at the same time e g by selecting multiple files in the file dialog but there is no need to assign all documents at one time You can assign more files during the course of the analytical process Bulk assigned files are listed in alphabetically order For every PD created during assignment an ID is created consisting of a prefix P and a consecutive number In addition the name of the data source file name is appended to the ID This name can be changed later for display purposes This one source multiple PDs principle is not restricted to one HU A data source can be assigned as a PD or many PDs in more than one HU This is usually the case in team scenarios Each PD however refers to exactly one data source Thus if you plan to analyze a single document source from several different perspectives there is no need to create physical copies of the document and assign each of the copies as a PD to the HU A single data source can be assigned more than once which creates as many PDs each with its own number and name but they all refer to the same data source Assigning Documents via the File Dialog To assign files opens by default on the Text
146. 13 73KB 21 08 2009 17 graphic Check whether all EM Site Second lt HUPATH gt yes 321 24KB 21 08 2009 17 graphic files can be T3 investigati lt HUPATH gt yes 519 52KB 27 06 2009 10 pdf unbundles E Exdude selected documents Status t Conflict Color Code a E No conflict detected HU will be unbundled M Existing fle can be overwri replacing existing version Unbunde Bi Version conflict detected all documents will be unbundled li Path cannot be created replacing 16 documents Fallback path used 4 d Figure 64 Copy Bundle Install window The Install Bundle dialog box looks as follows Unbundling Strategies Unbundling is the term we have adopted for unpacking or extracting the compressed archive containing the HU and its associated files at the new ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL PROJECT BACKUP AND MIGRATION 132 location The installation of a bundle on the same or a different computer can be done using two slightly different strategies Migrate and Restore Migrate Choose the The Migrate strategy assumes that the bundle is to be installed on another Migrate computer or another disk in order to resume work at this different location The strategy when target path for the HU can be freely chosen When checking for conflicts this moving projects strategy accepts that older versions of data source files are replaced by newer between two versions
147. 2011 James hpr shared drive hb GG Project ABC August 25_2011_Mary hpr6 Project ABC August 25 2011 Peter hpr G Project ABC August 25 2011 Tom hpr6 de backup_old HUs 3 Master project ABC hpr6 Project ABC James hpr6 data source files Project ABC Mary hpr Project ABC Peter hpr6 Project ABC Tom hpr6 de project folder Gi Master project ABC August 25 2011 hpr6 aj Project ABC August 25 2011 James hpr6 a Project ABC August 25 2011 Mary hpr6 aj Project ABC August 25 2011 Peter hpr Project ABC August 25 2011 Tom hpr6 subfolder 1 data source files subfolder 2 subfolder 3 Figure 84 Team scenario 1 Project files after merging Tasks of team members after merging Access the new Master HU file on the shared drive and if this was not yet done by the project administrator make a copy of this file and add your name or initials to the file name F Continue to work on the project Backup all Team members After each work session each team members copies the HU file and stores it at a secure location e g on their local drive a backup folder on the shared drive or an external device Keep three rolling copies of your backup files Project administrator The project administrator creates a copy bundle file directly after setting up the project and after each merge operation and stores it at a secure location see Create a Bundle on page 129
148. 348 User defined code colors 349 Auto Color Mode 349 O AE O NOTO NOOO 350 Display of NOGes recae cete rtm tec to C o TET HU T a ERO HC TL BI RE C HO TE C n HL E ret id 350 Node and Link Appearance 350 IN Keto A le oT mr M 350 A HH 351 Link Display 23 351 Miscellaneous Network Procedures 4352 Theory Transfer 352 Plat Cde ru 352 Semantic NEtWOrk Migration 352 To export the code network it To importa Code NE WORK cari iter eee t eie n ced i th ct trt te tea ceci Eee Dea Ge Conflict RESOLU ON P 353 Cleaning Up 353 Scaled Theory TRANSL ON 2 terrre t o end ent deeem EAEE E e dtc dou P a end 353 Merging Godes using the Network EGItOr itt ide tp rete a ir confe nit tdi ed Pei agit 353 To merge codes using the Network Editor 4353 Splitting Codes treten tte 354 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL 15 To split the previously merged code Number magic c ice eee eerie ence een teee secs ne sees ii nr 355 Network Views as Graphical Tables of Contents trente R E treten ases 358 FY Perte Xt i LE M M 360 Representing th Rhetoric of Texte ica aec peces epe A e gu as ear
149. 4 again And so on Click here to set an Pepe is anchor or press F8 file or press F4 Figure 47 Get into the rhythm F4 listen type F4 F8 F4 listen type The closer the distance between two association anchors the better will be the synchronization However it is not required to set anchors at any particular or prescribed intervals for instance at the end of every line of text You can also tell ATLAS ti to automatically insert an anchor at the end of each paragraph see below If you mark longer segments interpolation is used to synchronize Save mdi El Mode the text with the associated multimedia file Discard Changes and Edit Mode Discard Changes Only Save the text from time to time by clicking on the edit pen selecting the Save Onty option When you are finished with your transcript or want to take a break select the option Save anp Leave Epir Mone Then save the HU You can either use the functions key F4 to start and stop a recording or use a foot switch This saves about 30 of transcription time You can use any foot switch that is configurable to the F4 key see for example the web page of the developers of the free transcription software f4 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 95 Insert Anchors Automatically If you want ATLAS ti to set anchors automatically at the end of each paragraph select A Docs Text Auto Insert AncHor With Return or select this option from t
150. 5 The reference for coded images indicates the position of the quotation within the PDF file like 0422 0618 Creating and working with Textual and PDF Quotations on page 181 Audio and Video Quotations Audio and video quotations can be as short as a few milliseconds The length of a quotation is selected on a time line Segment starting points and length are displayed in the following formats milliseconds HH MM SS ms frames for videos See Creating and Working with Multimedia Quotations on page 189 GoogleEarth Quotations When creating a GE quotation you see the ATLAS ti icon on the GE map It is linked to one location and thus is different from all other types of quotations that present a range The quotation ID shows either the name of the document or the feature s name if applicable In addition the geographic reference of ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN CONCEPTS AND FEATURES Codes 30 the marked location is provided Creating and Working with Google Earth Quotations on page 194 Additional reading Working with GoogleEarth data http downloads atlasti com library Cisneros_2009 03_17 pdf The term code is used in many different ways First we would like to define what that term means in qualitative research and then in ATLAS ti Coding Objectives From a methodological standpoint codes serve a variety of purposes They capture meaning in the data They also serve as handles for specific occurrences
151. 7 8 Comment about Hanbury Street in 1967 explains X Delete QU live link GE 15 3 Hanbury Street Site of second murder QU shown in GE map 16 3 Hanbury Street 2 murder Qo P 7 2 Victim Annie Chapman scene of the murder 1967 w Speak Open MediaControl Figure 277 Checking for and jumping to hyperlinked quotations The quotation on the other end of the hyperlink is displayed in a pop up window To directly move to this quotation in context click into the pop up display or click outside the pop up to cancel Useful options for hyperlinks and quotations in the network view editor To move to the text of a quotation that appears in a network right click over the quotation node and choose Disptay in Context You are moved to the section of the Primary Document where the quotation resides To import the neighbors of a quotation Remove all The Network Editor lets you import the neighbors of selected nodes by recently choosing Import NeicHBors from the Network Editor s None menu see imported description in section Import Node Neighbors on page 339 Importing the objects with neighbors of a quotation that is part of a hypertext not only retrieves linked CTRL SHIFT Z objects of type quotations but also yields all codes memos and other quotations directly connected to it To reduce clutter by only importing neighbors that are quotations and not codes memos or documents hold down the
152. A 3 88 Aman ned James Thomas Sa 11 3 He was cleared of suspicion when 0 1 On 1 September the day after the 0 I As he was still imprisoned at the ti 0 However Sickerk reason released mix up of nan reason released never taken se reason released theory dispute S reason released theory rebutte E nm nn m m fn ot considere Figure 181 Location of super code button in the query tool Enter a name for the new Super Code or accept the default name created from the query expression Click OK The newly created Super Code immediately appears in the list of codes and can be used for new queries and Super Codes right away Its icon and code name are red f My Code Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage Il 62 E Codes Edit Miscellaneous Output View aur aoo gg X OBA 4 name of suspect 28 0 amp name of suspect Cohen 6 6 Y amp name of suspect Feigenbaum 1 0 38 name of suspect Kaminski 3 0 3 name of suspect Kelly 1 0 v name of suspect Kosmiski 8 2 name of victim 14 4 jason released alibi lack of evidence 10 0 reason released alibi reason released lack of evidence manually added comment Figure 182 Display of super code in the Code Manager ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 285 You can access and edit the query later but the not
153. A T G fit Code Code Relations Editor Sex if Hyperlink Relations Editor PES File Edit File Edit Internal 1D ID Label i Label2 Menu Relations Label 1 ASSO isass R is associated Internal ID ID Label i Label2 Menu AVOID avoids bel 1 CHANGE change change over abel 2 2 Label 1 Label 2 BE repor berichten b CONTINUE gt gt gt gt cont continued by BTP is par G is part of Label 2 CONTRA X co contradicts Mene CAUSA gt N iscauseof corr l et te 4 1 w Menu Text 4 tt Line Style Line Style Width 1 Width 1 Color Select Color Select Preferred Layout Direction Preferred Layout Direction Left gt Right Right gt Left jp n Down gt Up Left gt Right Right gt Left Ip gt Dor Doy Formal Property Formal Property Symmetric Asymmetr Transitive Symmetric Asymmetric Transitive Comment Comment Figure 248 The Code Code and the Hyperlink Relation Editors Cosmetic and descriptive as well as structural aspects of relations can be edited with the Relation Editor Cosmetics Cosmetic aspects include the label used when displaying links in a Network Editor the menu text displayed when creating a connection and the width solidity and color of the line connecting the nodes linked with this relation Preferred Layout Direction A more sophisticated cosmetic property is the preferred layout direction By using this relation characteristic t
154. AA Do tre puedes d tor EIE RI mette E EU RE aC Eee 21 The VISE Principle s te pi A Aa it epe tte abet a Pet E a sedent 21 MiSUalIZat A A Ea ES ARAE E EEOAE EE AAE AE AAEE E APEN ONETARA Ora rE EEKE AO ar SAn ai tE 21 TN EE AAA ASEE KE E EAAS ET AOE A AE ESE M 22 BTO e A A E 23 Exploration 23 Areas of AppliCatiori e teta tet nee gr de me et d er erede dio d ecd e ded de devel seaside 1 23 Teamwork Support cerchio teen ete tei t e de t n a n e td ee neri iv t c d n e Pe dent aie E a 24 Main Concepts and Features Th Hermeneutic Unt HU 4 i eas e e eee eo adequate dece en Primary Documents PD or PDoc Primary Document Families Data Attributes mene nenennrrnnnr enr r nnne trien enne 27 folileufsp tim c MT EE Quotations as Layers Typ s of QUID Text Quotationse iiin ka A eru make a cien EE avian ads Green i n ee EHE A Te Rede e o Graphic Quotations iar oina 29 PDF Quotations O 29 Audio and Video Quotations ais ies esas ster eret 29 GoogleEarth Quotations TET 29 Coding Objectlives 2 denne e Pr et tere ien t eee t di li n EH PR P n o te e M n RO oda 30 Text Search TOO iii coit ite t He tH E PO ERE EH RR PO e PETI ENTRE dates eon HR CRY RR E e evens PR E dels o eade 30 AAA E 30 NetWork VIGWS 3 3 e S
155. ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 271 Operators Three sets of operators are available They are located within the toolbar at the left edge of the Query Tool Boolean operators allow combinations of keywords according to set operations They are the most common operators used in information retrieval systems Semantic operators exploit the network structures that were built from the codes Proximity operators are used to analyze the spatial relations e g distance embeddedness overlapping co occurrence between coded data segments You can display a short help message for each operator by right clicking on its corresponding button in the toolbar Boolean Operators Four Boolean operators are available with the Query Tool OR XOR AND and NOT OR XOR and AND are binary operators which need exactly two operands as input NOT needs only one operand However as stated above the operands themselves may be of arbitrary complexity Codes code families or arbitrary expressions can be used as operands A OR B AND NOT C AND D OR tal The OR operator retrieves all data segments i e quotations that are coded with any of the codes used in the expression Example All quotations coded with Earth OR Fire An example of a more complex formulation based on a combination of queries is All quotations coded with Earth OR coded by both Fire AND Water wey XOR The OR operator does not really match the
156. ANUAL session EDITING PRIMARY DOCUMENTS 139 If you leave the edit session without saving the edited PD the changes will be discarded This includes all changes to the HU caused by the editing session e g quotations deleted copied or moved by deleting copying or moving text If you do not save the text will revert to the state before the last edit session or when the document was last saved If you choose Save Onty all modifications are saved a log file is created or an existing one modified and you can continue to edit the document If you select the option Discaro Chances AND Leave Epir Mone then all changes are discarded and no log file is created If a log file already existed no additional information is added to it If you choose Discarp Chances Onty the recent modifications are dropped and the document is reverted to its last saved state Since there is no Undo function for document editing activities make it a habit to select Save Onty once in a while during the edit session Then you can revert to the last saved status in case you made a mistake by selecting Discard CHANGES ONLY Please read This happens when you save an edited primary document Creation of Log files As soon as you save your changes an auxiliary file is created This auxiliary file has the same name as the original source file that was edited plus the file extension log It is stored within the same folder as the original fil
157. AO Deae ie roe dea tao eve eoe thu de sx hate Ert estere Ee esee t e t toe Ede ee re tei ev 32 Nodes Links and Relations ro esee tse reed eee edet eco ene reno ede ee ute Ero be Ee Eg ee eerta dae ges aereas ha eec ood e 32 Network View Manager O TA a 32 Network Editor A CAI Rp db tc EREE de dt dtes rt eua ed 32 Relation Editor EON 33 EL S LHEPICHM TEC A aan iia 33 Analysis tdeo sae bt eee idet ete eet et tpi a ct eru pede ta Ete ees m tetur andes ne etre do te abd Query Tool Super Codes The Co occurence Explorer e tete dece d e ee ar detta een d E ce de debe reat eus A ass 33 Codes Primary DocumentsTable irre otra serrer erp tr open s me tirar ni cedri credens tre ru cago aaa cana d 34 Team Tools sss User Administration Hermeneutic Unit M rger ceret rrr aen de ee c La eer a ee Dip aa La d e E dpa e HEP C aee REEL VE dura Dien doge 35 Coding Amal y Zen ics sere T 35 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SI nce D O ON inane deal nas NANA 35 XML ConVertet ze ce lesb e recap uten E dun DE AI OR e FETTE re aU AE 36 SPSS EXPONE r Mm V DE 36 Excel EX POTT a n fA Malian dudes 36 Graphic Fl isernia ien A AEREE EA Id a EE A NE A AE dei 36 HTML Generator des s 36 Miscellaneous TOONS cat Un liio redet gei etu di eere d nen Feeds 37 A
158. AS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 219 Clean up synonymous codes by merging them Save the HU before merging codes ATLAS ti offers a procedure to merge synonymous codes into one resulting target code This target code replaces the merged codes and inherits all of their references i e quotations links to other codes or memos and their comments There are two ways to merge codes a list based method and one that works from within the Network Editor Merging Codes Using the List Method In the Code Manager select the target code into which a number of other codes are to be merged Choose Miscettaneous Merce Cones from the Code Manager s menu In the multiple choice window select the codes to be merged into the selected code If the code had a comment already then information about when and what was merged into the target code is entered into the comment field of the target code including the comment s of the merged code s Merging Codes in a Network View Here the procedure works the other way around You first select the codes that you want to merge into another code and then you select the target code Open an existing Network View Select the code nodes that you want to merge hold down the Ctrl key to select multiple code nodes From the network view s menu select Nodes Merge Codes Some red lines appear starting at the selected code node ending at your mouse poi
159. As Saved Network Views can be selected from the pick list or the Network View Manager Adding Nodes to a Network View There are several options available for including objects in a Network View Via Drag amp Drop From Object Managers the Object Explorer or the margin area You can add nodes by dragging objects from Object Managers the Network View Manager the Family Manager the margin or the Object Explorer into the Network Editor Drag amp drop gives you better control of the initial position of the imported nodes F Open the Network View to which you want new objects imported Open the manager s for objects code list memo list etc that you want to import into a Network View F Select the node s you want to import into the Network View F Drag the selected objects into the Network Editor Drag selections of a primary text This method creates nodes from textual quotations or new selections of text l Open the PD that contains the text that you want to import into a Network View ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 328 Make a selection within the PD or select an existing quotation F Drag the selected text into the Network Editor placed A new node is created and displayed If a quotation did not yet exist Release the mouse button at the position you want the new node to be for the selection of text it will now be created Drag text from other applications This met
160. Case54 M Casel5 F Case20 F Case22 F Location Berlin London New York Tokyo New York Tokyo Berlin Tokyo London New York Tokyo Berlin Figure 150 PD family table with a nominal variable for location The table shows one variable for Location and the respective values as string Berlin London New York and Tokyo Note that the variable name is prefixed with a hash sign This is the syntax that needs to be used when preparing a table for import see below The hash sign indicates to ATLAS ti that this variable needs to be turned into multiple families Super families in PD Family Tables Super Families see page 289 are treated like standard families If you do not change the default name suggested by ATLAS ti when creating super families then they are prefixed by an asterisk In the table below you see two super families combining the families for age group 7 and 2 with the family female ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH VARIABLES PRIMARY DOCUMENT FAMILIES 248 Agegroup1 amp Age group 2 documents Name female female P1 Case8 F T 0 P2 Case6 F 1 0 P3 CaselO F 1 0 PA Casell F al 0 P5 Casel6 F 1 0 P 19 Case2 F 0 1 P20 Case3 F 0 1 P21 Case4 F 0 1 P22 Case5 F 0 1 P23 Casel3 F 0 1 P24 Casel4 F 0 1 Figure 151 Display of PD Superfamilies in PD Family tables Do not assign a PD to more than one family with the same variable name e g both to Location Berlin and Location New York ATLAS t
161. Crrt key when selecting the option from the Network Editor s menu If you want the neighbors of only one quotation imported open the context menu of this quotation and choose Import NEIGHEoRs Editing Hyperlink Comments Use the margin The links between quotations use fully qualified relations like the links between area to display codes and unlike the simple association between a code and a quotation As and edit link first class objects these links can be assigned a dedicated comment comments ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 370 Such a comment could explain why quotation A has been linked to quotation B Link comments can be accessed displayed and edited from three locations the margin area the Hyperlink Manager and the Network Editor The margin area has the advantage that it is readily available during scrolling through the primary documents The Network Editor method offers a visual approach to accomplishing this goal Create a network view of the hypertext nodes to facilitate this process To edit a hypertext link comment using the margin area Switch the margin area on If not already selected open up the properties context menu in the margin area and select Object Types HYPERLINKS Pop up the context menu for a hyper link displayed in the margin The quotation inside the primary document pane is highlighted at the same time Choose Enit Link Comment lt shown in GE
162. DF documents contain bookmarks you can chose whether you want to see them or not and where to position them To change the settings for PDF documents select the main menu option Extras PREFERENCES PDF PREFERENCES ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION ATLAS ti PDF Preferences AX Display Default page display mode 9 Continuous Single Page Y Display texts optimized for LCD screen Selection highlight color SS Navigation V Open bookmarks navigator when loading a PDF doc V Expand all bookmark levels V Dock to left border of HU Editor o ie omn Figure 36 Setting PDF preferences F Click on the colored rectangular area to select a highlight color f Select the continuous page display option to scroll down the entire PDF document If selecting the single page option only one page at a time is displayed When moving down and up the scroll bar a preview image of the other pages is displayed see below ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL 86 DATA PREPARATION 87 Storms and flooding and consequent events sun as lends des will cizim greater numbers cf homes in both urban and rural srsss As a consequence greater numbers of familias will be forced into temporary shelter which is likely to bs even mors vulneratis tc adverse weather In 2007 it was estimated that more then 1 5 million people hed bean left homeless due to rains and flooding across B Af countrie
163. DOGCUtmeFteu csi ceo a e qd a VE E EE Epa dd Pda dn 76 KMZ and KML documents asco dae Ii c Tec radon 77 Assigning and Handling Primary Documents sees nne nre innen neret enne nnns nnn 78 Assigning Documents vlasthe File Dialog 2 2 tct iaa i ir pera caia e cer rt p B edad 78 Assigning Documents using Drag amp Drop 79 To assign documents by dragging a link 79 Assign Documents via a PD Family Table 79 Assign Google Earth Documents 80 Create and Assigr a Google Earth Snapshot pete pr cecinit aate et cen epe certat onere AT ENEA ENEE Banded 80 Create a 3D stereoscopic image just for a little fun in between ssssssssssssssseseeseseneeenennenennnnr eene 80 Assign KMZ Documents ai Assign Me mos as Primary Doc ments t tr if 81 Rearranging and ren mbering PDs cia dl ati Che td lada n Gad atv ea eer dedere hal dL E dde ead 82 Rearranging a Selected Primary Document 82 Rearranging Primary Documents Using Drag amp Drop 82 Renumbering all Prima ry Documients ccce tere co ra i co de nl o c E HO TR IR a EEG EE GR RR t a tied 82 Loading and Navigating Primary Documents sssssssssssssssesseeeeeneeetneeneetretretnrrtnrerrrtnri rre errr itr s de rrs sitne nns 83 Loading Primary Documents ce tact en ete ettet bi eec red ce de a EA He Certe t b tre to c FED Pla de ded 83 To load a PD using the drop down list To load a PD us
164. E THE HU EDITOR 43 Main Workspace The HU Editor Overview The Hermeneutic Unit HU Editor is the main workspace It is opened after the start of the program and will be your home page most of the time C dote Kipper siage 1 62 ead Ony Mode AMAS File Edit Documents Quotations Codes Memos Networks Views Tools Extras A Docs Windows Help EILA A A A AL ARAN By aa oo Zi Quotes E 2 1 His prey was th Godes g date of murder 1 221 E LO IO ee pal Lao RIBDER active in the largely impoverished Whitechapel area and adjacent districts of London England in late 1888 The name originated in a letter sent to the London Central News Agency by someone claiming to be the murderer Code memo 0 Me F v The victims were women earning income as prostitutes Most victims throats were slit after which the bodies were mutilated The removal of internal organs from three of the victims led some officials at the time of 6 the murders to propose that the killer possessed anatomical or surgical knowledge Newspapers whose circulation had been growing during i V role of the media legend building historic context this era bestowed widespread and enduring notoriety on the killer because of the savagery of the attacks and the failure of the police to capture the murderer B the killer s identity has bec amp 1 the legends lack the Ripper legend surrounding the murd
165. E REDE teu cae 395 Selected Quotation PABerecul rm Al OQ otations Lishe ena tao 395 Speak Quotation The Codes Output Submieriu 2 aae tte ene et er ama t eed ie t ne te me E dede 396 Muotations tor Selected Gode UR 396 Quotation List ara Urs es oa du tee PEE 396 CUS Ty TOOL vai entente e E nd Pe een e b ce e a rer e EN Code List Code Hierarchy Cod s A 397 Codes Primary Docunients Table S bmenl cred eine recti d Dd PE pe Ye XR eara Rep ee eee en a IARE Rr ou 397 Quotation Referernces maer arr ita c E OU REORUM EGRE AR D EM DRE OREL EEUU arise rese cua leo 397 All Codes with Quotations vico carere ORE A E TOTO D MO HO HERO TONG GIN GCSE TO CURE IR QBUS es 397 Codes With Comments Code BOOK tiers ecce a tin eei eaa steer ce erroe a enu 397 CO OCCUMIN Es COMES T 397 The Output Dialog in the Code Manager Reports for Code Combinations via the Query Tool The Memos Output Submenu sess Eist of MemoS t a oir oa D a tede dat ta Creep ed En o tardo ct oct ena cene d d Selected Metmo s z nio onc Bbc teeta i tex i e reed ee dede cai de Cet ra ge corso eese decrevi ceste deeem etes iere decet tue Selected Memo with Quotations Speak up M H Family Output HU ere tc p e eo d ea enata e cta ek d d et erar dta ta te oe Le Tee ER CAS Output for C
166. FS eseni The User Database droit id rtp tere Aa AAA dare utc Rr te drap eerie ende ed Creating and working with different user databases 156 Relaxed User Management la deren mper dendi rns 156 Team Scenario 1 The team is sharing the same data source files on a shared drive 157 SCHUccT M 157 Option A All InsOne H PATH Setup 8 t cti ten terree d i e ia ge n e en Een Li rd e pe Pa e e reb drag 157 Project Setup Tasks of the Project Administrator Project Setup Tasks of Team Members Editing Primary Documents all 158 Merging A Task for the Project Administrator esses nn 159 Tasks of team memibers after merging iaa ii te iter eia c ative i e t d d tre E en dd eet d aan 160 Backup all Le Benefits OF THIS AP POA CH ics user ce hie tte eet o viet erp iens dian ers ed ri caste nities Ee Ree RETO Rabe RR a DeL Ete 161 BC Uri cde C ok 161 Option B Working with the Textbank Folder the TBPATH setup 161 Examples Project Setup Tasks of the Project Administrator das Project Setup Tasks of Team Members icon id de dto Dead do con onere dcin on d d RE danny aa dd T le ZA GO Editing Primary Documents all nitri tnt o ER Merging A Task for the Project Administrator ah Tasks of team MEMDENS ARE merging com d t ica
167. For D LI E Uo e ERE ELT Ded 53 Integration mitate eC C Line Paragraph Numbets ic tete eee e tr s E P Hee ru e e o e ence d rd nda tet cn en tet e ien dread 45 Link COMMONS m T P Margin Area Memo Editor Memo families DY POS eee Use as PDs VEG M Ed hi info DEEP EI euch Merge Codes ae Merges HU Link CONTIENE AEDEM nN AG AR AS eser Lao rc ale AM 175 Merge Wizard 173 Report 177 Scaled codes 1176 yelut ce 173 cu MANN ER 172 Target HU 172 Using Ignore Families 172 Mind maps 318 MSXM P O ed II HE EPPO E ad 403 Multi authoring i MEIST CP RS 321 Network EdItor a rime root icto tat oo Ot cte SERO E ET Ta ND ex PAG Vs Cr NN Mero ar ap eos rex Rc eA ce tenute ipu eu 186 321 323 Change Relation instet coc a a en eme n Pn et a c hd o E a Meds min de dee EO CR ERE Pee ede ra oe 333 Colo
168. G UP A NEW PROJECT 116 r amp Primary Doc Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage I 62 C Lo Documents Edit Miscellaneous Output View Ph g oe vs 6 1_Jack the Ripper story rtf Rich Text UPATH gt 1_Jack the Ripper story rtf 1 Jack the Ripper letters rtf Rich Text lt HUPATH gt 11_Jack the Ripper letters rtf 2 Victim Mary Ann Nichols pdf PDF HUPATH M2 Victim Mary Ann Nichols pdf 2 Victim Annie Chapman pdf PDF lt HUPATH gt 2_Victim_Annie_Chapman pdf 2 Victim Annie Chapman sceneof Video HUPATH V2 Victim Annie Chapman scene of 2 Victim Elizabeth Stride pdf PDF HUPATH V2 Victim Elizabeth Stride pdf 2 Victim Catherine Eddowes pdf PDF HUPATH 2 Victim Catherine Eddowes pdf 2 Victim Mary Jane Kelly pdf PDF HUPATH V2 Victim Mary Jane Kelly pdf 3 Investigation Suspects pdf PDF HUPATH 3 investigation suspects pdf 3 Criminal Profiling rtf Rich Text lt HUPATH gt 13_Criminal Profiling rtf 3_The Ripper Revealed mp3 i lt HUPATH gt 3_The Ripper Revealed mp3 att Figure 56 Check the path reference in the PDoca Manager Project Migration To migrate the project to a different computer you can either copy your project folder e g to a USB stick or flash drive and move it to a different computer Or you can create a copy bundle file and move this file The copy bundle file then needs to be unpacked installed on the second computer see Copy Bundle Migrating and Backing Up Proje
169. Grounded Theory method of Glaser amp Strauss uses relations like is phenomenon is context of is consequence of is condition for is strategy for etc to relate concepts found during the data oriented open coding phase In the analysis of argumentation structures other relations are more suitable e g is evidence of is contradictory to warrants etc A medical expert attempting to capture diagnostic knowledge would use e g is symptom of and is medication for ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 323 The Network Editor The Network The Network Editor offers an intuitive and powerful method to create and Editor lets you manipulate network structures It favors a direct manipulation technique You visually connect can literally grab codes quotations memos or other objects using your codes and other cursor and move them around the screen as well as draw and cut links between objects to them create semantic networks or The following describes various methods available for creating and editing hypertext webs Network Views 2 investigation doubts 0 GA WERE A A Network Nodes Links Layout Display Specials Help 14 Code Code Relations Editor ss 2 E TE a _Relabons Internal 1D 575 bj Labeli Label2 Meru width Type 438 Label i ispartof ASSO osm R is associated 1 smmetc E sil L3 epo berichten ber 2 tensive Label 2
170. H is relative to a specific HU It has no a _Jack the Ripper relevance X independent of 9 1 Jackthe Ripper Story Introduction this HU i 1 Jack the Ripper story ad 1 Jack the Ripper letters p 2 Victim Annie Chapman A 2 Victim Catherine Eddowes 2 Victim Elizabeth Stride W 3 investigation location of murder E 3 investigation scene of the murder Chapmann 1967 E 3_investigation_suspects 14 3 The Ripper Revealed Project Folder Figure 52 Single folder HUPATH setup Lo Project Folder A Jack the Ripper di Case description d 1 Jack the Ripper Story Introduction 1 Jack the Ripper story i 1 Jackthe Ripper letters 1 Jackthe Ripper letters rtf n Investigation mi 3_investigation_location of murder iB 3 investigation scene of the murder Chapmann 1967 x 3_investigation_suspects 9 3 The Ripper Revealed de Victims D 2_Victim_Annie_Chapman x 2 Victim Catherine Eddowes 2 Victim Elizabeth Stride D 2 Victim Mary Ann Nichols x 2_Victim_Mary_Jane_Kelly Figure 53 HUPATH setup with multiple subfolders ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA MANAGEMENT IN ATLAS TI TBPATH is user relative It affects ALL projects on which the user works It is set Via GENERAL PREFERENCES 110 When documents are assigned as PDs special paths are used whenever possible You can deactivate this option under Extras Prererences GENERAL Prererences tab HU Editor When assigning Primary Documents Use
171. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse pointer down and right to cover all nodes to be selected with the selection marquee F Release the mouse button Linking Nodes The links between nodes in a network are real connections between the objects Therefore creating and removing links should not be regarded as solely cosmetic operations Links make permanent changes to the HU There are several ways to link nodes To link two nodes using the toolbar icon d Select a node in a network view and click on the Link button in the toolbar A red rupper band appears Move the cross that you see at the end of the line on top of another node and left click If you link two codes to each other or two quotations then a list of relations pops up Select one of the offered relations via a left click ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 330 A quick way to link two nodes Set of standard code code relations Set of standard quote quote relations iis associated with gt gt gt gt continued by is part of X contradicts gt Is cause of gt criticizes lt gt contradicts gt discusses isa isa expands noname gt explains is property of l gt justifies gt i supports Figure 235 Linking two nodes The two nodes are now linked to each other In case of a first class link between two codes or between two quotations the relation na
172. However all settings created using the Display menu of Network Editor are lost after closing the editor If you want to change colors and fonts globally for all Network Views you need to change these settings under Networks PREFERENCES Colors The color of the Network Editor s background and the color of nodes can be set independently Choose Disptay Ser Coors and then one of the options from the submenu You are offered a standard color chooser dialog from which to pick a color ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 349 User defined code colors If you have colored your codes you can display these colors either as node label or as node color in a network view To do so click on the color circle in the tool bar and select the appropriate option k uto Color Mode Nodes Background Nodes amp Background Light Gray Use Colored Label v Use as Node Color v High Contrast Label Figure 251 Coloring options If you have used a dark color to color a code then use the High Contrast option to display the node label in white high contrast label Figure 252 Low and high contrast label display Auto Color Mode Auto Color mode visualizes the coding and modeling state of the codes This mode affects code nodes only Code nodes are automatically assigned a color according to their groundedness and density Groundedness of a code i e the number of associated quotations increases the
173. ITHIN B retrieves all quotations coded with A that are contained within data segments coded with B B ENCLOSES A ENCLOSES B retrieves all quotations coded with A that contain quotations coded with B Overlap Operators The overlap operators describe quotations that overlap one another ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 275 E OVERLAPPED BY A OVERLAPPED BY B retrieves all quotations coded with A that are overlapped by quotations coded with B 5 OVERLAPS A OVERLAPS B retrieves all quotations coded with A that overlap quotations coded with B man P He use a that he had once Macnaghten 4s were killed y more serious prison records ers Ostrog is last E murderer description EG name of suspect E reason suspected behavioral clues d Y reason released alibi Figure 171 Visualizing the spatial relations between segments If you want to retrieve all segments for reason suspected behavioral clues related to the code murderer description you would need to click man reason suspected behavioral clues murderer description WITHIN mou If you enter murderer description reason suspected behavioral clues WITHIN the query tool would not deliver any results or the data segments shown in figure 171 If you enter murderer description reason suspected behavioral clues ENCLOSES then the query to
174. If a document in the bundle is older than an existing one at the new work locations location it will not be unbundled This prevents a document from replacing a newer version of it Restore Use the The Restore strategy is used to restore a bundle created as a backup of a Restore project i e an HU and all the data source files referenced by its PDs This strategy when strategy restores the HU in exactly the same folder as at the original location It installing a does not reject an attempt to replace a current file with an older version bundle that was which is indeed the very nature of restore created as backup copy Paths Below the strategy selection section the original path of the HU is displayed A color marker next to the path indicates possible conflicts for this HU if it were to be installed in the target environment HU Path C ProgramData Scientific Software ATLASti CommonDocuments m 3 gt az E Exdude HU TB Path lUsers Susanne Documents Scientific Software ATLASti TextBank Click on the browser button to determine the location for the HU Figure 65 Selecting a location for the HU file Click on the Browse button to select the location where the HU file should be stored on the target computer If you transfer a project to a different computer most likely you will need to change the location If you use the bundle file as backup and want to install the backup on your comp
175. In Place Activation and Editing How to Embed an Object Embed an Object via Copy and Paste Special Embed an new or existing Object via Insert Object Coding Embedded Objects cee Editing Embedded Objects Idiosyncrasies Editing Primary Documents in Team Projects Synchronization or Demard notet Tox ced Rr dese EROR gavin nd oxi A OD iaa paa ara CIA se eire ea od ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL Te m Project Management AAA I IL lI 149 Tasks of the Project Administrator 2 iei rd e e a d n pte Lf Te dat ec ie codd 149 Sets up the Projectin oec cce edi bas otra a sd edet toit sucer etcetera E Gu ru a eene a eR Peg eode tid 149 Makes Decisions with regards to Editing Primary Documents sse enne tnetrertre trennen 149 Merges Hermeneutic Units 1 150 Works on the Project 150 User Management 150 Adding a New serio dota d ec Cer re a dde 151 Administrative and Standard Access Rights niti e teer tena td d a t e e P a n dp a ER 153 Removing a user Changing user attributes Saving the user database POR PATATE ELEC EA Access Rights for the HU nio d oi teer odi i i e e D e denen M a d i E EE d ere ee e RA Co Authors uu To f gister cosauthiors ie ice testet tendit c ih ecd rd cde ded ecce teet ce ide pileta Tit p etia eccl nde id ME Cs cdeoc iiie EE e dea utente To display co authors ns TO filter by CO AUTN O
176. In order to compare the four groups in regard to different types of complaints the steps above need to be repeated Having frequently used combinations of families available as Super Families eases such tasks considerably Below a step by step instruction on how to create Super Families is provided How to create a Super Family 38 Open a Family Manager and click the Super Family button or select Famuies Oren Surer Family Toot from the menu The Super Family Tool opens A Super Family Tool on Primary Doc Families lola lm Sa Families Query EcJEsJLe Recalc Undo Redo v Business travelers 7 v Domestic flights 5 term stack International flights 4 p a Leisure travelers 5 i feedback pane Result Create Super Family Id Name Media Quo x result pane 4 m 4 perro t Refresh Help eso Figure 187 Super Family Tool for Primary Document Families The Super Family Tool is like a reduced Query Tool see Query Tool on page 268 for details In the left pane the available families are listed For our example above there are four regular families The panes on the right hand side from top to bottom the term stack pane the feedback pane and the result pane display information once you begin to create a combination of families The buttons above the stack pane are described in the context of the Query Tool see Stac
177. It won t look as neat as the original Excel object and it cannot be activated but you can select and code a single cell or several cells of the spreadsheet The same Excel table selection pasted into a document as as an Excel object and as Rich Text April 6 1887 Elizabeth Stride brings charges of assault against her lover April 8 1887 Joseph Barnett and Michael Kidney Mary Kelly meet for the first time June 10 1887 Elizabeth Stride using the name Annie Fitzgerald is embedded objects can be coded as one segment Severin Klosowski arrives in London from brought before Thames Magistrates Poland Court for drunk and disorderly conduct Mary Ann Cox charged on assault charges August 22 1887 Israel Lipski is in front of Thames Magistrates Court hanged for the murder of Miriam Angel Michael Ostrog sent into Surrey Pauper Lunatic Asylum suffering from mania on September 30th 1887 APRIL 1887 April 6 1887 Elizabeth Stride brings chargds of assault against her lover Michael Event April 6th 1887 Kidney April 8 1887 Joseph Barnett and Mary Kelly meet for the first time JUNE 1887 SeverinKlosowskiarives inLondonfromPofand June 10 1887 Elizabeth Stride using the name Annie Fitzgerald is brought before Event June 10th 1887 Thames Magistrates Court for drunk and disorderly conduct August 22 1887 Israel Lipski is hanged for the murde
178. L SPECIAL TOOLS 381 Redundant Coding Analyzer This procedure identifies overlapping or embedded quotations that are associated with the same code Such codings possibly indicating redundancy can result from normal coding but may occur unnoticed during a merge procedure You might not need or want to correct redundant codings but these occurrences may be indicative of methodological issues in your analysis The Redundant Coding Analyzer Screen The Coding Analyzer finds codes with redundant codings and offers appropriate procedures To open the tool select Toots Repunpant Copine Anatyzer from the HU editor s main menu The upper pane displays a list of codes referencing overlapping quotations Clicking on a code displays the conflicting quotations pair wise Double clicking on a listed quotation displays it in context f T x Q Redundant e Analyzer Soa Codes with redundant codings Name Redundancy Grounded Density Author ae DN reason released mix up of names 2 8 3 Susanne amp reason released theory disputed 1 0 Susanne EC reason suspected could have been there 3 15 2 Susanne y 4 m Pairs of redundant quotations Name Conn Name Conn 11 104 James Kelly no 2 11 156 James Kelly 7 Figure 292 The Redundant Coding Analyzer ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SPECIAL TOOLS 382 The upper pane lists all codes for which redundant codi
179. Link Sounct from the context menu Alternatively you can click on the Source Anchor button in the primary document toolbar ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 365 3 Select a target segment or an existing quotation as target right click and i select the option Create Link Tarcet from the context menu Alternatively you can click on the Source Anchor button in the primary document toolbar If you select a data segment as source or target that was not yet a quotation ATLAS ti automatically creates a quotation from it A list of relation pops up Select a relation to link the two selected quotations If none of the existing relations fit create a new relation by selecting Open TT Link 4 5 gt 4 6 gt gt gt gt continued by X contradicts gt criticizes discusses explains l gt justifies gt supports Open Relation Editor Figure 271 Select a relation to link the source with the target quotation ReLarion Enor see How to create new relations on page 346 Select the option Chain to link a next data segment to the current target quotation Select Fini to end the chain Hyper Link f Star More links with 4 5 Figure 272 Select Chain to link another quotation to the current target quotation To create a star Proceed as explained above To create a chain but select the option Star Then the next quotation is linked
180. MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 205 Create multiple In Vivo codes This procedure offers a list of all current codes from which one or more code can be selected and associated with the current data selection Code multiple quotations in one go Drag and drop the selected text into the Code Manager s list pane or the code drop down list You can create a code from each word of the selected text by holding down the ALT key when dropping the text Code by List Select the data section quotation to be coded F Click the Code by List button or choose Copia Cope sy List from the menu From the list window with applicable codes select one or more codes while holding the Ctrl key and click OK The number of codes that you can select from the list is unlimited If the data section resembles an existing quotation only codes not already assigned to this quotation are offered Code by List Inverse The standard code by list technique associates a list of codes to one selected quotation Sometimes it makes more sense to associate a list of quotations to one code To link a code to many quotations In the Code Manager or the drop down list select the code to be associated with one or more quotations From the main or the code s context menu choose Copes Coping Link Cope TO QUOTATIONS A list of quotations that were not already assigned to the selected code opens Select one ore more quotations and
181. ML file that you just exported and click Open The code list is imported Check the Code Manager to see whether the procedure was completed successfully and according to your expectations Avoiding Name Clashes when Importing Code Lists If a code with the same name already exists in the HU the imported code name is prefixed with three exclamation marks Another attempt to load a code with a conflicting name will be ignored Note to ATLAS ti 4 x users The old Import Codes function still exists In case you have some previously created code lists saved as cod files that you wish to import select Copes MisceLLaneous Import Cope List However this format cannot be generated any longer Renaming and Deleting a Code Renaming and deleting codes are procedures that seem trivial but understanding the scope of these operations can be a problem for new users For both operations you must understand that there is only ONE code object e g Happiness in a given HU even if you applied associated with quotations other codes etc this code many times With the margin area switched on you may see the code appear many times while scrolling through your document In fact you are seeing links between a quotation represented by a bar and the code represented by its name icon etc ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 217 Renaming or replacing Renaming or removing a code in the margin besides
182. NAGEMENT Optimize Patus from the main menu optimization for all PDs is initiated When using the equivalent option offered in the PD Manager only the currently selected PDs are optimized Changing Absolute Path References to the HUPATH Before you open ATLAS ti you need to move your documents in the Windows File Manager Either move all documents the HU file into one common folder or move the HU file into the main folder on the top level if you store your documents in sub folders If documents have been edited make sure that all log files stay together with their source files in the same folder see Editing Primary Documents on page 136 for further detail Then open ATLAS ti and briefly check whether you can load all documents Even before optimizing paths ATLAS ti should be able to access all documents If there is a problem create an accessibility report Documents Data Source MANAGEMENT Accessipiity Report The accessibility report indicates the potential cause of the problem see Troubleshooting on page 433 Fix the problem before you continue with path optimization Next select Documents Data Source Manacement Optimize Paths from the main menu ATLAS ti goes through all documents and exchanges path references if a more optimal solution is possible ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT 122 Open the Primary Document Manager and look at the column Origin You should now see
183. Network Editor The Network Editor displays and offers all editing capability to construct and refine semantic networks In addition it allows the visual creation and traversal of hypertext structures ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN CONCEPTS AND FEATURES Analysis 33 Relation Editor Should the already built in relations that are used to connect objects in Network Views prove not sufficient you can edit them or create new ones using the Relation Editor Link Managers The Link Managers provide an overview of all code code links and of all quotation quotation links you have created You find more information on the network function under Network Views starting on page 318 Video tutorials Network Building 1 3 http www youtube com watch v 7 ObpQ5GMLgU Network Building 2 3 http www youtube com watch v OumfcNTZqHe Network Building 3 3 http www youtube com watch v JTKJ95DYA0Q Hyperlinks http www youtube com watch v R7IbSt5rpks Query Tool For more complex search requests the Query Tool is at your disposal Here you can formulate search requests that are based on combinations of codes using one or a combination of 14 different operators Boolean semantic and proximity operators Query Tool page 268 Video Tutorial http www atlasti com video article the query tool html Super Codes A Super Code differs from a standard code A standard code is directly linked with the quotations to wh
184. Networks Export Cone Network from the HU Editor s main menu Enter a name for network file By default the name of the HU with the extension NET is offered The file contains a textual description which can be processed by the import step described in the following directions To import a code network F Load the HU into which the network of codes shall be imported Choose Networks Import Cove Network from the HU Editor s main menu Select a network file extension NET ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 353 Clean up synonymous codes using the Code Merge procedure The essentials of merging codes have already been described elsewhere see Merging Codes on page 218 Conflict Resolution When importing networks into an HU that already contains networked codes the following internal strategy is applied to avoid conflicts Existing codes and links are not modified inconsistent links are not created e g direct cycles Cleaning Up While the situation of importing homonyms is controlled by the conflict resolution strategy the system cannot automatically handle unwanted synonyms Especially when importing codes and networks created by others into a non empty HU such synonyms e g man and mankind might clutter the name space of codes You can clean up by merging the synonyms see Merging Codes on page 218 Scaled Theory Transfer Besides the two strategie
185. Number Magic which is immediately displayed in the network editor as well The clone inherits all quotations code links family memberships and other relations from the original code You will see that all links originating from Number Magic also appear with the newly created clone Number Magic Clone 1 You will very likely end up with lots of nodes and links cluttering the screen Repeat this step as we want to split the code number magic into two codes Magic 3 and Magic 7 Enlarge the network window to fill the entire screen To de clutter the display select the menu option Layout Semantic Layout This distributes all nodes in a more ordered fashion Rename the two clones into Magic 3 and Magic 7 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 356 Y Magic 7 20 1 v Figure 259 First step in splitting a code Making one or more clones and renaming them Select all quotation nodes that should no longer be referenced by the original node In the above example number magic remains only linked to quotation 1 29 Magic 7 remains linked to quotations 1 2 1 3 and 1 4 All other quotations are linked to Magic 3 6 Select Links Cur Links from the menu or use the unlink button in the toolbar Red rubber bands appear connecting the selected nodes with the mouse cursor Move the mouse pointer over code node that should not longer be linked with these quotations This unlinks all
186. P DI ED HU TP PM P pe criaron Ev eO seeded 89 Marking segments Navigation 5 Renumber 82 Primary DOCUMENT Parle eccentric t ne reso E cede sce ea dee deseris a TCR QE Due vede cesa c nee gres pri dab Erf oe crece 45 Primary Brore V e Tat Multimedia m Etc H RTF74 SAVING M 139 Size ReslricliOns ior iere reader eei aee er ELI HE EE e Pe DRE EC Ho re e br NO 73 Project MaintenanCe e Copy Bundle ca Project Manageme Ep MI EE Planning and setup Scenario 1 ST EFE SCONANO M denned Project planning Proximity Operators Qualitative Analysis y enam ae BOol an Operators ace vasca e e tena cadet pl tpe ce P de tl dra Maven sc ce e E CU Eee ad 271 QueryTool Boolean operators BOONE GUSTY cate cater tect a enna eater casio cerdo 278 GleatTermistackg serie renean N t err uidet ea eee Eu be doeet deca eren dee dor e ace Ferne a iste ge oe ede e E A pee ed 296 Context menus 296 Examples ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL INDEX 443 Ope hands ies ibt eed ee teks adele tte A bhava amanda eal wb Anker event e
187. PDs select those you want to print in the PD Manager Switch the wrap mode to Printer via Epit Woro Wrap Fon Printer Although printer wrap is enabled anyway when starting the print it is advisable to select this wrapping mode in the first place to better judge the expected layout and avoid surprises text and the margin area Specify the ratio between the space reserved for the text and the margin by moving the splitter bar to an appropriate position It might take some experimentation to arrive at optimal results for your printer Select Documents Output Print witH Marcin from the main menu If you print several PDs select out Output Print with Marcin option from the PD Manager s output menu The printer dialog opens If you have made a selection e g manually or by activating a quotation and want to restrict the output to this part of the document check option Print Selection before clicking the Print button If The printed page is divided into columns for the numbering the actual you want to create a PDF document select a PDF writer as printer O ur WYSIWYG of annotated documents has its limits For instance if you have coded the document quite densely with lots of overlapping quotations and many memos and hyper links color is recommended for best visual discrimination ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 395 The Quotations Output Submenu Selected Quotation Prints the selected qu
188. PORT Use comments for an explanation of scaled code s values 416 END DATA Scaled vs Dichotomous Codes Within ATLAS ti a code is always dichotomous because it either refers to a given quotation 1 or it does not 0 Each case quotation can in respect to the codes be described as a vector of O s and 1 s The concept of scaled codes variables requires a special syntax The dimension or scale along which an evaluation is to take place is partitioned into the number of different values required Assuming that five degrees of fear are to be distinguished in a given analysis five codes must be created oo degree of fear degree of fear degree of fear degree of fear degree of fear o A oe Owe WNE oo A special naming convention is necessary to let ATLAS ti identify variable codes from dichotomous codes Naming Convention for Scaled Codes Each code name is followed by at least one blank and the character you may choose an alternative lead character for the value part through the SPSS initial screen followed immediately by a value This notation allows the system to construct one variable from a group of codes as in the example given above The new ordinal variable degree of fear has as many distinct values as the number of codes the user defined according to the convention In SPSS syntax the transformation of the data could be expressed as follows if degree of fear 1 eq 1 degr of fea
189. Primay Doc families P 5 2_Victim_Mary_Ann_Nichols pdf 13 P 1 1_Jack the Ripper Story Introduction mp3 P 6 2_Victim_Annie_Chapman pdf 18 P 2 Transcript Jack the Ripper Introduction 6 2 P 8 2 Victim Elizabeth Stride pdf 15 P 3 1 Jack the Ripper Story rtf 99 I3 P 9 2 Victim Catherine Eddowes pdf 15 P 4 1 Jack the Ripper Letters rtf 30 P10 2 Victim Mary Jane Kelly pdf 18 P 7 2 Victim Annie Chapman scene of the m P11 3 Investigation Suspects pdf 167 P12 3 Criminal Profiliggy rtf 8 4 m non members Figure 143 Primary Document Family Manager Family Managers and the procedures described in the following are the same for all family types Components of the Family Manager The Family Manager s main pane lists all families for the specific object type The window displays the name member size author and creation and modification dates not currently visible The columns can be used to sort the families according to these criteria by clicking the column header The left list below the family list displays the family members already assigned The two buttons between the list panes are for assigning or removing items from the selected family The right list displays all items not currently assigned to the selected family The comment area contains an optional description for the family To Open a Family Manager 3 Select Epit Famities Open Fa
190. Projects HUPATH Betina 103 rtf female Tokyo 0 31 40 0 P9 Case54 M C Users generic Example Projects HUPATH T Robert 244 rtf male London 0 0 41 50 P10 Casel5 F C Users generic Example Projects lt HUPATH gt Heather_170 rtf female New York 0 0 41 50 P11 Case20_F C Users generic Example Projects lt HUPATH gt Joan_53 rtf female Tokyo 0 0 41 50 P12 Case22_F c Users generic Example Projects lt HUPATH gt Beverly_116 rtf female Berlin 0 0 41 50 Figure 148 An Exported PD Family Table column header and content is explained ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH VARIABLES PRIMARY DOCUMENT FAMILIES 246 This data exchange format can also be used to conveniently assign a large number of PDs from generic lists Documents The PD sequence number Name The name of the PD Path The resolved path of the PD s data source i e the actual location of the data source at the time the table was exported Origin Contains the original path reference that was valid at the time the document was assigned to the HU May contain special paths e g HUPATH This attribute can only be handled intelligently when importing such a table with ATLAS ti Other applications may simply ignore it and use the path attribute instead All following columns Families Type of Variables Within ATLAS ti all families when interpreted as variables are dichotomous because an item may or may not belong to a specific family thus it encoded
191. Report Figure 198 Context menu of the results pane The last option is very useful in the search of patterns and typologies in your data It is also of good service when working with images as in a lot of cases the image itself is the unit of analysis ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 299 Co occurrence Tools The Co occurrence Explorer works on a different logic than the Query Tool In the Query Tool the user has to determine and select codes or code families and the appropriate operator The results are a list of quotations The Co occurrence Explorer by default looks for all codes that co occur in the margin area combining the operators WITHIN ENCLOSES OVERLAPS OVERLAPPED BY and AND without the user having to select a a specific code code family or operator It is however possible to work with filters so that the tool is not always creating output for all data and all codes The Co occurrence Tools offer two output choices You can either view the results in form of a hierarchical tree or in form of a table Below you see an example for both How to open the Co occurrence Tools Select Tools Co occurrence Tools and then select either the tree or the table explorer The Co occurrence Tree Explorer When running the tree explorer you only see the root objects when it opens Open the branches by clicking on the sign to see the the co occuring codes on the first level and the as
192. S ti 6 USER MANUAL APPENDIX 436 Y 3 Report Bundle Created x O The following items have been compiled into archive Report Susann 2011 09 16 AtlRep The ERROR LOGs the contents of the configuration files USER INI fonts xml and ATLAS INI the logbook of recent updates updates log the DEBUG LOG an ATLAS ti system report the PD mapping file PTPATH MAP the list of files in the ATLAS ti program folder C Program Files x86 Scientific Software ATLASti Program the user system folder C Users Susanne AppData Roaming Scientific Software ATLASti and the ATLASti root folder C Program Files x86 Scientific Software ATLASti Figure 333 This message informs about about the files included in the bundle ATLAS ti launches your default email client and creates a new message addressed to an ATLAS ti support address The report file Report name yyyy mm dd AtlRep should already be attached to the mail automatically In cases where it isn t please attach it manually its exact location is indicated in the on screen message The body of the message displays further instructions Add a description of your problem in the mail body If possible name any circumstances under which the problem occurred Make sure you have an active Internet connection Send the mail Our support team will usually respond in less than 24 hours Service Packs amp Patches Live Update Program updates patches
193. S ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 201 Quick Copine Ctri SHirt Q o Codes with the last used code 9 Copes Text SearcH RESULTS Codes the results of a text search How Codes are Displayed After a code has been created it appears as a new entry in several locations e g in the margin area the drop down list the code manager amp test 1 1 0 jot disappoint drop down list ed the California for codes daria Shriver ical adversaries ornia Well let For the people symbol and label Figure 116 Codes in ATLAS ti The selected code word is written next to the quotation bar in the margin You can recognize codes by the yellow diamond symbol The entry in the drop down list in Figure 104 Quotation reference reads test 1 1 0 The first number shows the frequency how often the code has been applied It gives you some information on the groundedness of a code i e how relevant this code is in the data The second number the density how many other codes this code is linked to Hence the code Test 1 has been used only once so far and it is not yet linked to any other code Display of codes in the Code Manager The Code Manager provides a number of typical Windows display options like Large Icons Small Icons List and Details The details view has already been described at Code Manager Columns on page 60 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNC
194. Square 4 murder 350 404 lt 16 5 Dorset Street 5 murder 136 190 ictims circle GE snapshot 27 485 Figure 269 List of linked quotations Hyperlinks in the Margin Area When working with hyperlinks it is advisable to set the margin display options an optimal work as follows space for navigating hyperlinks sane I murder site Gane YM disi so as E M victin 2 Annie Chapmar x Vise Images ee ie The an expands 613 Hyperlinks v Use Object Colors um 2d some iam s at E 1 shown by video 7 5 4 7 Display Coordinates Code Families 9 er possesses anatomic ad Use Short Names Memo Families culation had been PM Set Font Network Views aduring notoriety on ks and the failure of the None All Figure 270 Display of hyperlinks in the margin area To open this context menu right click on a blank space in the margin area Creating Hyperlinks ATLAS ti offers a variety of options for creating and traversing hypertext links Similar to the linking of codes you may create hyperlinks in a the Network View editor see Linking Nodes on page 329 In addition hypertext links can be created in context or via Drag amp Drag in the Quotation Manager and in the margin area Creating Hyperlinks using the context menu To create a chain Select a data segment as source or an already existing quotation Right click on the selection or the quotation and select the option Create
195. TIONS 202 lubl View Large Icons Small Icons List e Details v Single Column Figure 117 View context menu The Single Column View Within curly brackets following the code name groundedness and density are displayed 3G name of suspect Kosmiski 8 2 Figure 118 Code display Grounded ness As explained above groundedness refers to the number of quotations associated with a code In the above example groundedness is 8 This means the code name of suspect Kosminski has been used for coding eight times Density In the above example the density is 2 thus two codes have been linked to the code name of suspect Kosminski Links between codes are established by the user either by dragging and dropping codes onto each other in the Code Manager or by linking them in in a Network View see page 329 Comment The tilde character flags commented codes It is used not only for codes but for all commented objects Open Coding Open Coding assigns new codes with already existing or newly created quotations You can create one ore more codes in a single step Coding with a single new code F Select the data section or the quotation you want to code Click the Open Coding button see above or choose Cobina Oren Covina from the main or context menu ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL Write comments Create more than one code at a time using the vertical bar character The Code Manager offers
196. TS AND FEATURES Network Views 32 Network Views are a bit more sophisticated than families They allow you to conceptualize the structure by connecting sets of similar elements together in a visual diagram With the aid of Network Views you can express relationships between codes quotations and memos PDs families and even Network Views can also be nodes in a network view Qu 2 46 So great is the democratic deficit that people increasingly 2 2274 2 2645 So great is the democratic deficit that people do not bother to vote or voto for ties The parties terified of crossing the Olympian if the same Thus the UK s Labour party is losing votes National Party and the Irish Labour party is losing votes to Sinn Fein Figure 2 An example of a network view see Friese 2011 Nodes Links and Relations A node is any object that is displayed in a Network View You can change their look and move them around in the Network Editor Relations are link prototypes used to create a link between two codes or between two quotations An example is the is a ISA relation which is frequently used to link concepts of different abstraction level e g DOG isa MAMMAL Network View Manager The Network View Manager contains a list of all saved Network Views previously constructed by the user It can be used to create new Network Views to access or delete existing ones or to write and edit comments
197. Tool Display Grid v Display Node Bitmaps Ctrl Alt B v Display Nodes 3D Ctrl 3 Extended Code Label Codes with Comments Boxed Quotations B Lei v Full Image for PDs DIR Quotation Verbosity gt Veco Set Fonts Arrows for Undirected Links Set Colors Boxed Labels Rotated Labels Refresh Display F5 Figure 250 Display options for link labels The menu label equals the menu text The text entered in the field Menu Text is used in the relation menu and as a label In addition the menu text is also used when outputting networked codes in the form of quasi sentences Copes Output Cope Hierarchy or Cope NeIGHBORS ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 348 Create sets of relations that reflect your methodology F Next select the line style width color solid or dashed If you wish you can specify the preferred layout direction that is used to automatically draw the picture when opening a Network View on an object The final attribute to enter is the formal property of the relation transitive symmetric or asymmetric A transitive relation is a directed link like is part of is reason for isa Both symmetric and asymmetric relations are non directed links An example of a symmetric link is is associated with contradicts is an example for an asymmetric link Optionally you can describe the newly created relation in the text
198. Tour Loap Jack THE Ripper STAGE II RS date of murder 13 0 RS historic context 4 0 RS name of suspect 28 0 RS name of suspect Cohen 6 6 I name of suspect Feigenbaum 1 0 RS name of suspect Kaminski 3 0 RS name of suspect Kelly 1 0 RS name of suspect Kosmiski 8 2 EX name of victims 14 4 RS INVESTIGATION 4 0 RS investigation doubts 12 0 RS investigation stolen evidence 4 0 RS investigation suspected by whom 37 0 RS investigation theories 15 0 Bi investigation theory by M Fido 4 0 RS JACK THE RIPPER 1 0 R Jack the Ripper legend 11 1 Bes LETTER 0 0 RG letter authenticity 6 0 NS letter commonalities 1 0 RS letter content 4 0 RS letter date 4 0 RM letter differences 1 0 RS letter recipient 2 0 NS MODUS OPERANDI 0 0 RY modus operandi_cut throat 7 2 RS modus operandi differences 8 0 Re modus operandi mutilation 8 2 RS modus operandi others 5 0 RS modus operandi similarities 10 0 ii MURDER 0 0 Si murder profiling 16 0 RS murder site 26 0 murder weapon 5 0 Y murderer description 22 0 Yi murderer motive 1 1 i murderer serial killer 11 2 murderer_various persons 4 0 Yi murders canonical five 4 6 3G murders more less than five 5 0 3 amp murders potentially attributed to JR 3 3 Y REASON RELEASED 0 0 Y reason released alibi 7 0 X re
199. UE De MP or eet SN cM LUE TN Search swarm delimlterz s 4o c 2005 tires sce E TE tiet O a cett o AP ese PADS E eto 227 Text Search Category search GREP search ns Standard sear E M M gc guum Semi automatic selection is Theory importe 2s acm te e ore ec ea e a e acd enn La dd t aae r v cte aad t ta ta o ata e He he ORTA Theory TANSTE Moats E T Thesauriss mccum cepa hea rennet m MM MI dM EM oa mS M 318 Topological Layout TL 341 Transitive relations User management ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL INDEX 444 Pe MI AUBUL IA M 152 REMOVE SO raadi OE 153 SA Ve Udala a a See A TTE 153 User database Venn diagrams Vertices m MAT adco M E IEEE E Export Memos Folder Import Memos 2 MSXMIUE par star O A o OATES E EU Aoo beens Stylesheets a AEEA M ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL
200. USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT 415 COMPUTE KF2 K19 K20 K21 K22 K23 K24 COMPUTE KF13 K9 K67 K68 K69 K70 K71 K72 4 K73 K74 K75 K76 AKTI t RK84 RETO FORMATS KF1 F1 KF10 F1 KF11 F1 KF12 F1 KF13 F2 KF2 Fl KF3 F1 KF4 F1 KF5 F1 KF6 F2 KF7 F1 KF8 F1 KF9 F1 VARIABLE LABELS KF1 KF Investigation VARIABLE LABELS KF2 KF Letter VARIABLE LABELS KF13 KF Victims Represent primary document families as IF variables Using ALL primary document families PF1 Description of Victims COMPUTE PF1 0 IF PD 5 or PD 6 or PD 8 or PD 9 or PD 10 PF1 Silk PF2 Investigaton all files PF14 Type of data Video files COMPUTE PF14 0 IF PD 7 PF14 1 FORMATS PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4 PF5 PF6 PF7 PF8 PF9 PF10 PF11 PF12 PF13 PF14 F1 VARIABLE LABELS PF1 PF Description of Victims VARIABLE LABELS PF2 PF Investigaton all files VARIABLE LABELS PF14 PF Type of data Video files BEGIN DATA 000001000002000001000000040000011800000004000002803428240 739 000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000010000000000 00 00 000456000017000005000000360000000100000036000000013463671 649 000000000000000000000000000000001000000000000000000000000 00000000000000100000 00 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IM
201. YH moc 3 Open a network view on the target code to see the links Figure 237 Creating a Code Code link in the Code Manager This is only available for codes and quotations in the Code and Quotation Managers Selecting a Link Only first class links can be selected First class or strong links can only exist between quotations or between codes Selecting links is similar to selecting nodes Move the mouse pointer onto the label of the link to be selected The mouse pointer changes its appearance F Click the left mouse button The selected link label will be displayed inverted All previously selected nodes links are deselected Selecting links is a convenient way to cut or flip multiple links see Cutting Links on page 333 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 333 Deselecting Nodes and Links To deselect a selected node or link Hold down the Cra key on your keyboard Click on a selected node or link To deselect all nodes and links Move the mouse cursor over the Network Editor s background Double click the left mouse button Cutting Links Several approaches to disconnecting previously linked nodes are available The first method works for all types of links and is useful when many nodes linked to one other node are to be disconnected Select one or more nodes whose connections to another node are to be removed E Choose Links Cur Links from the Network
202. a Like the method described above creating hyperlinks in the margin area is best suitable for connecting two quotations that are in close proximity to each other Select a quotation bar in the margin area Hold down the left mouse button and drag the bar onto another quotation bar Release the left mouse button The Relation menu opens Select a relation The linking procedure ends here Dropping a bar onto another quotation displayed alongside a bar replaces the existing hyperlink Modifying Hyperlinks There are two place to modify existing hyperlinks the Network Editor and the Hyperlink Manager see Link Management on page 344 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 367 The margin area permits a very intuitive traversal of hyper links To modify links in the Network Editor quotation and then selecting the option Oren Network View from the context Open a network view on a hyperlinked quotation e g by right clicking on a menu In the Network Editor right click on a link label and select Chance RELATION from the context menu The relation menu pops up Select a different relation Defining New Hyperlink Relations The procedure for defining or editing hypertext relations is equivalent to the methods described for editing code code relations You may either define a new relation by choosing the bottom option from the list of relations when actually creating
203. a denial center ks Backup all ese ctt ek ceterae annimmt oo bte ct ees aoi N atacan ec cree screamer es Benefits of this approach 5 BICI cm H Team Scenario 2 Teams that do not always or never have access to a shared drive 165 Project Setup Tasks of the Project Administrator sssssssssssseseseseeene carr Project Setup Tasks Of Team Members 5 acht caddie eer e idee dpa ec rea dr et en aene Migrating projects to a Second Computer for Team Members P Editing Primary Documents all 5 rte tret v DIO UO E pe Le e HENCE Va de ERU dank CARERE EE E EXER SL A REY ERR E eta Merging A Task for the Project Administrator isorine irii onar aE i E anaE a EEEE treten tnit tte tna ANA EE A TSh If documents are not edited Tasks of team members after merging If documents are edited de Tasks of team Members Er merging 3 eta ce o cedet cti cp el pO Ur RU HR Ode dc teat a PA If only the project administrator is allowed to edit documents sss nnne nenne 169 Tasks of team members after merging s Backup alocado RH MEO CLER EQ D IO RAE LEE CORDE EE PD HE Rec EL PIE E DEAE Benefits OF this approach vie zs co cene ee me fme ete ated ui nre dece te TRO Ca Ee tote re ie a a Rv RP e Drawbacks Merging Hermeneutic Units Examples of Application s Text
204. a e c 3i ABRASIONS o o o o o 0 o 1 0 e o 33 ABROAD o o o o o 1 o 1 o o 0 23 ABRUPTLY o o 9 o 1 c o B c Cc o I ABSENCE EJ 5 o o o o o 1 e c 3 ABSENT LJ o o o o 1 o 1 o o e DM ABSOLUTELY o o o gt e 1 o o o 1 27 ABSTRACTHO 0 o o o e 1 e c c o n o gt o o o o o 1 G 6 c o o o o o e 0 o 3 0 0 1 o e 0 0 a 2 o 1 0 n 1 e p o 1 0 i o F O Figure 166 Word frequency count displayed in Excel Use MS Excel functionality like sorting by highest to lowest frequency for further exploration Working with the stop list The user system folder Extras ExrLorer User System Fouper contains a sample stop list a file named stoplist txt The first lines starting with a semi colon contain an commentary in this case an explanation of terms that can be used lines that start with a semicolon are excluded from the frequency count ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 268 Query Tool You need the Query Tool for queries using more than a single code M stoplist txt Editor Se Datei Bearbeiten Format Ansicht ATLAS ti stop list created 2003 12 09 modified 2006 05 08 use new digit pattern d lines beginning with a semicolon are ignored unless they contain the special keywords grep or nogrep p the following line switches GREP interpretation on for all entries up to a nogrep switch grep d Lt 0 gt the next switch turns off grep subsequent
205. a link or you may use a hyper links relation editor that is identical to the code code relations editor see How to create new relations on page 346 Newly defined or edited relations must also be saved to disk Traversing Hyperlinks Media type quotations can be distinguished easily by their icons These icons may be used in the margin area the Object Manager the Object Explorer the Crawler and in Network Views The figure below shows the media types of hyperlinked quotations in the margin From top to bottom these are text video audio image and Google Earth hyperlinks 2 4 lt shown in GE map gt 1 lt shown in GE map gt lt discusses gt 13 38 7 lt expands gt 19 1 live link GE 15 5 6 E 88 Figure 274 Media types for hyperlinks To traverse hypertext links using the margin area F Switch on the margin area If needed open up the properties context menu in the margin area and select Object Types HvrenuNKs the margin area is highlighted and a pop up window displays the hyperlink s Double click a hyperlink displayed in the margin The quotation to the left of contents ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 368 double click to open hyperlinked quotation in pop up window It is my pleasure to escort you now back to the London of 1888 and around the area where the five murders took ETO j y Figure 275 Traversing hyperlinks To display the
206. a preferences E Several individual preferences can be set for the margin area the kind of objects shown whether icons should be used whether in place editing should be allowed etc In order to set your individual preferences Select Extras Prereremces PREFERNCES GENERAL PREFERENCES or use the wrench button and then select the Margin tab Status Bar 8 The status bars at the bottom of the window The leftmost field tells the user about successful termination of operations displays the file name of the currently loaded file contains short help texts for menu items and buttons and shows error messages when necessary Figure 8 The status bar ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 47 Pop up or context menus are activated with a right mouse button click Towards the right side the current size of the loaded document is shown Next to it the ATLAS ti icon It changes to a pen when the PD is switched to edit mode The next field displays the document s content type e g rich text rich text doc PDF image audio video and GEO Click the Default button to select the language Galician a German P Greek Greenlandic Hausa Latin Hebrew Hungarian Icelandic Igbo Indonesian Inuktitut Latin Trish isiXhosa isiZulu Italian Figure 9 Select the language you are using The Pop up Menus Context or pop up menus are us
207. a text on real paper using an eraser and a pencil affects only one specific occurrence of a code all other occurrences of the same code are untouched The effect of the operation is local With ATLAS ti you can do the same However you can do additional things that are not possible using traditional paper and pencil techniques By renaming or removing a code from an HU you are affecting every occurrence of the code throughout the entire HU The effect is global Renaming the code will instantly change all the code links in the margin to reflect the new name Deleting it will remove all occurrences in the margin and from all other contexts in which it was engaged like network views families etc To Rename a Code Select a code in a Network View or in one of the following places the code drop down list the Code Manager the Object Explorer or the Code Forest from the main menu The Rename option is also available from the context When selecting a code from a list you can use the Copes Rename function menu Enter the new name and click OK Another method to rename a code is to use In Place Editing This option is available in the Code Manager the Object Explorer and the margin area Renaming a code in place in the margin area has two different effects The code can be renamed globally affecting all occurrences or replaced by another code locally This preference can be set via the Margin tab of General Preferenc
208. abel shows the user defined color Coding PDF documents PDF documents allow for various ways of coding Basically there are no restrictions you can code any area within the document If it is text you code the characters of the text If the PDF file contains an image then ATLAS ti ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 208 automatically switched to image mode and you code a rectangular area within the PDF file Below you find a number of screen shots demonstrating the various options Coding as usual F Just highlight a section of text as you do in other text documents The difference is that you can set a selection color see PDF preferences and that a PDF quotation has a handle on the top left and bottom right that you is available it is too far away most times we have to walk 10 to 15 minutes to places where we can access safe drinking water think the solution would be for us to recycle our waste THREATS are snxiOlpeaine water as lam told has T A more recent survey of 1 150 children undertaken by UK supermarket chain Somerfield Aidit around So per f ch age o 11 t Figure 124 Coding a text segment in a PDF primary document can use to easily modify the size of the quotation see image below Coding embedded images Select a rectangular area of your choice and use the handle at each corner to scale to the appropriate size found that around 50 per cent of children
209. acking Up Projects The Copy Bundle function lets you make a copy of your entire project i e the HU and all associated files packed as a single file As such it serves a dual purpose Portability to migrate a project to another location and data security a powerful backup amp restore device Copy Bunbte is a powerful tool By inspecting the HU it finds and collects all files that make up the project the data files used as PDs and all associated auxiliary files It checks the accessibility of the data sources and provides feedback in problematic situations From all the project files it compiles a single compressed file On a target computer installing a bundle distributes the HU the data source files and all associated files to appropriate location s Under Toots Copy Bunpte you find two functions One to create a bundle and the other to unpack or install a bundle The two procedures are explained below Create a Bundle Create Bundle creates a single compressed archive containing the project In order to create a well behaving bundle e g one that can be unpacked without effort on a target system the project should have been set up with flexible use of references in the first place See Scenario 1 recommended Working with One Project Folder for Single Users and Teams on page 114 for details The Copy Bundle Tool The bundle tool is separated into three list panes and one report pane see Figure below
210. acters Textual quotations represent for the computer a sequence of characters strings and can be of arbitrary size Sentences speech turns or paragraphs are often the basis for the length of textual quotations Only text offers enough syntactical clues to allow for searches for the occurrence of specific evidence that may support a concept Text also offers the option for automatic segmentation as used by the Auto Coding procedure Text Search amp Auto Coding on page 225 Graphic Quotations The creation activation and display of graphical quotations has similarities with but also differs from their textual counterparts A graphical quotation is a rectangular region inside a graphical PD From its data structure it is identical to textual quotations since their main attributes are also the PD identifier and two coordinates that mark the beginning and end defining a rectangle through its upper left and lower right corner Handling graphical quotations is largely analogous to marking text passages in a textual document Creating and Working with Graphical Quotations on page 187 PDF Quotations PDF quotations can be of a textual or of a graphical nature The quotation references for textual quotations indicate the page number and the start and end position on the basis of character counts For example 31 1537 31 1745 means that this quotation is from page 31 starting at character 1537 and ending at character 174
211. activated and displayed are listed in black Quotations from PDs that are available but cannot be loaded due to an issue with editing either a mismatching log file or changes made outside of ATLAS ti are displayed in red See Rule No 2 Never delete modify or move the auxiliary log file page 140 Quotations from PDs with inaccessible data source files are displayed in See The ATLAS ti Referencing Model page 105 Quotations that can be loaded but are loaded via the fallback path are shown in a dark red color The fallback path is either the HU or the TBPATH See Special Paths page 108 It is advisable to optimize that path settings when this occurs Documents Dara Source Manacement Optimizes Parus Quotation Manager Toolbar Figure 20 Quotation Manager Tool bar From left to right Open text pane for writing comments in a full fledged text editor e Toogle The windows either is display always on top default or is closed when you click somewhere else e Open a network view on the selected quotation Move forward to the next quotation or back to the last one e Create the link source for a hyperlink Hypertext page 360 Create the target link for a hyperlink Delete selected quotation s Various View options ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 58 Quotation Manager Columns dd Name Density Codes Stat Size Author Created Modified Figure 21 Quotat
212. advances the focus to the next list entry unless a matching name cannot be found A very powerful variation to locate list entries is by typing the asterisk as the first character While the standard incremental search is always anchored to the start of the name using the asterisk allows the matching string to appear anywhere inside the name Example typing ref would jump to entry External Reference while ref would stop at Reference if such an entry exists This feature is especially useful for searching the Quotation Manager as quotations have a numeric prefix like 208 1977 Avoid long pauses between entering characters After a certain system defined timeout the next character starts a new forward search In place Label Editing In place editing in Object Managers is a convenient way to rename objects On a selected item you can initiate in place editing by either clicking again or pressing the F2 key Don t rush the second click though as this initiates a double click action Editing Text In the Object Managers the comment for the selected object or a memo s content is displayed in the text pane below the list pane You may edit the text right there or you might prefer to open a full fledged text editor see button to the left For minor changes working in the Object Manager s text pane is quite comfortable There are several ways to save a changed comment With General Preferences set to Accept ch
213. am 08 11 2009 18 LETTER team 08 13 2009 19 letter authenticity Tom 08 11 2009 Letter 20 letter commonalities team 08 11 2009 Letter 21 letter content team 08 11 2009 Letter 22 letter date team 08 11 2009 Letter N ur letter_differences team 08 11 2009 Letter Figure 311 Code list using style sheet Sortable Table Example CSS Switcher Create The output shown in the figure below might be used in presentations because presentations it displays HU information in a more comprehensible way ing styl ond e This particular style sheet example makes the point that you can go in wildly differing directions with your design ideas when it comes to displaying your ATLAS ti data to the outside world solely equipped with a Web browser ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 406 NUN Jack the Ripper stage ll 62 HU Info HU Content Figure 312 Using the CCS switcher style sheet to choose between different displays of the same information about your HU The examples shown here created from the same data source are intentionally overdesigned so as to give an impression of the wide variety of options that are possible Example Code book The style sheet Modern Codes a report of codes with comments can be used to create a code book in table format It displays all codes including creation date and author information in the first column of the table and the code definitions that you have written in t
214. an a few words as code word consider using quotations or the code comment instead Like codes memos have names These names or titles are used for displaying memos in browsers and help to find specific memos Just like code names a memo s title should be short and concise Don t mix the name with the content How Memos and Comments Differ Memos are very similar to comments in that both are intended to hold lengthy texts as opposed to codes that are simply naming a concept Comments exclusively belong to one entity For example the PD comment is part of the primary document ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH MEMOS 255 Comments are not displayed in browsers separately from the object to which they are attached Memos can be associated with more than one object and have an additional type attribute e g theoretical methodological commentary etc They can also be free standing unlike comments Memo Content Memos may use plain text as well as Unicode or Rich Text The latter allows extended formatting and offers the option to insert pictures tables etc You can also include local file names like file notation The Memo Editor For displaying and editing memos a modified text editor is used It is opened via the Memo Manager s toolbar for an existing selected memo or when creating a new memo fr 29 Memo ME 15 07 2011 137 ES CRs E Type memo Figure 156 The memo editor Below the too
215. an cover relatively large areas of the workspace You can use the roll up mode to save screen space In order to roll up a window click on the icon on the top left of the window as shown in Figure 13 and the select the roll up option from the menu Memo Manager HU financial crisis June 08 Viederherstellen Verschieben Gr e ndern Minimieren o Maximieren x Schlie en Alt F4 v Rollup Mode Ctrl Shift R v Alwayson Top Ctrl Shift T Figure 13 Activate the roll up mode to optimize space Launching an Object Manager Simply click on the button left to the drop down list ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 50 P Dos Ml P 4 1 Jack the Ripper Letters rtf 30 v Figure 14 Launching an object manager 4 Primary Doc Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage II 62 gasta Documents Edit Miscellaneous Output View i Eh S 7 AA Name 1_Jack the Ripper Story Introductio Transcript Jack the Ripper Introduc 1 Jack the Ripper_Story rtf 1_Jack the Ripper_Letters rtf 2_Victim_Mary_Ann_Nichols pdf 2_Victim_Annie_Chapman pdf 2 Victim Annie Chapman scene o 2 Victim Elizabeth Stride pdf 2 Victim Catherine Eddowes pdf 2 Victim Mary Jane Kelly pdf 3 Investigation Suspects pdf Description of the victim Annie Chapman Source Wikipedia http en wikipedia org wiki Annie Chapman Figure 15 The Primary Document P Doc Manager Alternatively select the option Prim
216. and quotations if not needed The benefit of exporting the entire HU lies in applying style sheets to create impressive reports browsers and formats suited for other applications By using ATLAS ti s XML Converter and the supplied style sheets on HUs exported as XML you can create output usually HTML displayed in the web browser installed on your system The steps for exporting an entire HU as XML file where explained above in the section Exporting an entire HU as XML file on page 412 The default folder for storing XML files also contains the style sheets and several other auxiliary files that are used when working with the ATLAS ti converter see Creating Reports with the XML Converter on page 400 If you select a different folder to store XML files customizable via General Preferences but still want to make use of the ATLAS ti converter make sure that you copy the content of the default XML folder to your new XML folder ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT HTML Export 423 When using XML as an exchange format to transfer memos and codes between HUs or when creating XML version HUs you will lose some formatting of the texts contained in the memos and codes The HU to XML export and conversion utility allows an alternative and very powerful and flexible approach to creating web pages for users willing to learn how to program style sheets Using HTML Export and specifying the layout using the HTML gener
217. and service packs are regularly available to update your installation The program downloads and installs these service packs automatically Provided you have administrative rights to your computer note under VISTA and Windows 7 you need to explicitly run ATLAS ti as administrator in addition to being logged in with full administrator rights in Windows ATLAS ti checks for new service packs upon start up this requires an Internet connection If a new service pack is found you will be informed and asked to install it ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL APPENDIX 437 To run the software as administrator for VISTA and Windows 7 users menu select the option that appears in the language of your Windows Right click on the program icon instead of double clicking From the context system Run as ADMINISTRATOR generated by ATLAS ti pops up informing you that you run the software in A Windows message pops up that you need to confirm Next a message administrative mode Confirm this message as well Now you should have the necessary rights to install service packs and also to create new user accounts Live Update Settings A ATLAS ti Live Update Connection Settings e Automatic update check on startup E Prohibit checking for updates for all users 7 Check for updates on startup Proxy settings Try direct connection ignore proxy server Automatic proxy detection Use these proxy settings E Enable proxy aut
218. and the tree one more level you gain access to the full context with a click on the quotation link In the section Explaining frequency count and number of quotations listed on page 304 it is explained how to interpret the listed quotations If you want a count of the number of quotations that co occur you need to run the table explorer see below The Co occurrence Table Explorer The Co occurrence Table Explorer in comparison to the Tree Explorer shows the frequencies of co occurrence in form of a matrix similar to a correlation matrix that you may know from statistical software ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 301 a Codes Aces Table X investigation susp YK name of suspect T murder site 26 0 2 murderer descripti Z murder profiling 1 SH reason suspected T investigation theo XX name of victim 1 Y reason suspected d reason suspected _ m Winvestigation_suspe SH name of suspect s T murder site 26 0 F murderer descripti H murder profiling 1 Ti reason suspected T investigation theor X name of victim 1 YG reason suspected Yt reason suspected T reason suspected Yi date of murder 1 Z investigation_doub m investigation name of sus murder site murderer de murder profi reason suspe imvestigatic investigation s name of y ell murder site murderer desc NA murder_profilir profs
219. anded and you need to move your mouse over the cell entry to see the full code label This will change in version 7 Another way to reduce the codes to be displayed in the table is by setting a code family as filter before running the Co occurrence Table Explorer ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 304 Inspecting Content In order to see the quotations associated with the two co occuring codes the table cell can be expanded as shown in figure 205 The quotations in the drop down list provide a direct link to the data in context name of suspect Cohen reason for being suspected behavioral clues 11 34 Cohen exhibitetP iolent destructive tendencies 7 941 7 1379 11 35 coincided with the end of the murders Described a 7 1 7 196 11 164 coincided with the end of the murders Described a 7 1 7 1379 Figure 205 Expanded cell in the Co occurrence Table Explorer The number of co occurrences in the above example is two however three quotations are listed Why this is the case is explained next Explaining frequency count and number of quotations listed The co occurrence frequency does not count single quotations it counts co occurrence events If a single quotation is coded by two codes this would count as a single co occurrence The complications arise when we take overlapping quotations into account In such a case when each of the two quotations is coded by one of the
220. ane of the query tool window Similarly you can activate quotations in the Co occurence Tools that result from a co occurence query page 304 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 225 Text Search amp Auto Coding Click this button to activate text search Short cut Ctrl F The Text Search Tool is used to search within primary texts for the occurrence of specific text strings that match a designated string or pattern The Text Search Tool offers three distinct methods entitled Standard Search Category Search and GREP Search to scan primary texts for specified text patterns The functionality of the Text Search Tool is also fully integrated into the Auto Coding Tool see The Auto Coding Tool on page 231 The search mode is automatically determined by the kind of search string entered Regular Expression search GREP however must be explicitly selected If you need to know what GREP stands for and what GREP searches are a detailed explanation is provided at GREP Search on page 229 The Text Search Tool To open the Text Search tool Load a primary text Either click the text search button in the PD toolbar select Epit Searcu from the main menu or use the key combination Crn F p A Text Search Enter or select Search Expression Figure 135 Text search tool If the document is in Edit mode Ctrl F opens a Windows standard text search Use the menu option or th
221. anges in browser silently an object s comment or a memo s body is saved automatically whenever you select another object in the list This is the default setting and a quick way to save However you will also change the text if you click on another item accidentally ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 54 If you are not using the Quick Save option you need to confirm saving the comment memo when selecting another object in the list Changes can be explicitly saved at any time by pressing the Ctrl S key combination or via Epit Accept from the Object Manager s menu Primary Document Manager For many operations the Primary Document Manager is easier to handle than the drop down list For instance using drag amp drop files can be assigned directly and very efficiently to an HU see Assigning Documents using Drag amp Drop on page 79 The PD Manager also allows drag amp drop rearranging of the documents see Rearranging Primary Documents Using Drag amp Drop on page 82 Double click Double clicking a PD loads the data source and displays its content in the PD pane Single click pause single click or F2 activates in place editing of PD names Multiple Selection You can select more than one PD at a time This is useful for printing a selected list of PDs Output List Q Colors Usable PDs are colored black e PDs that are available but cannot be loaded due to a consistency
222. another quotation is by flying When you press the SHIFT key during a transfer you are tele ported to the other location directly The default speed can be set via Extras Prererences Goocte EARTH PREFERENCES ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 197 Extrusion Display Quotations at elevated levels Usually the placemark icons are fixed to the ground For hilly environments or between large buildings you can raise the icon like a balloon to a certain height in meters above ground The icon is always tied to the ground with a connecting line You can set extrusion via Extras Prererences Goocte EARTH PREFERENCES Display a GE Quotation in Google Maps If Google Earth is just too heavy you may open a GE quotation in Google Maps instead Select a quotation e g in the Quotation Manager From the Miscellaneous menu select Open in Google Maps If you have created hyperlinks to Google Earth quotations right click on the hyperlink and select the option Open in Google Maps This opens your Internet browser on the same location However you do not have tilt and heading Currently there is a fixed zoom factor for the Google Map view Import Google Earth Quotations If KM files include placemark features these can be imported as quotations The meta information that was inserted into the placemark is inserted into the quotation comment field in ATLAS ti The default setting is to import placem
223. arks during the process of assigning a KML KMZ file as primary document This can be configured in the GE Preferences window Assign a KML or KMZ file as primary document Documents Assicn AssicN Currently KML and KMZ files have to be created in GoogleEarth If you have created them elsewhere open them in GoogleEarth and save them again Then assign them Next select Documents MisceLLANEOUS Import Quotations from the main menu Create Graphical Snapshot PDs The images provided by Google Earth are not stable They may change over time When views are changed is not known to the regular user Thus although positions on earth are stable the views are not A new set of aerial and satellite images may yield a whole different set of details This makes making snapshots from a current view a practical thing Furthermore you can code detailed sections within a graphical PD Such PDs do not require Google Earth to be installed Position Google Earth to the desired view either manually or by selecting a GE quotation ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 198 Resize the GE window to the desired size The content you see will be used for the PD Only the main area is used the side bar title etc are ignored Configure all needed layers From the drop down Assign button select New GE Snapshot PD i ig Assign New Text Document Import Survey Data Import PD Family Table
224. arrister and a special pleader until his death 4 numsrous orthographical mistakes despite college education Quotation Nr 8 John Pizer 1850 1897 was a Polish Jew who worked as a boot maker in Source 3 Investigation Suspects pdf Whitechapel Quotation Nr 9 Michael Ostrog 1833 1904 was a Russian born professional con Source 3 Investigation Suspects pdf man 3 He used numerous aliases and disguises Among his many dubious claims was that he had once been a surgeon in the Russian naw o Figure 315 Table excerpt in MS Word Creating and Modifying Style Sheets In addition to the few examples presented above many more examples are included that can show you a variety of practical style sheet applications If you already know how to write XSLT style sheets use the supplied examples as a point of departure for your explorations If you are motivated to learn XSLT they can serve as study material for basic and advanced XSLT coding Many more examples are supplied to give you a hint of the limitless possibilities in designing and individualizing ATLAS ti XML output Check our Web site http www atlasti com for additional information on ATLAS ti s XML support as well as for an emerging repository of useful style sheets and dedicated service providers who specialize in creating custom applications interfaces and conversions on the basis of ATLAS ti s XML XSLT capabilities Let s take a look at some of the examples for ma
225. art of the group Following a special syntax you can also create PD families that can be imported or exported as variables with two or more characteristics based on an Excel table like Gender male and Gender female PD Families can be later used to restrict code based searches like Show me all data segments coded with attitude towards the environment but only for ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN CONCEPTS AND FEATURES Quotations 28 females who live in London as compared to females who live in the country side You can also use PD families as filer to reduce other type of output like a frequency count for codes across a particular group of documents See the chapter on Working with Variables Primary Document Families below on page 245 A quotation is a segment from a PD that is interesting or important to the user In textual documents a quotation is an arbitrary sequence of characters ranging from a single character a word a sentence or a paragraph up to the entire data file Free quotations resemble passages scribbled on the margin of a book Usually quotations are created by the researcher However if repetitive words or phrases are contained in the text the Auto Coding feature can be used to automatically segment these quotations and assign a code to them When a quotation is created ATLAS ti automatically assigns an identifier to it This identifier is built from the index of the primary text to which it b
226. ary Doc Manacer Quotation Manacer Cove Manacer or Memo Manacer from the corresponding main menu entry The Object Manager Window The four Object Managers have some common properties The general layout of their window is as follows Title Menu and Toolbar The title bar displays the object type In the figure above the PD Manager is shown The menu and the toolbar below the title bar offer access to frequently used functions some of which are also accessible from pop up menus As the functions are different for all four object types menu and toolbar options differ for the four Object Managers The toolbar options are described in more detail below The menu items resemble the corresponding main menus in the HU Editor Note that not all options are available at all times Some menu and toolbar options need either a single selection or multiple selections ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 51 The List Pane Below the toolbar is the list pane Unlike the Object Explorer or the Network Editor that can handle heterogeneous collections of objects the Object Managers display objects of only one type When you are in Details view mode a number of attributes of the items are displayed in a table like manner The order of the columns can be changed by dragging a column to a different position in the list Items can be sorted or reversed by clicking on the respective column header The Text Pane The text
227. as well And this is how it works Create an internal document for every document that you want to convert Documents Assicn New Text Document Then load a primary document that you want to convert Highlight the entire text Ctrl A and copy the entire text Ctrl C Load the new internal file and enter into edit mode by clicking on the Edit button Paste the text into new internal document Ctrl V The coding is transferred to the new document as well Save the document and leave edit mode Repeat this process for all documents that you want to convert click on the document in the Primary Document Manager and select Disconnect all documents that are now converted into internal files Right Disconnect from the context menu or click on the Disconnect button Save the HU Fite Save ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL PROJECT BACKUP AND MIGRATION 128 Project Backup and Migration Keep both the regular backup and the automatic recovery backup on Backup Copies The defaults settings is that ATLAS ti creates a backup copy of an existing HU before overwriting it on save Backup files can be distinguished from their original by a name prefix For file Sample hpr6 a backup file backup of Sample hpr6 would be created To change the default setting select Extras Prererences GENERAL PREFERENCES Tab Storace from the main menu or click on the Preference button in the main tool bar Cra
228. ason released alive long after killing stopped 5 Y reason released allegation unproven doubtful 3 0 Y reason released does not fit characteristics 8 0 Y reason released lack of evidence 3 0 Y reason released mix up of names 8 3 Y reason released never taken seriously 3 0 Y reason released theory disputed 3 0 3 amp reason released theory rebutted 10 0 Y REASON SUSPECTED 0 0 amp reason suspected attention seeking 4 0 3G reason suspected behavioral clues 5 1 Y reason suspected could have been there 15 2 X reason suspected fiction historic research 13 0 Y reason suspected fitting the profile 14 1 Y reason suspected killed others 13 1 Y reason suspected knew victim 4 0 EC reason suspected witness 4 0 T ROLE OF THE MEDIA 0 0 YX role of the media aiding investigation 3 0 XX role of the media facilitating free riding 1 0 XX role of the media legend building 9 0 R role of the media sensationalizing 4 0 NS VICTIM 1 0 Yt victim 1 Mary Ann Nichols 3 1 im 2 Annie Chapman 3 1 Figure 132 Structured code list Code Manager in List View All terms preceding the underscore _ or colon indicate the main category name the terms following the underscore or colon constitute subcodes Other projects may require additional sublevels But don t overdo it ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 222
229. assle free Please see Scenario 1 for a simple project approach Project management however becomes an issue if your projects and your work environment are more complex than this most basic scenario What s in a project In short an ATLAS ti project consists of an HU and its associated document files ATLAS ti project management involves an understanding of how ATLAS ti handles and accesses documents see The ATLAS ti Referencing Model on page 105 It concerns itself with ways to fine tune data source access for a maximum of robustness and flexibility but first and foremost proper project management involves decisions regarding where HUs and documents are to be stored Most problems can be avoided by a little informed planning about issues such as file locations and paths and the need to copy move and distribute your HUs across disks networks and computers HU management is the least problematic if you can store all project related documents in the same folder along with the HU itself or in a subfolder see ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT Various project scenarios are presented 113 Figures 52 and 53 on page 109 However ATLAS ti also easily facilitates the distribution of files across the file system and across different computers and networks These procedures are also discussed in this section There are various types of ATLAS ti users there are those who have stronger or weaker computer
230. aster project ABC hpr6 Project ABC James hpr Project ABC Mary hpr E E EEE data oe source files subfolder 2 Project ABC Peter hpr STER Project ABC Tom hpr subtolder 3 subfolder 1 subfolder 2 Figure 82 Project setup for team scenario 1 HUPATH Project Setup Tasks of Team Members Create an ATLAS ti user account on your computer and log in under your name see page 153 Access your HU file on the shared drive As the HU file name contains your name you can easily see which file you are supposed to work on F Work on your part of the project Do not change the order of the PDs otherwise there will be a problem when merging the various subprojects This means extra work for the project administrator as he or she needs to adjust the order of the documents in each affected HU Save your individual HU file to the common project folder after each work session Editing Primary Documents all Editing primary documents can be allowed without restrictions as ATLAS ti controls that no two persons edit the same primary document at the same time See the chapter on Editing Primary Documents in Team Projects on page 145 for further detail ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 159 Merging A Task for the Project Administrator The project administrator merges the sub projects according to previously agreed upon time intervals e g in the evenings first thing in the morning
231. ated and they access their source document via the HUPATH This means you need to store the HU file the five Word documents in rich text format in a common folder as shown below If the PDs do not yet exist in the HU new PDs are created and are assigned to the HU J ATLAS ti data folder Ea case 1 rtf in case 2 rtf Wi cae3nr E rif source files i case 4 rtf id case 5 rtf Import PD Family table exmple hpr ATLAS ti HU file Figure 154 File Management for creating an HU via importing a PD Family table Adding new PDs If your HU already contains PDs you can assign additional PDs by importing a PD Family table However you must be sure that the new PDs are numbered consecutively If your HU already contains P1 to P10 the numbers of the additional PDs in the documents column need to start at P11 If the document number and path reference do not match an existing reference then this document is ignored and not assigned as a PD Based on the above example table PD Family Manager shows the following families after importing the table ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH VARIABLES PRIMARY DOCUMENT FAMILIES 251 If you have named your variable families using a different separator change the separator when prompted r fF Primary Doc Family Manager HU Import PD Family tabl ES Quotes gender male 0 2 profession police 0 2 profession teacher 0 e reading novels 0 m
232. ategory name the terms following the underscore constitute subcategories As category and subcategory names may contain more than one word an empty space cannot be used to separate the two levels of coding The symbols used here underscore colon have no syntactic function Additional subievels may also Sut dE http www casebook org suspects cari feigenbaum html Feigenbaum Figure 313 Use the style sheet Modern codes to create a code book You can copy and paste this table from Internet Explorer into a MS Word document or other applications and if desired add some further formatting Example All coded segments sorted by codes If you want to output all quotations sorted by codes then the style sheet Print codes in full with comments can be used You need to be aware that this potentially may result in large outputs as you cannot apply filters Nonetheless this output is frequently used and asked for e g as a means to add transparency to the analysis process and to make outcomes available to third parties The result is a list of tables one for each code displaying the code name and its definition comment in the first row and all quotations underneath The rows for the quotations are split in two columns the first column displays the quotation ID and comment in case a comment has been written You can only output textual information For image geodata or multimedia quotations only a reference is provided
233. ation it is linked to the target quotation and it replaces the object it was dropped on the latter is unlinked from its quotation ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH MEMOS To copy linked objects hold down the Ctrl key and drag a margin object e g a code onto another quotation bar 261 Copy Linked Objects An object in the margin is unlinked from its original quotation when it is dropped onto another quotation bar or onto another margin object To keep the object from unlinking from its original place hold down the CTRL key when dropping This resembles dragging objects from managers and browsers into the margin area which does not change existing links Linking Quotations Dragging a quotation bar onto another quotation bar creates a new hyperlink between the two see Creating Hyperlinks in Margin Area on page 366 Merging Quotations By holding down the CTRL key you can merge the quotations The following messages pops up 9 Merging 1 quotations into 3 1 C l E Choose YES to expand the boundary of the merge target y to cover the combined boundaries of both quotations Choose NO to preserve the boundary of the merge target only Nein Abbrechen Figure 161 Merging quotations Click YES if you want that the new quotations encompassed the length of both of the quotations Click No if you want the dragged quotation to be deleted thus merged into the ta
234. ation is removed Two methods are described in the following sections To unlink several codes from a quotation This method is used to remove a number of codes linked to a specific quotation Open the context menu of the desired quotation Choose Ununk Cones from the context menu From the list of all codes connected to this quotation displayed in a pop up window select the codes to be unlinked and click OK In the margin area you can see the immediate effect of this operation the unlinked codes disappear To unlink a single code from a quotation This method is a very direct manipulation of the association between a code and a specific quotation using the interactive margin areas F Switch on the margin area display Right click a code in the margin area area It does not disappear from other places in the margin where it has been Choose Unuk from the context menu The code disappears from the margin used Remember the Deere option removes the code for good including all associations with quotations codes memos etc If you want to remove a code from a Network View but do not want to actually delete it select the option Remove From View from the context menu Merging Codes When developing a coding scheme it may happen in the course of the analysis that two or more codes essentially mean the same thing One cause could be the import of code lists with different names but similar meanings ATL
235. ation that is used in the edit query window is not so easy to understand Therefore it is advisable that you enter the query into the comment field of the super code You can copy and paste it from the feedback pane into the comment field Editing a super code If you want to edit the query a super code is based upon highlight the super code in the Code Manager and select Miscettaneous Enit Query from the menu F Click on the Help button for instructions r Query Editor on Super Code reason released alibi lack of evidence Edit expression Click Help for hints c reason released alibit c reason released lack of evidence Current query in infix notation K c reason released alibi c reason released lack of evidence All editing MUST be done in prefix syntax operator first When changing or adding entities make sure they already exist All entity names need to be terminated by a single exclamation mark All exclamation marks which are part of names need to be duplicated Example for a family f No She said This expression reason released alibi reason released lack of evidence Figure 183 Editing a super code query Auto Optimization of Super Code Queries In order to take into account quotations that were manually removed from the hit list in the result pane of the Query Tool the system must modified the query before a Super Code is created Otherwise
236. ations Using Drag amp Drop This technique allows you to virtually throw pieces of text into the quotations list This however only works for textual not of PDF files txt doc docx rtf Move the mouse pointer into the selected text The pointer will change to its drag amp drop appearance TA By holding down the left mouse button drag the selection into the quotation drop down list or the Quotation Manager ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 184 unidentified serial killer E Quotation Manager HU Jack the Ripper s x arca and adjacent districts Quotations Edit Miscellaneous Output View tiginated in a letter sent to on AA 2 claiming to be the LA lads Name About 11 p m 30 August Mary A 5 2 She was born Mary Ann Walker i Mortuary photograph of Mary An While her death certificate st Eliza Sarah Henry Alfred The The victims were women earning ostitutes Most victims sutilated The removal ne officials at the hatomical or surgi id been growing during this ety on the killer because of e police to capture the Figure 103 Creating quotations using drag amp drop You have just created a quotation A new entry appears in the quotations drop down list and the Quotation Manager In the margin a bar will be displayed Quotations are also be created in the course of coding or memoing using drag amp drop Quotation re
237. ator on the other hand is simply a matter of clicking options without any need to learn HTML Potential reasons for creating HTML versions of Hermeneutic Units include Create a web publication Even intermediary results can be presented to other researchers without much effort These reports are readable without needing ATLAS ti on every system that has a web browser available Create a report A convenient way to create a printout of almost all objects contained in a Hermeneutic Unit using a web browser ATLAS ti s HTML code generation converts the Hermeneutic Unit currently being worked with into an HTML document The user can control the HTML creation entirely via the HTML Preferences dialog box Of course the generated code can be edited and refined with a plain text editor or specialized HTML tools if you are knowledgeable in HTML Exporting an HU as HTML Document Specify all desired characteristics using the ATLAS ti HTML setup under Extras GeneraL Prererences HTML PrerereNnces ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT 424 JB HTML Preferences m General Primary Docs Codes Memos Families Network Views Character encoding jure 3 File extension for image links mf Short report disables all other controls V Indude statistics V Create contents table V Include link to project V indude HU comment V Indude author s OK Cancel Figure 325 The HTML prefer
238. ators is rejected You cannot for instance remove the user who is logged in Select the user to be removed in the list right click and select the option Derete User or or select the corresponding menu item from the Ep menu Changing user attributes You can change the account name the password the first and last names of a user and the access rights menu or highlight a user and select the corresponding menu item from the Right click on a user entry and select the appropriate option from the context Epit menu None of the menu options except New user will be available if you select yourself in the list of users If you need to change or even delete your own account log in under a different administrative account edit your normal account and log in again Extras Login Logging in can be accomplished without the need to restart ATLAS ti Saving the user database After new definitions and modifications the user database must be explicitly saved or all changes will be discarded If you close the user administrator window without saving you will be prompted to save Be default the user data base is stored in a file called HERMENCR HDB in the ATLAS ti program folder This name and folder should be used unless you are about to create a copy of the database To save the user data base select File Save from the main menu in the User Administration window Logging in After creating a new account the next step is log
239. author s productions Every object created including the Hermeneutic Unit itself is automatically stamped with a date time and author This identification of the author is what makes the log in process upon system start necessary which by default proceeds automatically Simultaneous collaboration is not supported so only one person can work on a specific Hermeneutic Unit at a time By default only the author who created the Hermeneutic Unit the owner or original author is authorized to load read and edit the Hermeneutic Unit Letting others participate in creating a Hermeneutic Unit requires a few bureaucratic adjustments one of which is the definition of users cf User Management on page 150 The simple concept of the ATLAS ti user management allows all data that will be shared by different users to be placed in publicly accessible directories But even with the Hermeneutic Units stored in a public directory access can be restricted to the author In other words Hermeneutic Units can either be private or public The default setting is pubic If set to private other users can be defined as co authors for this Hermeneutic Unit see Access Rights for the HU on page 154 To keep it simple it is best to leave the default setting to public access and to allow all users to create an account with administrative rights These rights only local area network or your Windows log in name ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL
240. available from the Documents Miscellaneous menu HU before proceeding This is needed to be able to access HU follower If you are importing into a new HU a dialog opens asking you to save the documents using the special lt HUPATH gt Save the HU into the same folder where the documents are stored unless you have entered an Origin column with user defined path references standard file dialog window opens immediately Select the prepared xls xlsx Next a file dialog opens If you are importing into an existing HU the or csv file and click OK to start the import procedure If you import a native Excel file tab delimited with the extension xls the families are imported immediately If you select an Excel compatible file format like csv select the field delimiter comma semicolon or tab Once the import is finished a message pops up informing you about the number of families that have been created Importing the above table results in the following HU ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH VARIABLES PRIMARY DOCUMENT FAMILIES 250 n 4 Primary Doc Manager HU Import PD Family table exmple Documents Edit Miscellaneous Output View aned oe E vu Origin lt HUPATH gt case 1 rtf lt HUPATH gt 1case 2 rtf lt HUPATH gt case 3 rtf lt HUPATH gt case 4 rtf lt HUPATH gt case 5 rtf Figure 153 HU file created based on importing a PD Family table Five PDs with the names case 1 to case 5 were cre
241. bal structure of nodes and links combined with an individual layout of nodes It is like viewing the same thing i e the network from different angles and with different pieces visible ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 321 Node Types The user can manipulate and display almost all objects within the HU as nodes in a network view quotations codes code families memos memo families other network views primary documents PDs and PD families The following discussion applies to all nodes regardless of their type See Node Types on page 324 further details Relations ATLAS ti allows you to establish named links to more clearly express the nature of the relationships between concepts With named links you may express a sentence like a broken leg causes pain by two nodes the source node broken leg and the target node pain connected with a named link causes or is cause of A default set of The name of a link is displayed in the Network Editor as a label attached to the relations is link midway between the two connected nodes Six pre set relations or link provided You types are available in ATLAS ti These standard relations can be substituted may define your modified or supplemented by user defined relations The default relations are own listed in the table below C1 and C2 are source and target nodes respectively Cricasocatedwin R h Be smere 2 N
242. bank folder If you have already assigned files Choose Documents Assicn Assicn from the main menu The file dialog box during this session the most recently used folder is opened By default all file types that are permitted to be assigned as PDs are offered By selecting from the filter drop down you can restrict the type of documents Browse and select one or more data source files to be assigned to the HU and click the Open button The selected files are assigned as PDs ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION Complete folders can be assigned in one step 79 Assigning Documents using Drag amp Drop Assigning documents via Drag amp Drop may be more convenient when you have different browsers opened on different folders Open Windows File Explorer e g by selecting Extras Explorer from the main menu F Select the folder from where you want to assign files F Select one or more files Drag the selected files into the document drop down list or into the Document Manager A single file can directly be dragged into the main PD area In addition to being assigned it is immediately displayed You may also drag amp drop sub folders This essentially assigns all files stored in the sub folders and any sub folders below Documents not compatible with ATLAS ti are rejected You can imagine that this operation can assign an unexpected number of files to your HU Make sure you know what is in the fol
243. ber of connections to codes quotations and memos for the selected quotation The connectivity counter provides an additional clue about the next step A quotation with less connections might be less painful to remove If you see a quotation listed more than once in one of the quotation list panes it means that three or more quotations are involved in a redundant coding You will notice that merging one pair of quotations may have the effect that other pairs are removed from the list as well as the redundancy assertion does not hold any longer for the remaining pairs of quotations for this code Unlinking Removing or Merging a Redundantly Coded Quotation Select a code in the upper pane All pairs of redundantly coded quotations are then displayed in the two lower panes Double click on the quotations of a pair to inspect them in context Decide whether you want to unlink or remove one of the two quotations or whether you want to merge them ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SPECIAL TOOLS 383 To unlink a quotation click the Untink button below the appropriate list pane The effect and alternative procedures of unlinking codes is described in further detail in Unlinking Codes on page 218 To remove a quotation click the Remove button below the appropriate list pane To merge the pair of quotations click the Merce button Note that the quotations removed by this procedure cease to exist inside the Hermeneutic Unit
244. bold italic for these object types If you have projects in different languages you can specify different font themes InVivo Code settings e First check whether the appropriate language is set in the language tab see above e Then select Extras PREFERENCES GENERAL PREFERENCES and then the Text EDITOR tab Select the desired language ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION Make your data sources as small as possible but as large as necessary 73 Storage paths Text Editors po Printing Memos Text Editors HU Editor PD Area vi vj v v ir Non DBCS Lanauage Support Convert Unicode text selections for InVivo coding using a specified language alos Use this language Bosnian Cyrillic Use Windows Language Bar setting 5 Don t convert text Figure 33 Language setting for InVivo coding System settings for Thai and Asian language support on Western European and US Windows systems In case you are working with Thai and Asian languages on non Asian systems such as Western European or US Windows the appropriate language pack needs to be installed on your computer Login to your computer with full administrative rights Select Start ControL PAnets REGIONAL AND LANGUAGE OPTIONS Select the Languages tab and then the option to install the language files that you need Under the Advance tab select the language in the field Language for no
245. bout Hanbury Street in 1967 1 01 73 3 25 7 10 Look into the yard where Chapmann was killed 23 50 14 24 gt 15 1 Berner Street Site of third murder 51 30 49 43 N 0 3 56 01 W gt 15 2 Buck s Row Site of first murder 51 31 11 42 N 0 3 39 99 W gt 15 3 Hanbury Street Site of second murder 51 31 12 43 N 0 4 5 81 W gt 15 4 Mitre Square Site of fourth murder 51 30 49 21 N 0 4 41 38 W gt 15 5 Dorset Street Site of fifth murder 51 31 7 53 N 0 4 30 36 W 15 6 Osborn Street potential JR victim 51 31 3 20 N 0 3 35 12 W 15 7 George Yard potential JR victim GE 51 30 59 57 N 0 412 14 W 16 1 Berner Street 3 murder 346 397 16 2 Buck s Row 1 murder 103 152 lt gt 16 3 Hanbury Street 2 murder 84 135 16 4 Mitre Square 4 murder 350 404 16 5 Dorset Street 5 murder 136 190 Figure 303 Quotation list output Speak Quotation Lean back close your eyes and let ATLAS ti read the quotation to you Currently this works only for English language text ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 396 The Codes Output Submenu Quotations for Selected Code Prints all quotations for the selected code s When quotations are exported headers for individual quotations include references to other codes and memos that are linked to those quotations This is also true for other output options including quotations Quotation List Prints a compact list of all quotatio
246. by Date 20 A list of codes and memos witha 19 10 2010 11 available HUs in 2 Expandable Boxes by Name 10 A list of codes and memos witha 05 11 2007 18 XML format J amp Expandable Boxes by Name 20 A list of codes and memos with a 19 10 2010 11 2 HU Entity Browser 10 A simple browser for HU entities 06 11 2007 19 1910201011 i HU Entity Browser 4 20 A simple browser for HU entities r Description of style sheet Figure 318 XML converter tool Conventions You will note that the XML Converter displays more than just the file name of the style sheets it found in the XML folder This additional information is part of the style sheets themselves The atlas description node within the atlas data namespace contains this self description Style sheets that do not use this header are not displayed in the converter Style sheets are stored in the ATLAS ti XML folder which you can conviently locate via the main menu option Extras ExpLorer XML Fo oper ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 412 Applying style sheets using the XML converter The XML Converter offers XML versions of HUs you have already created using the procedure described in Exporting an entire HU as XML file The XML Converter can only convert XML versions of ATLAS ti Hermeneutic Units It is not a generic tool for arbitrary XML conversions Select an XML file in the left browser pane entitled
247. by selecting its check box in the search list view You can turn on the Editing Places and display for entire search results by selecting that search folder s Folders check box You can also delete the entire METRE de contents of a search result by right bp tne folder and selecting Deiet p the fc Figure 39 Bookmarks docked to left boarder of HU editor ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 88 Changing the display size of PDF documents If you increase the size of the editor window the size of the PDF page is enlarged You can also use the Zoom buttons in the vertical tool bar and the size tab in the status bar to set the display size of your PDF document The size tab in status bar shows the actual size of the PD When clicking on the Size tab when a PDF document is loaded you have a few additional options Fit to Window Fit to Width Whole Page additional options for Sa PDF files Continuous v Single Page Figure 40 Additional display options for PDF files Navigating within Graphical Primary Documents To change the visible section of a graphical PD F Use the scroll bar F You can scroll up and down using the mouse wheel The cursor arrows and other navigational keys can be used When you click on the upper left corner of a graphical PD its comment is displayed in a pop up window Navigating within Multimedia Primary Documents Displa
248. cal five murders_more less than five murders_potentially attributed to JR reason released lack of evidence reason suspected knew victim role of the media_legend building role of the media_sensationalizing victim Emma Elizabeth Smith victim Martha Tabram Commented Codes only ei investigation stolen evidence 4 0 Information regarding evidence stolen from police records 2il investigation_suspected by whom 37 0 Persons e g police investigators journalists historians or book authors who suspect ed a specific person to be Jack the Ripper 2 investigation_theories 15 0 Various theories about Jack the Ripper s identity motives occupation life and death Y investigation theory by M Fido 4 0 9 Idea memo 0 Me F Susanne Create a single idea memo Guesses hunches thoughts dreams Instead of writing a separate memo for every new idea collect all of your ideas in a single memo If you have a hunch pertaining to a speci research topic insert it into the appropriate research question memo The overall aim of this suggested strategy should be to stay on track a revisit important thoughts with ease and not to end up with an unmanageable number of memos with scattered bits and pieces of informa hi if to Figure 326 Example HTML output ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT 426 Special Considerations Size of HTML Documents The more options you specify in the HTML
249. cannot be loaded again during the same session Figure 76 Server message informing users that a primary document is currently edited Agnes corrects the document and leaves edit mode and saves the changes made in the source file of P4 Tom tries to accesses P4 a bit later He receives a message stating that changes have been detected in P4 and that all PDs using this data source need to be synchronized In order to load the document Tom needs to confirm this message If he clicks NO he will not be able to load the document until he confirms the synchronization Modified PDs can only be loaded after all necessary alignments have been processed during the synchronization E PD out of sync o Changes detected in document I Exp w Smith rtf used by PD P4 To synchronize the dependent PD please confirm Figure 77 Synchronizing edited primary documents After synchronizing P4 Tom can continue to work on it add new codes memos etc He may also edit the document All other team members will be informed about any further modifications For this reason there is no danger that the team will end up with five different versions of the document Due to ATLAS ti s content surveillance system each team member works with the most up to date version of the document The only thing that remains to be done is to merge the Hus from all five team members from time to time so that all coding and other wor
250. cbe TEA Network vs Network View er pec peo ee e aarp inns E VL de CB pag UTE cat annie CERE esp ELDER Node Types m Mu dC E HE Einlevs Relatiori acc proce m e EE C HR REDEEM GEHE RR OE M Beo dood alienate The Role of Relations T TheNetWwork Editores c tarro dico UE AL MEI Ae RA Network ViewiCharacteristics 5 2 etti rettet EO S EHE Et Cep EE Ne ep rail AO E eu DIEN Node Types Codes as Nodes Memos as Nodes d Primary Documents as Nodes sodes ctis pcne telo Fee ai E ved n bcr edd d Quotations as Nodes iniae ia a E a E a E E aE a Y og Ree rk dee ER ae red De deut de Families as Nodes es Network Views a Nodes aoa ea be eae a al aa dn IG re ta pg aee Hs e st Basic Network View Procedures 3 3 d ed oen dra Ea teta bete E e er e Eee e Gaia lanai E ED Y ERE HN ita d Creating Network Views x TO create new NeEtWOrK VW loci To open a Network View On an Object ee eddie ere dadas Adding Nodes to a Network View Via Drag Drop Via the Import Nodes dialog T Selecting Nodes and LEinks u uci meo eie c ecce ODE A PERI edad To selecta single Node Sisin ru iarr nnani E r ipta tia LIMITE NODES NEE sncaiit To link two nodes using the toolbar icon is To link two nodes using mouse and Keyboard 2 siehe eei n ien d nene Pb dna 330 To link m r than two nodes 52i eee ca
251. cedures described below First of all it is useful to switch on the margin display to see the immediate effects of the coding process note there is no margin area for audio and video documents The margin area also permits the direct manipulation of the codes and the associations between the quotations and the codes To display the margin area Choose Views Marcin Area from the main menu or click the Margin Area button in the primary document toolbar The margin area is a useful feedback device during coding Codes are displayed alongside the quotation to which they are attached ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 200 After the murders police officials stated that they believed this letter and the postcard were hoaxes by a local journalist These suspicions were not well publicized and the idea that the killer had sent messages taunting the police became one of the enduring legends of the Ripper case Modem scholars are divided on which if any of the letter_authenticity X investigation suspected by whom letters should be considered genuine but the Dear Boss letter is one of three named _ lt live link GE 15 8 most frequently as potentially having been written by the killer A number of authors try to advance their theories by comparing handwriting samples of their suspects to the writing found in this letter Like many items related to the Ripper case the Dear Boss letter disappeared fr
252. ces HTML Prererences HTML Export page 423 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN CONCEPTS AND FEATURES 37 Miscellaneous Tools Object Crawler With the Object Crawler you can search all of the parts of your project within ATLAS ti that contain text Searches are not restricted to just textual PDs codes memos quotations all families code code links hyper links and the HU can be searched In addition the scope of the search can be limited to certain fields You find the Object Crawler under the Tools menu The Object Crawler page 373 Object Explorer The Object Explorer displays all the elements of an HU in a strictly hierarchical manner even if the structures are non hierarchical or even cyclic You find the Object Explorer under the Tools menu The Object Explorer page 375 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN STEPS IN WORKING WITH ATLAS TI 38 Main Steps in Working with ATLAS ti The figure below illustrates the main steps of working with ATLAS ti starting with the creation of a project adding documents identifying interesting things in the data and coding them Memos and comments can be written at any stage of the process whereas there is possibly a shift from writing comments like adding meta information to your documents first code nodes that later turn in to code definitions initial thoughts about specific data segments the ATLAS ti quotations to more extensive memo writing during the later stages of th
253. choo system sitogether it reduces continuity in health care provision for examcis y interrapting routine Immunisation programmas and may leave fari as with limited sccess ts hesith cars in preview the longer term Finally disease outbreaks ars common within displaced image or refuges communities communicabis d sesses such as cholers are rapidly transmitted between grouns cf people living in close proximity and health save water Figure 37 Single page view with preview image When selecting the single page view click on the Page button in the status bar to move back and forth Or click on the preview image to jump to the displayed page Figure 38 Page button in the i TUS In case the PDF document includes bookmarks a bookmark navigator is displayed In the preference window Extras Prererences PDF PrerereNces you can choose whether to display it where to place it on your screen and how much you want to see E Google Earth User Guide Introduction Google Earth User Guide Finding Places and Directions Google Earth User Guide Marking Places Google Earth User Guide Using Layers Google Earth User Guide Using Map Features Google Earth User Guide Using Places Google Earth User Guide About KML Google Earth User Guide Sharing Places Information Google Earth User Guide Touring Places Google Earth User Guide Editing Places and Folders Google Earth User Guide Google Goo
254. choose a merge strategy Choose a merge strategy The second step is the selection of how the source HU is to be merged into the target HU Four broad predefined strategies are available that can be customized in a second step Object classes can be selectively added unified or ignored see Concepts on page 172 above ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT The Merge Wizard offers a variety of options to set the merge strategy for every object type 1 Selecta strategy 174 Select one of the four stock strategies A short description of the strategy is displayed at the bottom left of the dialog box you can divert from the predefined stock strategyand manually define how Fine tune the strategy so it best suits your needs For all major object types the various object types are to be handled in the merge process A Defne me merge srate 00000 x Stock Strategies Same PDs Different Codes Quotations Different PDs Same Codes Codes Different PDs and Codes Memos E o Netviews e 2 Fine tune your PD Families 6 e selected strategy Code F Both PDs and code scheme of the merged E BE the same as in the target HU Memo Families V Merge Comments Short description of selected strategy lt Back Figure 94 Merge Tool Select a stock strategy and fine tune your selection The Merge Wizard offers a variety of options to set the merge
255. chronous display is still possible if you select Karaoke mode see below Karaoke Mode CrrL F4 Karaoke mode lets you follow multimedia content and text documents at the same time The multimedia document sets the pace while the current passage is highlighted in the text document Because of the moving text selection normal text work tasks such as creating quotations are not possible in this mode There are several ways of highlighting text in Karaoke mode To choose one of it select them from the Text menu of the Associations Editor or via the main menu A Docs Text HicHuicut Section Highlights the section between two anchors HicHucHr Line Highlights the entire line of text that corresponds to the position of the lead document HicHucur Woro Highlights the word that corresponds to the position of the lead document HicHucHr Character Highlights the character that corresponds to the position of the lead document Load the associated text document e g the transcript To start the Karaoke mode press Crri F4 or select A Docs Karaoke This activates both the SyncHro mode and the Karaoke mode Press F4 to start the multimedia document Both will now be shown side by side In the text document the passage is highlighted that is currently played back Importing and Exporting Associations Associations are saved together with the HU and remain affiliated For exchange between ATLAS ti projects they can a
256. codes code neighbors lists etc For memos you can either output just a list of your memos the content of memos or the content including the linked objects PDF You can print out coded documents as you see them on the screen with the codes in the margin area This option will be available in Version 7 You find it under Documents Output Print with Marcin XML Generator The XML generator exports all information contained in an HU in XML format This universal open data format allows for a wide variety of possibilities for display processing and even integration of your data with external applications Click on the XML button in the main tool bar to explore the options Further detail is provided in the full manual in the chapter Creating Reports with the XML Converter on page 400 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN CONCEPTS AND FEATURES 36 XML Converter The XML Converter lists HUs saved in XML format and applies so called style sheets miniature programs written in XSLT to the XML files The user may edit the supplied style sheets or add new ones Just to mention a few outputs that you can create using the XML style sheets e A nicely formatted code book Modern codes commented only A tag cloud for the elements in the HU HU tag cloud e A list of quotations sorted by documents Quotations List by Primary Documents e The content of quotations sorted by codes Print Codes in Full Use version 1 sty
257. codes within the Code Manager and create a report that contains quotations coded to each of the three codes Another option to restrict output is to work with filters See Sorting and Filtering on page 384 Creating Output for the Main Objects Under the main menu for each of the four main object types primary documents quotations codes and memos you can find an output submenu The corresponding object managers contain equivalent output menus However output options within object managers allow for the selection of specific items e g a subset of codes rather than all codes to be included in the output The output options for the four main object types are explained in detail below The Primary Documents Output Submenu The output submenu for primary documents List Generates a list of all primary documents in the HU If any of the PDs have a comment you are asked if these are to be printed as well Hierarchy Prints the selected PD s quotation numbers and their codes and memos in a hierarchical manner Quotations Prints all quotations belonging to the selected primary document Print with Margin The Print with Margin option creates a WYSIWYG printout of coded texts What You See Is What You Get It also prints texts with their paragraph numbers If you direct it to a PDF printer a PDF document is created Print with Margin is currently only available for textual primary documents The appearance of the printed
258. coding open ended questions from survey data and you want to keep the cases in synch with the cases in the SPSS file Name The name shows the first 30 characters of a textual quotation This is the default setting which can be changed under Extras Prererences GENERAL Prererences Quotations based on image audio or video files show the file name The name of a quotation can be renamed This is a useful option for image audio and video quotations as we will see below Start and end positions The figures in brackets after the quotation name show the location start and end position in the document For textual quotations the reference given is to the paragraph numbers within which the coded segment occurs 9 9 thus means that the quotation starts and ends in paragraph 9 For image files the rectangular area marked as the quotation is referenced Audio quotes use a time reference and for video quotations you can choose between time or frame numbers References for PDF quotations consist of page number and number of characters on the page for start and end positions In case the document contains columns the column number is provided as well Video tutorial http www youtube com watch v bU6nu aWhYM Activating and Displaying Textual and PDF Quotations Quotations can be activated retrieved and displayed by selecting an entry from the drop down list by double clicking on an entry in the Quotation Manager or by clicking on the
259. color of the affected Object Manager and drop down list changes You can modify this color by changing the Quicklnfo color via Windows display preferences In the figure below the filter is set to abstract codes and the QuickInfo color is set to a darker yellow under Windows preferences The default color is pale yellow and depending on your computer screen it may be difficult to see Codes Edit Miscellaneous Output View ee em US OPERANDI 0 0 Main category 4 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SORTING AND FILTERING 388 An overview of all filter options for all object types is provided below Overview of Filter Options Entity type Description incrementally with immediate feedback after PDs quotes codes All objects are displayed filter off memos Pattern PDs quotes codes Objects matching the entered search memos pattern Only today s PDs quotes codes Objects created today memos Only mine PDs quotes codes Objects created by the current user memos Co Authors PDs quotes codes Objects created by any of the selected memos co authors Families PDs quotes codes Objects belonging to a family memos Free PDs quotes codes Objects that do no reference any memos other objects PDs quotes codes Objects bearing a comment Selected PD quotes codes memos Objects referring or belonging to the currently selected primary document PD Memo Memo used as primary document data sources Text Te
260. commend to create a copy bundle file after each work session If something goes wrong like accidentally deleting a log file you can always recover a recent version of the coded file And this is what needs to be done Disconnect the primary document whose log file has been deleted see Disconnecting Primary Documents on page 89 Install the backup copy bundle file into a new folder at a different location than your project folder Save it under a unique name See Install a Bundle on page 131 rescue Save the HU again Merge this HU with your current one Toots Merce with HU Select the merge strategy Different PDs Same Codes You find more detail on Then disconnect all documents but the one or the ones that you want to merging two Hus in the section Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 171 Enriching A Plain Text Document If you have edited a plain text document and added formatting attributes like fonts color font size bold italic embedded objects etc you are asked if you want to keep the formatting information and save the document as a rich text rtf document If you select No any features contained in the document beyond plain text will be lost If you want to keep the rich formatting you need to confirm the message If you select Yes the file will be saved in rich text format although the file extension e g TXT is not changed to RTF Embedded Objects What is an Embedded Object Data
261. conflict If all PDs in the HU can be displayed in the HU Editor there should be no conflict when bundling the HU The following conflicts may occur Source Missing Conflict The document does not exist Source Unusable Conflict The document cannot be loaded Possible cause It was manually copied from another location without its associated LOG file using Windows copy method PD Source Conflict Mismatch between PD and its source This implies that the data source is not the one that is expected by the PD Possible causes mapping changed data source was replaced by another file LOG file was edited manually Ambiguous Reference Conflict A data source is used by more than one PD but was assigned using different paths Report In the report pane the situation before bundling is summarized This includes a list of all excluded documents and the reason for their exclusion How to Create the Bundle File Save the HU ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL PROJECT BACKUP AND MIGRATION 131 Select Toots Copy Bunbte Create Bunn from the main menu The Copy Bundle window opens All documents that can be bundled are listed in the top right pane To exclude documents double click on a document or select all documents you want to exclude and click on the Exclude lt lt lt button Check the pane on the bottom left for problematic documents If some are listed try to resolve the conflict see Help with Data Management Problems
262. constraints between the nodes From these local constraints a global solution is generated One correct way to get dressed The is cause of relation was used to describe constraints The only condition a relation must meet is that it has the transitive attribute Figure 246 Topological sort always results in a linear diagonal placement of the nodes Such algorithms are typically in use in project management software You can use a directed relation like before to represent time dependencies between events socks before shoes shirt before tie marriage before divorce and then compute a possible sequence of events ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 343 Creating Output Several output options are available for Network Views The range is from printing the layout via copying to the clipboard in a variety of formats both textual and graphical and by saving a Network View to a file Printing Networks Before printing a Network View the first time you may prefer to set some general options include title print border etc Speciats Prererences PRINTING You can either print the entirety or part of a Network View Open the Network View and arrange all nodes to be printed If you want to print a selection of nodes only select these nodes for multiple selection hold down the Ctrl key Choose Network Print Network View from the Network Editor s menu In the Printer d
263. ct an object and edit the comment that appears in the text pane Save changes by opening the context menu inside the text area and choose AccEPT ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SPECIAL TOOLS 380 The View Menu The items offered by the View menu let you change the font useful before capturing screen shots for presentations the display of object specific items the length of the tree indentation the presence of the collapse expand buttons the display of the object s icons and the comment area Zoom List You can also disable the in place editing capability v Has Lines wv Has Lines at Root Indent Zoom List v Show Toolbar v Has Buttons v Use Images v Edit Labels Font Refresh F5 Figure 291 View menu Code Trees amp Forests Special Object Explorers can be invoked to display codes only To display a tree view for a selected code only F Select a code e g in the Code Manager From the Copes MisceLaNEous menu choose Copt Tn To display all root codes with their trees and branches F Select a code Choose Copes MisceLLaneous Cope Forest The rules and procedures described above for codes in the Object Explorer apply here as well see Using the Object Explorer on page 376 Codes displayed in code trees and forests can be used for drag amp drop coding This is a preferred alternative for users who like to work with hierarchically ordered coding schemes ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUA
264. ction techniques for multiple item selecting via the Ctrl or Shift key F In the second column select the codes to be displayed in the rows l Activate the option Use selected codes You find this option above the two selecting fields ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 303 selected codes date of murder 13 0 historic context 4 0 Z name of suspect 28 0 Select codes to be displayed in the columns a ECCE XX name of victim 14 4 T INVESTIGATION 4 0 Ec investigation doubts 12 Y reason released mix up T l reason released never t T l reason released theory X reason released theory r z Select codes to be pa displayed in the rows E E d E 98 Ei role of the media aiding Figure 203 Select codes to be displayed in either the columns or rows of the table The table below provides a good overview of the reasons why the five suspects Cohen Feigenbaum Kaminski Kelly and Kosminski were suspected name of suspect Cohen name of suspect Feigenbaum name of suspect Kaminski name of suspect Kelly name of suspect Kosmiski reason suspect n a reason suspected could have been there 15 2 reaso Auspect pa reason suspect Bl Figure 204 Co occurrence Table Explorer with selected codes As of this writing version 6 2 the column with the code labels for the rows cannot be exp
265. cts on page 129 Don t pack all If you do not modify your documents the entire project folder only needs to your documents transferred once including all data With subsequent migrations it is sufficient each time to move the HU file back and forth If you want to modify your documents unless they using the ATLAS ti editing option see Editing Primary Documents on page 136 were modified for further detail Project Backup To backup your project it is recommended to create a copy bundle file and to store this file at a save location It takes just a few seconds to create this file and you are assured that you have a backup of your entire project in case something goes wrong See Copy Bundle Migrating and Backing Up Projects on page 129 Alternatively you can backup your entire project folder Benefits of this approach The folder can be completely moved to another location and all documents remain accessible Migrating or backing up your project using the Copy Bundle function is easy and allows the use of arbitrary folders on the target computer Merging projects is easy as all files refer to the same reference the HUPATH ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT 117 Consideration for teams Sharing documents is restricted to HUs that reside in the same folder Thus if you work in a team each team member needs a copy of the project folder or access to the project folder on a shared drive If you wo
266. d The Network View Manager also allows you to view some properties of Network Views without opening a Network Editor Select Networks Network View Manacer from the main menu or click the Network button in the main toolbar F Select one of the displayed Network Views F Click on the network button above the list The Network View Manager offers easy access to all Network Views of a given HU The text area displays the comment for the selected Network View fr y Network View Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage II 62 NetworkViews Edit Miscellaneous View Name Size Quotes Author Created RQ1 Suspects who might have been Jack the Ripper 16 50 Susanne 21 08 2009 18 57 43 RQ5 Who was Jack the Ripper 28 133 Susanne E Scene of the second murder Chapman in Hanbury Street Susanne 21 08 2009 16 39 42 n This network view illustrates the answer to research question 5 i e the reasons why the Whitechapel murders assumed a legendary status see Memo RQ5 This network view was created with a screen resolution of 1280 x 1024 If the network view does not fit your window you can adjust it to the current window size and resolution After you open the network select Layout Fit to Window If you still don t see the network view properly displayed on your screen you can adjust the font size to optimize your view To do this open the network view Then select Specials Preferences gt Fonts Adjust th
267. d and dis played like any other quotation with one exception As there is not yet a margin area for multimedia documents no clickable bars represent multimedia quotations Modifying Audio and Video Quotations To modify an audio or video quotation select it first e g in the Quotation Manager so you see its boundaries on the time line Next set a different start or end point by clicking on the Selection Start or Selection End button As the quotation already exists its name is highlighted in a pale yellow color in the Media Control window This means that you now have the option to either create a new quotation or to modify the existing one Then click on the Create Quotation button but this time hold down the Ctrl key The boundaries of the currently selected quotation are now modified Deleting Audio and Video Quotations Also for audio and video quotations the option to delete quotations is available in a number of different places the main menu the Quotation Manager Quotations Deere from the context menu and the Object Explorer ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 194 Creating and Working with Google Earth Quotations Creating Google Earth Quotations If you haven t done so you first need to assign a GoogleEarth PD Documents Assicn New GoocteEartH PD Then load the Google Earth PD by selecting it from the drop down list This loads Google Earth into the ATLAS ti editor Open
268. d be as follows Double click on the family gender female Double click on the family age group under 25 Double click on the family residence New York F Select the operator AND F Select the operator AND again Further examples If you add the NOT operator to the above query you have create a family combination not containing female respondents under the age of 25 living in New York As an exercise how would you create a family combination yielding males over 25 not living in New York moa Solution Combine families gender female age group under 25 and residence New York using the OR operator then negate using NOT The resulting query looks like this NOT gender female age group under 25 residence New York Another option is to click the sequence age group under 25 residence New York OR NOT F gender male AND The resulting query looks like this NOT residence New York age group under 25 amp gender male Create a Snapshot from a Super Family A snapshot creates a hardwired standard family containing the items derived from a Super Family as its members Example By creating a snapshot from Super Code family Chemistry a new standard family is created which includes all codes that the Super Family has as its members at this time While a Super Family reflects any changes in regard to the members of any of its combined familie
269. d to copy the content of the default XML folder to the new location Requirements ATLAS ti s XML Converter requires Microsoft s MSXML v 3 XML parser to be installed In turn MSXML requires the Internet Explorer 6 or later to be installed Although Microsoft s Internet Explorer 6 or higher must be installed on your system it is not required to be your default web browser If you have Windows XP as your operating system you should already be well equipped However it is recommended that you download the most recent version of the parser from the Microsoft web site run the Check MSXML option below To check for the version of MSXML installed on your computer run Toots XML XML Converter from the main menu or click the globe button in the main toolbar Checking MSXML compatibility If you receive an error message you need to check if you have a compliant version of MSXML installed From the main menu select Here More Resources Check MSXML ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 404 compatibility with ATLAS ti If none of the modules is compatible follow the A list of installed MSXML modules will be displayed including their link to the offered download site to get a compliant version of MSXML Working with Style Sheets ATLAS ti offers a number of style sheets ready for you to use Below the general procedure is explained and then a few examples of the most commonly used style sheets and th
270. data source which is where it gets its content from whenever it needs to be displayed The Reference is an important property to understand ATLAS ti 6 has a number of powerful functions and tools see Adjusting References on page 122 that keep this loose link alive under varying circumstances Understanding the relationship between a PD and its data source is important for addressing the most common FAQ Where are my PDs The special nature of this relationship explains why simply copying the HU to another computer is not sufficient a PD won t find its data source unless you copied it as well It also explains why you should use Copy Bundle for migrating a complete project HU data sources to another computer See Copy Bundle Migrating and Backing Up Projects on page 129ff Finally it explains why there can be more than one PD referring to the same data source Primary Document Families Data Attributes Families in ATLAS ti are a group of objects see the entry Families below Primary document families fulfill a special function as they can be regarded as quasi dichotomous variables You can group all female interviewees into a PD family named female all male interviewees into a PD family named male You can do the same for different professions marital status education levels etc The classification is a 0 1 classification 1 meaning the document is part of a particular group 0 meaning it is not p
271. dations Digital cameras and scanners often create images with a resolution that significantly exceeds the screen s resolution When preparing a graphic file for use with ATLAS ti use image processing software to reduce the size so that the graphics are comfortably displayed on your computer s screen If an image does not fit into the primary pane you may need to use the zoom function available via the mouse wheel or the zoom button when displaying the image using ATLAS ti ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 76 Preparing Audio and Video Documents Audio and Video files ATLAS ti s multimedia capabilities are built upon directX technology Both MCI and DirectShow are available to use virtually all files that can be played on your computer While drivers for AVI and WAV files are installed in any basic Windows system or at least when installing a sound adapter formats like MOV QT AU SND MPG and MP3 may require a dedicated driver Check the Multimedia section in Extras System Report for a complete list of supported media types In case you have problems in playing a video file the likely cause is a missing codec Codec is a blending of two words based on coder and decoder Thus a codec is capable of encoding and or decoding a digital data stream or signal When creating a video file a certain codec is used to encode it when you want to play it you need the same codec to decode it But when this codec is not availab
272. deo Quotations sss tnenetrenetretrinetre rens erret tese it Modifying Audio and Video QUOtAUIONS rents cae toe d e to de cde cedi dp da d isn a inn donne cc kara 193 Del ting Audio and Video UA iii i ce came qe a e d dete a er ced uada n A E D DEVE ag Ra RE dA RR 193 Creating and Working with Google Earth Quotations nere nennen treten se rers enne 194 Creating Google Earth Quotations n tco rtt etn eee te ea caetera t tr EE Lal ee bte ilc to rc dederis Dope ble 194 Activating Google Earth quotations tt antes ree petente td a Pucci rcd eue pite dog ne db ela tide vae ebd 195 Displaying Google Earth qUe He d ces 195 Modifying Google Earth quotatloris ecce tette rr ette a e dei eR Dea 196 Deleting Google Earth quotations citet nte heec rea hee eret er s Ee Ile te ct t Iani qa I TERRI TER p E pad 196 MoViDs Arrate Dm E Crate dei 196 Extrusion Display Quotations at elevated levels erertretr retener serrer ens 197 Display a GE Quotatiori in Google Maps dicc nineteenth re trier re ida dci epa den epe pea 197 Import Google Earth Quotations 197 Create Graphical Snapshot PDS cec oec rero dona aber pa de deine a d AEK NVA AL Hark x oe e lon PAZ 197 Coding Techniques itn e eee pena nire Dn i pe ePi terae eec be PR Rr e Pea vtto cash FER nei uta 199 General Coding Procedure iei cnet tette een eee e rh nrc er iip ter REIR UE deri ta a roni ee d
273. ders You can drag arbitrary files as opposed to the standard assign technique that filters the files offered but you are responsible for only assigning compatible file types When ATLAS ti detects a file extension that does not correspond to one of the file formats specified in the Assign File Dialog you are asked for confirmation Remember a file with unknown type is always assigned as a plain text document If it does not contain text garbage is all you will see when it is displayed To assign documents by dragging a link Assign PDs by dragging a link directly from your web browser into the PD Manager window But caution is advised using web based documents is one thing and indeed a very powerful option But as far as contents is concerned the files need to comply to the restrictions in regard to contents plain text rich text etc Furthermore make sure you have a reasonably fast Internet connection or some operations might slow down considerably Assign Documents via a PD Family Table This method allows bulk assignment of documents while importing document properties i e families at the same time Importing a PD Family Table on page 248 for details A table can also be Prepare a PD Family Table for instance in Excel see Preparing and created by using Export PD Family Table in ATLAS ti ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION IUE ER wey zip Assign amp S New GoogleEarth PD E New GE Snaps
274. described in our introductory guide ATLAS ti 6 Quick Tour to use as sample material for educational purposes mme Figure 285 The Object Explorer c Codes 79 EC date of murder 13 0 Y historic context 4 0 3 amp 4 name of suspect 28 0 EY name of suspect Cohen 6 6 Y amp murderer motive 1 1 why suspected Y reason suspected behavioral clues 5 1 why suspected Y reason suspected could have been there 15 2 why suspected Y reason suspected fitting the profile 14 1 why suspected YS reason suspected killed others 13 1 why suspected Y name of suspect Feigenbaum 1 0 3 name of suspect Kaminski 3 0 Y name of suspect Kelly 1 0 name of suspect Kosmiski 8 2 A reason suspecte 9 x ame of victim 14 4 3i INVESTIGATION 4 0 i36 investigation doubts 12 0 YS investigation stolen evidence 4 0 3 amp investigation suspected by whom 37 0 Clear evidence exists for some suspects while for others this point remains speculation or at least not proven beyond a reasonable doubt Evidence regarding the suspect s presence in the vicinity of the murder sites Expanded code tree The upper pane displays the tree structured contents of the HU The text pane below displays the comment that is associated with the activated object The root object of the tree is of course the HU itself The
275. detail The stoplist The user system folder Extras Exptorer User System Fouper contains a sample stop list The first lines starting with a semi colon contain an explanation of terms that can be used All lines starting with a semi colon are not included in the frequency count A I stoplist txt Editor Datei Bearbeiten Format Ansicht ATLAS ti stop list created 2003 12 09 modified 2006 05 08 use new digit pattern d lines beginning with a semicolon are ignored unless they contain the special keywords grep or nogrep the following line switches GREP interpretation on for all entries up to a nogrep switch grep the next switch turns off grep subsequent entries are interpreted literally nogrep note all entries must be uppercase A AN IT THE THIS Figure 163 Default stoplist You can use the following regular expressions excludes numbers of any length excludes strings of hyphens of arbitrary size excludes strings of underscores exclude sequences of zeros Clean text before counting ignore The characters specified in this dialog will be removed from the source word before it is counted Example including eliminates the difference between Hello and Hello Ignore case If checked upper and lowercase letters are ignored Hello HELLO and hello are not counted separately F After all options are set click the OK button The figure below shows the
276. ding something without having searched for it The term serendipity can be equated with an intuitive approach to data A typical operation relying on the serendipity effect is browsing This information seeking method is a genuine human activity When you spend a day in the local library or on the World Wide Web you often start with searching for particular books or key words But after a short while you typically find yourself increasingly engaged in browsing through books that were not exactly what you originally had in mind Examples of tools and procedures ATLAS ti offers for exploiting the concept of serendipity are the Object Managers the Object Explorer the interactive margin area full text search and the hypertext functionality Exploration Exploration is closely related to the above principles Through an exploratory yet systematic approach to your data as opposed to a mere bureaucratic handling it is assumed that especially constructive activities like theory building will be of great benefit The entire program s concept including the process of getting acquainted with its particular idiosyncrasies is particularly conducive to an exploratory discovery oriented approach Areas of Application ATLAS ti serves as a powerful utility for qualitative analysis particularly of larger bodies of textual graphical audio and video data The content or subject matter of these materials is in no way limited to any one pa
277. direct branches from this root are Primary Docs Codes Memos Primary Doc Families Code Families Memo Families and Network Views Using the Object Explorer The Object Explorer can be launched by clicking on the Object Explorer button in the main toolbar or by selecting Tools Ossect ExPLorer from the main menu Expanding and Collapsing Branches You can expand and collapse the branches of the Object Explorer tree If a branch can be expanded a plus sign is displayed to the left of the object unless this is switched off via Views Has Burrows Expanded branches are indicated by a minus sign You can expand or collapse a branch with a mouse click on the plus or minus sign Below a partly expanded branch for memo families is shown ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SPECIAL TOOLS 377 G5 Network Views 3 cj RQ1 Suspects who might have been Jack the Ripper 16 11 153 Characteristics of David Cohen 7 40 7 1379 XS investigation theory by M Fido 4 0 reason released mix up of names 8 3 8 reason released theory disputed 3 0 amp reason suspected could have been there 15 2 Xi reason suspected fitting the profile 14 1 3 reason suspected killed others 13 1 amp reason suspected witness 4 0 4M RQ1 Suspects who might have been Jack the Ripper 4 An Figure 286 Partly expanded branches for a network view Expanding the Primary Docs branch displays the PDs expanding this branch displays quotati
278. dit iere o Prat d a c n E be POR e ERO EI De UE ED o 331 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL 14 Tolik code nodes using the list method 5 2c ee Oi b nte e tants 331 To create code code and quotation quotation links using the Object Manager 331 Selecting a Linkara eb aa MT ca ad ei ur Do tg OH Ea A OP EA Dies Deselecting Nodes and Links Cutting Links Modifying Links m xri ras roe cm Selectng or deselecting all Nodes 2 iid rete ete te ri rem em tea fis tp tet eee eene edel d Inverting the current selection 3s Moving Nodes ines eec dran eese pen quen pau e t pn intended od ce ec dde e re dni ne Du e uec eve PR DP a To move A single node repel a reg e e bc eR EL TCR Reda ra E ue tva eed e AD ERE dera dd garages To move multiple nodes ii To move nodes with the arrow Keys ec re ma cp e ni da a a d P a RO EE ER LA E ERE TL HL RS 335 Removing and Deleting Nodes from Network Views enenrtnetr nete treten irre seen nna 335 To remove nodes from a Network View 110339 To delete nodes from a Network View 1 335 Node and Link Actions 1335 Actions via ContextiMemnus sso rem eene tatc n om c c e e EP e EG EE EET EE DH TE EO PER id teat eae 336 TO execute node actions per dou ble click 2c nat teen terre corp qr o E e Hat ida ad 336 Saving a Network View m
279. ditions hold Use specially named families for fine grained control over items to be ignored 172 Concepts Target and Source HUs The main concepts in Merge are the Target HU and the Source HU The Target HU is the HU into which another Source HU is merged The target HU has to be loaded into the HU Editor before invoking the Merge HUs option It is advisable to store the target HU under a different name before starting the merge procedure To prevent accidental overwrite of an existing HU you may create a new HU first and then merge the two HUs consecutively into this HU However this approach takes two merge steps Merge Strategies Three strategies can be chosen for the processing of every object category These are Add Unify and Ignore The object categories that can be processed within the HU are PDs Quotations Codes Memos PD Families Code Families Memo Families and Network Views Add The objects of this category are added to the target HU If an identical object is found in the target the added object will get a new name consisting of the original name plus the suffix number A new number is added until the name of the object is unique For instance if a code Alchemy already exists in the target the source version of Alchemy is renamed to Alchemy 1 Unify Searches for corresponding objects in the target HU If such an object is found all attributes of the source object are inheri
280. ditors on page 344 To save a specific layout you have created select the menu option Network Save As Enter a name for the network view and click ok You can access saved network views via the Network View Manager main menu Nerworks Nerwork View Manacer or via the network button that you find in the top left corner of the HU editor underneath the main menu File a Jack the Ripper stage II 62 ATLAS ti File Edit Documents Quotations Codes Memos Networks Views Tools Extras A PO E A AAA New Network View Ar y 4 RQ1 Suspects who might have been Jack the Ripper 16 RQ5 Who was Jack the Ripper 28 Scene of the second murder Chapman in Hanbury Street 16 Figure 241 Accessing saved network views ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 338 Launching a Network View You can open a Network Editor on a specific Network that is already part of the HU Open a Network View by one of the following methods To open a Network View from the pick list Click on the network button s down arrow on the main toolbar to display the drop down list of existing Network Views see figure 241 above F Select one of the listed Network Views A Network Editor opens on the selected Network View To open a Network View using the Network View Manager Use this method if the number of Network Views already defined is too large to be comfortably displayed using the pick list metho
281. ds of issues might come up here is a list of issues that are important to consider Where will you store your data Do you want to work with external or internal documents Do you want to link your data transcripts to the original audio and video sources Version 6 manual addendum e Do you think you might have to move your project at some point See Project Maintenance p 282ff Should data be edited after it is assigned to ATLAS ti See the section on Editing Primary Documents on page 136 Additional reading http downloads atlasti com library Friese 2009 09 2 pdf Do you need data to be shared among team members For further information on team project management see Team Project Management on page 149 Where and how can you create project backups Project Backup and Migration on page 128 The One Folder Setup For Single Users and Teams Storing all data files to be analyzed and the ATLAS ti project file in one folder is the easiest and most flexible way to set up a project Even when working with video files or other sizable data sets that you may store on an external hard disk or server you can still use this setup You just need to save the ATLAS ti project file the HU on the external disk or server as well This scenario also works well for team projects Each team member either stores the project folder with all of the data on his or her computer or the project folder is kept on a server
282. e and or the etc The result can be displayed in an Excel table The Word Cruncher page 264 Auto Coding Tool If the primary text itself contains important key words the Auto Coding Tool scans the text and automatically assigns a pre selected code to matching text passages If so desired the process can be controlled by manual confirmation of each action The Auto Coding Tool page 231 Memos capture your thoughts regarding the text and are an important device for creating theory A memo is similar to a code but usually contains longer passages of text A memo may stand alone or it may refer to quotations codes and other memos They can be grouped according to types method theoretical descriptive etc which is helpful in organizing and sorting them Memos may also be included as the objects of analysis by assigning them as PDs See the chapter on Working with Memos on page 254ff Additional reading Memo writing http downloads atlasti com library Friese 2009 09 1 pdf http downloads atlasti com library Friese 2008 12 8 pdf Families are a way to form clusters of PDs codes and memos for easier handling of groups of codes memos and PDs Primary Document families can be regarded as attributes or variables Family Life page 237 Families can be combined using logical operators similar to codes and Super Codes Super Families page 289 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN CONCEP
283. e clicking a quotation displays it in context in the PD pane The list is also drag amp drop capable you can drag objects from the list into a Network Editor or into a Text Editor The Object Explorer Although the structures that can be created with ATLAS ti are not necessarily restricted to hierarchical trees the ATLAS ti Object Explorer provides a hierarchical view of the HU and all of the objects that it references Main purpose of the Object Explorer is to serve as a hierarchical content table which may be used to navigate between the different parts of the HU Unlike the pure Object Managers that display only one type of object the Object Explorer allows an integrated and structured display of all heterogeneous objects that make up an HU These are PDs quotations codes memos families and networks The display though is not strictly hierarchical You will notice some redundancy when expanding the tree view For instance ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SPECIAL TOOLS 376 quotations are listed under each PD As PDs can also be members of PD families their quotations appear there as well SW y Jack the Ripper stage Il 62 8 4 Primary Docs 22 i X Codes 79 3 4 Memos 21 15 E2 Primary Doc Families 14 5 83 Code Families 13 fj Memo Families 0 w Network Views 3 This sample project can be used for a number of different purposes to demonstrate various software features to complete the steps
284. e If file extensions are shown in the file manager you see Original source file Interview rtf Auxiliary log file Interview rtf log The default setting of your file manager is set to hide commonly known file extensions This is an unfortunate setting as it can be helpful in a lot of contexts to be able to see the file extensions You can easily change this setting under the view options in your file manager In the event that the file extensions are hidden you will see the following file names Original source file Interview Auxiliary log file Interview rtf Only the type column indicates that the first one is indeed the rich text document and the second one a text file The characters rtf are part of the file name and do not indicate the file extension As they are just plain text log files are very small usually just a few k in size Log files contain information for the HU about how to adjust the codings according to the modifications that have been made If you edit a document multiple times the new modifications are written into the same file Thus for every edited document you find one log file in your project folder Below you see an example of a log entry ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EDITING PRIMARY DOCUMENTS Never never delete modify or move a log file 140 lt LOGSESSIONS gt LOGS SECS 1901 3243616859 ISODATE 2003 10 14T20 40 59 gt
285. e Excel file is used If you import the same table repeatedly rows with already existing PDs are ignored This way you do not have to wait until the last respondent has filled out the questionnaire Below various screen shoots are shown based on importing the above sample table ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 103 4 Primary Doc Manager HU sample table em ss i Primary Doc Family Manager HU sample table Documents Edit Miscellaneous Output View Name e Academic E Army Did you serve Origin LeP1 Case 1 Rich Text Embedded Case 1 Rich Text Embedded Case 2 Favorites Scorpions B Favorites Stones Imported Survey Data e Sex female P 2 Case 2 2 What bands do you listen do regularly Figure 50 Two primary documents and eight primary document families have been created Analyzing Survey Data In order to analyze survey data you should get acquainted with the following features and functions of ATLAS ti Primary Document Families especially their use as data attributes see Family Life on page 237 and Working with Variables Primary Document Families on page 245 Basic coding techniques to add some additional codes to the precoded responses see Coding Techniques on page 199 Code Families see page 252 The Codes Primary Documents Table see page 311 The query tool and the scope function see page 268
286. e a global or local scope Global types are available in all HUs local memo types are known only for the HU for which they have been defined Memo types are displayed and can be sorted in the Memo Manager s details view in an extra Type column Create a local memo type When creating a new memo simply overwrite the default memo type displayed in the memo editor s type field with a new type After saving the memo this new type may also be used for other memos inside this specific HU Add or remove global memo types 7 Open the General Preferences dialog and select the memos tab S In section Global Memo Types enter a new memo type in the entry field and click the App button ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH MEMOS 258 Global Memo Types analysis comment memo theory m Remove Remove fault type Figure 158 Adding new memo types To remove a global memo type select a memo type from the list and click Remove F Click Apety and close General Preferences The default memo type is Commentary unless you have set a different default in the dialog This default type is used for newly created memos To change the default type select another memo type and tick the box use as default type Make a local type global Choose the menu option MisceLLaneous Make Tyee Grosat from the context menu or from the Memos main menu to make all types of the selected memos global Using Memo
287. e analysis Once your data is coded it is ready to be queried using the various analysis tools provided The insights gained can then be visualized using the ATLAS ti network view function Some steps need to be taken in sequence for instance logic dictates that you cannot query anything or look for co occurences if your data has not yet been coded But other than that there are no strict rules Network views in addition to presenting findings also have an exploratory component and as such can help you to see your data from a different perspective This may provide further ideas for coding querying or even further data collection Creating a project Adding documents Identifying relevant data Coding writing segments memos and comments Analyzing amp querying data Developing models Visualize EE Generating Reports rtf html amp Exports Excel XML SPSS Figure 4 Main work flow ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN STEPS IN WORKING WITH ATLAS TI 39 Data and Project Management A first important but often neglected aspect of a project is data and project management The first step is data preparation You find more information on supported file formats in the section Supported Formats on page 71 Apart from analyzing your data you also manage digital content and it is important to know how the software does it See the section Data Management in ATLAS ti on page 105 ff In order to give you an idea what kin
288. e between playing or pausing the current audio or video stream When you hold down the Cra key at the same time the current segment will be played Keyboard shortcut Play e toggle Space Stops playing the current file and in addition also releases the resource giving as it were other Windows applications the opportunity to access the resource and or the media player Keyboard shortcut Stop s Repeats either the complete file or any selected segment until the pause or stop button is clicked Especially useful to repeat noise covered or otherwise hard to understand passages during transcription Helps to fine tune a segment end e g to isolate a word from a contiguous spoken text When moving the position while the Sneak Preview mode is active a short preview of 500 milliseconds or 2 frames for video data is played repeatedly making it easier for marking the boundary of your segment Using this function takes practice and is best used in combination with the cursor keys Repositions the track slider to either the next selection mark to the left or the beginning of the file Repositions the track slider by 1 20 of the overall size of the file to the left Repositions the track slider by 1 20 of the overall size of the file to the right Repositions the track slider to either the next selection mark to the right or the end of the file The current position is made the start coordinate of a quotation to be c
289. e data source located at the Google servers ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 77 However you can also use more than one Google Earth PD even if there is only world in order to create distinct sets of locations to simulate tours to simply tell different stories The prerequisite for use of the features described in this section is that Google Earth is installed on your computer See or your respective language website for more detail KMZ and KML documents KMZ files are zipped KML Keyhole Markup Language files which will start Google Earth and fly you to a specified location KML or Keyhole Markup Language is an XML grammar and file format for modeling and storing geographic features such as points lines images polygons and models for display in Google Earth and Google Maps KML is used to share places and information with other users of Google Earth and Google Maps and now ATLAS ti You can find many KML files that describe interesting features and places On the Google Earth Community site ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 78 Assigning and Handling Primary Documents Assigning PDs is indeed a sloppy term and we left it as is mainly for historical reasons A more accurate name would be Create PD or Assign as PD or Assign Data Source Indeed whenever you select Document Assicn a new Primary Document which is an ATLAS ti internal object is created e g P
290. e detected when you are about to close or save the HU you will be offered the choice to accept or discard such changes By accepting the changes they become part of the HU and are then saved to disk along with all other changes in the HU The extended dialog below lists all pending changes and allows control over which pending changes are to be committed ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 70 r Consolidate Changes before Saving Changes have been detected which have not yet been commited to the HU Before proceeding to save please check those changes in the list below which you want to become part of the HU Double click an item to bring the window to the foreground V Quotation Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage II 6 a V Code Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage II 62 V Memo Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage II 62 IV Primary Doc Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage II Click the button below to commit all changes checked above All unchecked changes will be discarded Commit changes and proceed Figure 31 Lists all objects with pending changes Before taking any further action you can inspect any pending changes in their respective editors simply by double clicking an item in the list ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 71 Preparing Primary Documents Primary Documents PDs play a major role in ATLAS ti s framework They are the interface between a Hermeneutic
291. e font for nodes Figure 242 The Network View Manager ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 339 Hold down the Ctrl key to suppress the import of quotations Import neighbors can be undone Shortcut Ctrl Shift Z Simple analytic functions Import Node Neighbors This method imports all direct neighbors of the selected nodes into the Network View This option is also available from the node s context menu Importing direct neighbors allows you to construct a connected Network View step by step In a connected graph there is always a direct or indirect path between any two nodes To import neighbors of selected nodes F Select the node s whose neighbors are to be included in the Network View Choose Nobes Import NricHeons from the menu This procedure imports neighbors of all types If a code with many quotations is selected this operation might fill the Network Editor with unwanted quotation nodes To suppress the import of quotations hold down the Crr key when issuing this command If you have mistakenly imported the wrong or too many node neighbors select Nopes Uwpo Import NeicHBors from the menu or press the key combination Ctrl Shift Z Import Co occurring Codes For code nodes there is a special import feature that exploits the spatial relations of different codings A code co occurs with another if it has been used to code quotations that are in close p
292. e n nnne ener nee 68 Protecting the HU against concurrent use HU Lok file eese narraciones 69 Saving a Hermeneutic Unit Preparing Primary Documents Supported Formats Language Settings coop se e CIE RR qux D ed cma etapa eter dede age t tre iere tec cuir Leod eet e RETI nee A Requirements teet eoa ce rp aiitem tar aci is sedis biie Font settings oe InVivo Code settings a casa cm cede e dir o a e E i REL RB sive evita votive Gd dO E TO DR OH RE CER System settings for Thai and Asian language support on Western European and US Windows systems ssssseeee 73 Size Restrictions ies Preparing Textual Documents rite eren der eroe c i pedi tig e f nein d Even ga ci dE D del dd Cri denne ee Mats de eda dd 74 Supported Forrnats bss en ce mco tener io ne nere EM d ie i a dE i Fr ee ne PR reb d i HE ba eben di 74 Rich Text snis 74 Word doc and docx files 74 Limitations of working with doc or dox files a Plain VOX A O A NT Preparing PDEfiles A a deena Preparing Graphical Documents s Supported FOP AS sits ceca oui tene eot repe op n A A cec na AA da ties REI anda ava edd este pa v eva Etna hate Dues Size recommendation Si T r HO Preparing Audio and Video Documents 76 Audio and Video files 76 Length Recommendations 76 Preparing Google Earth
293. e of data PDF 1 Type of data Transcripts internal documents gt Type of Type of data Video files gt Type of data Video files 1 Figure 98 Names of added primary documents Unified Objects Unified codes are displayed along with their new quotation references within the resulting HU date of murder 25 41 25 42 25 43 25 44 25 45 25 46 25 47 25 53 25 58 25 64 25 67 25 75 25 80 historic context 25 7 25 8 25 48 25 99 name of suspect Cohen Jd 163 33 164 39 21 35 27 39 34 35 35 32 129 32 13 Y X victim last hours and death 27 2 28 4 30 2 31 4 32 2 32 7 victim marriage children 27 4 28 9 30 4 31 5 32 3 32 5 Figure 99 Report on unified codes Statistical Summary The statistical summary at the end of the report provides an overview of all object types after the merge ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 180 Object sizes per object type after merge Primary Docs 44 Quotations 914 Codes 79 Codings 1046 Memos 21 Network Views 3 Primary Doc Families 28 Code Families 13 Memo Families o Code Links 23 Hyper Links 29 Figure 100 Statistical summary at the end of the merge report ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 181 The Data Level Basic Functions As you may already know from the chapter on the main concepts and features see page 25 there are two principle levels of interaction the data level and
294. e resulting output is shown Click on the down arrow next to the XML button in the main toolbar and select Appty Style SHeet or select main menu option Toots XML gt al il Export HU to XML Kill XML Converter Figure 309 Select the option Apply Style Sheet to make use of existing style sheets Select a style sheet from the list displayed Next you are asked which parts of the HU you want to convert to XML If you select a style sheet that only shows codes with comments or a list of objects then you do not have to include the full content of the primary documents z XML Generator Export Options T Exporting quotation content can be very processor intensive This is needed only if you apply a style sheet that utilizes quotation content e g HU Tag Cloud Do not include Primary Documents Include Primary Documents and Quotations meta info only Also include Quotations contents as plain text Ey Figure 310 XML export options An HTML file is generated as your output file A file dialog opens offering to store the file in the ATLAS ti XML folder For the file to be displayed properly including all colors and images as defined by the style sheet store the file at this location You can accept the suggested default name or enter a different one Then click the Save button The output is displayed in your web browser Internet Explorer by default results may vary in different brows
295. e search button instead Initially the status bar displays the current search mode in the figure above Standard Search Mode During a search activity this is the place where you should look for warnings and messages Not all options are available for every type of search For instance backward and case sensitive searches are not available for Category Search see below ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 226 Categories are reusable named search swarms A text search always starts from the current position of the text cursor in the currently selected primary text When the end of this document is reached you are asked if the search should continue through the rest of the primary text documents Standard Search Mode Use the standard search mode when you want to find exact specified strings of characters Word boundaries are not recognized in this mode Hence searching for the would also find instances like bother there and theater Searches that recognize word boundaries are available with the Category Search or by using appropriate GREP patterns To start a standard search F Open the Text Search tool Enter a string into the entry field The search string should contain the special pipe character as this initiates the Category Search Uncheck GREP mode Set Case Sensitive as needed Start the search by clicking the Next or Previous button Two search option
296. e to be built manually and result from an intellectual effort The system cannot decide for you that segment x is in contradiction to segment y But after the work of establishing the links you can make semantically richer retrievals Show statements contrary to statement x Hypertext allows you to create different paths through the data you are analyzing For example you may create a timeline different from the strict sequence of the original text Graphical Hyperlink Maps ATLAS ti incorporates procedures for creating and browsing hypertext structures It allows for two or more quotations being connected using named relations Further you can create graphical maps using Network Views to make parts of your hyperspace accessible in a comfortable way Hyperlinks may connect quotations textual graphical multimedia across documents inter textual links or may link segments within the same primary document intra textual links The natural boundary for hyperlinks like all structures in ATLAS ti is the Hermeneutic Unit ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 362 The hypertext Network View to the right displays quotations in maximum verbosity set to full text Other node types can also be included in the Network View like the memo in the upper left corner A hyperlink chain connects quotations sequentially m Ersay Jack the Ripper ac the threat 10 outcast London Rober F Haggard B nen
297. ea 199 To display the Margin area 2 rte Eee ct e redeo truc lata dn Ere emn cd idu c ce dp Dra tados 199 How Codes are Displayed si5 3 ect aider toi Det dre dai det ier dnce Ut lea tard th 201 Display of codes in th Code Manager e centena ceci t te pre eg i Dd e Ha e del dala Acre s 201 The Single Column Vie Wo os eec ettedtetice aaa d 202 AI A c 202 Coding witha Single NEw Code crt eene eer tp or np onte miran n ASENET din denies A DIRE E ve DA 202 Creating more than one code concurrently Coding via drag amp drop from the Code Manager sient rte retirer Di Pat eni dde ade ede Ba ed ee pae t 203 uS Vereor E E EEE 204 TO create an In ViVo code 2 toner geo encanto dcin an eden a ve nha db era d et cr dg b RA 204 In Vivo coding via drag amp drop aaa db DL E e 204 Code by List ii Code by List Inv rse cient coercet ra ed iR PR CUR O HEURE wag EA NL HET EATER UR BLAU FER GERE YEA ec e EN 205 Toilink a cod to many quotations riter re ct te n te tl e ORO e UE LG THE T RO IL DL C De c e he dades 205 To link a code to many quotations via Drag amp DIOP ooonncinoninninaninnoninnanicnana nana rra 205 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL 10 tene a A A A NS 205 Meaning of colored bars in the Margi ivi ii teca nat Ete den tcn ende ee dde tad 206 Unlinking a code Writing
298. eam 01 09 2011 21 33 44 HU C ProgramData Scientific Software ATLASti CommonDocumen Jack the Ripper stage II 62 hpr6 Filter setting PRIMARY DOCS CODES 7 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 Totals reason suspected at 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 reason suspected be 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 reason suspected co 0 13 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 reason suspected fi 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 reason suspected fi 0 9 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 reason suspected ki 0 12 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 reason suspected kn 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 reason suspected wi 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 Totals 0 61 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 71 Figure 219 Internal report of a Codes Primary Documents Table ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 315 Calculating Inter Coder Reliability using CAT Some programs offer rudimentary forms of inter coder reliability calculation as an internal tool but we have found CAT a free external tool to an excellent addition to ATLAS ti Being that it is free very easy to handle closely integrated with the ATLAS ti data format and sporting powerful functionality we recommend it as a useful add on rather than reinvent the wheel The Coding Analysis Toolkit is a web based add on tool to ATLAS ti that allows you to calculate inter coder reliability for ATLAS ti coded data You can access the tool via the following web site http cat ucsur pitt edu To use the tool you need to regist
299. earch examples are presented showing the matching GREP expression in the column on the right Examples of GREP Searches Find text of arbitrary length enclosed within brackets Note that the brackets had to be escaped with as they are control characters themselves ML Find all years between 2001 and 2004 200 1 4 Find all numbers with 2 digits at the end of a line or d d paragraph Find all Meyer s spelled in four different ways Mlaelliyler As Find all lines paragraphs starting with one arbitrary letter followed by a colon If you search for a d following the colon you will have to use the Escape character N d Otherwise the letter d would be interpreted as a digit ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 231 The search expression entered in the text search window to the right finds all 3 digit numbers with the last digit being a 7 8 or 9 This can be a useful search to find certain social security numbers or other personal identification numbers To start a GREP search Open the Text Search tool Enter a search pattern Error Reference source not found shows an example F Check the Use GREP box AJ Text Search Enter or select Search Expression d d 7 9 7 Case Sensitive V Use GREP Standard Search Mode GREP Figure 139 Search expression dialog Click on the Previous or Next button The Case Sensitive opti
300. eated with ATLAS ti within other software packages ATLAS ti is intended primarily for supporting qualitative reasoning processes On the other hand especially with large amounts of data it is sometimes useful to analyze the data in a quantitative manner using statistical approaches ATLAS ti provides an export function to permit further processing of the syntax file by SPSS the Statistical Package for the Social Sciences Cases amp Variables The basic components for statistics are cases and variables The SPSS export function in ATLAS ti treats codes as variables and data segments quotations as cases In contrast to the dichotomous treatment of codes within ATLAS ti you can use codes as ordinal or otherwise scaled variables in SPSS jobs by using a specific code naming convention The notion of a case here is rather fine grained and differs from the common understanding of this term Usually cases in qualitative research refer to persons interviews or documents We chose to treat the smallest unit as a case for the output to SPSS to ensure that no data is lost during export Broader information e g which primary document a quotation belongs to is coded into the variable PD primary document ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT 414 SPSS Syntax File The output of the SPSS generator is a complete SPSS syntax file containing variable definitions optionally the data matrix and some default jobs statement
301. ecial HUPATH see page 108 for further detail To distribute the project you have the following options a create a copy bundle file and send it to the team members see page 129 or b use a program like WinZip or WinRar compress the project folder and send the zip or rar file to the team members or c ask each team member to copy the project folder from the shared drive to their individual computers F Instruct the team members about their tasks Project Setup Tasks of Team Members Create an ATLAS ti user account on your computer and log in under your name see page 151 Depending on whether the project administrator has chosen option a b or c for distributing the project folder you either need to install the bundle file on your computers see Install a Bundle on page 131 for further detail or unzip the zipped file and store the extracted folder on your computer or make a copy of the project folder on the shared drive and store it on your computer Rename the Hermeneutic Unit file by adding your name or initials to the file name Get data from Project folder M ai Project ABC Mary hpr6 copy bundle file pur sc data 2 Project ABC acb source files OR zipped version of project folder Dg Figure 90 Project folder on the computer of a team member data could also be contained in sub folders within the main project folder ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 167
302. ect one of the following report options List Print a list of all quotations in a compact format showing only the quotation names List Incuune Comments Same as List but includes the quotations comments if any Fut Content Output the complete text of the quotations Fui Content No Mera Output the complete text of the quotations and specify the kind of information that is included in the output You may for example exclude the meta information for each quotation Fui Content IncLupe Comments Same as Furr Content but includes the quotations comments if any ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 282 Intelligent Super Codes compute their quotations on demand Then choose whether the output should be displayed in a text editor saved to disk or printed see also Output Destinations on page 391 r Send output to x ater ce O Pinter cone File Help 5 File amp Run Figure 178 Select output destination Cleaning up the Hit List Before creating a report of all the quotations found by the query you have the option to remove entries from the hit list You can remove unwanted hits from the list using the erase button right next to the printer button You could of course reformulate your query to improve the precision This is how you clean up the hit list F Select an unwanted quotation in the hit list F Click the Erase button see
303. ed possibly assign more data files to the project Organize PDs codes and memos using Families see the chapter on Family Life on page 237 for further information Query the data based on your research questions utilizing the different tools ATLAS ti provides The key words to look for are simple retrieval complex code retrievals using the query tool simple or complex retrievals in combination with variables via the scope button the co occurence explorer tree and table explorer the codes primary document table Excel and SPSS export of frequency counts for further statistical analysis see Analysis Tools on page 262 Build semantic prepositional or terminological networks from the codes you have created These networks together with your codes and memos form the framework for emerging theory Look for the chapter Network Views page 318 Finally compile a written report based on the memos you have written throughout the various phases of your project and the networks you have created and even publish your project as a World Wide Web document or an individual presentation using XML See Generating Output page 390ff Additional reading Working with ATLAS ti http downloads atlasti com library Casasempere 2007 07 11 pdf http www qualitative research net index php fqs article viewArticle 1632 3149 http atlasmalaysia wordpress com 2010 09 01 howtolr ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPAC
304. ed by the lt TBPATH gt send the HU file to each team member F Instruct the team members about their tasks Project Setup Tasks of Team Members Create an ATLAS ti user account on your computers and log in in under your own user name administrator Extras Prererences GENERAL PREFERENCE Patus see figure 85 Set the Textbank Path to the project folder as instructed by the project above computer or laptop Rename the HU file e g by adding your name or initial Save the HU file which was sent to you by the project administrator on your Each team member should use a unique name for their personal HU file Make sure that you are connected to the shared drive when working on the HU Do not change the order of the PDs otherwise there will be a problem when merging the various sub projects This means extra work for the project administrator as he or she needs to adjust the order of the documents in each affected HU ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 163 Do not add new documents if they should be shared by all team members This needs to be done by the project administrator After an agreed upon time interval send the HU file to the project administrator so he she can merge the various sub projects local personal drives of team members A 3 Project ABC Tom hpr A A Tom ba shared drive Textbank folder data source files 1 Project ABC Peter hpr6 lt
305. ed for commands that apply to a selected object or to a specific sub pane inside a multi pane window A pop up menu is activated by a right mouse click at the current location of the mouse pointer They are also termed context sensitive because the offered commands depend on the type and the current state of the object or the context in which the menu was activated Using pop up menus to initiate procedures is a three step procedure typical for window mouse user interfaces Select an object Open the pop up menu with the right mouse button Select a command with the left mouse button The HU editor provides specific pop up menus in each of its sub panes The PD pane alone offers a variety of pop up menus depending on what is currently displayed or selected When there is no PD displayed e g directly after starting a session or after closing a PD you get the wallpaper menu ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 48 Select wallpaper v Display Wallpaper Display Codes Center image v Display Details Figure 10 Wallpaper pop up menu When a PD is loaded and a chunk of text is selected a different pop up menu is displayed Create Free Quotation Coding E Create Link Source Vea Create Link Target Speak highlighted Text Figure 11 Pop up menu for a selected text segment If the selection is an existing quotation the pop up menu gets more specific Coding
306. ed in Excel Report Layout Common Header When creating textual reports a common header precedes the list of objects e g all codes or all quotations for a selected code The header includes information about the kind of report All current quotations the HU name and file path the current user the date and time of the creation of the report and the current filter if any ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 392 eo Report 6 quotation s for 1 code m File Edit Format Insert Help 11 Report 6 quotation s for 1 code HU Jack the Ripper stage II 62 File C ProgramData Scientific Software ATLASti CommonDocumen Jack the Ripper stage II 62 hpr6 Edited by team Date Time 2011 09 14 20 24 20 Mode quotation list names and references header information Quotation Filter All letter_authenticity P 4 1 Jack the Ripper Letters rtf 4 14 Because so many hoax letters were received by Scot 28 28 Susa Codes letter authenticity Family Letter No memos Because so many hoax letters were received by Scotland Yard the press and others it is not known definitively if this was an authentig letter written by the Whitechapel killer It did contain information that was compelling enough to lead investigators to publish a facsimj Figure 301 Report header information Sorts amp Filters Many list reports are affected by the currently active filter for the reported objec
307. ed to build up the super families are also shown When clicking on an operator only the corresponding family members are shown as explained above for Super Codes Expanding the Network Views branch shows the existing networks on the first level and all objects contained in the Network Views on the next level On the levels below the usual elements as described above for the Primary Docs Codes and Memos branches can be made visible All codes displayed in the Object Explorer can be used for drag amp drop coding PDs codes and memos can be dragged into family managers and assigned to families Double click Actions Double clicking the entries launches the respective Object Managers These are the Object Managers for PDs codes and memos the Family Managers for PDs codes and memo families and the Network View Manager for Network Views When double clicking on a PD its comment is displayed When double clicking on a quotation it is highlighted in context When double clicking on a code a list of quotations pops up If only one quotation is associated with the code it is highlighted in context ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SPECIAL TOOLS 379 When double clicking on a memo its content is displayed Using the Object Explorer for Coding Drag amp drop coding works from within the Object Explorer either using the codes under the Codes tree or under the Code Families tree This way you can utilize the structu
308. edge In fact ATLAS ti was designed to be more than a single tool think of it as a professional workbench that provides a broad selection of effective tools for a variety of problems and tasks Teamwork Support ATLAS ti facilitates co authoring i e it allows two or more researchers or work groups to work on the same project albeit asynchronously This means each person works on his or her own project file Access to the same data source is possible The sub projects are then merged into one comprehensive MASTER project ATLAS ti provides the tools that allow for the transfer and conversion of research data while keeping the respective sources of ideas identifiable at all times ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN CONCEPTS AND FEATURES 25 Main Concepts and Features The concepts of primary documents quotations codes and memos are the overall foundation you need to be familiar with when working with ATLAS ti complemented by a variety of special aspects such as families network views the main visualization tool and analytical data querying tools All of these come together in the overall project container The Hermeneutic Unit HU for short The Hermeneutic Unit HU The Hermeneutic Unit HU provides the data structure for each project in ATLAS ti The name was chosen to reflect the initial approach taken when building a support tool for data interpretation There was no intention to intimidate users with this admitted
309. ee AS 270 IO PehatOrs ccs C EET 271 PUTOS US ics 281 PROXIMITY A MEE M US Distance Operators Embedding Operators 4274 o iEeuiicu rp 274 LIN M 296 Query A vet Creation Suppresssor codes HS Quit progra eii M QUOTATIONS O ONO Redundant Cod Sii aa aaa pa A ee 381 Reference LY NO 107 Relations Ss AAA HE THEE 322 REMOVE filter ee ERE d teo toe ete e re m E E RE RAE EE EHE EXERCI de b ei eeepc e ee o terete TR Dad da ns 389 Reverse ler tht FE ec P D Ye eG t DT CEA sal seed ERE EAT o REPRE MY tea A tune S E Ee A e PL Ln D reese aioe 389 Roles 322 Serendipity ii EE 23 Service RACKS sc sic cvs 436 SPSS 413 COME AACS AANSEN AEEA e e e e 417 MISSING VAIUCS C QN 418 INAMIME CONVENTION e CR 416 Primary document families Syntax file zs Start ATLAS o aos ea 64 Strong and weak links rerit trn nti n er nn E e n CR RC FR PCR EAE RADAR EA EE DER DA PO EA TAL DR FR 320 O M M Defining categories ics SearchrsWarfileesis sue ci el ewe EINE RIA TM MIL Acc MEN MI
310. een edited Either move the entire project folder and overwrite the previous version on the second computer or create a copy bundle file and install it see page 131 During the installation of the copy bundle file ATLAS ti checks whether there is a newer version of a file and if so overwrites the old version Editing Primary Documents all Editing primary documents can only be allowed with restrictions A decision could be that only the project administrator is allowed to edit documents Another option is to allow individual team members to edit a sub set of documents but not any of the other documents If none of the primary documents are edited it is sufficient to upload send the HU file to the project administrator for merging After merging the project administrator just needs to distribute the new Master HU file to all team members f team members are allowed to edit a specific sub set of documents they need to upload send a copy bundle file to the project administrator for merging After merging the project administrator needs to distribute a bundle file or a zipped version of the project folder ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 168 If the project administrator is the only person allowed to edit the documents it is sufficient to send the HU file for merging After merging the project administrator needs to distribute a bundle file or a zipped version of the project folder If two people
311. elongs and the first 30 letters note that a different length can be set via Preferences of the text segment e g 1 21 Therefore a more efficient fil The identifier is displayed in list windows and printouts For graphic audio and video segments the original file name of the PD is chosen as an identifier Although the creation of quotations is almost always part of a broader task like coding or writing memos free quotations can be created that indicate interesting parts in the primary data for which a meaningful classification has not yet been found The Data Level Basic Functions on page 181 Quotations as Layers Quotations can be regarded like a transparent layer on top of a document Technically speaking a quotation consists of the identifier a number and a pair of coordinates that specify the beginning and end of the quotation The content of a PD file the data source is therefore not altered by the creation deletion or modification of quotations Quotations are stored inside the HU independent of the document to which they belong Additional reading http downloads atlasti com library Maietta 2009 05 6 pdf ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN CONCEPTS AND FEATURES 29 Types of Quotations There are six different types of quotations corresponding with the six different types o f Pds ATLAS ti accepts Text Quotations A textual quotation originates from an arbitrary sequence of selected char
312. ence window Select Extras Export to HTML from the main menu Select Fite amp Run as the output destination to immediately open the generated output in a web browser Select Ebrror if you want to modify the source before storing it Below you see an example of how an ATLAS ti project in HTML format may look like ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT 425 Generator ATLAS ti WIN 6 2 Build 27 Date 15 09 2011 19 32 59 Original project ATLAS ti needed jack the ripper stage ii 62 acb Copy Bundle format General Statistics Primary Documents Commented Codes Co Authors 0 Primary Texts 22 Quotations 456 Codes 79 Codings 523 Memos 21 Primary Document Families 14 Code Families 13 Memo Families O Network Views 3 Code Code Links 22 P 3 1_Jack the Ripper_Story rtf File name 1_Jack the Ripper story rtf media type richtext Comment Wikipedia entry on the legend of Jack the Ripper 99 quotations Codes 28 date of murder historic context name of suspect name of victim INVESTIGATION investigation_doubts investigation_suspected by whom JACK THE RIPPER Jack the Ripper_ legend modus operandi_cut throat modus operandi_differences modus operandi_mutilation modus operandi_others modus operandi_similarities murder_profiling murder_site murder_weapon murderer_serial killer murderer_various persons murders_canoni
313. enerate a HUGE number of hits It has high recall a lot is retrieved but low precision many of the retrieved quotations may not make sense Venn diagrams are descriptive schemes for illustrating the different set operations associated with Boolean operators AorB not AorB A xor B om Aand notB AandB not A and B Figure 169 Boolean queries depicted as Venn diagrams The rectangle encloses the set of all retrievable quotations e g the document universe The two circles represent two codes A and B Q1 to Q5 are quotations coded with A B or none Q5 Semantic Operators The Semantic Operator buttons The operators in this section exploit connected codes resulting from previous theory building work While Boolean based queries are extensional and simply enumerate the elements of combined sets e g LOVE or KINDNESS semantic operators are intentional as they already capture some meaning expressed in appropriately linked concepts e g SUB POSITIVE ATTITUDES ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 273 SUB sa The SUB or DOWN operator traverses the network from higher to lower concepts collecting all quotations from any of the sub codes Only transitive relations between the codes are processed see Relations on page 321 all others are types ignored When building a terminology from your codes use the ISA relation for sub term links Example All quotatio
314. ent Manager onto the header bar in the Association editor see Figure 42 below N LS AN PS Figure 42 Adding PDs by drag amp drop to an association A new association is automatically created The default name is S 1 S 2 3 and so on ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 92 For a better overview it is recommended that you replace the default name with a unique name Select Fite Rename from the Association Editor menu and overwrite the default name Click OK to confirm Setting Rewind Time When transcribing it is often useful to listen once again to the part one just has transcribed Therefore you can set an interval from 1 to 5 seconds When starting the multimedia file the file automatically rewinds the time interval that you have set Rewind 1 sec Rewind 2 sec Rewind 3 sec Rewind 5 sec Ls Figure 43 Set rewind time To set the rewind time click on the Aubio menu of the Association Editor and select the desired rewind time Start Transcribing F Close the Primary Document Manager The new transcript should still be loaded and in edit mode If not load the blank transcript PD and enter edit mode click on the pen button in the main tool bar see also Editing Primary Documents on page 136 F Check your settings in the Association Editor as shown in figure 44 below NW Association Editor S 1 File Association Check your settings rewind mode ac
315. ent by clicking on a quotation in the list or you can create a report ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 281 Output of Query Results Viewing results in context Make sure that the Query Tool does not completely obstruct the area where PDs are displayed F Click on a quotation in the results pane The quotation is highlighted in the primary document pane A ES Macnaghten tv name him as a suspect in a memorandum of 25 rebruary 1894 However Macnaghten incorrectly described the barrister as a doctor and his age is incorrectly given as 41 he was 31 at the time of his death 8 On 1 Septe disi Su wu fsons 4 B amp murders canonical five 4 6 murders more less than five 5 Z murders potentially attributed Create Super Code x amp S REASON RELEASED 0 0 Y reason released alibi 7 0 amp reason released alive long afte le Y reason released alibi E najan 2 um om George Chapman Season released does notftch EAT As he was still imprisonedatthe ti O 4 p alia itt TT P is JE reason released lack of evident pe A aus x Paene L Figure 176 Viewing results in context Creating a Report To print all hits found by a query click the PRINTER button to the right of the results list List Include Comments Full Content Full Content No Meta Full Content Include Comments Figure 177 Output options Sel
316. ent code levels in the sense of higher or lower ranked categories When you delete a quotation the colors may change It is possible to set your own colors for codes but not for the bars marking the length of a quotation see Setting code colors below Unlinking a code Just as you can erase a pencil mark in the margin of a paper document you can erase a code in the margin area on screen as well The digital equivalent is called unlinking It is mostly used when a segment is coded with more than one code To unlink a code right click on the code in the margin area and click on the Unuink option When you unlink a code from a segment that only has one code the bar remains in the margin If you want to erase both the code and the quotation you need to proceed as explained below Writing Code Comments Like Primary Documents comments can be added to clarify the meaning of a code or to explain how the code is to be used for coding The practice of commenting objects greatly supports a transparent and if working as part of a team cooperative working style Creating and Editing a Code Comment Open the code manager and select a code F Right click and select the option Ebir Comment from the context menu A text editor opens Write or edit an existing comment Save the changes and close the editor ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 207 You can also use the text pane in the low
317. enter or right align the object before resizing Editing Primary Documents in Team Projects Editing in team situations needs to be tightly controlled in order to not loose the integrity of the various HU file involved If team members work at different locations and store data locally the best solution is to restrict editing to the project administrator For details on how to setup and manage team projects see 149 If the team project is set up in way that all team members access the data on a a server see example below the ATLAS ti controls the editing process This is possible based on the Lok and Log files created by ATLAS ti See File Locking on page 84 and Creation of Log files on page 139 Let s assume you work in a team of five people Each of you is located in a separate office or at different geographical locations All of you work on the same project and analyze the same pool of data source files As shown in the figure below all data source files are located on a network drive and are shared by all team members ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EDITING PRIMARY DOCUMENTS While the data sources referenced by an HU can be shared by multiple users HUs cannot be worked on concurrently Therefore each team member works on her own HU The work can then be combined using the ATLAS ti Merge feature 146 Working on Project xy Tom ul The project folder E all documents and all 5 HUs is stored on E
318. entries are interpreted literally nogrep note all entries must be uppercase A AN IT THE THIS Figure 167 Default stoplist Enter all words you want to beexcluded from the count in capital letters and enter one word per line The following regular expressions can be used excludes numbers of any length excludes strings of hyphens of arbitrary size excludes strings of underscores exclude sequences of zeros When you are done save the stop list and close the window Fite Save the menu of the text editor appear in the language of your Windows system The Query Tool is used for retrieving quotations using the codes they were associated with during the process of coding This is different from a text search To search for occurrences of text that match a specified pattern or string you have to use the search function or the Object Crawler see Text Search on page 225 and The Object Crawler on page 373 The simplest retrieval of this kind search for quotations with codes is what you frequently do with the Code Manager double clicking on a code retrieves all its quotations This may already be regarded as a query although it is a simple one The Query Tool is more complex in that it can be used to create and process queries that include combinations of codes A query is a search expression built from operands codes and code families and operators e g NOT AND OR etc that define the c
319. er object a memo is an object by itself Writing memos is an important task in every phase of the qualitative analysis process The ideas captured in memos are often the pieces of a puzzle that are later put together in the phase of report writing Theory building often associated with building networks also can involve the use of memos Memos are explanatory and descriptive texts that may be associated with other objects like quotations codes or other memos Memos can also stand alone simply as part of an HU They can contain methodological notes they can be used as a bulletin board to exchange information between team members you can use them to write notes about the analytical process keeping a journal of to dos Memos may also serve as a repository for symbols text templates and embedded objects that you may want to insert into PDs or other memos Memos can also be assigned as primary documents if you want to code them see page 258 below Difference between Memos and Codes Code names are or should be succinct dense descriptors for concepts emerging during the stage of closely studying the data They often reduce complex findings to crisp placeholders and or theoretically relevant concepts Beginners often stuff lengthy treatises into a code name blurring the distinction between codes comments and memos and thereby mistaking codes for their more appropriate siblings If you find yourself using more th
320. er and location female location A female location B male location A male location B and a code family for the codes fear worries belief in technology change of focus no change and indifference assuming that you have used a few more codes than just these seven Then you create four tables and copy them all into one spread sheet In most cases the totals are of highest interest and not the count for each individual PD But this could of course also be the case depending on your type of data and the kind of questions you are interested in Based on this first result you can aggregate the data further and could come up with the following comparisons ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 313 belief in change of fear worries technology focus nochange indifference Figure 218 Further aggregation of the data How to create a Codes Primary Documents Table Exporting the entire data set If you want to create table based on all of your data for import into another software for further statistical analysis Select Copes Output Copes PrimarY DOcUMENTS TABLE gt QUOTATION COUNT ExceL or Woro count ExceL Select as output destination File or Fie amp Run if you want to view the table first Enter a name for the Excel file or accept the default name Wait for Excel or OpenOffice Calc to open in case you have chosen the File amp Run option Accep
321. er and create a user account Privacy issues are explained on the website If you don t want to use CAT via their official website you can host your own version of CAT from the project source code CAT offers the following analysis options to compare the coding of two coders Analysis v Standard Comparisons Code by Code Comparisons Comparison for ATLAS TI Families Figure 220 CAT Analysis options The standard comparison allows you to either calculate a Kappa value or Krippendorff s alpha The Code by Code comparison shows you the data content and thus offers a qualitative means of comparing coded data by coders The third options allows a comparison based on families Standard comparison Once the data is uploaded the tool for the standard comparison looks as follows ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 316 7 o CODING ANALYSIS L TOOLKIT Main Menu Datasets Analysis y Validation y Reports Bookmarks v Account Y Logout Comparison Tools Standard Compare Dataset Master JR y Available Coders n Coders Add All gt gt Remove All lt Remove Available Codes Chosen Codes Add date of murder Family Murder historic context Add All gt gt name of suspect Family Suspects lt lt Remove All name of suspect Cohen Family Suspects name of suspect Feigenbaum Family Suspects Remove name ofsuspect Kaminski Family Su
322. er browser window is opened after the import which lets you select the multimedia document This is then added to the association and assigned as a PD ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 97 ATLAS ti determines automatically if it is dealing with f4audio or f4media documents Working with Associated Documents All A Doc functions can be accessed either via the A Docs menu or from the Associations Editor A Hermeneutic Unit can contain unlimited numbers of associations but only one can be active at any given time The active association is selected via the main menu A Docs Use Association and closed via A Docs CLose Association In the Associations Editor you find these options under the Fite menu Associations between documents are automatically activated when a document is loaded in the HU Editor In cases where several associations exist the first available is automatically selected Play Selected Text If you select a piece of transcript or a quotation in an associated text the selected linked audio or video can be played Highlight a a piece of text and select either the menu item A Docs Pray SELECTED Text or press the key combination CrrL P The associated video or audio recording will be played back from the correct position Playback stops at the end of the selection The accuracy of selected text playback depends on the precision and the number of the available anchors Synchronization Mode F3 In
323. er e EET Quotation Manager Toolbar M m Quotation Manager Columns nione ri eni cnt di can ea de reci t i Pa db d ene rri Dn EE e HE DEC PLN dads 58 Code Cre EE Code Manager Toolbar Code Manager Columns Memo Manager s 2 A ones cte Dette sie tesis out Arabes ec PR Ee ist lo a turbet ted dix et Memo Manager Toolbar EE T Memo Manager Columns iita ied esi ca dide ted e a eem odd n Ce du cie e tan e oem a Mais dashes cei A o ts 62 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL Data Prepara as ssp A A A STE 64 Starting and Ending an ATLAS ti SessiON o oonnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnincnnc cnc a a reee 64 Starting ATLAS Mia al ie Aaa edo deanna DTE RERO 64 E A EUR PSU 65 Ending your ATLAS HO a id bedi ads 66 Creating Opening and Saving a Hermeneutic UNit ooooocnnncnnnnnicinnanicnnannnccnao narco roca cnn cnn 66 Creating a Hermeneutic Unit Opening a El rmeneutic Unit cap cire Mri ei rir rp oce Hsec ico re ice Re able od RL ddan een abate ele aa 66 To open a Hermeneutic Unit using the standard Windows file dialOg ooonoiininnininioninnnnnnnnnaniannnnnn nana 67 To open a Hermeneutic Unit using the HU Browser 67 To open a recently used Hermeneutic Unit 68 To open the most recently used Hermeneutic Unit at start up 68 To open a Hermeneutic Unit using Drag amp DIOP ooonccocccccncccnononaconononanonaconononanonncronnnnnnonnn ron emen eene nrennnen nennen nnn
324. er for every piece of text followed by a hard return For video and audio documents paragraph numbers and the margin area are not displayed Margin Area 7 To the right hand side of the PD area is the optional margin area Brackets are used to indicate quotations Attached codes memos and hyperlinks are displayed next to the brackets The margin area is fully interactive the displayed objects are sensitive to mouse clicks and have their own context menus In addition a variety of drag and drop options are possible See Margin Drag amp Drop on page 260 for more detail You can resize the margin area using the split bar 9 between the PD pane and the margin pane When you double click on a code in the margin area a comment field pops up showing the code definition if you have written one Context menu for a code in the margin area ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 46 Code JACK THE RIPPER Display Code Info Rename Display Comment 2 Edit Comment Open Network List Quotations Unlink Figure 6 Code context menu A general context menu can be opened inside the margin area by moving the mouse pointer onto the background between the objects It allows you to set display properties of the objects ObjectType E v Uselmages Use Object Colors Display Coordinates Use Short Names Set Font Figure 7 Margin area context menu Margin are
325. er on the Network Editor but should be mentioned here Codes and quotations can also be linked in the Code Quotation Manager via drag amp drop F Identify the target item in the Object Manager s list pane ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 332 v Select one or more source items in the Object Manager s list pane and drag them to the target item in the same pane F Select a relation from the list of relations Yi context x 10 2 d YX context X 9 2 ERE content Y 1 di see YX context Y 0 4 F mvesticarion Link to code context Y tigation d jinve is ass is associat Y l investigation st evidence 4 0 Yd investigation_stol avoids 3B investigation s ted by whom 37 0 SB investigation sus berichten 3B investigation t 15 0 investigation the spar is part af Yo investigation theo Fido 4 0 investigation the gt 5 cause of X JACK THE RIPPER 1 0 Yd JACK THE RIPPER Li T Jack the Ripper legend 11 1 A tintmoe 1 gt contrbuting to 1 Select source 2 Selectarelation err ev gt i describes Wetter authenticity 6 0 Kh lonor auth codes and drag them letter commonalities 1 01 noname Wrietter_date 4 0 WH letter date 4 0 s property of Wiletter_ditterences 1 01 Wetter ditterences Form Wietter_redpient 2 0 Yi letter recipient gt Why suspected d DK LI Open Relation Editor Xm t A e nes 3 y fedes maton AE t
326. er part of the Code Manager see Editing Text on page 53 to create or edit a comment Writing comments for coded segments If you notice something interesting while coding and you want to write it down use the quotation comment field for it Right click on the highlighted quotation and select the option Epir Comment from the context menu An editor pops up Write a comment on the selected data segment Save your comment by clicking on the Accerr button and close the editor E Quotss ES 1 5 There is also evidence that th 10 10 ake you unhappy 9 down happiness visibility of quotation comment parenthood are not at having children 1 5 http www jstor org pss 351391 have children in the CLICK TO EDIT 10 happier and many ire all these baby Figure 123 Drag amp Drop coding Quotation comments are visible in the bar in the margin area and by the tilde sign in front of the quotation name in the quotations list Setting code colors If you want to color your codes select a code in the Code Manager and click Q on the rainbow colored circle in the tool bar To make code colors visible in the margin right click on a white space in the margin area and select the option Use Ossect CoLors In order to still be able see which code label belongs to which quotation bar a small bar colored in the same color as the quotation bar is shown in front of the code label The code l
327. er window that shows the PDs in the lower left pane and the PD families in the upper left As PD families can be looked at as nominal variables it is easy to preselect all interviews with male interviewees aged between twenty and thirty from small towns A restricted set of operators is offered note that only Boolean operators make sense here and can be used to construct scope selection queries in much the same way as the query itself Figure 185 Restricting a search to a sub group of data A ATLAS ti Query Tool em x A Scope of Query Families Query OEE Rea indo Redo Primary Doc Families Query Undo Redo v political program 7 a lang direct quote v 2 circulation local 5 Country Brazil V g reactions 4 v 2 circulation national 4 E 183 tittes 3 L PE Country Brazil 5 ES e n t Y nea nf dirart enaarh 51 A Counta Barman IT a m A 5 mnn 4 Codes Primary Docs t 3 L LANGUAGE 0 0 P 1 Badische Zeitung onlin M lang direct quote 25 1 GRP 2 Badische Zeitung Schw 36 lang emotional 3 0 P 3 Berliner Zeitung doc 4 B 8 lang evaluating 4 0 3l XP 4 Berliner Zeitung Schwa B lang formal 0 0 sl D 5 E57 dar JIT M 5 Y lang_metaphoric 16 1 Create Super Code x amp Im s LAYOUT 0 0 ld Naina S Candidate Quotations in Query E kdo rr 8 13 how mapy4votes I got b 5 Id Na
328. erm stack and feedback pane now display the code reason released alibi The results pane lists all quotations for this code Double click on the code reason released lack of evidence aussa NN LO Murdar 2 4 mr cn Codes reason released lack of evidence murderer motive 1 1 5 murderer serial killer 11 2 Z murderer various persons 4 0 Z murders canonical five 4 6 Z murders more less than five 5 Y amp murders potentially attributed Yi REASON RELEASED 0 0 amp reason released alibi 7 0 EC reason released alive long aftei XX reason released allegation unp EG reason released does not fit ch 3 88 A man named James Thomas Sa E3 1 Carl Feigenbaum E3 1 James Kelly lt m Figure 174 Clicking a Boolean Query Step 2 DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 280 With two operands on the term stack we can combine them with an appropriate operator The intention was to retrieve all quotations that contain information about an alibi or lack of evidence as reasons to release a suspect Click on the OR operator see left to combine the two expressions from the stack A ATLAS ti Query Tool CO co E Som ames Query Lc JLs J P Recalc Undo Redo Investigation 6 OR reason released alibi reason released lack of el Letter 6 L3 K Modus operandi 5 PO Murdar 21 Y Ti ttt aal t Codes t
329. ers ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 405 Example Sortable Table In order to create the output in the figure below style sheet Sortable Table was applied The generated table allows interactive sorting and searching of codes and some of their related information Sortable and Searchable Results Table Instructions Highlight rows by clicking them Sort coiumns by clicking the ARROW in the header Find data anywhere in the table by using the search facility Note Search is Case sensitive Fra Search Results Code 4 Author 4 Date 4 Code Family 4 1 date of murder team 08 11 2008 Murder 2 historic context Anna 08 11 2009 3 name of suspect team 08 12 2009 Suspects 4 name of suspect Cohen team 08 21 2009 Suspects 5 name of suspect Feigenbaum Tom 08 21 2009 Suspects amp name of suspect Kaminski team 08 21 2009 Suspects 7 name of suspect Kelly Tom 08 21 2009 Suspects B name of suspect Kosmiski team 08 21 2008 Suspects 9 name of victim team 08 13 2009 Victim Who Victims 10 INVESTIGATION Anna 08 11 2009 Investigation 11 investigation doubts Anna 08 11 2009 investigation 12 investigation stolen evidence Anna 08 11 2009 Investigation 13 investigation suspected by whom Anna 08 11 2009 investigation 14 investigation theories Anna 08 13 2009 Investigation 15 investigation theory by M Fido Anna 08 19 2009 investigation 16 JACK THE RIPPER team 08 13 2009 17 Jack the Ripper legend te
330. ers letters digits symbols long but should not exceed 10 letters higher risk of typos A password can be changed later by the administrator However when logging in you are not required to enter a password if the default settings are kept see Relaxed User Management below Last and first name Both names really have no important function other then giving the user a correct welcome However both a last and a first name must be provided when defining a user To add a new user F Select Enr New User Enter an Account name a password the last and the first name into the sequence of prompters After completion of the sign up procedure the new entry appears in the list of users The Access rights attribute is set to Administrator by default see Administrative and Standard Access Rights below Change the access rights if needed ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 153 Administrative and Standard Access Rights Administrative rights allow you to add delete and change users In addition administrative access rights are necessary if you want to edit primary documents Users with standard rights can only access HUs they have created themselves or those where there have been registered as co author They are not allowed to edit primary documents Removing a user To assure that there is at least one user with administrative privileges in the database any attempts to remove all administr
331. ers have become a combination of genuine O historical research folkdore and pseudo history Many authors V investigation suspected by whom I modus operandi similarities modus operandi cut thre 1 historians and amateur detectives have proposed theories about the e identity of the killer and his victims 07 Background 2 Figure 5 The HU Editor with activated line numbers and margin area The HU Editor serves as the main editing tool and offers access to all other workbench tools ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 44 With all optional controls buttons and panes visible the HU Editor looks rather overwhelming at first You can decide which parts of the window to display and customize its appearance to your needs Use the Views menu to hide some of the buttons windows etc Components of the HU Editor The numbers in brackets refer to the figure above showing the HU editor Title Bar The title bar is common to all windows and dialog boxes It displays the name of the HU that is currently being edited Main Menu The main menu below the title bar offers access to the different kinds of objects that populate an HU Commands found in the main menu are often also available from context menus and toolbar buttons Tool bars Tool bars offer functions that are generally also available as menu commands A short tool tip help text is displayed when the mouse pointer rests on
332. es comfortable territory for moving from memo to memo to read and contemplate each individually and the relationship s between them When dragging a piece of text from a drag enabled application like MS Word into a Network Editor the text becomes a memo with an automatically assigned title The title can be renamed later ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS E TA 325 Primary Documents as Nodes PDs as nodes are useful sometimes but in the presence of quotations may clutter the view by myriad links However PDs as nodes make a nice graphical content table for graphical primary documents When selecting the option DisPLAv FuuL Imace For PDs thumbnail images of the PDs are displayed This option only affects graphical Pds Windows Explorer are used as standard icons for PD nodes indicating the file of the document 23J 2 El Figure 230 PD node icons Quotations as Nodes Quotations and codes have one thing in common that is not true for the other objects They can link to each other quotations to quotations and code to codes with fully qualified first class links using relations The inclusion of quotations in a Network View supports the construction and inspection of hyperlink structures commented text quotation image quotation audio quotation video quotation Google Earth quotation pum Figure 231 Display of quotations based on its media format Tex
333. es dialog Extras Prererences GENERAL PREFERENCES TAB Marcin n PLace AcTION Deleting Codes Deleting a code removes the code from the entire HU All references that involve this code are removed It also disappears from Network Views and families that contained this code If you only want to remove a code from a specific quotation you should unlink the code instead see below To delete a Code Select a code in the Code Manager a Network View the Object Explorer or the Code Forest In the Code Manager Object Explorer or Code Forest use the Deere function from the menu In a Network View right click on a code If the code has been used e g is assigned to quotations connected to other codes part of a super code etc you are asked for confirmation before the deletion process continues Furthermore if quotations coded with this code are not used in any other context you are asked whether these quotations should be removed as well ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 218 There is no undo function to get deleted codes back If you are unsure about the effects of an operation save and or make a backup copy of your Hermeneutic Unit first Unlinking Codes This option is the reverse function of coding It removes the links between codes and quotations Unlike the delete function neither codes nor quotations are removed only the association between the code and the quot
334. etailed view frequently used tools A double click on a code displays the coded quotation highlighted in the context of its PD If more than one quotation is associated with this code a list pops up from which a quotation can be selected The Code Manager is frequently used to create and modify codes to code data segments via drag amp drop and to retrieve coded data segments It can also be used to sort your codes in multiple ways in order to analyze codebook evolution Single click Selects a code If you have written a definition for the selected code it is displayed in the text pane Once selected the code can be used for drag amp drop coding Single click pause single click or F2 activates in place editing of code names Double click Opens a list of quotations that have been coded with this code Multiple Selection You can select more than one code at a time to delete code a data segment with all of the selected codes open a network create output assign them to one or more code families or to create a code family containing the selected codes Copes Epit FamiLy ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 60 Drag amp Drop You can use the Code Manager as a convenient tool for coding by dragging codes onto a highlighted piece of data If you drag codes onto another code within the same list pane code links will be created Colors Super Codes are displayed in red regular codes in black
335. etation Prefix Result This column defines the primary document s name This column defines the primary document s column ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 101 This column defines the primary document s author amp This column defines the primary document s date expects 1508601 format lt Ignore this column use to exclude stuff inserted by the survey tool Creates a PD family from the field name Currently the cell needs to contain the number 1 or the words Yes or Ja to be applied Use for single choice questions where respondents can answer yes or no or encoded as 1 and 0 Only the responses encoded with yes ja or 1 become part of the PD family PD Family from the field name plus cell value Use for single choice question like gender PD Family from the field name plus the actual cell value Use for single choice questions with more than two answer options or for multiple choice questions Add no prefix to all open ended questions The text in the column header is used as code To avoid very long code name use a short form to indicate the question and add the full question as comment see next row All text entered after two colons is added to the object s comment field This can be applied to cells resulting in PD families or codes elect whole table 20100414T1 female Beatles Stones Iwas walking This is a lengthy response toa 20000 roo
336. ete HORE IET I Lo n OT C th A xt eC dece d S RE cta Crash Recovery Automatic Backup Copy Bundle Migrating and Backing Up Projects netnetrenetretetnt nn 129 Create a BOM NM The Copy Bundle Tool How to Create the Bundle Fileantais ii enan ai cene tnnt opp e aed te Yosh and i d e EP E P Ee uc tes 130 Installa BUNGIE sa ce taka diia n a d x er get b c edet ia Unbundling Strategies IIS ALC Eo ieee es RESTOTE e EN UE Edilne PHITISFV DSCUTentero edes occae id Objectives eerte er cte te rd e d nt e e C TO HP La a t HG e nd Pec Ll b te c ERR E e os Insid Editing Primary Documetis 2 tice et says their ger inv ceat rite podes ira EUR De eer cad AR radi aa danaitedasencignsannsarasucgut Understanding the Primary Document HU Relationship umb adnate dads How to Edita Primary DOCUMENT sisiane dai ts mede cq ac d n i een nre emi nier iden Dou Er bn ile ei bg ods Please read This happens when you save an edited primary document Creation of Log tl EE D Best practice rules ii o ccu tede Pee d dent ebd cal Moshe talk a Rule No 1 Always edit from within ATLAS ti Rule No 2 Never delete modify or move the auxiliary log file sse eene Enriching A Plain Text Document T Embedded Objects What is an Embedded Object
337. ettings for memos via Extras PREFERENCES Generar Prererences Memos Dragging a Memo to another Hermeneutic Unit You can drag memos between HUs This transfers the memo name body type but none of its referenced quotations codes etc are migrated along Using Memos to Create a Code List Using a pseudo memo allows you to bulk create a large number of free codes Create a new memo Type a list of codes with one code per line or copy and paste an existing list from an application like Word F Save the memo From the Miscettaneous menu choose the option Create Copes FROM SELECTED Memo Codes in the memo s code list that already exist are prefixed with three exclamation marks If such prefixed codes already exist they are ignored Drag amp Drop Text to Create a Memo While dropping text into the text pane of the Memo Manager or the memo editor inserts the dropped text at the drop position ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH MEMOS 260 Margin Drag amp Drop All objects populating the margin area i e margin objects support drag amp drop The bar visualize quotations segmenting the document and depending on the context the objects attached to the bars represent themselves or the Margin link with the quotation Drag amp Drop The effect of a drag amp drop operation depends on the objects that are involved can be toggled as drag sources those that are dragged and targets those ont
338. everyday usage of OR Its meaning is At least one of including the case where ALL conditions match The XOR operator in contrast asks that EXACTLY one of the conditions must meet It translates into everyday either or Example All quotations coded with EITHER Earth OR Fire but not with both AND The AND operator finds quotations that match ALL the conditions specified in the query This means you have applied two or more codes to the same quotation Example All quotations coded with Earth AND Fire The AND operator is very selective and often produces an empty result set Precision of this operator is high but the recall is rather low It produces best results when combined with less restrictive operators or when the overall number of the available text segments is large ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 272 aj NOT The NOT operator tests for the absence of a condition Technically it subtracts the findings of the non negated term from all data segments available Given 120 quotations in the HU and 12 quotations assigned to code Fire the query NOT Fire retrieves 108 quotations those which are not coded with Fire Of course the operator can be used with an arbitrary expression as in the argument NOT Earth OR Fire which is the equivalent of neither Earth nor Fire The OR operator has the potential to g
339. ew Category desse dene t evo antec ed dde idv oen i d ced eur e ed lev Aaa As 228 Managing Search Categories cicer io enan a AAEN aE ENVE E no E CR Yr e ca la d Dd t E 229 GREP Search Supported Basic GREP Expressioris icon occ tp tta ete Pe died ena te lo e eoe d e t Reg 230 Examples of GREP Searches uices etm eee tte tee entes tea Aviat et d e T a ii 230 yer igu uahdu i EM 231 The Auto Coding Tool sse 231 Ioue M te gieoes 231 The AUtO Goding BICI e 231 A e 232 Scope of Search sni ONERE 232 Segment Size aint ina Lemno rea bed Fieri T en HE P EIE Le EE eI ca E DO DLL Ree t e ERE d LE Eine ede n 233 T st your Search EXpIeselon s i recede det rct tic oen depo aia c i 233 How to Autos Code trt a Scc tede eda lao redire dec be tho noD ev Fully Automatic Coding Semi Automatic Coding ii Ac denne deter rn a i ide dab e HR Eee e DU re vod bere a Br shingsup Results after Auto Coding cette atem t n tere dpi cido Checking and Modifying Quotations n Preparing Documents optimized for Auto Coding sse treten tetne treten iet nenncns 235 Famy MS EN P Op NEPOS 237 Purpose of Creating and Working With Farnilies ttem n t e e i e lr a e T LR RR 237 Super Families e
340. ew category Open the Text Search tool Enter a new definition into the entry field using the following syntax CATEGORY NAME string or category gt lt string or Scategory gt etc When defining a new category do not prefix its name with a As soon as you press the Next button a new category is created and a search for the first occurrence starts This category is now available to you for the current work session If the new category should be available in the future you need to save it to the search library F Click on the Options button and select Save CATEGORIES category to the existing search library with the name srchbib skt and save it In case you do not want to create multiple search libraries add your new at the suggested location in the ATLASti folder ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL Create search libraries for different languages different topics different projects etc GREP searches are very flexible Regular Expressions efficiently exploit the syntactical properties of the technical device called texti THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 229 Managing Search Categories Search categories are managed in search libraries On startup ATLAS ti loads a default library of search categories named srchbib skt You can update this library by adding new categories and removing or modifying existing categories It is also possible to create completely new search libraries
341. existing version all documents will be unbundled replacing 16 documents Figure 67 Status report in the copy bundle window The report pane in the lower right of the Install Bundle window displays a dynamic report of the documents about to be unbundled How To Install a Bundle File F Select Toots Cory Buwpis Instat BunoLe from the main menu From the file dialog select a bundle file and click Oren The Install Bundle window opens Select a strategy for installing the bundle Migrate or Restore see Unbundling Strategies on page 131 entry field All documents using HUPATH are also copied to this folder It If in Migrate mode select the target location for the HU via the HU Path might be a good idea to select a new empty folder as the target l Check for conflicts and try to resolve them Conflict Color Code on page 133 F Exclude unwanted documents or the HU before installing the bundle Click on the Unbundle button When all files have been copied to their respective locations a message pops up informing you that the unbundling process is finished Every file that is replaced during the installation of the bundle is backed up The name of the backup files is backup of A two level backup strategy is in effect The files are first backed up then the backup files are also backed up So you might experience quite an increase of files However given that disk space is not a big problem these da
342. explain why you linked the two quotation comment area for hyperlinks Figure 279 Writing viewing or editing a hyperlink comment in the Hyperlink Manager To edit a hypertext link comment using the Network Editor Open a Network Editor on a quotation establishing one end of the hypertext link Move the mouse pointer onto the link between two quotations and open the context menu with a right mouse button click F Choose Epir Comment the tilde indicates that this link is d commented Ez E afe E 19 1 yper Link EXPANDS 16 5 Display Comment Flip Link amp CutLink Display Relation Change Relation Figure 280 Editing a hyperlink comment in a network view editor The Hyper Link Manager The Hyper Link Manager works exactly like the Code Link Manager only that it is populated by hyperlinks ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 372 4 LM Hyper Link Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage II 62 hyperlinks Hyper Links Edit Miscellaneous View x Y Els Source Relation Target Pl 16 5 Dorset Street 5 murder live link GE 15 5 Dorset Street Site of fifth murder 17 1 iPicture Object expands 5 3 At about 6 40 in the early morning she was found d 5 117 2 Picture Object X Display Source lt 17 1 Picture Object 5 5 P 17 2 Picture Object Display Target gt 5 3 At about 6 40 in the early morning she was found d 1 929 1 1188
343. f ofa a question that may elicit looooong building answers Case 2 2010041511 Stones Scorpions d Quite simple every field name 71000 y question that has no prefix is an open ended question be default Figure 49 Sample table ready for import By importing the sample table we get The name date and author of the resulting PD Two dichotomous families Academic and Army The following comment is added to the PD Family Army Did you serve Two families Sex male and Sex female Four families Favorites Beatles Favorites Stones etc For the PD families the following comment is added What bands do you listen to regularly ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 102 Two codes Tell us a dream and Open End The following comment is added to the comment field of the code Open End Now how do make a question be interpreted as open ended How to import survey data Prepare an Excel table as explained above You can add the prefixes already when you prepare the online survey or afterward by editing the the resulting Excel table The drawback of adding the prefixes to the survey is that such early applied mark up also displays in the online survey interface and your respondents might wonder about the funny characters at the beginning of questions Editing the downloaded Excel table prior to importing it into ATLAS ti has the advantage of not displaying unusual formatting characters to the user A disad
344. f testing with the Text Search tool is that no quotations are created Another option is to auto code into a new code If you later find out that the search did not yield good results you can delete the code and all created quotations with two mouse clicks and try a different search How to Auto Code Auto coding can be fully automatic or semi automatic The sections below will clarify the difference and will show the advantages of each method ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 234 Fully Automatic Coding Select the PD you want to code using the auto coding procedure If you only want to auto code the current text load the PD in question If you want to auto code all texts load the first PD and position the cursor at the beginning of the document To open the Auto Coding tool choose Copes Coping Auro Copinc from the main menu If no code is selected select a code from the drop down list at the top of the Auto Coding tool Enter a new search string or choose an existing search category F Specify the search scope e g Selected PD Specify the segment size Start the process by clicking START Semi Automatic Coding As it is not always desirable to let the program decide whether or not to code a given text passage you can control the process by checking Confirm always Specific confirmation from the user on each new code will then be requested An example for the usage of semi auto
345. f the intellectual activity of coding as for example understood in Grounded Theory GLASER amp STRAUSS 1967 In ATLAS ti coding is simply the procedure of associating code words with selections of data Technically speaking coding is the association between a quotation and a code The following describes ways to establish maintain or remove such associations Although some of the coding techniques reflect the ideas and terminology used in Grounded Theory you do not have to use this methodology when analyzing your data within ATLAS ti Four coding procedures are described Open Coding In Vivo Coding Code by List and Quick Coding In addition the purpose and creation of free codes are explained Text search and automatic coding is described further below in a separte chapter see The Auto Coding Tool on page 231 A code may contain more than a single word but should be concise Use the code comment area to write a definition If you find yourself writing prose instead of a succinct code name you might in fact want to annotate If this is the case use comments or memos instead Video Tutorials Coding Basics http www youtube com watch v TUZpXEySp1U Code Management http www youtube com watch v f1jO3B4218 Margin Area 1 2 http www youtube com watch v N8e9jPhTXNg Margin Area 2 2 http www youtube com watch v kfyPwkrFYAA General Coding Procedure There are some common steps with each of the coding pro
346. ferences 2 Quotes 3 8 In the mid 19th century Engla 8 10 iomanon or genuine xy Many authors sed theories about the drop down list for quotations quotation bar marking the length of a quotation Figure 104 Quotation reference The bars in the margin mark the length of the quotation graphically The entry in the quotation field shows a textual reference for the quotation It consists of the following elements ID name start and end position ID The quotation ID is composed of the number of its P Doc and a second number indicating when the quotation was created The ID 8 1 means that the quotation is from P Doc 8 and is the first one that was created in this ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 185 document The reason for the chronological numbering is to do with the fact that you will not necessarily code a document from the first line to the last You will jump between passages and modify or delete some quotations during the coding process A linear numeration would have to be updated with every single quotation that is inserted which would take up unnecessary computation capacity Sorting the quotations by their start position for example offers a clear linear view of your quotes Recently an option was added to change the chronological numbering to a sequential order if need be Quotations MisctLLANEOUS Renumeer ALL TO DocrLow This can for example be useful when
347. for fine resolution positioning If you have a multimedia keyboard you can use the special keys available to control multimedia files ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 190 Fie Edit Documents Quotation Codes Memos Netwons Views Estas A Docs Windows Help ad p 7 2 Victim Annie Chapm EZ la lt gt 75 The swinging c igi 38 name of suspect Coher Code memo 0 Me E P 7 2 Victim Annie Chapman scene of the murder 1967 wmv Qi P 7 2 Victim Annie Chapman scene of the murder E 2 Quotation Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage I 62 T Quotations fan Miscellaneous Output View lt gt 7 1 Hanbury Street 29 in 1967 0 00 00 00 0 00 15 32 72 the two entrances 0 00 06 96 0 00 03 24 73 The swinging door 0 00 23 50 0 00 03 70 E lt gt 7 4 The wooden shed 0 00 31 47 0 00 06 34 lt gt 7 5 The swinging door and wooden fence 0 00 38 50 0 00 09 91 77 Place where Chapman was found 0 00 50 25 0 00 04 16 fi 7 8 Comment about Hanbury Street in 1967 0 01 01 73 0 00 03 25 D 7 10 Look into the yard where Chapmann was ki 0 00 23 50 0 00 14 2 Figure 108 Active video window Given that there is currently v 6 no margin area display of audio and video files we recommend the following Open the Quotation Manager and place it on the right side of your screen Set a filter for the currently
348. ful results the quotations created and assigned to the selected code during auto coding should be screened and modified if needed Checking and Modifying Quotations Close the Auto Coding tool Open both the Code Manager and the Quotation Manager F Select the code you just used for auto coding F In the Quotation Manager set the quotation filter to Selected Code Click the Created column header to find all recently created quotations at the top of the list Browse through the quotations assigned to this code by using the Next and Previous buttons in the Quotation Manager Modify or delete misaligned or inappropriate quotations See Modifying Textual and PDF Quotations on page 186 Preparing Documents optimized for Auto Coding The following instructions are useful for preparing transcriptions of focus group sessions questionnaires or interviews Such data usually contains different speakers sections The hints given here also apply for other documents that include sections you wish to identify for auto coding It would be tedious to code speaker or section turns manually Two things are needed a good marker for which to search and once the marker is found a reliable identification of the unit sentence paragraph to be coded Insert easily identifiable markup in the text to let the auto coding pattern matcher do this for you For proper markup a little knowledge regarding the auto coder s search procedu
349. g Codes Creating Free Codes via the Batch Method To create a large number of free codes this works best using the Memo Manager Open the Memo Manager Memos Memo Manacer From the Memo Manager s menu select Memos Create Free Memo As title enter code list ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 216 Renaming or deleting a code has global effects Add your list of code words one per line Save the memo Memo Save or Cret S and close it Highlight the memo and select the option M scerLaneous Create CODES FROM SeLEcTED Memo Transferring Codes from Other Projects If you want to import an already existing list of codes from another HU that might serve as a repository for codes use the XML Export Import function for codes see Exporting and Importing Codes in XML on page 420 This option has the advantage that already existing code definitions i e code comments and colors are transferred as well If only a subset of codes is to be transferred from one project to another set a code filter in the exporting HU How to transfer codes F Select Copes Miscettaneous Export Cones XML F Select the option Send Output to File l A file dialog window opens Select a folder enter a file name and save the file Open a HU into which the codes will be imported For this HU select Copes Miscettaneous Import Copes XML A file dialog window opens Select the X
350. gh this web ATLAS ti provides powerful browsing retrieval and editing tools Primary Documents PD or PDoc Primary Documents represent data sources These are the text image audio video or geographic materials that you wish to interpret The content of PDocs usually consists of data files on your computer This content is turned into primary documents by assigning them to an HU The source files remain external to the HU However it is also possible to create internal text documents and to assign memos as a internal PDs When using data files as external sources for your PDs then you need to make sure that permanent access to these sources is guaranteed This means the source file has to remain at the referenced location and should not be renamed or moved otherwise the HU cannot find it Also to not jeopardize the integrity of your coding data sources should not be changed outside of ATLAS ti ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN CONCEPTS AND FEATURES 27 ATLAS ti offers an edit mode in case you need to make changes to your data sources See Editing Primary Documents on page 136ff A Primary Document has e a NAME which is used when it is displayed in the PD manager By default the name of the data source the file name or the memo title is used an AUTHOR the user who assigned this PD to the HU a CREATION DATE date of assignment acollection of QUOTATIONS e a REFERENCE e g a file name and path to its
351. ght click on the white background There you will find the option SHow Links ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 212 Coding gt Create Link Source Rename Show Links S Ctrl RB Pp Edit Comment HZ Open Network View X Delete Speak Open MediaControl Figure 130 Show links Unlinking codes To unlink a code from a video quotation right click on the white background Then select the option Unuink Copes Modifying the length of a video quotation To modify a quotation boundary activate a quotation in the Quotation Manager Then reset either the start or end position You can use the right and left arrows on your keyboard to adjust the length of a quotation by frames To modify the length click Ctrl the Create Quotation button Resetting the filter To reset the set filter select the main menu option Extras Reset ALL Fitters Describing video quotations to improve outputs As mentioned above the name of a video quote is its data file name If you want to add further information you have two options renaming the quotations and adding a comment Renaming video quotations and creating text output In the process of creating video quotations rename them so they can serve as titles for your video segments To do so right click on the quotation name in the Quotation Manager and select the Rename option If 30 characters are not enough for quotation names you can extend the number Fro
352. gle Earth User Guide Table of Contents Managing Search Results Introduction Once you begin searching for places anc listings and nave learned how to save them you can leam about Finding Places and Directions Search Results Basics Clearing Search Re Marking Places Measuring Distances and Areas Google Earth User Guic Printing Search Results Drawing Paths and Polygons Google Earth User Guide Using Layers Viewing Many Results Using Image Overlays and 3D Models Google Earth Use Importing Your Data Into Google Earth Google Earth U Using Style Templates Google Earth User Guide Using GPS Devices with Google Earth Google Earth User Making Movies with Google Earth Google Earth User G Keyboard Controls Google Earth User Guide 3D Viewer Options Google Earth User Guide Table of Contents Google Earth User Guide Using Map Fe Helo Mac Festum Search Results Basics Using Pl Satna Pace This section covers the basic search results features not covered in Finding About KML Places and Directions Matching search results are displayed in the 3D viewer with an icon to mark the search The alphabetical icons next to each result corresponds to its matching item in the search list view for easy Cross reference By default only the most recent search is turned on Touring Places in the 3D viewer but you can turn on the icon for any search result
353. h the procedure In the first step the source HU is selected Next a merge strategy is chosen and possibly fine tuned Select a target and source HU Load the target HU It is advisable to save it under a different name so that you don t corrupt the original file in case something goes wrong From the HU Editor s main menu select Toots Merce with HU Alternatively you can drag an HU onto the HU Editor s caption holding down the CTRL key The Merge Wizard opens guiding you through the merge procedure see figure 93 below The first page of the Merge Wizard displays the current target HU i e the one that was loaded first requesting you to enter the source HU s file name r A Merge Hermeneutic Units Select Source HU A Please select the Hermeneutic Unit to be merged the Source HU into the one that is currently loaded the Target HU Select HU C Users Susanne Organisation Des v gt Target HU Master project ABC_15 Sep 2011 S Source HU project ABC Tom hpr6 Figure 93 The Merge Tool select a Source HU after loading the Target HU F Click on the browse button and select a source HU from the file dialog Click the Next button The source HU is loaded and you can proceed with the next step If the merge procedure was initiated by drag amp drop the source HU is already entered into the source entry field You can immediately proceed by clicking on the Next button Next you need to
354. he Text menu in the Association Editor Delete Association Anchors If you set an anchor accidentally you can correct this by clicking F8 a second time Another way to delete anchors is via the Association Editor Select an anchor in the editor and then either press the Del key on your keyboard or select the menu option Association Derete ANCHOR Undo Setting or deleting an anchor can be reversed via the undo option Association UNpo Naming Anchors You can use the list of anchors in the Association Editor to navigate through the associated documents For this purpose anchors can be named To name an anchor select it click on the name field and enter a name You can also use the currently highlighted text as name In order to do this click F9 or select the menu option Text Gras Text as Name Adding Documents via the Association Editor s Menu First you need to create a new association select Fite New from the Association Editor s menu A new association is immediately created The default names are S 1 S 2 S 3 S 4 etc Primary Documents on page 83 Then select the menu option Association Load the primary document that you want to transcribe see Loading Insert Primary Document option Association Insert Primary Document again Now the two documents Now load the file that you have prepared for transcription Select the menu are associated Deleting Associations The active association that is s
355. he area that you actually want to use as quotation When increasing the size of the quotation you can simply highlight the larger area that you want If you want to reduce the size of the quotation you need to deselect the selection first by clicking somewhere next to the highlighted area Then select a smaller section Click the modify button located to the left of the text window or choose Quotations Mooiry from the main menu The quotation will be changed reflecting the new boundaries Deleting Graphical Quotations As was described for textual quotations above the option to delete quotations is available in a number of different places the main menu the Quotation Manager Quotations Derete the Object Explorer and the margin area la To delete a quotation in the margin area right click on the quotation boundary and select the option Deere Creating and Working with Multimedia Quotations The following section explains the Media Control window that you need to create and modify audio and video quotations When working with video data an additional video window is opened that plays the video The video window floats on top of all other windows lt can be re sized and moved to an appropriate position If you re size the window and want to return to the original size double click on the gray frame around the video window In addition to the buttons in the media control window you can use the cursor keys on your keyboard
356. he comment fields of each code in the second column If you don t want date and author information displayed in the table you can modify the style sheet accordingly ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 407 Commented Codes No of commented Codes 58 Note date of murder Susanne This code list is structured as follows Main categories and subcategories were used within this list this is not a requirement you are obviously free to structure your own list to suit your needs and are separated by an underscore or a colon All terms preceding the underscore or colon indicate the code category name the terms following the symbol constitute subcategories As category and subcategory names may contain more than one word an empty space cannot be used to separate the two levels of coding The symbols used here underscore colon have no syntactic function Additional sublevels may also Musee Description of the time period economic situation living conditions etc during which the legendary Jack the Ripper murders occurred http www casebook org suspects A http www casebook org suspects davidcohen htm Note This code list is structured as follows Main categories and subcategories were used within this list this is not a requirement you are obviously free to structure your own list to suit your needs and are separated by underscores or colons All terms preceding the underscore indicate the code c
357. he qualitative analysis of large bodies of textual graphical audio and video data It offers a variety of tools for accomplishing the tasks associated with any systematic approach to unstructured data i e data that cannot be meaningfully analyzed by formal statistical approaches In the course of such a qualitative analysis ATLAS ti helps you to explore the complex phenomena hidden in your data For coping with the inherent complexity of the tasks and the data ATLAS ti offers a powerful and intuitive environment that keeps you focused on the analyzed materials It offers tools to manage extract compare explore and reassemble meaningful pieces from large amounts of data in creative flexible yet systematic ways The VISE Principle The main principles of the ATLAS ti philosophy are best encapsulated by the acronym VISE which stands for Visualization Integration Serendipity and Exploration Visualization The visualization component of the program means directly supports the way human beings this includes researchers think plan and approach solutions in creative yet systematic ways Tools are available to visualize complex properties and relations between the objects accumulated during the process of eliciting meaning and structure from the analyzed data The object oriented design of ATLAS ti seeks to keep the necessary operations close to the data to which they are applied The visual approach of the interface keeps yo
358. he same rights as the author but not the ability to change the access rights Private By choosing this option you can revoke previously granted rights again Set Password lets you protect the Hermeneutic Unit against loading unless a correct password is provided Make sure you remember the password or you will not be able to load your own Hermeneutic Unit again As with all other access related options you need to save the Hermeneutic Unit before any changes are in effect ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 155 Co Authors To restrict access to a group of co authors i e more than one author the sub menu Extras Co AutHors offers three options for authors add remove and view the list of co authors currently defined for this Hermeneutic Unit This feature only makes sense if public access to the HU has not been granted To register co authors Co authors have the same rights as the original author except for the right to define or remove co authors unless having administrative rights themselves all users known to the system which have previously been defined by the Select Extras Co Auruons Recister Co AutHors You are presented the list of administrator or the original author 2 Q Register Co Authors Admin GUEST Peter Silke Super team Ca J Figure 80 Registering co authors Select one one more authors from the list and click OK A mes
359. he user can assert some control on the automatic layout algorithm Indeed this option justifies the name semantic layout Formal Property The formal property associated with a relation has a cosmetic effect and it controls the procedural semantics of the semantic operators in the Query Tool When you want to utilize the semantic operators SUB UP SIB transitive relations need to be used Comment As with all entities in ATLAS ti a comment can be attached to a relation The text entered as a relation comment is displayed within a Network Editor after opening a context menu on a link or when selecting DispLay RELATION Bear in mind that a comment written for a relation is different from a comment written for a link The comment for a relation is of a global nature and defines the relation type e g what is meant by the relation is associated with A link using this relation connects two specific codes When writing a comment ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 346 for this link the meaning is local and explains why two codes were connected using this relation How to edit relations The Relation Editor is available from the main menu Network or can be launched from the Network Editor s Links menu You can change the properties of relations If these relations are already in use by the currently loaded HU changes will be stored along with the HU when saving it Open the Relation
360. hentication Miscellaneous connection settings 7 Do not ping server to check connectivity Cm a Figure 334 Live update settings You find the settings for the live update under the Herr menu You have the option to prohibit the live update for instance for settings where users to not have administrative rights to the computer Or if internet access is not always available Then it can become quite annoying if ATLAS ti starts the update request just to find out after half a minute that no Internet access is available You can set the proxy settings or enter an authentication if needed ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL APPENDIX 438 We strongly recommend that you leave automatic update checking enabled see Help menu By always keeping ATLAS ti up to date you avoid problems and benefit from ongoing continuous development of new tools and features Also in case you need to request assistance with a technical problem our support team may not be able to assist you as quickly if your installation is severely out of date Updating regularly is beneficial on all levels so the adage never change a running system we sometimes hear is at least as far as ATLAS ti is concerned a misguided superstition that will hamper you more than anything If it wasn t for the many free service packs updates we publish for each program generation users would still not be able to perform a great many tasks that they hence have co
361. her Web page Such a reference or URL Uniform Resource Locator is very much like a file name only that the former is unique in the namespace of the whole world while a simple file name is unique only on a certain computer However if the linked page has ceased to exist has been moved or renamed or if a connection to the site where the file resides can simply not be established you will get a message that the page cannot be loaded the infamous error 404 If the owner of the missing Web page takes pity on other pages referencing the moved page she would create a forward link redirection to the new location of the page ATLAS ti works in a similar manner Files that are assigned to an HU do not become a physical part of the HU but are referenced via the file s path and name Example 2 Word Documents with External References Word gives you the option to organize large documents into one central document and a number of semi dependent subdocuments say one for each chapter of a book The objective is to reduce the overall size of the main document and make handling easier and faster Why load 50 chapters into memory when you want to read or edit only two of them Furthermore this approach facilitates teamwork while the main document is edited by the main author other team members can work on individual chapters Although a multitude of files are stored Word gives the appearance of working with one single mo
362. herine Eddowes is associated with murders canonical five victim 5 Mary Jane Kelly is associated with murders canonical five murders more less than five is Root murders potentially attributed to JR is Root name of victim is associated with murders potentially attributed to JR modus operandi cut throat is associated with name of victim modus operandi mutilation is associated with name of victim victim Emma Elizabeth Smith is associated with murders potentially attributed to JR victim Martha Tabram is associated with murders potentially attributed to JR Figure 304 Code hierarchy based on the links created between codes Codes Neighbors Similar to codes hierarchy but restricted to one hierarchy level Prints all current codes with only their immediate code neighbors Codes Primary Documents Table Submenu Prints frequency counts number of quotations or sum of all words of the quotations in form of a table all current codes x axis by primary documents y axis You may also export the table to Excel for further processing or more flexible reporting This option is explained in detail in page 309 Quotation References Prints a list of codes including the boundaries of their quotations Code comments can be included All Codes with Quotations Prints all codes with a full report of their quotations A table based output can be created using an XML style sheet see page 407 below Codes with
363. hile 3 amp reason suspected behavioral clues his book The t behavioural clues Quotation 11 he only one he 7 941 7 Figure 206 Explaining the relation between frequency of cocccurence and number of quotations Thus there are three quotations but only two co occurrences that are counted for the frequency count Clustering quotations If you want to count embedded quotations as only one count you find an option for this in the tool bar called Cluster Quotations see button to the left C Coefficient Using the default settings in addition to the frequency count the so called c coefficient is displayed You can display or hide it see button to the left The c coefficient indicates the strength of the relation between two codes similar name of suspect Cohen name of suspect Feigenbaum name of suspect Kaminski name of suspect Kelly name of suspect Kosmiski reason suspect N A reason suspect I 0 07 reason suspect 1 8 reason suspect Figure 207 Co occurrence Table displaying c coefficients to a correlation coefficient The calculation of the c coefficient is based on approaches borrowed from quantitative content analysis see Garcia 2006 Thus interpreting such a coefficient is only meaningful with a sizable data set and not for an interview study with 10 respondents Given the possibility to work with survey data to analyze open ended questions it however is a valuable addition
364. his is not necessary 0 Next click the Free Quotation button in the vertical toolbar left of the PD area or choose Create Free Quotation from the Quotations menu The default name of the quotation is the name of the primary document e g Google Earth In case you have selected a feature as quotation like a place from the list of saved places in Google Earth the name of this place is used In addition the geographical reference is provided ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 195 822331 Hamburg Germany 53 32 44 59 N 9 59 40 57 E 82 23 2 London Eye GB 51 30 11 80 N 0 7 11 76 W 23 3 Google Earth 48 51 29 00 N 2 17 39 32 E Figure 111 References for Google Earth quotations Whether the PD name or the feature s name is used can be set via Extras Prererences Goocte EartH Prererences Depending on your project needs you may choose to rename the quotations Activating Google Earth quotations In the first instance you only see the newly created quotations within the Quotation Manager or in the drop down list In order to see the information in Google Earth as well the information needs to be transferred Thus the ATLAS ti Google Earth PD needs to be injected into Google Earth This is easily done by reloading the PD For the ATLAS ti placemark in the GE document the name of the quotation is used In addition you see the quotations in the Places Panel under Temporary Places on the left
365. his report is useful for non textual data where the quotations do not contain textual content If a comment has been written for any of the quotations you will be asked whether you also want to include the comments in the report disk option File or to save it and run the file in the standard RTF Next you have the option to send the report to an editor printer save it to application usually Word or Wordpad option File amp Run Send output to Editor Printer File j File 4 Run Figure 134 Output options Reports on Quotations for Code Combinations To retrieve quotations or generate reports for combinations of codes use the Query Tool For more information see Error Reference source not found on page Error Reference source not found Other Places to Activate Quotations Quotations for a code can be activated from the margin area and any browser displaying codes The Margin Area displays codes and other objects associated with quotations Clicking on a code in the margin area selects the associated quotation in the primary document pane By activating objects in the Object Explorer see The Object Explorer on page 375 quotations are displayed in context similar to the object manager The Network Editor see The Network Editor on page 323 also offers access to associated quotations via a node s context menu In the Query Tool page 281 you can activate quotations in the result p
366. hod allows you to drag text from drag amp drop compliant applications like Word into a Network Editor Text dragged from Word is converted into a new memo and displayed as a node Open the application from which you want to drag selections of text in to a Network Editor Mark the piece of text within the other application Text dragged E from other Move the mouse pointer over the selected text The pointer changes its applications appearance pectic d f Hold down the left mouse button and drag the selected text into the memo Network Editor Text dragged from the PD l Release the mouse button at the position you want the new node to be pane becomes a Aa placed with its upper left corner A new node is created and displayed Via the Import Nodes dialog The Import Nodes window offers access to all available node types The list pane offers a context menu to select or deselect all displayed objects opens offering objects to be imported Only objects that are not already Choose Nobes Import Nobes from the Network Editor s menu A window members of the present view are listed First select the type of node you want listed in the list pane from the node type drop down list G 3 Import Nodes into LETTER sosete aa Codes 2 date of Code Families historic Memo Families 38 name o Network Views name o Primary Docs Si name o Primary Doc Families 3G name o Quotations
367. hot PD Create GE Snapshot 3D 80 Import the PD Family table by selecting the menu option Documents Assicn Import PD Famity Tase F Select the prepared file and click Open A message pops up informing you about the number of families that have been imported Click Ok Primary documents that did not exist already are assigned new primary document families are created and the documents are sorted into these families or already existing families as indicated by the table Existing documents will also be sorted into their respective families Assign Google Earth Documents To create a new GE PD toolbar and select New Goocte EartH PD or setect Documents Assicn New click the drop down arrow beside the Load Document button in the main Gooc te EartH PD ATLAS ti starts the application Google Earth for you and displays the Google Earth window within the ATLAS ti editor Depending on the speed of your internet connection this may take a few seconds Create and Assign a Google Earth Snapshot You can create a snapshot from the geographic region that is currently shown on your screen within the HU editor This snapshot is automatically assigned as primary document Click on the drop down arrow beside the Load Document button and select New GE SnapsHor PD or select the option from the Documents AssiGN MENU added at the end of list and can now be loaded and treated like an image Then check your list of primary documents
368. hown in the editor can be deleted via the menu Fite Devete Associating two already existing documents When you already have a transcript that is however not associated with its audio or video file you can synchronize the two documents by going through the transcript and setting anchors This is how it works Create a new association in the Association Editor and add the two documents see above Transcribing Audio and Video Files in ATLAS ti ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 96 point press F4 again locate the matching text in the transcript and set an Start the multimedia file with F4 listen to it or view it Stop it at a certain anchor at the end of the matching text passage press F8 Start the multimedia file again with F4 listen to it or view it Stop it at a certain point press F4 again locate the matching text in the transcript and set an anchor at the end of the matching text passage click F8 And so on As you can open the two documents side by side you can move through the documents quite quickly It should not take much longer to create the associations than the actual duration of the multimedia file Importing documents transcribed in f4 f4audio Transcripts produced with the help of the freely available program f4audio manufactured by dr dresing amp pehl GmbH http www audiotranskription de f4 htm can be directly imported Time markers from the transcript are automatically
369. hyperlink in context click into the pop up window Clicking outside the pop up window cancels the process When you double click on a multimedia hyperlink in the margin you do not see the usual info text popping up Instead the quotation is played directly without opening the Media Control window Q P7 2 Victim Annie Chap E 9 E Brand 13 38 expands 19 1 88 live link GE 15 5 hyperlinked video quotation Figure 276 Hyperlinked video quotation The In Place Method for audio and video hyperlinks You may travel directly from a highlighted Hyper quotation to its neighbors This is especially useful for video and audio quotation where you do not have a margin area but can also be used for other media types To display hyperlinked neighbors in place Activate a quotation with a double click in the Quotation Manager Move the mouse cursor into the highlighted area of the document and click the right mouse button From the context menu choose Show Links Steps one and two can be combined by pressing the Ctrl key while clicking the right mouse button ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 369 Coding gt EL Create Link Source TE Create Link Target Rename Unlink Code References lt gt 7 1 Hanbury Street D Edit Comment QU change over time 6 21 The location of 29 Hanbury Street in 2008 X Open Network View QU
370. i acess to shared Peter etc subfolder 3 OR i driv Textbank folder i e i subfolder 1 Project ABC James hpr6 L data source subfolder 2 i files t James i Li Li L LI LI Li Figure 86 Team project setup using the TBPATH Editing Primary Documents all Editing primary documents can be allowed without restrictions as ATLAS ti controls that no two persons edit the same primary document file at the same time See the chapter on Editing Primary Documents on page 136for further detail Merging A Task for the Project Administrator The project administrator merges the sub projects according to previously agreed upon time intervals e g in the evenings first thing in the morning every Friday etc As all files in each sub HU are referenced by the TBPATH the project administrator can download store all HU files in one folder on his her computer and start with one of the HUs to begin the merge process Depending on the way the work is distributed the merge strategy may vary See Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 171 for more detail ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 164 After merging the project administrator saves he new Master HU and sends it to the team members In order for team members to easily see which is the newest version the date can be added Master project ABC_August 25 2011 hpr6 Figure 87 Master project file after merging All old version
371. i allows this as it treats every family as a separate dichotomous variable However when converted into a categorical variable Location in the process of creating a PD Family table such multiple assignments could create problems Preparing and Importing a PD Family Table Create the following columns when manually preparing a PD Family table for import from a spreadsheet application such as Excel First column Use Documents as the header and a PD number in subsequent rows Second column Use header Name and enter a name for the PD in each row The next one or two columns As already mentioned above the document path is stored twofold when a table is created by ATLAS ti The actual path at the time of export column Path and the path at the time of the assignment of the document to the HU column Origin The latter can also contain special path components HUPATH TBPATH that will be correctly resolved when imported into ATLAS ti When reading a table into ATLAS ti the Path column has more or less descriptive character as the G Origin is always preferred Therefore the Path column can be omitted when creating a table manually The column Origin is sufficient and may either be absolute or contain special paths For details see Reference Types Many Paths One Destination on page 107 If neither the Path nor the Origin column is defined the name of the document is used as file reference in combination with
372. ialog window that opens check Selection to print selected nodes only If the size of the network view determined by the node layout exceeds a single page depending on current printer settings scaling or multi page print will be offered as a choice F Make your choice and the network view will be printed Network Views for other Applications Copy to Clipboard The menu option Network Copy ro CuipBOARD copies the network view to the Windows clipboard From the clipboard it can be included in Word or other foreign documents The Network View all nodes or selected nodes only is copied to the clipboard in a variety of formats A textual description of the contained nodes a node synopsis reports Depending on the processing capabilities of the target application An Windows Enhanced Metafile for high quality graphics to be used in results may sometimes be less than optimal A bitmap file that has more accurate layout and fonts but less quality when printed In other applications Word PowerPoint etc a selection or all of these formats are offered via Paste SPECIAL Save Network View as Graphic File You can save your Network View as a graphic file either as a bitmap BMP or as a Windows Enhanced Meta file EMF You can insert this file into reports Word PowerPoint etc Choose Network Save as GRAPHICS FILE This function does not save the network as a reusable structure for import to other HUs In orde
373. ic context fr aa army ty historic context S Network Nodes code nodes after importing spreading the nodes using the semantic layout feature Figure 244 Links Layout Display Specials Help Me ado aK Se Pak Po s murder_witnesses S murder site efore and after applying Semantic Layout to a Network View The results of the automatic layout procedure are typically quite usable and provide at least a good starting point for subsequent manual refinement of nodes placement If you are not happy with the layout produced you can revert to the previous placement by using Unbo Positionine Ctrl Z Topological Layout This special layout procedure tries to create a linear list of nodes positioned from the upper left to the lower right This sequence is the result of a depth first traversal of the graph The algorithm tries to resolve as many constraints between any two nodes so that a node with the least dependencies is made the first node positioned in the upper left corner and the node with the most dependencies on other nodes is positioned in the lower right corner of the Network Editor ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 342 gt gt mi i e gt net Ia gt Figure 245 A set of activities with local constraints In the example above the dependencies between several activities necessary to get dressed are described by local
374. ich it is associated while a Super Code is a stored query thus provides an answer to a question in the best case that typically consists of several combined codes Super Families on page 289 The Co occurence Explorer The Co occurence Explorer is more exploratory than the Query Tool Rather than determining the codes yourself you can ask ATLAS ti which codes happen ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN CONCEPTS AND FEATURES Documents TOTAL 34 to co occur in the margin area The output can be viewed in form or a tree view or a table view CTE Co occurence Table Explorer The CTE provides frequency of co occurrence and a coefficient measuring the strength of the relation is calculated Since a coefficient is only appropriate for some type of data its display can be activated or deactivated It is always possible to directly access the data behind the frequency counts or coefficient You find this function under the Toots menu For further information see Co occurrence Tools page 299 Codes Primary Document Table The Codes Primary Document Table contains the frequency of codes across documents It can be exported as Excel compatible table Optionally the table cells can also contain the word counts for the quotations per code across documents date of historic nameof x letter letter letter murder context suspect authenticity content letterdate differences recipient TOTALS o hoooonbs SoolNoc Brnoun
375. ies in the lower right hand side F Click the Add Items button to assign the families to the selected object ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL FAMILY LIFE 242 r T 2 ATLAS ti Family Assigner mI EP 2 Case6 F 133 P3 Casel0 F 173 LP 4 Casell F 177 P 5 Casel6 F 71 P 6 Casel7 F 83 E Age group 1 21 30 0 Age group 2 31 40 0 Age group 3 41 50 0 Gender male 0 pETTCUDEEM Location A 0 B Location B 0 Location C 0 4 n Figure 145 Assign families to objects in the Family Assigner Assigning Families to Objects in Object Managers Select any number of objects in an Object Manager by holding down the Ctrl key Right click on one of the selected items and select Assign Families or choose Epit Famuuies Assicn rAMiLIES from the menu From the list of families that opens select one or more families to which the selected objects are to be assigned F Click OK Creating Families from Selected Items I Select any number of items in an Object Manager by holding down the Ctrl key Right click on one of the selected items and select Epit Famiuies New FROM SELECTED ITEMS Enter a name for the new family and click OK Accessing quotations To access the quotations related to the objects included in the family double click on a family while holding the Ctrl key Writing a Comment for a Family The family comment can be used
376. ify the name of the data set This name is used as the file name and as the FILE reference from the DATA LIST section You only need to enter a name here if you generate separate data files Create a fresh data file during next run can be unchecked if the data has not changed since it was last created This may save some processing time The value separator is by default but can be changed to something else un See ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT 419 Create task section Enable this option if you want templates for procedures included at the end of the syntax file Create SAVE OUTFILE instruction Enable this option if you want SPSS to save the data as sav file after running the syntax file Specify all desired properties and then click OK The output is generated and sent to the selected target location When directed to a text editor you can edit the job statements and other parts of the syntax file before proceeding If file separation is selected two files the SPSS job file and the data file are created simultaneously You can directly RUN the result if SPSS is installed on your computer and the SPS extension has been associated with SPSS 3428240739 3428240748 3428240776 3428240886 3428332512 3435910437 3427452068 3427452101 3427452136 3427452161 3427452187 3427452202 3427452232 3427452260 3427452435
377. iles amp a 8s Mary 13 shared drive SS James A Peter E Figure 81 Team scenario 1 the team is sharing the same data source files Examples Team members code all documents but only for specific aspects Team member code the entire document but only a subset of the entire data base Option A All In One HUPATH Setup Project Setup Tasks of the Project Administrator Any of the four team members Tom Mary Peter or James can take on the role of the project administrator In most cases the project administrator is also a team member Create a project folder on a shared drive and move all documents to be analyzed to this folder The documents may be organized in subfolders within the same main folder see below Open ATLAS ti and assign the documents ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 158 Save the Master HU to the project folder All files are referenced by the special HUPATH see page The HUPATH the recommended option on page 108 for further detail Copy the HU file as many time as there are team members add the name or initials to each file name F Instruct the team members about their tasks Project folder I Master project ABC hpr a Project ABC James hpr Project ABC Mary hpr Project ABC Peter hpr Project ABC Tom hpr6 data source files Project folder Project folder G Master project ABC hpr6 subfolder 1 M
378. ilies with the AND operator yields only those members belonging to both families Combining two families using the XOR operator yields all members belonging to any of the families less those that are in both families The NOT operator inverts an existing family By negating a family female you could simply create a Super Family that presumably includes all males The NOT operator as well as all other operators does not only work on families but also on Super Families or in arbitrary partial queries as in NOT A OR B Combining Families using Boolean Operators Combining families to build Super Families is essentially the same as formulating code and code family based queries in the ATLAS ti Query Tool The sequence of entering a query to create a Super Family is as follows First select all families that you want to combine and then select the operator s Intended Query entoces Display in query feedback pane Members family A or Family A Family B OR Family A Family family B or both B ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 293 Members that Family A Family B Family A Il Family exclusively belong to XOR B either family A or family B Members that belong Family A Family B Family A amp Family to both family A and AND B family B Members that do not Family A NOT NOT Family A belong to family A Combining more than two families
379. ime The Edit Toolbar The Edit toolbar provides a number of options known from other Windows applications Many of these options are also available from the Edit menu bold italic color add bullet underline characters points AMESIG BATA T7 IE Ty Pm RENS ET gt _ wa r2 i LD gt B 1 d increase decrea left centre cut copy paste se size of right allign Enter and Leave edit characters mode Save changes highlight Figure 69 Edit toolbar The highlight color can be set under Extras PREFERENCES GENERAL PREFERENCES tab Text Editor How to Edit a Primary Document Editing is only possible when logged into ATLAS ti as an ATLAS ti user with administrative rights See Administrative and Standard Access Rights on Doc and Docx page 153 files cannot be edited Load a rich text or plain text PD Click on the Edit button in the main toolbar or select Epir Document Access Enter Enit Move from the main menu If a non editable document e g a doc docx or PDF document is loaded the editing toolbar is not available Edit the document When you are done save your changes and leave edit mode Click the Edit button and select Save ano Leave Enit Mone ave tan od b Discard Changs and Leave Edit Mode Discard Changes Only Figure 70 Saving a modified primary document Changes to the document must be explicitly saved when leaving the edit ATLAS ti 6 USER M
380. in a network may be linked to an arbitrary number of other nodes The number of links for any one node is called its degree e g a node with a degree of zero is not linked at all Another simple formal property of a network is its order the number of its nodes You may make practical use of the degree of nodes by using it as a sorting criterion in the codes list window The column Density in the Code Manager represents the degree of a code Directed and Non Directed Links Links are usually drawn as lines between the connected nodes in graphical presentations of networks Furthermore a link between two nodes may be directed or not A directed connection is drawn with an arrow With directed links source and target nodes must be distinguished The source node is where the link starts and the target node is where it ends the destination to which the arrow points The terms connection and link are synonymous why suspected ts name of suspect Cohen 6 reason suspected fitting the profile directed link transitive is associated with s murders canonical five non directed link symmetric asymmetric Figure 225 Examples of directed and non directed links Links are created either implicitly e g when coding a quotation the quotation is linked to a code or explicitly by the user The latter option is described in detail in this chapter Strictly speaking code quotation associations codings also fo
381. in characteristics of XML which makes them distinct from HTML The presence of tags e g MEMO SPEECH TURN which are not available in the fixed set of HTML tags where new tags are proprietary or at least deviations from the standards The tags used in an XML file represent YOUR data without invalidating any standards Below a raw XML file is shown The absence of presentation display layout related information tables fonts images rulers etc Below you can see an XML version of an interview section with some added information Trans version 1 trans method LING22 version date 990120 audio filename au wav xml lang DE gt Speakers Speaker id I name Interviewer gt lt Speaker id B name Herr Schultz dialect bavarian gt lt Speakers gt Turn speaker I tape pos 2010 gt Ja lt Turn gt Turn speaker B tape pos 2314 gt Wars doch eigentlich ja da wars doch glaub ich erst ein oder zwei Tage oder vielleicht einen Tag Turn Trans If you interested to learn more about XML you may want to look at the following online article Muhr Thomas 2000 December Increasing the Reusability of Qualitative Data with XML 64 paragraphs Forum Qualitative Sozialforschung Forum Qualitative Social Research Online Journal 7 3 Available at http www qualitative research net fqs texte 3 00 3 OOmuhr e htm last access date Sept 14 2011 ATLAS
382. ina P 45 Marginrarea preferences icio mco dp ei ore cec ende a ena e E Deb nu exe a dace e Ur IT A vee e aaa da 46 Status Bar RRA 46 The Pop up Menus ino A bc cei wate 47 The Object Managers p x OU 49 Roll up Mode ius ra itr ae ha dos 49 Launching an Object Manager erected eret ie ied ee tie e tme i Ln da ee qe n cem td ect en Pe aio 49 The Obj ck Manager Window 2 coe hne ee ee tiet nerd tinte de e dete tmd dr te HAT a dde tedio da 50 Title ME and n ica 50 AAA E RN The Text Pane The Split Bar I Sere 51 The Pop Up MENUS cei eene ec dace en ect et tad rdg eee a ec De onset cues d rd ra cd deu etti 51 ViOW M eebeyeugyteae 51 Selecting Items in Object Maragets orca ce tercer te e D e HEC HR C OR UT OTRA LR HE OR CUT TOC ERO EAT OT eet TIR dd 52 Sorting and Filtering 4 tt ortam e e e rata cd oe n et e to a Ote n e i D t E HE c Rae 53 Incremental vertical ToolBar List Sarai teet n EO CIO TU DG E D ERO PET UI I Hi da et teca 53 Insplace Fabel Editing ci coser O Tu Den ETRE 53 HEAD 53 Primary DOCUMENT Manager sc t ee in hehe eee ated a rn ected edet silia eii ee ee erede ts 54 The PD Manager Toolbar eg s ea PD IUE IEEE H Quotation Manag
383. ine by line Instead the text matching the search pattern is highlighted on the screen The core of a GREP search is the inclusion of special characters in the search string that control the matching process GREP finds instances in your data that match certain patterns The ATLAS ti GREP search offers a subset of the Regular Expression language used in sophisticated text search systems ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 230 Supported Basic GREP Expressions All GREP expressions supported by ATLAS ti are shown in the table below Anchors the entered pattern to the beginning of a line If used as the first character within brackets it excludes the following characters or range from the search Anchors the entered search pattern to the end of a line Matches any single character Matches at least one occurrence of the preceding expression or character Matches zero or one occurrence of the preceding expression or character stones matches stone and stones Matches any number including zero of the preceding expression For example 0 9 finds all numeric characters while O 9 finds all non numeric characters Matches any digit equivalent to 0 9 The escape character disables the special GREP functionality of the following character For example matches an opening bracket dl Matches a range or set of characters a z or 0 9 or aeiou In the following a few s
384. ing documents using Unicode In the course of editing plain text documents within ATLAS ti they can be enriched and saved with all added formatting Preparing PDF files In general it is good to have an understanding what PDF is and what not When PDF was invented it was never meant to be a text processable thing The goal was identical layout in display and print Thus PDF is perfect if you need the original layout When preparing PDFs you need to pay attention that you prepare a text PDF file and not a graphic PDF If the latter then ATLAS ti treats it as a graphic file and you cannot search it or retrieve text When scanning a text you need to use character recognition software often provided with your scanner in order to create a text PDF file Another issue that needs to be pointed out is that you can retrieve text e g from a coded segment but not in PDF format The output will be in rich text Thus you will loose the original layout This is due to the nature of PDF as mentioned above It is a layout format and not meant for text processing Preparing Graphical Documents Supported Formats More than twenty graphic file formats are accepted by ATLAS ti as valid data sources for PDs including BMP JPEG and TIFF Scanners often produce TIFF and digital cameras usually create JPEG images Multipage TIFF files are also supported They need to prepared in an image editing software that supports such an option Size recommen
385. ing Procedure on page 199 Create a memo for a data segment l Select the part of the primary document for which you want to write a memo F Click the memo button in the primary document toolbar If the selected data segment does not resemble an existing quotation a new quotation is created and the memo is attached An editor opens and you can start to type 4 ME 20 07 2011 PAR keep on hearing the police have caught me but they wont fix me just et I have laughed when they look so clever and talk about being on he right track That joke about Leather Apron gave me real fits I am 25 Memo ME 20 07 2011 down on whores and I shant quit ripping them till I do get buckled Grand work the last job was I gave the lady no time to squeal How can they catch me now I love my work and want to start again You will soon hear of me with my funny little games I saved some of the RE CRE SE RE CR RO Or proper red stuff in a ginger beer bottle over the last job to write with Tile ME 20 07 2011 but it went thick like glue and I cant use it Red ink is fit enough I hope ha ha The next job I do I shall clip the ladys ears off and send to the Type enter a meaningful police officers just for jolly wouldn t you Keep this letter back till I do y E title Figure 157 Attaching a memo to a data segment Adapt the automatically generated memo type and title according to you
386. ing an object from a file is not the same as Insert Insert Fite which appends the usually textual contents of a file at the cursor position If you choose to link the object it will also be inserted but with a significant difference Linked objects A linked object keeps a reference to the original file When you edit the original Excel table the changes will be written to the Excel file and will be updated in ALL documents where this object was embedded Because of this in place activation is not available and the original application is launched when double clicking the object An object inserted without checking the link option is fully embedded and has no reference to the file from which it originated Editing this object will only modify this copy of the object ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EDITING PRIMARY DOCUMENTS APRIL 1887 JUNE 1887 AUGUST 1887 SEPTEMBER 1887 144 Coding Embedded Objects Every object is treated as a single character when it comes to selecting and coding it in ATLAS ti You cannot enter an object in order to select and code parts of it e g a single cell inside an Excel spreadsheet or a graphic inside a PowerPoint slide However for some objects selecting a more suitable format from the list presented by Paste Special see also Embed an Object via Copy and Paste Special on page 142 may be the solution For instance an Excel table is also offered as Rich Text
387. ing or descending order Media 1 duction mp3 Audio Mp2 Transcript Jack the Ripper Introduction Rich Text mp 3 1 Jack the Ripper_Story rtf Rich Text ip 4 1 Jack the Ripper Letters rtf Rich Text Eps 2_Victim_Mary_Ann_Nichols pdf PDF lr6 2 Victim_Annie_Chapman pdf PDF 2 Victim Annie Chapman scene of the murder_1967 wmv Video 2 Victim_Elizabeth_Stride pdf Figure 294 Sorting via the columns in object managers ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SORTING AND FILTERING 385 The column used for sorting is displayed in a darker shade The sort direction is visualized by an arrow in the header In four field of the status bar the sort criterion is displayed A double click on the status bar s sort field refreshes the current sort This is a useful option because newly added objects are appended to the end of the list regardless of their correct position in the sorted sequence Sorting via the menus The Sort menu option is available in the object menus of the HU Editor Documents Quotations Codes and Memos and from the corresponding Manager s menu The figure below shows the Sort menu for documents with the current sort criterion set to ID which is also the default Edit Miscellaneou Assign gt Rename 2 Edit Comment Disconnect Close Doc Filter All gt Name A Toggle Filter Media Quotations Edit Families gt Author X Open Network View Cid Relevant Text Search Modified Data Source Manage
388. ing the PD Manager File Eocking ts 84 ARA can Jac ccsst cissvtacctastissgescsaldsedsdl cassaadatesecesivvccscsteassaitisatesessecesadl ducunaderdssestivccacttasestittangatesslecdadtertas 84 Navigating within Primary Docurrients 2 itineri tert trien ede eer tre he i ea air dede i Fade e ped a enhn 84 Navigating within Textual Primary Documents ss 85 Some additional notes on displaying and navigating PDF Documents nennen 85 Changing the display size of PDF doc rments oreet ec eet er eb ec eer ei ead e cn i n cn a eaa 88 Navigating within Graphical Primary Documents a Navigating within Multimedia Primary Document 0 0 00 coe ee ie entrer aan 88 Disconnecting Primary DOCUS eo eee trat ees e eet isa debe Eaa eu e i d ev ii 89 Data Transcription ntt f Fette Dt eer terere tede e aeta dea Paare das re edet Pu dr AAA d 90 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL Transcribing Audio and Video Files in ATLAS tH ooonnncnnnninninnnnininnonnnnnnncnnc e 90 Adding and Associating Multimedia Files and Transcripts nennen trennen nens Setting Rewind Time erre eed t mete iie did e m ir te Ia ee a ad te a M P a Re Poo Don Start Transcribing Insert Anchors Automatically Delete Association Anchors Naming AAA rae o enn er pedea era en ud ree per e e n rdc dee deg es Adding Documents via the Association Editor s Menu E Deleting Association
389. inistrative users on secure well in principle operating systems like Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows Vista Windows 7 etc For Windows Vista and Windows 7 users When using Windows Vista or Windows 7 you need to run ATLAS ti in administrative mode To do this right click on the program icon when you start ATLAS ti Then select the option Run as administrator If you do not see this option then you do not have administrative rights to your Windows system Thus you first need to start Windows with administrative rights ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT The user administration tool allows you to create modify and remove users 152 32 User Administration File Edit View Selected User Account Password First name Last name Access rights Standard 9 Administrator Current user database First Name Rights Admin Administrator GUEST Standard Miller Administrator Silke A Administrator User Administrator Susanne Administrator all Administrator Figure 78 User Administration Editor A user is characterized by five attributes four of which you are prompted for in sequence Account name password last name first name Account name When working with ATLAS ti the account name has to be entered at log in time Every object created including the Hermeneutic Unit is stamped with the account name Password A password should be at least 4 charact
390. inve 12 Quotations for investigation doubts Yin Y amp invel 331 Macnaghten did not join the force until the year a 21 21 Z JACK E2372 One of the examining pathologists Dr Thomas Bond 33 33 BS Jack E34 Perhaps more interesting is the existence of hundr 4 4 3 v LETI E24 Initially it was considered a hoax but when Eddow 16 16 1 Y lett 24 9 After the murders police officials stated that th 25 25 diese E418 There is some disagreement over the kidney some c 42 42 ES h E 4 27 Most experts bel is was a modern fake insert 58 59 Y lerrel E1126 DNA analysis dye attempted on some letters th 10 3089 10 Yes d Z lette OK Cancel Smo Figure 133 Simple retrieval Create a Report for Coded Quotations As an alternative to the contextual display of quotations you can get different reports of the quotations for a selected code Reports are displayed in a text editor and can be printed or saved To create a quotation report Select a code for instance in the Code Manager ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 224 Use the Query Tool for complex retrievals of quotations From the main menu select Copes Output QUOTATIONS FOR SELECTED Copt When selecting a code in the Code Manager choose Output QuorarioNs FOR SELECTED Cope Select the option Quotation List if you only want a list of the quotations names T
391. ion Manager columns ID The ID combines the PD ID and the quotation sequence number In the example above the first ID number is 3 10 which means that the quotation is part of the third 3 document and it is the 10 10 quotation that was created in this document Quotations are numbered in chronological and not in sequential order The tilde sign indicates that a comment was written for this quotation the bracket symbol indicates that the quotation is a start anchor for a hyperlink Name The first few characters of a quotation are used as the default list name This name can be changed if desired The default name of a graphic audio or video quotation is the name of the data file name Density Number of links to other quotations Codes Codes that have been applied to this quotation Size media type dependent Text quotation number of paragraphs Graphic quotation height in pixel of the quotation s rectangle Audio quotation milliseconds Video quotation frames or time see Changing between time and frame references page 213 GoogleEarth quoation 1 Start media type dependent Text quotation paragraph number Graphic quotation upper left coordinate Audio quotation h mm ss mil hours minutes seconds milliseconds Video quotation start frame or time see above GoogleEarth quotation Geographic reference Author Name of user who created the item Created Creation date and time Modified
392. ion on every single computer differs from the next as different software packages drivers hardware components and many many individual user settings all struggle to get along and vie for system resources Sometimes that precarious balance cannot be easily achieved and clashes occur There really is no good way to test complex software other than through empirical tests Only by practical application in the hands of developers beta testers and yes the users can errors and conflicts be found The development of ATLAS ti is and has been an evolutionary process by design and with significant user involvement providing feedback proposing new features reporting bugs The good news is that the majority of bugs are are never even noticed under normal conditions and are eradicated as soon as reported through a new service pack ATLAS ti has a stellar record of reacting quickly to reported problems Other errors are only errors in the eye of the user and not infrequently even turn out to be part of the software by design And quite often errors or unexpected behavior are the result of applying the wrong procedure to a task Most errors are trapped by the program and reported to the user in such a way that the erroneous behavior can be avoided in a subsequent attempt Screen Refresh When scrolling lists in any of the tools you may experience refresh problems under certain system configurations Such problems may appear as incomplete
393. ipt rat e ue edet cie patr ede ode aei a OR DELL e ERR The Redundant Coding Analyzer Screen Unlinking Removing or Merging a Redundantly Coded Quotation RA e IES SASIE iSEA PEERS EMAA ETAN ES PSAP Ae PER LAS MESAR CEAS ET ELEDE EI EREE SE REOR AENEA E SEREUS Hage E AETAT EEE Overview of Sort Options PIC MIN Sistah esta RN NO A Overview of Filter Options sic trt rm tr tds Pattern Searches as Filter TojReverse a Fi lere e tinte onda t tte iterom Non LLL cH cS CLIE fco TOIREMOVE On RESEE e tos E NA t tag aont ein neat cid on LE Meer nce ater dA E Filter by Families in the Family Managers trot ttt eee t fenetre ipn ocn n d Pede id Dra RD c eo TR ds 389 Generating OU teen eite Dicho Date pre tdo Racosadu duos 390 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL 16 Overview General Procedure is ts s Output Destination srs zc rr ree die AI Go DE aD a dE EG C treu PE PE ed Fleece d Report LayOUL non eric eite ite n Ee Y edet ba cu tel ds haved Dodo EA Ee Cd eere PA Dam AAAS CH a tates POR EYE ee N eut OES edad Common Header Sorts amp Filters T a Lat EE ETE Hierarchy Quotations Print with Margin Set rig PD Printing Preferernces RT 394 To print a primary document With margin erectione rte en feeder a P teen at E ace Re dna Pee aE da 394 The Quotations Output Submen ssiri a cim it tenete n p ri bt re Pete e E de E PO ER
394. is Super Code to the code family later This would create a cyclic structure and is therefore disallowed Snapshot Codes A Snapshot Code is a normal code that records the current state of a Super Code by way of hard wired links to the derived quotations By creating a snapshot from time to time you can analyze the development of a Super Code Unlike the Super Code a code created by the snapshot is displayed in the margin area and can be used for further coding The default snapshot code names are suffixed with SN lt number gt How to create a snapshot F Select a Super Code in the Code Manager From the Copes Miscettaneous menu select option Create SNAPSHOT The newly create code appears in the Code Manager The code icon turns yellow the characters of the code name appear in black and the post fix SN1 a consecutive number is added to the name The frequency count is permanetly displayed as the snapshot code is no longer dynamic Y reason released alibi reason released lack of eviden 14 Y amp i reason released alibi reason released lack of eviden SN 1 10 1 Figure 184 A super code and its snapshot ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 287 Restricting Code Queries to Sub Groups You can specify the documents that are to be considered in a query By default the query s document universe is a PDs currently filtered in the HU Editor Clicking Scope opens anoth
395. is not completely trivial and you will also need some basic knowledge about the guts of a style sheet to start writing your own You can start by analyzing any of the existing style sheets and creating modifications of those Dc CO en Select an XML data source in the left list and a style sheet in the right list before converting XML Hus 4 Stylesheets 48 Est stveshet Jools ew a Name Version Description Modified 2 Author 10 displays all quotations codes an 09 11 2007 13 Een Nic ANNE eat IE Code Network Synopsis 20 A list of codes links and relation 19 10 2010 11 42 Code Network Synopsis 10 A list of codes links and relation 06 11 2007 18 e 2 Codes as RTF 20 Convert codes description to rich 19 10 2010 11 hu EG add Fis Jackie Ij Codes as RTF 10 Convert codes description to rich 05 11 2007 18 Theory SA Ripper sta gel 42 CSS Switcher 20 Switch dynamically between CSS 19 10 2010 11 Jj CSS Switcher 10 Switch dynamically between CSS 09 11 2007 13 DEConvert anuerts a Hllinte DE format 05 11 2007 18 2 DEConvert anxia Decisio 19 10 2010 11 4 Elements by Author disposal codes me 19 10 2010 11 Expandable Boxes by author gt a emos witha 05 11 2007 18 E Expandable Boxes by author 20 A list of codes and memos witha 19 10 2010 11 Expandable Boxes by Date 10 A list of codes and memos with a 05 11 2007 18 8 Expandable Boxes
396. ist is also offered at the end of the File menu To open the HU Browser F Choose Fite Browse from the main menu Select a HU and click Load HU The HU will be loaded in a new HU Editor ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 68 f Q Choose Hermeneutic Unit financial crisis June 08 June 09 stage 2 coding hpr6 gt C Users Susanne QuaRC Load HU n Ed l Jack the Ripper stage II 62 hpr6 gt JTR Manifest hpr gt WinDesktop Manifest Remove Browse Disk a ipei IE la mU wal Always on Top V Store list when dosing session Jack the Ripper_stage II 62 C ProgramData Scentific Software ATLASti CommonDocuments Samples JTR Jack the Ripper stage II WIN 6 2 23 Filesize 1028608 Modified 29 03 2011 15 48 47 Super Codes 0 This sample project can be used for a number of different purposes to demonstrate various software features to complete the steps described in our introductory guide ATLAS ti 6 Quick Tour to use as sample material for educational purposes Figure 30 HU Browser The browser displays some information about the selected HU e g its location date of creation co authors number of assigned PDs quotations codes and its comment If needed you can launch the standard file dialog from within the HU Browser by clicking the Browse Disk button If you want to clean up the list of recently used HUs click the Re
397. ist of the current memos You are given the option of output with or without the memo text Selected Memo s Prints the selected memo s Selected Memo with Quotations Prints a selected memo including all referenced quotation s Speak Memo Lean back close your eyes and let ATLAS ti read the selected memo for your Currently this works only for English language text ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT a 400 Family Output When clicking the output button in any of the three family managers a report is created with information associated with the selected family name comment list of members When desired a report of all quotations that are associated with any of the members of the family is included Output for Co occurence Tools See quantitative results of the Co occurrence Table Explorer i e frequency of co occurence of the c coeffient can be exported as Excel compatible file To do this you find an Excel export button in the tool bar of the Co occurrence Table Explorer see page 310 The qualitative results i e the quotation IDs and names of the co occurring codes can be exported as an rtf file You find this option under Copes Output Co occurinc Copes Output for Network Views Network Views can be saved as either Windows Bitmap bmp or enhanced meta emf file In a network view editor select the option Network Save as Grapuic Fire A second option is to copy the entire or only
398. it what For more information on editing see the general section on Editing Primary Documents on page 136 and the project scenarios below ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 150 Merges Hermeneutic Units Each team member has to work within her or his own sub HU and these need to be merged from time to time The project administrator sets the time intervals when sub projects are to be merged provides instructions to team members when and what to send where this varies depending on the project setup chosen and whether editing is allowed or not merges the sub HUs see Merging Hermeneutic Unitson page 171 and distributes the new Master HU to all team members Works on the Project In most cases the project administrator will be someone from the research team and not a remote IT person It is essential to understand how data management in ATLAS ti works it is not just a matter of installing ATLAS ti and providing IT resources In addition to data management other things like how to develop a common coding system need to be decided upon Thus methodological and content related matters are also part of the project management tasks User Management 5 ATLAS ti s user database is independent of the account database in a Collaboration or multi authoring means that more than one author may work on an ATLAS ti project at different times ATLAS ti supports this teamwork by systematically keeping track of each
399. ither is display always on top default or is closed when you click somewhere else Open text pane for writing comments in a full fledged text editor Opena network view on the selected primary document Disconnect the primary document Various View options Open the Primary Document Family Manager PD Manager Columns The columns of the PD Manager s details view offer a vast amount of information to keep track of possible access problems The arrangement of columns may differ from your current setting ia Name Quotations Media Author Created Modified Usable Origin Location Families Figure 18 PD Manager Columns ID The internal ID number assigned to the document when it was first added as a PD An icon indicates the document type Name The name of the PD Note that this name can differ from the file name as PDs can be renamed within ATLAS ti Quotations The number of quotations created for this PD Media The media type Author The name of the ATLAS ti user who assigned the document Created The date the document was assigned to this HU Modified The date when the PD was last modified Modification is not the modification of the data source but the date of last usage within ATLAS ti e g a quotation was created or removed Usable Yes indicates that a PD s data source can be loaded and no indicates that the data source not accessible See Help with Data Management Problems on page 433 for fu
400. ive mapping precedes this entry How to create path mappings From the menu HU Editor or Document Manager select Documents Data Source Manacement Enit Primary Document MapPiNGs The Path Map Editor opens ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT 125 r Primary Document Path Map Editor Currently mapped paths Target path s unresolvable H Wy files ATLAS project data 4 4 Add Path Enter target path for selected path Remove Path Remove Path Enter new path to map My files ATLASt project data H My files ATLASt project data Select from all current target paths or browse to select any path Click ADD PATH elect from a path used in current HU Enter or browse for any existing path Click ADD PATH Y Always use fallback paths Apply Apply amp Close Cancel amp Close Figure 61 Primary Documens Path Mapping Editor The figure above shows a mapping example for path Z My files ATLASti project data With this mapping the documents Z My files ATLASti project data interview_3 rtf and Z My files ATLASti project data Special interview_4 rtf would also be assumed at H My files ATLASti project data interview_3 rtf and H My files ATLASti project data Special interview_4 rtf in case they are not accessible at their original location It is possible to define more than one replacement alternative for a given path H
401. ject Embed an Object via Copy and Paste Special Copy a table or a portion of it in Excel In ATLAS ti enter edit mode within the PD area or in the memo or comment area choose Enit Paste Speciat and select the Excel object ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EDITING PRIMARY DOCUMENTS 143 Inhalte einf gen u Quelle Notizen Z352 71355 Rich Text Format RTF Text 7 Als Symbol anzeigen Unicodetext Bitmap F gt den Inhalt der Zwischenablage so in Ihr Dokument ein dass Sie ihn mit Microsoft Excel 2003 aktivieren k nnen Figure 72 Paste special dialogue which will show the language of your Windows system The list of formats available in the Paste SpeciaL dialog may also contain other non object formats Embed an new or existing Object via Insert Object Enter edit mode and select Epit Insert Insert Ogiecr from the main menu computer However not all of the objects listed in the dialog make sense The Insert Object dialog opens and offers all object types installed on your inside a PD Create a new object To create a new object select the object type and click OK By default the option Create new object is activated Load an object from a file Activate the option Create from file in the Insert Object dialog Click OK and browse for the file to be inserted If the file s content is not an embeddable object an icon representation is inserted and displayed instead Insert
402. ject use the Corr BunbLe function instead see Copy Bundle Migrating and Backing Up Projects on page 129 If you were to copy an HU file using standard Windows functionality the documents used as PDs are not copied along and would be missing at the target location Reference Types Many Paths One Destination There are a different ways to establish external references in order to accommodate a wide variety of situations ATLAS ti always uses the most efficient way to reference a document once it is assigned to an HU This section discusses techniques for making references more flexible special paths and if absolute paths are necessary path mapping ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA MANAGEMENT IN ATLAS TI ATLAS ti uses special paths to reference data sources whenever possible Special paths offer a degree of flexibility which increases project portability 108 Absolute Paths Absolute paths are fully qualified file names such as D NDataNATLAStiNProjectXNInterviewsNInterview 1 rtf Or WServer1NDNDataNATLAStiNProjectXNnterviewsNnterview 1 rtf The former path references a file in a non ambiguous way on a specific computer which has a disk drive D The latter path a UNC path addresses a file on a specific computer in a local area network Both paths will refer to the same file if your computer is in fact Server1 Pros Aslong as the file itself is not deleted or replaced by another one it will a
403. k Management on page 296 To create a Super Family combining two families such as domestic flights and business traveler do the following F Double click on family Domestic flight It is displayed in the stack pane stack Now you have two families on the stack that can be combined with Double click on the family Business travelers It is pushed on top of the one of the operators ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 291 In order to create a group of all business travelers on domestic flights click the AND operator This operator fetches the two families from the stack and creates the combined expression The stack now contains the query expression in prefix notation the feedback pane shows the infix notation of the query which is better to read and understand The resulting items are displayed in the results pane AL Super Family Tool on Primary Doc Families eS Families Query oS Business travelers 7 2 AND Domestic flights Business travelers Domestic flights 5 4 i y International flights 4 zu 2 Leisure travelers 5 Domestic flights amp Business travelers query in infix notation Result 4 id Name Media Quo amp P1 Badische Zei Rich amp P3 Berliner Zeit Rich amp P5 FAZ doc Rich Figure 188 Creating a super family In the results pane those members of the fami
404. k performed on the data is joined together See page 171 further detail on merging HUs ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EDITING PRIMARY DOCUMENTS Synchronize all PDs at once 148 Synchronization on Demand Instead of synchronizing PDs one at a time you may want to synchronize all or a selection of PDs at the same time Choose Documents Data Source Manacement Synchronize PDs from the main menu ATLAS ti then searches for LOG files analyzes them and asks you for confirmation if synchronization is necessary ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 149 Team Project Management Tasks of the Project Administrator Sets up the Project When working The project administrator is responsible for in teams one person should creating the HU with the necessary settings for each team member be the designated administrator distributing the project data to team members assigning the data explains team members how to create a user account and how to log in see Adding a New User on page 151 Makes Decisions with regards to Editing Primary Documents Editing documents that are assigned to a Hermeneutic Unit is a critical tasks and effects coding Therefore the pros and cons need to be considered and informed decisions should be made If editing is allowed then it either needs to be done at one central location or clear instructions need to be provided containing information about who is allowed to ed
405. kaunchingva Network VIew s encata reca cce edere li bna t tae Fera iic DI ded bec les ea ic To open a Network View from the pick list cte tenete ree an te te nene s rni n c d ede To open a Network View using the Network View Manager e Simple analytic f rictions 2 eset te ren c dnd ere Pad te ota ebd iaa Import Node Neighbors concordia C EEA Import Co occurring Codes Create Families from Network Views Create network views from code families de EM AAA ghicasireas Semantic LAV OU e A ONO Topological Layout sud Creating Output D E en 343 Printing Networks acer pee etere ette dodi ce n ae dd gem CER OF UR I a EE LANDE P LER D P RT RE NT I EHE 343 Network Views for other Applications 343 Copy tO GIP DOAN m 343 Save Network View as Graphic File oo copies e tette dna pret lace D RD Ce RD sending thats Dee quinn Okan LS 343 Link Management s sss 4344 The Link Managers 344 The Relation Editors 4344 COSMETICS RN NN 345 Preferred Layout Direction EE 345 Formal Property 345 COMME e CN o erc recur A dc O tio Bain d 345 How CO CCIE relations coro A A patas 346 How to create new relations 4346 Managing RE A 348 Cosmetics Network Display Properties tech fnit hee die dece int dan add de eg nha ce idee 348 COlOIS 3 5 dcn A ertet
406. l bar As output select destination File amp Run Save the file and wait for Excel OpenOffice Calc to be opened Confirm the conversion of the data Application The two Co occurrence Tools are very useful for many kinds of analysis But not all options make sense for all type of data If you have a smaller data set like a typical interview study with 10 to 20 respondents then taking a look at the frequency count for exploratory purposes is likely to provide some new ideas and you may gain new insights The c coefficient is useful when working with larger amounts of cases and structured data like open ended questions from surveys If you use the c index pay attention to the additional colored hints As your data base is qualitative the c coefficient is not the same as for instance a Pearson correlation coefficient and therefore also no p values are provided In any case co occurrence measures need to be clearly understood not only for the mechanical but also for semantic issues involved in their meaningful interpretation e g mixed application of codes with different level like broader ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 311 and sub terms Furthermore you need to be aware of the artifacts enforced by a table approach like being reduced to a pairwise comparison Higher order co occurrences which would take more than two codes into account need more elaborate methods References Garcia 2004
407. lation had been growing V role of the media legend building t his during this era bestowed widespread and enduring notoriety on the killer because of e sum vaiiho attacks aj re th Q n ej M modus operandi similarities 4 modus VJACK THE RIPPER Jack the Ripper is a pseudonym given to an unidentified serial killer active in the largely impoverished Whitechapel area and adjacent districts of London England in late 1888 The name originated in a letter sent to the London Central News Agency by someone claiming to be the murderer new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text new text The victims were women earning income as prostitutes Most victims throats were slit after which the bodies were mutilated The removal of internal organs from three of the victims led some officials at the time of the murders to propose that the killer possessed anatomical or surgical knowledge Newspapers whose circulation had been growing i V role of the media legend building his during this era bestowed widespread and enduring notoriety on the killer because of xy Abate rg M modus operandi_similarities modus q
408. lbar the editor includes a title and memo type field The default title assigned to a newly created memo is ME today s date The title and the default type Commentary can be changed by overwriting the default title or by selecting a different memo type Various options are available You can change the default memo title and manage available memo types You can also be prompted for a title when creating a new memo For details see Memo Preferences on page 259 After having typed or changed something in the memo editor and before closing the editor save the contents if you want to keep it Click on the Save button or select Memo Save from the editor s menu Create a free memo In the Memo Manager click the Create New button or select Create Free Memo from the HUEditor s Memos menu A new memo with the default memo title is created The memo editor opens default setting l Change the memo title according to your needs and begin to type the memo ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH MEMOS iN 256 Save the memo content before moving on to do something else by clicking on the Accept button or select Memo Save or click Ctrl S If you forget to save it you are reminded by the program to do so before closing the editor Attaching Memos to Data Segments The procedure to create and associate a memo with a data segment or an existing quotation is similar to the coding procedures described above see General Cod
409. le on your computer the file cannot be played The solution is to go online and to search for a codec package They are available in a number of languages and are free of charge Length Recommendations File size does not pose a problem for ATLAS ti as an external referencing system is used and data are not imported into the ATLAS ti project file see The ATLAS ti Referencing Model on page 105 However certain issues should be considered regarding the length duration of a multimedia clip Currently the time line for audio and video file has no scroll bar Thus it can only be as wide as your computer screen whether your audio video file is 30 seconds or two hours long Therefore when using very long clips as primary data it might be difficult to mark quotations of short duration If you need fine grained resolution when creating quotations chop a big file into smaller clips The resolution of multimedia documents also depends on the compression scheme codec used when creating the multimedia output Higher compression results in smaller file sizes but often in less precision so marking a specific period or sequence of frames may become problematic Preparing Google Earth Documents Even with a non standard data source as the World as seen through Google Earth we still stay within the Primary Document metaphor Thus there is only ONE data source worldwide and all Google Earth PDs created in any HU all refer to the sam
410. le sheets in ATLAS ti v 5 x and version 2 style sheets in ATLAS ti v 6 x SPSS Export You can export your coded data as SPSS syntax file When executed in SPSS your quotations become cases and your codes and code families variables In addition further identifying information in form of variables is provided like the primary document number for each case start and end position and creation date These variables allow you to aggregate your data in SPSS if needed SPSS Export page 413 If you need a less detailed output see Codes Primary Documents Cross Tabulation on page 311 The table provides an output that is already aggregated by primary documents Excel Export The frequency of codes across documents Copes Output Copes Primary Document Taste the results of the Co occurence Table Explorer Toots Co occurence Toors and the word frequency count see The Word Cruncher page 264 can be exported as Excel compatible file Graphic Files Network Views can be saved as bmp or emf files Open a network view and select Network Save as Graphic Fue HTML Generator Publishing online or just creating a printout from a project is available with the HTML generator see Extras Export to HTML The results can be viewed platform independent with any Web browser This option can be found under the Extras menu and is best suitable for exporting your entire project HTML preferences can be set under Extras Prereren
411. le value e g fear 1 and fear 2 to the same quotation Although ATLAS ti permits an arbitrary number of codes to be attached to a quotation this would not make much sense with mutually exclusive values of scaled variables If you do so the SPSS generator will simply ignore additional values after processing the first one it finds for a given quotation Since it cannot be guaranteed which value will be detected first this will most likely produce unpredictable results in the SPSS job generated How SPSS Export Handles Families Treatment of Code Families Code families in SPSS jobs simply count the occurrences of assignments of any of its contained codes for the current case quotation using COMPUTE statements Below an example for computing a code family variable is provided COMPUTE KF1 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 VARIABLE LABELS KF1 KF Investigation Scaled codes are ignored in the computation of code family variables Treatment of Primary Document Families Each case quotation has its primary document index automatically generated by the SPSS export function The value of a quotation that is part of a primary document that is a member of a primary document family will be computed as a 1 or 0 In the SPSS syntax file the PD family variable is computed as follows PF1 Description of Victims COMPUTE PF1 0 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT 418 IF PD 5 or PD 6 or PD 8
412. lection methods described at Selecting Nodes and Links on page 329 Use the arrow keys in combination with the CrrL key to move the node s 1 pixel at a time in all four directions Ctrl Z Undo node To undo an erroneous placement use the function Uno Positionine or the placements key combination CrrL Z Removing and Deleting Nodes from Network Views Removing Removing nodes from the view simply removes the nodes from the Network Nodes will not View The nodes remain in the HU Removed nodes can be re imported at delete the any time using the node import functions described previously However objects they deleting nodes results in the deletion of the objects they represent from the NE entire HU erasing codes quotations etc Be cautious when deleting nodes option Delete Node however does To remove nodes from a Network View F Select the nodes to be excluded from the view View or press Ctrl Del on the keyboard If you only want to exclude a single From the Network Editor s main menu choose Nobes Remove Nopes FROM node you may also choose this option from the node s context menu To delete nodes from a Network View F Select the nodes to be deleted permanently from your HU From the Network Editor s main menu choose Nobes Detete Nove Confirm the deletion process as it is a critical action Deleting a node from a network view means that you permanently delete this object from your HU This
413. left Super Codes Super Codes are a convenient way to store queries Super Codes are very similar in look and feel to normal codes with one important difference instead of hardwired connections to quotations Super Codes store a query to compute their virtual references whenever needed They automatically change their behavior during the course of theory building If you have a Super Code All about Magic with a query SUB Magic and later add another sub code White Magic all quotations to which the latter code refers are also retrieved by the unchanged query of All about Magic Super Codes can be clicked on in the code list like any other code and they will display their quotations in an identical way Normal codes are hard wired to their quotations ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 283 Super Codes can contain Super Codes can contain Figure 179 Codes are hard wired to their quotations 11 54 Y 11 14 PA 3 reason released alibi lack of evidence _ M apg Figure 180 Super codes are linked to quoations via a query Super codes are displayed in the Code Manager just like regular codes and can be recognized either by a red text color or by their red symbol if images are switched on in the Views menu The list of quotations associated with the Super Code can be displayed with a double click just as for any other code Frequencies density
414. lies are listed either PDs codes or memos that match the current query F Click the Surer Fawnv button to store the query as a Super family You are prompted for a name Accept the default or enter a new name for instance Business travelers on domestic flights The new Super Family is displayed in the family browser with a red version of the family icon If icons are turned off the list entry is colored red ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 292 Fr A Super Family Tool on Primary Doc Families Families 2 Business travelers 7 a Business travelers on domestic flights Domestic flights 5 international flights 4 2 Leisure travelers 5 Figure 189 Display of super families Possible Family Combinations You can combine families in numerous and complex ways to form Super Families In the following section some common combinations are presented Once you are familiar with the tool you can venture out and try out more complex combinations For the following descriptions of the four operators looking at the Venn diagram see Semantic Operators may be helpful The Super Family tool offers four operators that can be used to combine families The four operators are also known as Boolean operators OR XOR AND and NOT Combining two families with the OR operator yields those items that are members of one or both families Combining two fam
415. limited by the vertical bar character The bar can be read as a Boolean OR The search defined above yields text passages including any of the following strings because causes causation before and therefore why and since Defining Categories Search swarms that have proven useful can be assigned names search categories in ATLAS ti to facilitate re use For example CAUSE caus why efore since defines CAUSE as a placeholder for the original search swarm Therefore instead of retyping lengthy search strings the user may later simply type the search category CAUSE into the entry field The dollar sign is a special character that indicates that the content of the CAUSE category is to be used for the search and not the string CAUSE itself Therefore do not use the sign to start a category name Categories can be mixed with ordinary strings to build complex search requests such as until CAUSE when Do not mistake search categories for codes Search categories are shortcuts for complex search procedures while codes are concepts representing some level of interpretation However when using search categories extensively and building hierarchies of search categories such a para taxonomy might stimulate the construction of a matching network of codes Hierarchies of Search Categories As categories may be elements of other categories recursive search trees of arbitrary depth may be defi
416. lso be exported and imported as files In the Associations Editor select menu items Fite Export and save the file The active association is saved as a file This file is in XML format and has the m extension syn The import function Fite Import lets you open files that were created in the above fashion and activates them as new associations in a different HU ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 99 Importing Survey Data These days a lot of surveys are conducted online A positive side effect is that a all data is immediately available in digital format and b respondents often do write lengthy answers to open ended questions On paper amp pencil surveys this was rarely the case Statistical programs like SPSS do offer options to analyze open ended questions but basically you end up encoding each answer with a number A proper qualitative analysis of the answers is not possible This is now possible in ATLAS ti Make sure you have updated to at least version 6 2 for this function to be available A typical work flow for working with survey data looks like this Rm Create online survey Transfer data as Excel Import and analyze with Google Forms table or similar formats in ATLAS ti Figure 48 Work flow when importing survey data Online surveys can be created using a number to tools What most of these tools have in common is that you can export your data as Excel file And this is what you
417. lways be found at this original location Absolute paths stay valid even when moving the HU to another location on this computer or when UNC paths are used to another computer within the local network Absolute unique paths in a local area network are easy to share among users Cons When porting the project to another computer or to another network files will not be found unless the target has identical conditions identical drives identical folder structure identical computer and network names If referenced files or folders are moved to another drive or to another computer the references become invalid Special Paths Absolute paths are exact but inflexible To overcome this restriction a more flexible reference type is offered Special Paths Special paths eliminate the need to address specific resources a specific computer a specific drive a specific path that may not be available over the lifetime of a project There is no need to know the actual file paths when porting a project to another computer The HUPATH the recommended option The HUPATH is created when you save the ATLAS ti HU file and the documents that you have or want to assign to one folder Let s call this the ATLAS ti project folder When you want to analyze or manage a lot of documents you can work with sub folders within the main project folder See the examples below ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA MANAGEMENT IN ATLAS TI 109 HUPAT
418. ly tongue twisting name Acquaint yourself with this general container concept and its implications Once you understand the HU concept you understand almost everything that is necessary to work with ATLAS ti And in spite of its impressive name it is really simple and practical to use Everything that is relevant to a particular project e g a research topic is part of the HU and resides in the digital domain For instance the Primary Documents representing the data sources the quotations the codes the conceptual linkages families networks and the memos etc are all part of one HU One obvious advantage of this container concept is that the user only has to deal with and think of one entity Activating an HU is the straightforward selection of a single file all associated material is then activated automatically ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN CONCEPTS AND FEATURES 26 Hermeneutic Unit Super codes Families Networks Codes Quotations Primary Documents Figure 1 The hierarchy of objects inside a Hermeneutic Unit The most basic level of an HU contains the Primary Documents followed closely by the quotations as selections of the Primary Documents On the next level codes refer to quotations Memos you meet them everywhere An HU can become a highly connected entity a dense web of primary data associated memos and codes and interrelations between the codes and the data To find your way throu
419. m the main menu select Extras Prererences GENERAL PREFERENCES GENERAL At the bottom right you will find the option List NAME SIZE FOR QUOTES Increase it to the desired number of characters 80 characters are probably enough for short titles This allows you to create a meaningful text output of coded video segments To create such an output select a code in the Code Manager Select the option OurPur Quotation List FOR SELECTED Cope s ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 213 The output will show an overview of all the titles you have created for your video or audio segments Plus it provides the position within the audio or video file Changing between time and frame references P 7 2 Victim_Annie_Chapman_scene of the murder_1967 wmv 0 01 04 98 z lt Quotation gt lt SelStart gt lt Sel End gt lt Sel i Choose Time Format 9 Milliseconds HH MM SS ms HH MM SS ms optimized Frames conce Figure 131 Changing the time format for video quotations If you prefer time rather then frame settings for quotation references right click the bottom right hand side of the time line and select Chance Time Format Then a small window pops up showing you the various options available Making use of quotation comments In addition to using quotation names for titles you can add a description for each video quotation in the comment field When you
420. m this message Accept the default name for the new code or enter a new one and click Ok The newly created network view opens p reason released lack of evidence reason released does not e a a Network Nodes Links Layout Display Specials Help Do P TS ee v Figure 243 A network view created from a code family Layout Procedures Two methods are available for the automatic placement of nodes Semantic Layout Places the nodes within the window using the semantic layout algorithm This algorithm tries to place the nodes into optimal positions using an invisible matrix of default positions It tries to place the nodes with the highest connectivity into center positions ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 341 Ctrl Z Undo node placements By recursively applying the same method to the rest of the nodes using neighboring positions of the first node placed the algorithm tries to avoid overlapping nodes and too many crossing links However calculating an optimal solution is not possible in a reasonable amount of time The user can exert some control on this algorithm via the preferred layout direction of the relations used for the links e g links using the is a relation go from bottom to top if possible You can change the layout direction manually using the Relation Editor see The Relation Editor on page 344 for details tp histor
421. m xml html XML vs HTML A Little Tech Talk XML is short for eXtensible Markup Language This is already quite a useful description when you compare it to its competitor or predecessor HTML short for HyperText Markup Language The crucial term is extensible NOT extended HTML was intended to allow documents and information of considerable complexity to be exchanged ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 402 across different technologies operating systems browsers etc It was also meant as a language which describes the logical structure of documents If you look at today s HTML code right click and select View Source when browsing a web page you will have a hard time identifying content in the chaotic noise produced by tags representing tables frames buttons rulers fonts images indentation etc Both HTML and XML are descendants of a much more powerful and less comprehensible language SGML the Standard Generalized Markup Language What XML shares with the latter is that you can define your own new languages something HTML does not allow for While HTML is a ready complete language itself XML is a meta language for defining new languages HTML has no clear separation of content and presentation With a fixed set of tags there is no way to clearly mark up document content in a meaningful manner If you have ever seen the source code of a HTML coded web page you can easily recognize two of the ma
422. mantic networks are all networks that serve to represent complex information by intuitively accessible graphic means One of the most attractive properties of graphs is their intuitive graphical presentation mostly in form of two dimensional layouts of labeled nodes and links EJ miyan Rixenmiamecmpman Dowumktntemimas Cb samacsrere cidos 23 SN b a y i AS cR E CO Gi pd tne m Ec m 4 i i i o A n l Gm n mw Oo RS A a R NX T m ROS The Jack the Ripper legend MEROS The Jack the Ripper legend 0 An Susanne CLICK TO EDIT Jock the Ripper was never cought and his identey has remained 9 mpstesy for 120 years feeding s whole international dust of Rigpliotogras bean to tel uz who he really was Jack the Popper has uttmately become a legend The aim of thes memo is to compre the pertinent estonta developments that turned a number of gruezcene acts mo a legend What is a legend Legends are famous accounts oF person they may or may nat have actualy occurred oF existed A legend may be someone ni noted celebrity mth larger thon lfe accomplishments whose fame is mef known Legends are stories mhich are told ac f they ware a historical event rather than as an exglanation for something or a symbolic narrative The legend may of may nat be an elaborste verson cf a testonicat event Thus examples of legends are the tales of Robin Hood which aro cat in a defi
423. matic coding would be to code for the concept distress Indications that a person might be distressed could be words like nervousness tension unease edginess etc In order to capture this you would do the following Create a code with the name Distress Open the Auto Coding tool F Select the appropriate code In the search entry field define a new category by entering DISTRESS nervous tens uneas edg etc The OR operator in this example is marked in red for visibility only The search term in ATLAS ti does not show colors or formatting Depending on your data set select a suitable scope of search current PD all PDs or a specific PD family F Select the segment size to be coded e g sentence Check Conrirm Atways and click on the Start button Every time the program finds a piece of text that matches your search category it stops the search and highlights the text it has found You can then read the surrounding context and decide whether the text passage really has something to do with distress If it does click Cope ir otherwise click Skip r The program continues to search for the next match You can uncheck the Conrirm aways box at any time and let ATLAS ti scan through the rest of your texts without prompting for further confirmation ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 235 Brushing up Results after Auto Coding Since no automatic search can guarantee 100 meaning
424. may be a solution No files other than the HU itself are involved in this scenario This approach is also recommended for work with sensitive data material When saving the HU the data material is highly compressed and therefore unreadable outside ATLAS ti pseudo encryption In addition the HU can be password protected This should make unauthorized access reasonably difficult Issues to Consider Size and Length of Documents As the documents become part of the HU file the size of the HU increases When working with external files it is hard to bump up the size of an HU file beyond 1 MB even if you write a lot of comments and memos An example project we created with about 1600 pages of transcripts and 360 000 words based on 40 interview transcripts resulted in an HU file size of 700 KB Another HU containing 10 internal documents of 90 pages each and a total of 650 000 words resulted in an HU size of 1 5 MB Both projects were easy to handle Thus if your project data contains more than 650 000 words it is still possible to work with internal files You need to keep in mind that very long documents take a while to load This is true in Word and also true in ATLAS ti You may want to consider splitting very long documents into a number of smaller subdocuments of only about 100 pages each For analysis purposes all subdocuments can be added to a primary document family containing all parts of the long documents If the documents
425. may need to be merged see Merging Codes on page 218 It could also be the case that you end up with a number of quotations that overlap but are coded by the same code s Such instances can be found with the help of the Coding Analyzer see Redundant Coding Analyzer on page 381 The Merge Report If you have checked the option Create Merge Report in the Merge Wizard default a report generator keeps track of every object affected during the merge process The report displays the name and location of the source and target HUs object statistics and merge strategies for source and target HUs added objects sorted by object type prefixed with a unified objects sorted by object type prefixed with a statistics for the resulting HU Below excerpts from a merge report are shown resulting from merging The Sample HU with itself using the strategy Different PDs Same Codes During this merge PDs quotations and PD Families are added and all codes are unified The first part of the report provides an overview of the selected merge strategies ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 178 Object Type Source HU Target HU Primary Docs 22 22 Quotations 458 456 Codes 79 29 Codings 523 523 Memos 21 21 Network Views 3 3 Primary Doc Families 14 14 Code Families 13 13 Memo Families 0 0 Code Links 23 22 Hyper Links 31 29 Figure 96 First part of the merge report An overview of the selected me
426. me Size Stat De Auth X E out 0 Ee i dl id ee A amp 14 4 8 1 Pride in Austria for Schwarz 3 81 Sus g sub title 4 0 E i i m we 8 16 e tru 8 2 On 77th Day the Voters Speak 1 122 Suam out 4 emphasis 4 0 j ll m y Es Been fo 2 0 8 18 en ecided it 8 3 In an emphatic end to an extra 1 20 2 Susar info 3 0 LPL Layout ja 8 20 When heSSaid California would 8 Californians voted overwhelmin 1 201 Susat Y N NFWSPAPFRS 0 0 pre ilia 8 5 the Austrian born bodybuilder 1 201 Susar j j i j E 8 i Adjacency Operator Settings Refresh Codes Scope Help Des With nearly 100 nercent of the 1 41 Susar ex Figure 185 above shows a simply query for the code lang direct quote use of direct quotes in newspapers articles The question of interest is whether this writing style is used equally across the various newspapers The two countries compared are Germany and the USA The frequency for all documents is 25 see the code in the code list on the left hand side The scope is set to the PD family Country USA This means that the result pane is filtered only displaying quotations from US newspapers This results in 16 quotations which can be seen at the bottom left of the query tool window Double clicking on the PD Family Country Germany in turn yields the remaining 9 quotations 16 9 225 Fur
427. me is displayed either within the link line above the line rotated or within a box 3 context x leads to Giemsa Figure 236 Display options for link labels You can set the link display options under Disptay Link Dispray Further options are to select between three alternative names lable 1 label 2 or menu label see The Relation Editors on page 344 and to select the display of symetric relations just a line or two arrows at both ends To link two nodes using mouse and keyboard Place the mouse pointer over the source node The mouse pointer changes its appearance to an arrow F Hold down the Surr key on your keyboard Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse pointer to the target node A red rubber band between the mouse pointer and the source node is drawn F Release the Surr key F Release the left mouse button ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 331 Select a relation applies to code code and quote quote links only To link more than two nodes If more than one source node is to be linked with a target node use the following method Select the source nodes see To select multiple nodes method 1 on page 329 TW Choose Links Link Nobes from the Network Editor s main menu or click on the Link button in the toolbar Move the mouse pointer with the rubber bands to the target node and click the left mouse but
428. me to consider essential for their work such as survey processing XML stylesheets smooth PDF and many more All of these were introduced in free service packs Manual installation of service packs For those rare cases where an Internet connection is not available to use the comfortable live update procedure usually users on highly secure networks there is a workaround that lets you install the service packs manually This is not the recommended procedure for any installation where a normal live internet connection exists Such users should rely on the much more convenient Live Update process The manual update procedure is as follows l Check your current version including the build number and the most recent version As updates service packs and patches for ATLAS ti are incremental you may need to download a number of files to update your installation Ask our support to provide you will a direct link to download the appropriate files Herr More Resources Support CENTER ATLAS ti installation so that the service pack manager will find them You can Download these files and then copy them into a special folder of your access the default folder via Extras ExPLORER ServicePack FOLDER After you have downloaded transferred the files to the ATLAS ti computer into the so called Service Pack Folder Start ATLAS ti if not already opened Launch the Service Pack Manager while holding the SHIFT key Too
429. ment gt Usable Origin Location Families Figure 295 Sort menu for documents In Object Managers the currently selected sort criterion is also displayed in the status bar see Error Reference source not found After new items are added to the list refresh the sort with a double click on the status pane s sort field Overview of Sort Options The following describes the sort options in more detail Default sort order D descending A ascending PDs quotes Entity name string ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SORTING AND FILTERING ro memos LL Author PDs quotes Author s name string A codes memos Created PDs quotes Creation date or date of codes memos assignment for PDs date time Modified PDs quotes Modification date date time codes memos Density quotes codes Quotes codes number of links to A memos objects of the same type Memos number of links to all associated objects i e quotes codes and other memos Number of associated quotations A PDs quotes The system generated ID A number Size quotes memos Quotations number of lines paragraphs Era A i PDs Media type i e audio image A rich text text video Quotations PDs Number of quotations for the primary document Usability of the primary document PDs Origin of data source A alphabetically The quotations start position Memo type Sting PD Memos Number of PDs using the memo as their data source if any Families PDs
430. ments A Boolean Query The example below uses the HU Jack the Ripper stage II Please load and display this HU while reading the following You can access the samples file via Her Quick Tour Our sample query using Boolean operators is this Find all quotations coded with either code reason released alibi or code reason released lack of evidence Open the Query Tool by clicking on the binoculars button in the main toolbar Double click on the code reason released alibi The Query Tool displays the following entries ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 279 A ATLAS ti Query Tool Lo as Query Q3 Investigation 6 3 Letter 6 3 Modus operandi 5 PY Merrrlar Y 4 mu Codes Y amp i murder witnesses 10 0 Y amp i murderer description 22 0 i murderer motive 1 1 X murderer serial killer 11 2 3S murderer_various persons 4 0 Z murders canonical five 4 6 Y amp i murders_more less than five 5 S murders potentially attributed He was cleared of suspicion when 0 T REASON RELEASED to On 1 September the de result pane P OD EE terete ON As he was still imprisoi r aive long afta However Sickert is not considere 0 3 reason released allegation unp s 3 Critics note among other things Y reason released does not fit ch 2i 4 n r Figure 173 Clicking a Boolean Query Step 1 The t
431. mily onto the stack which now contains two items ready to be combined Query Ec JCs JC P LRecalc undo _ _ Redo residence New York AND gender female age group under 25 residence New York Figure 191 Clicking a more complex query step 2 The feedback pane always displays the item that is on top of the stack The topmost item on the stack has either been entered or is the result of applying an operator To yield all documents that match all three requirements female under 25 and from New York click the AND operator again The stack and query feedback pane now looks as follows Query Lc Ls Jle Recale Undo Redo AND AND gender female age group under genderzfemale 8 age group under 25 amp residence New York Result CUR Figure 192 Clicking a more complex query step 3 If these are all the attributes that you want to combine click on the Super Family button If you want to combine a fourth or fifth attribute continue as described above ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 295 Snapshots are hard wired versions of super families Creating a complex query as a sequence When creating a complex query in one sequence the rule is to select all families first followed by the appropriate number and type of operators Using the same example as above the sequence woul
432. mily Manacer from the Documents Copes or Memos menu The Ept Famities submenu is available from the Documents Codes and Memos menu The Family Manager is also available by clicking the Family button in the corresponding Object Manager see left ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL FAMILY LIFE 240 Creating Families Before using a family it must first be created in the Family Manager Open the Family Manager for PDs codes or memos Click the button Create a New Item or select the menu option Famiuies New FamiLy already existing family you will hear an error sound A message pops up Enter a name when prompted and click OK If you enter the name of an letting you know that the entered name is not accepted Now you can add members and write a preliminary comment describing the family The number of items in a family is displayed behind the family s name in parentheses Adding Members After a family is created adding members is often the next logical step However the assignment and removal of items can be done at any time during the life cycle of a family To add new items to a family Select a family If you have just created the family it is already selected F Select one or more items in the list pane on the right hand side Click the Add Items button to make the selected items members of the selected family If you want to add one item at a time you can simply double click an item n
433. mo is connected Size Size of content Counts text characters and embedded objects Author Name of the user who created the memo Type Memo type selected for this memo Created Creation date and time Modified Date and time of last modification ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 63 Families Name of memo family if the memo has been added to a family PDs Indicates whether the memo is used as the data source for one or more PDs A dash indicates that it is not used as a PD ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 64 Data Preparation Starting and Ending an ATLAS ti Session This section describes how to start and end an ATLAS ti session how to create and save a project a Hermeneutic Unit Make sure to check out the Project Management section before starting any serious projects You can save yourself a lot of time and trouble by following a set of simple rules for proper planning storing and moving your ATLAS ti project files See Setting Up a New Project on page 112 for details Starting ATLAS ti ATLAS ti can be started like many other Windows applications e g via the Windows Start menu or by clicking on projects or program shortcuts Select ATLAS ti from the Programs menu Start sutton Procrams SCIENTIFIC SOFTWARE Double click on the program s shortcut on the desktop or on your task bar if you have created one ATLAS t1 6 Figure 28 ATLAS
434. move button This action deletes the list entry not the HU itself Although the standard file dialog is generally more flexible the HU browser s capability of displaying files from different locations in one list is often quite convenient However if you only want to open you can simply choose from the list of most recently used HUs available in the Fie menu To open a recently used Hermeneutic Unit Open the Fite menu Select an HU from the list displayed at the bottom of the File menu To open the most recently used Hermeneutic Unit at start up When starting ATLAS ti the last used HU can be loaded automatically This start up method can be selected under Extras Preferences GENERAL PREFERENCES tab HU Ebrror This is the default setting To open a Hermeneutic Unit using Drag amp Drop You can drag files from the Windows Explorer or the desktop ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION The HU is also protected against accidental concurrent editing 69 From the Windows Explorer your desktop or any other folder containing HU files drag an HU onto the HU Editor s main pane or caption Protecting the HU against concurrent use HU Lok file When you open an HU a Lok file is created for this HU e g My Project hpr6 lok to prevent concurrent editing of a HU The Lok file is deleted when you close ATLAS ti Sometimes it happens that the lok is not deleted either in case of a system crash
435. n Conclusion Special paths should be used deliberately wherever applicable They ease the task of locating referenced documents in a very efficient manner Using special paths makes management of projects involving multiple HUs multiple locations and multiple users convenient An HU containing special paths instead of absolute references makes it easy to transfer and install projects on other computers ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT 112 Setting Up a New Project This section provides assistance in setting up your ATLAS ti project in the most efficient manner and for maximum work productivity Objectives Working with ATLAS ti involves users files and computers An ATLAS ti project can be as simple as a single person working with a single Hermeneutic Unit HU and a few primary documents PDs on a single stand alone computer It can be as complex as large teams working on different computers in a network or even at different geographic locations working on several projects at once moving files between users computers and networks merging partial projects into compiled projects and many other conceivable constellations If you have a single project work on a single computer and have no plans to share your work with others you do not need to concern yourself too much with elaborate project management issues Keeping in mind a few simple rules is sufficient to make your work with ATLAS ti smooth and h
436. n Unicode programs Size Restrictions Theoretically size restrictions do not play a major role due to the way ATLAS ti handles documents see The ATLAS ti Referencing Model on page 105 However you should bear in mind that your computer s processing speed and storage capacity affect the performance Excessively large documents can be uncomfortable to work with even when you have an excellently equipped computer The crucial issue is not always the file size but rather in the case of multimedia files the length of playing time For textual documents the number and size of embedded objects may cause extraordinarily long load times There is a high likelihood that if a textual document loads slowly in ATLAS ti it would also load slowly in WORD or WordPad For very long texts or multimedia files navigation can be severely handicapped e g scrolling to exact positions We recommend making data sources as small as possible but as large as necessary without breaking passages that belong together Even with many smaller documents ATLAS ti supports unified processing and fast navigation ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION Rich Text supports character and paragraph related formatting Data from other applications can be embedded Store documents in RTF if you want to edit them later 74 Preparing Textual Documents Supported Formats ATLAS ti 6 principally handles documents in plain and Rich Te
437. n be used to migrate the project If drives and networks are not available see the section on Modifying the Project Setup on page121 especially the sub sections on path mapping and changing paths Project Backup The recommended option for this scenario is to create a copy bundle file See Copy Bundle Migrating and Backing Up Projects on page 129 If this is not possible you need to backup the HU plus each single document ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT 118 Benefits of this approach Archive friendly documents can stay where they are and do not need to be placed in a common folder The HU is not tied to the location of its documents and may be copied and moved anywhere without losing functionality as long as references point to the correct locations of the documents Drawbacks Copying or moving an HU to other environments is not as smooth For instance if a server that hosts PDs is changed e g new or changed disk drives these documents can no longer be reached unless the path reference is changed see Adjusting References on page 122 When you migrate such a project using Copy Bundle the situation on the target computer can differ considerably from the computer on which the project was created Scenario 3 Working with One Project File for projects that use text files exclusively If you plan to use only textual documents an approach that does not use any references at all
438. n may have two roles project administrator and team member Create a new folder for the project data on the shared drive Copy all documents to be used in the project into this folder use sub folders if you desire an added degree of structure Set your Textbank Path to this location Extras Prererences GENERAL PREFERENCE Patus ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 162 r General Preferences Default folder to store Hermeneutic Units primary docs etc lt gt v Folder to store HTML output also contains support files AS Figure 85 Setting the Textbank Path under General Preferences Open ATLAS ti and assign the documents Save the HU Fie Save to a location outside the project folder e g on the desktop or a local drive The resulting project has all documents assigned through the special lt TBPATH gt To double check open the PDoc Manager and look at the column Origin If you find that documents were assigned differently check the following If you find documents using the HUPATH you have stored the HU somewhere in the Textbank folder Documents with an absolute path if you see a long path name in the column origin indicate that these documents are outside the HU and the Textbank folder If this is the case it is best o start the project afresh delete the HU file and start again If everything is correct and the documents are referenc
439. na period during the reign at Richard fin England 1109 95 or the sccconts surrounding King Arthur whch were perhaps orignaty based cnt the oxplors of a Romanc Colti prince who aTtemgited to ceat the expanaon of the Anglo Saxons in what Figure 224 Example of an ATLAS ti network view In contrast with linear sequential representations e g text presentations of knowledge in networks resemble more closely the way human memory and thought is structured Cognitive load in handling complex relationships is reduced with the aid of spatial representation techniques ATLAS ti uses networks to help represent and explore conceptual structures Networks add a heuristic right brain approach to qualitative analysis Along with using networks for mind mapping and the visual design of theoretical models you can exploit the structural properties of code networks to enhance the retrieval of quotations Using networks for retrieval purposes is a well known technique in information retrieval In that domain a structured sets of keywords is usually referred to as a thesaurus This usage of networks for semantic retrieval will be described at Semantic Operators on page 272 in more detail ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 319 Nodes and Links The term network is formally defined within graph theory a branch of discrete mathematics A network is defined as a set of nodes or vertices and links A node
440. named by adding a numeric suffix as shown above Check the option Create Merge Report to generate an overview of what has been done The report lists all added and unified objects and their old and new names Statistics about the source and target HUs and the resulting merged HU are created The report will be opened in a rich text editor after the merge process is completed see Merge Report on page 177 for details Click Finish to start the merge process This may take a while depending on the size of both the target and source HUs and the strategy chosen The Unify strategy is generally more consumptive in processing time than adding objects If you repeatedly merge the same HUs you might want to deactivate the option Merge Comments as this may unnecessarily blow up the comment for any of the unified objects and leads to duplication of entries Conflict Resolution for Links For certain entities a default conflict resolution strategy is used If the inclusion of objects could result in the modification of a link between objects in the target HU the target HU link is preferred Example If there is a link is associated with between two codes Alchemy and Gold in the target HU and a conflicting link is contrary to exists between the corresponding source HU codes then the link in the target HU wins However if no link exists between two objects in the target HU the link existing in the source HU is transfe
441. ne_Kelly pdf id doc_8 gt e mimes locas P icti nda 9 primDoc mDate 2009 11 30T22 32 00 cDate 2009 08 11T13 24 37 au Susanne name 1_Jack the Ripper Story rtf loc doc 10 id pd 3 qindex 101 gt comment type text html gt p Wikipedia entry on the legend of Jack the Ripper lt p gt lt comment gt quotations size 99 gt lt q mDate 2009 08 18T17 00 49 cDate 2009 08 11T14 01 08 au Susanne name Jack the Ripper is a pseudonym given to an unident loc 1 4 289 4 id q3_1 gt content size 296 gt lt p gt Jack the Ripper is a pseudonym given to an unidentified serial killer active in the largely impoverished Whitechapel area and adjacent districts of London England in late 1888 The name originated in a letter sent to the London Central News Agency by someone claiming to be the murderer lt p gt lt content gt lt q gt lt q mDate 2009 08 19T15 34 58 cDate 2009 08 11T14 01 41 au Susanne name Most victims throats were slit after which the b loc 55 5 125 5 id q3_2 gt content size 78 gt lt q mDate 2009 08 19T12 51 37 cDate 2009 08 19T12 51 37 au Susanne name Elizabeth Long testified that she saw a man and a loc text v02 2 1480 2 1749 id q6_8 gt lt content size 305 gt lt p gt Elizabeth Long testified lt p gt lt p gt that she saw a man and a woman she believed to be Chapman lt p gt
442. ned Beaten gt EMOTION n UU RA Sah Bu a a POSEMO NEGEMO LOVE ANGER love loving beloved lover Search Swarm Figure 136 Hierarchy of search categories The definition for the taxonomy above is as follows EMOTION S POSEMO S NEGEMO POSEMO S LOVE etc NEGEMO SANGER LOVE love loving beloved lover ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 228 Such category structures are efficient tools to exploit the literal properties of the textual materials you use in your research Of course this tool does not find relevant information beyond the characters specified in the search How To Use Category Search Open the Text Search tool Fr A Text Search Enter or select Search Expression ARTIFICIALLIGHT lamp lantern kk Icandles CLOSERELATIVE father mother brother chil ink ME Standard Search Mode Figure 137 Selecting an existing search category in the Text Search tool Enter a new search swarm or select an existing category from the library of search swarms by clicking on the drop down button at the right of the entry field F Click Next List of example When using Category Search some of the controls become disabled Category search Search cannot be combined with GREP mode can never be case sensitive and categories in the Previous button cannot be used the standard search library To define a n
443. need to examine how many nodes populate the Network View and the overall size of the text To change the verbosity of quotes select the menu option DiseLAv QuorarioN VERBOSITY Link Display There are numerous ways to display links via menu item Display Link Disptay First choose from three different ways of displaying the label choose to display label 1 label 2 or the menu text as defined in the Relation Editor See The Relation Editor on page 344 for further detail Specials Help Show Tools sr um ae mr Boxed Quotations h Label 1 Label 2 x e Menu Label v Full Image for PDs Quotation Verbosity Set Fonts gt v Arrows for Undirected Links Set Colors b Boxed Labels Rotated Labels Refresh Display F5 Figure 256 Submenu Link Display The second option is to display labels with a box around them or not or to display them rotated alongside the line connecting two codes or quotes ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 352 Theory transfer supports a deductive approach to analyzing qualitative data and the application of proven theories to other domains Miscellaneous Network Procedures Theory Transfer By Theory Transfer we mean the re use of codes relations and code networks produced in one project in subsequent projects Two different strategies are supported The re use of a flat unstructured list of codes includi
444. need to prepare for import in ATLAS ti see below Based on specific prefixes that you add to your variable names ATLAS ti interprets the column headers and cells of the Excel table in various ways and turns them into primary documents the contents of the primary documents primary document families quotations codes comments and code families Data are imported case based This means each row of the Excel table that is imported from the online survey tool is transformed into a primary document How survey data is treated in ATLAS ti To represent the results of an online survey within the framework of ATLAS ti in the most accurate and complete manner a few basic requirements need to be considered A survey broadly consists of the name of the survey the questions the answers for each respondent Questions can be of different types like single choice ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 100 questions yes no or offering more than two options multiple choice questions or open ended questions Within the framework of ATLAS ti these concepts are mapped as follows Survey Concept ATLAS ti Concept Open ended question Code Single Choice 0 1 PD Family Single Choice gt 2 PD Family from Question plus Value options Multiple Choice PD Family from Question plus Value This does not mean that you cannot turn a multiple choice question into a code it all depends on how you define the columns
445. ng Scaled Codes When variable codes with a special naming convention see Scaled vs Dichotomous Codes on page 416 are added during the merge process their values are invalidated in case of name clash The reason for this is that imported codes with an identical name are automatically renamed using a numeric suffix Note that before applying the SPSS job generation feature on the resulting HU such codes would need to be manually renamed ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT Test merge effects by experimenting with sample HUs 177 A Few Additional Considerations You can unify codes but add Network Views This results in a new network containing the same nodes as those already contained in the target HU s network Adding nodes and unifying networks could result in an existing Network View being crowded with both the nodes from the target and the source HUs Unifying Super Codes combines their queries using the OR operator To get acquainted to the effects of either adding or unifying entities you should experiment with the various strategies using sample HUs Observe what happens Before modifying serious projects you should gain some understanding of how the merging process works After the Merge After a successful merge operation some cleaning up might become necessary For example codes with different names but similar meaning i e synonyms are now treated as distinct codes They
446. ng names code definitions author date of creation and modification in other HUs The transfer of rich representations of codes including the connections between codes Flat Code Migration The first strategy using unstructured code lists includes the output of all or a selection of codes from one HU into a file and the later import of this code file into another HU Step by step instruction is provided elsewhere see Transferring Codes from Other Projects on page 216 The method of flat code migration is useful when working in teams and when a code list is first developed on one computer This way other team members can easily import the agreed upon list of codes into their HUs Other potential applications for this function include testing reliability or starting deductive structural theory work from scratch When testing for reliability a given code base can be used on the same material by different authors Semantic Network Migration This method transfers a relatively complete theory into a new project Like the flat code migration method described above two steps are necessary First the network of codes needs to be exported and saved as an external file Second this file is imported into a new HU or an existing HU To export the code network Load the HU that contains the theory you want to migrate If needed set the code filter to contain only those codes to be processed in the next step Choose
447. ng the list of codes page 219ff Co occurrence Tools page 299ff When working in teams look at the following section Team Project Management on page 149ff You should not expect introductory or advanced information on methodological aspects of qualitative research other than cursory statements from this manual Some general familiarity with concepts and procedures relating to the Windows operating system e g windows mouse and computing in general e g files folders is assumed Manual Conventions Notes Margin notes contain This paragraph contains a general note that may be of interest or worth important remembering observations of a general nature Tip Recommendation This paragraph contains a tip or recommendation e something we advise you to make a practice in your work ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL 20 Caution This paragraph contains a warning or caution i e something you should avoid doing or be aware of consequences beyond the action itself Instruction This paragraph contains an instruction i e something you should follow along and or execute in the program Additional resources suggested further reading Additional information about this topic is available elsewhere usually online from our web site or some other place on the Web ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL INTRODUCTION 21 Introduction ATLAS ti is a powerful workbench for t
448. ngs were found The Redundancy column displays the number of pairs of redundant quotations found for the codes If you select one of the codes the redundant quotations are listed in pairs in the two lower panes Double clicking on the listed quotations displays and highlights them in context Because of this you can check them in context and decide how to proceed The figure below illustrates a typical redundant coding Y amp reason suspected attention seeking Y I reason suspected could have been there Es Vinvestigation suspected by whom T treason released theory disputed Bf Treason suspected could have been there F Y amp I reason released theory disputed Y amp reason suspected could have been there 38 treason suspected attention seeking gt HI Vinvestigation suspected by whom Figure 293 A typical redundant coding Three procedures to handle a redundant coding are offered Unlink detaches the selected code from the quotation selected in one of the quotation panes This method is the least destructive of the available options Remove deletes the selected quotation Merge melts the quotation in the right pane into the quotation selected in the left pane All references to and from the merged quotation is inherited by the other If the two quotations overlap the resulting quotation includes all data from both quotations Both quotation panes have a Connectivity column that shows the num
449. nherits all quotations code links family memberships and all other relations from the original code Now you can differentiate the two codes by selectively removing unneeded links from each Use a network editor as an appropriate workspace and use Import Neighbors for simultaneously displaying the links Figure 258 Instructions for splitting a code what to do in order to split a code Below step by step instruction is offered As an example the code Number magic is split Above in the section on merging codes we merged the two ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 355 codes Magic 3 and Magic 7 into the Number magic code see Merging Codes using the Network Editor on page 353 Before the merge sixteen quotations were attached to the code Magic 3 three quotations to the code Magic 7 and one quotation to the code Number magic Now we show how to revert this action To split the previously merged code Number magic F Select the code Number Magic in the Code Manager Open a Network Editor on this code The network editor will display Number Magic and all its direct neighbors except quotations NeicHBors from the network editor s main menu to import its quotations Select code Number Magic in the network editor and select Nopes Import Remove other node types from the view that might also be linked Select Nobes Dupticate Copes to create an exact clone of
450. nient if you clicked on the wrong code Redo pushes the last removed entry back onto the stack The functions above are also available from the context menu of the term stack pane More Functions Context Menus Several context menus are available in the various panes of the Query Tool that complement the functions available via the buttons Most items in the context menus serve an informational need The code family pane s context menu has a single command Display Codes Select to view the member codes of the selected code family ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 297 Families amp 3 Investigation Role of the media Investigation Role of the media SN 1 1 El g i Letter 6 Display Members amp 3 Modus operandi 5 Figure 195 Context menu of the code family pane The code pane s menu offers information about the selected code neighbors the term i e query if itis a Super Code embedding embedded and co occurring codes 36 date of murder 13 0 2 8 historic context 4 0 3 name of suspect 28 0 ES name of suspect Cohen 6 6 amp name of suspecti gigen Neighbors Z name of suspect Kamin ES rd radit erm Z name of suspect Kelly ici Gus Z name of suspect Kosmis Ed dc X name of victim 14 4 Co occurring Codes reason released alibi reason rereaseu tac Z reason released alibi reason
451. ning the program you are automatically logged in as Super Super User Admin ATLAS ti associates the user currently logged in with all objects like codes quotations memos etc created during a session If you keep the default settings all objects are stamped with the user name Super ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION Create your own user account 66 Especially if you work in a team we recommend that you create your own user account see User Management page 150 Ending your ATLAS ti Session When you have finished working select Fie Quit from the HU editor s main menu to close the session Creating Opening and Saving a Hermeneutic Unit Creating a Hermeneutic Unit For more detail on how to best set up a project see Setting Up a New Project on page 112 When you start ATLAS ti and a recently used HU is not loaded you will see New Hermeneutic Unit in the caption of the HU Editor You can start working right away on this new HU Alternatively you can choose Fite New Hermeneutic Unit to open a new HU To provide a name for your HU save it to disk Choose Fite Save or Save as from the main menu which opens a standard file dialog Browse to the desired folder where you want to save your HU file and enter a name for your HU F Click Save Make it a habit to always write a short comment for any new HU Describe the project s goals and intentions You and your team membe
452. nipulating raw XML data that come with the program The following sample was created by exporting the Jack the Ripper sample HU to XML Below you see some excerpts of the raw XML file ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 410 lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt storedHU mode complete version 6 2 27 method AML ATLAS Markup Language creator ATLAS ti lastSaved 2011 09 15T11 10 18 xmins aml http www atlasti com hu ns2003 gt lt hermUnit prot private lastPD 22 mDate 2010 12 12T21 59 25 cDate 2009 08 11T13 24 25 au Susanne name Jack the Ripper_stage II 62 gt comment size 627304 type text html gt is sampl n be u or dataSources size 20 gt dataSource mime bmp loc lt HUPATH gt Site Second Murder 29 Hanbury Street png id doc_1 gt dataSource mime snd loc lt HUPATH gt 1_Jack the Ripper Story Introduction mp3 id doc_2 gt dataSource mime bmp loc lt HUPATH gt Site Second Murder Wooden Shed png id doc_3 gt lt dataSource mime geo google earth loc GE id doc_4 gt lt dataSource mime bmp loc lt HUPATH gt Site Second Murder Place where Chapmann was found png id doc_5 gt dataSource mime bmp loc lt HUPATH gt Site Second Murder 2 Entrances png id doc_6 gt lt dataSource mime text rtf loc lt HUPATH gt 13_Criminal Profiling rtf id doc_7 gt lt dataSource mime text pdf loc lt HUPATH gt 2_Victim_Mary_Ja
453. nolithic file When you click on an outsourced chapter its file is loaded from the disk and displayed just as it would if it was an integral part of the main document But alas if you decide to copy the main document to another computer and forget to take all subdocuments along you will experience the dreaded file not found error when you want to look at a single chapter But even when you dutifully copy all the subdocuments along with the main document there is no guarantee that you will be able to continue working smoothly on the other computer If the subdocuments were referenced via absolute path names e g d word manual chapter22 doc and your other computer cannot resolve this path because you copied everything into c mydocuments instead of d word you still will not be able to access the chapters even though they are all there ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA MANAGEMENT IN ATLAS TI 107 Basic Principles for Working with Referenced Documents During the lifetime of an HU references to documents always need to point to the same documents or equivalent copies In other words Make an effort to keep your documents where they are when you first assign them to the HU Changing the references to external data sources must be matched by appropriate relocation of the affected documents In other words if you change a reference move the document to the new location specified Moving documents must be matched by u
454. nother cause is that you may have uninstalled the application needed for activation Cannot Enter Edit Mode for Primary Documents Currently only RTF and plain text documents can be edited under ATLAS ti s control An assigned Word document doc or docx cannot be edited To be able to edit a document created with Word you need to save it from Word as a rich text document rtf before you assign the document If you have assigned a document in doc or docx format and are in need to edit it you can turn it into an internal document F Highlight the entire document and copy it e g Ctrl C MaNacEMENT New Text Document Enter a name for the document The Next create a new internal document via Documents Data Source document will be loaded in edit mode Paste the coded content of the doc or docx into the new text document Then save and leave edit mode Disconnect the assigned doc or docx file from the HU right click on the document in the PDoc Manager and select the option Disconnect ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL APPENDIX 434 Of Bugs and Nuisances Sad but inevitable no software and no operating system is totally free of errors or bugs It s usually not so much inherent programming slip ups that cause a program to malfunction Much more frequently it is simply the digital environment inside your computer with which it doesn t agree This is because every deployment situation is ultimately unique every installat
455. ns coded with Magic or any immediate or indirect sub term of Magic Like the OR operator in the set of Boolean operators the SUB may produce large result sets However unlike the OR operator because you make use of a theory using SUB the precision is much better i e you get only what you expect Of course if your network contains dubious connections computer ISA intelligent entity the quality of your retrieval will decline UP The UP operator looks at all directly linked codes and their quotations on the next higher level Unlike the SUB operator it does not recursively traverse the structure Only the next level is considered SIBlings The SIBlings operator finds all quotations that are connected to the selected code or any other descendants of its parents Example All quotations coded with Love or any other Positive Attitude here kindness Attitude Positive _ spin Negative Attitude Attitude y Ne Ne Love Kindness Hatred Anger Figure 170 A hierarchy of concepts suitable for semantic retrieval ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 274 Because of non commutativity every proximity operator comes in two versions With such a network of codes the following queries would make sense Q1 to Q8 quotations SUB Positive Attitude gt O1 Q2 O3 O4 Q5 SUB Negative Attitude gt Q6 Q7 Q8 SUB Attitude gt
456. ns for nodes Node and Link Appearance Under the Display menu of the Network Editor you find a large variety of options to alter the display characteristics of nodes and links Some of these options affect all nodes regardless of their type Other options change the display of certain node types only Node Icon The node type icon can be switched on and off for all nodes by selecting the menu option DispLay Use Nope Bitmaps or by pressing the key combination Ctrt Att B The small image used as a node icon increases the distinctiveness of the nodes especially when a mixture of node types exists in a Network View Nonetheless when space runs low you may prefer to switch off the icons A node can be displayed with a 3D border or with a drop shadow To switch between the 3D and the shadowed view select the menu option Disptay DispLay Nobes 3D or press the key combination CrrL 3 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 351 Node Verbosity You have several options to control the amount of information displayed in a node Quotes can be displayed with just their ID or with the complete selection of text they represent Specials Help Show Tools v Full Image for PDs Juotation Verbosity 2 v Idonly Set Fonts b gt Name Set Colors Comment Refresh Display FS Lee Figure 255 Submenu Quotation Verbosity Of course to decide which level of verbosity makes sense you
457. ns for the selected code appearance as in All Quotation list Include Sub Terms Prints all quotations for the selected code including all quotations connected to any of the codes that are transitively linked to this code This resembles a Query Tool created term using the SUB operator see page 272 and page 331 Query Tool Opens the Query Tool see page 268for details Code List Prints a list of codes according to the current sort setting Code Hierarchy Prints the hierarchy of codes as indented text The hierarchy is not created automatically by ATLAS ti It is based on the type of links between codes as defined by the analyst see To create code code and quotation quotation links using the Object Manager on page 331 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 397 murderer serial killer is Root modus operandi cut throat describes murderer serial killer modus operandi mutilation describes murderer serial killer murderer various persons is Root murders canonical five is Root name of victim is associated with murders canonical five modus operandi cut throat is associated with name of victim modus operandi mutilation is associated with name of victim victim 1 Mary Ann Nichols is associated with murders canonical five victim 2 Annie Chapman is associated with murders canonical five victim 3 Elizabeth Stride is associated with murders canonical five victim 4 Cat
458. nter starts the merging procedure The codes you selected first disappear and Mouse the mouse pointer on top of the target code node and left click This their quotations are added to the target code The codes merged into the resulting target node are deleted from the Hermeneutic Unit s code database Since merging cannot be reversed easily and since this procedure might affect many aspects save the Hermeneutic Unit before doing the merge If you are not satisfied with the merge result you can reload the previously saved HU Another more laborious way to revert to the previous state is to split the target code See Splitting Codes on page 354 Suggestions for structuring the list of codes A frequent question is how to add a structure to the otherwise flat code list in ATLAS ti ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 220 Adding structure via the order in the Code Manager The easiest way to work with higher and lower order codes is to structure your codes alphabetically in the Code Manager e g according to the basic pattern below category A_sub 1 category A_sub 2 category A_sub 3 category B_sub 1 category B_sub 2 category B_sub 3 and so on As a means to visualize the beginning of a category you can enter a free code that is not linked to any quotation as shown below Such a main category code might initially be empty but may proof to be quite handy during further coding work You ma
459. o ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 183 pay attention that the cursor is positioned left from the first letter of the text If you begin your selection further to the left or above the text then ATLAS ti handles the selection as a graphic segment see Creating and Working with Graphical Quotations on page 187 Creating a free Textual or PDF Quotation Mark a section in the primary document wo Click the Create Free Quotation button see left in the HU Editor s primary document toolbar Alternatively you can right click on the selection and choose Create Free Quotation from the context menu The option is also available from the main Quotations menu text quotation PDF quotation are prominent We at World Climate Report always enjoy bringing you real world data which are so often not cong tent with the claims of the global warming advocates If you accidentally select a section for which a quotation already exists the context menu will not include the Create Free Quotation command A new entry is shown in the quotation drop down list or if opened the Quotation Manager The default name consists of the first 30 characters of the selected text Text quotation are highlighted according to the highlight color you have set in Windows The highlight color for PDF documents can be set within ATLAS ti in the PDF preferences window Extras Prererences PDF PREFERENCES Creating Quot
460. o occurence Tools Output fori Network ViCWS MM E Creating Reports with the XML Converter iii ir do ire ed ea eda dae Pa rut de e 400 NAL an INEPOCUCHON PET 400 XME vs HTML Ailittle Tech Talkin trem nr co ni ein enne emen diee o atin nated aa 401 Style Sheets n 403 Requirements X Checking MSXMbE compatibilily citar iritare recien aaea a D a dte ot ec td e PR Cr E EE iE 403 Working with Style Sheets s eto oett cin itd scar cM e E cen ecu RT de c enn D Pe RTL eX dae e ud 404 Example Sortable Table Example CSS Switche his rte eer te ttd pvc d aire e e p di e d si d des D Y Pene uk ita d 405 Exam pl i Code DO0k 5 et t cette etre ce OU Fe raa t teet ete hte i t e Ee t tin eoe hn A 406 Example All coded segments sorted by codes Creating and Modiftying Style Sheets cnet iot eme iia dr ener e ca Rl a GONMVENMTIONS RM E EAE Applying style sheets using the XML converter is Exporting an entire HU as XML Tile creer oet eene diet cce d c t ond e ete ee an da a rdg ee do va tony T Rd EXPOSITOR idad A a0t she iectocanssdgagteo bee ei ub up ee EUH epi nerit Cases A Variables ceo dte ee e ede era d eee d er ate redd re d edd co GRAUE US SPSS Syntax File Scaled vs Dichotomous Codes Naming Convention for Scaled Codes erm go epe ere itd ede d Pee nisin eir ten en e Hs pet ae dd ade ed de cer eia d 416 How SPSS Export Handles Families
461. o which objects on and off via are dropped General pped Preferences A large variety of objects from the margin area can be dropped into the margin Advanced area Furthermore objects can also be dragged from other object managers Drag amp Drop and browsers Objects can be dragged from the margin into other windows and even into foreign applications like Word In the latter case the ATLAS ti objects lose their ATLAS ti specific objectness but at least they render into something useful e g a formatted title and rich text comment Move Linked Objects When an object e g a code memo or hyperlink is dropped on a quotation bar a new link is created between the object and the quotation represented by the bar In the figure below the code historic context is unlinked from its original quotation silver bar and linked to the quotation of the target bar Replacing a 3 amp historic context code In the margin drag a code from one quotation onto Move objects per drag amp drop XX class system 3 class system T historic context another code and the target code is replaced Figure 160 Moving linked objects Replace Linked Objects When a margin object is dropped onto another margin object it is replaced It combines the operation described above with the replacement of the dropped on object Three operations are accomplished at the same time the object is removed from its original quot
462. ociated with a memo via General Preferences Multiple Selection You can select more than one memo at a time for bulk deletion to attach all selected memos to a data segment to open a network on them to create output to assign them to one or more memo families or ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 62 to create a memo family containing the selected memos Memos Epit FAMILY Drag amp Drop You can attach a memo to a data selection memoing by dragging it into the PD pane applies to text and image data Colors Memos content resides in the HU s file storage until selected for the first time Memos which are not yet loaded are displayed in gray Memos which were created or modified today are displayed bold Memo Manager Toolbar Figure 26 Memo Manager toolbar From left to right Create a new memo Toogle The windows either is display always on top default or is closed when you click somewhere else Open text pane for writing the contents of a memo in a full fledged text editor Opena network view on the selected memo Delete the memo Various View options Open the Memo Family Manager Memo Manager Columns Name Grounded Density Author Type Size Created Modified Families PDs Figure 27 Memo Manager Columns Name Memo title Grounded Number of quotations to which a memo is connected Density Number of codes and other memos to which the me
463. ocument is marked light green if an otherwise irresolvable path could be resolved via fallback redirection i e HUPATH or TBPATH Mapping a Path You need to map a path if the original path of a file on the source computer cannot be created on the target computer This is likely to be the case when a project was set up with absolute path references on a network drive that cannot be accessed by the target computer Such a conflict can be resolved by mapping the non existing path Click on the Mae Para button included in the Install Bundle window This opens the same window as explained in the section Path Mapping on page 124 Proceed as described there If you do not want to define a mapped path a second option is to Select an existing location for the HU file in the field HU Path The Always Use Fallback Paths is activated by default in the mapping tool see Redirection Fallback on page 126 for a definition If activated the following happens all such irresolvable files are unbundled in the HU s folder i e the folder where the HU HPR6 file is stored It is best to organize projects in ways that use absolute path references as rarely as possible This reduces the need to use PD Mapping Report ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL PROJECT BACKUP AND MIGRATION 135 For all files replaced during installation of a bundle a backup copy is created Status report HU will be unbundled replacing
464. ode Discard Changes Only 127 The field to the right displays the documents path name relative to the reference type You can now enter a new file name or path name Alternatively you can use the Browse button to select a new location using the previous file name Hold down the Ctrl key if you prefer a file browser to select the new file to be used If you are happy with the result close this dialog by clicking OK If a valid document was detected at the old location another dialog box asks for confirmation to move the file reference from its current location to the new location If you click Yes the file is moved and the PD s reference is updated accordingly for example if there already is a valid file in the target folder If you click If you click No the reference is changed but the file is not moved do this Cancel you are back in the Change Path dialog box You can cancel the procedure at any time by clicking the Cancel button You must save the HU to make these changes permanent Turning External into Internal Documents You may want to consider this possibility when you already work on a smaller project only containing textual documents and you do no longer want to deal with external files or if you have assigned doc or docx files and you found out too late that you cannot edit these files Turning them into internal documents creates an editable version of these files All coding done so far is transferred
465. odify the path the file name or both Furthermore the special path can be changed or an absolute path can be replaced by a special path if appropriate If you change the path for a perfectly accessible document ATLAS ti thinks that you want to move this document to a new location Change Path is the best option to do this But use caution you are changing conditions for a specific HU In case you use Change Path to move a document that is also assigned in other HUs this document will no longer be found In such multi project settings path mapping which affects ALL HUs and all of their PDs of the current user may be the preferred option In the Primary Document Manager select the PD whose reference should be changed menu If you attempt to change the path for an accessible document a Right click and select Dara Source Manacement Chance Path from the context warning will pop up 6 Change path for primary document New file name please enter complete path C Users Susanne Documents ATLAS ti data folder project x Figure 62 Change path dialog The Change Path dialog opens with the current path displayed here Absolute Click on the down arrow to change to TBPATH or HUPATH if The drop down list to the left shows the current reference type necessary ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT ve and Leave Edit Mode Save Only Discard Changes and Leave Edit M
466. often each pair of codes co occurs The cells also provide access to the data behind them see page 299 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 263 Codes Primary Documents Table This table is a cross tabulation of codes by primary documents It shows how often a code has been applied to a document see page 311 Super Codes are saved queries They can be reused e g after more coding has been done or after coding has been modified They can also be used as part of other query thus you can build complex queries step by step see page 282 Super Families Like super codes super families are saved queries based on families The purpose is to create families on an aggregate level For instance if you have your base families for age groups gender and location you can create super families that reflect a combination of these base families like all females from age group 1 living in city X see page 289 Intercoder Reliability To assess intercoder reliability for data coded in ATLAS ti you can use the web based tool CAT to calculate Cohen s kappa and Cronbach s a alpha On page 315 the functions the tool provides are explained and you find references for further resources on how to prepare ATLAS ti data for upload Tools for Visualization and Theory Building The first steps of theory building of course already take place much earlier often already during coding Ideas are developed further during the
467. ojects a little help in finding all their documents Two Ways to Adjust References Redirection Mapping paths Dynamically uses an alternate path for one many or all documents when needed Change Path Permanently changes the path reference to the document for each PD that needs it The change path option changes the external reference that is used by ATLAS ti to access a data source file permanently The redirection option in comparison creates additional alternatives leaving the original reference untouched Based on these differences the two options can be used for different purposes Use the change path option to do the following To move the data source for a PD to a different location on your computer To modify the path for a single or only a few PDs after documents have been moved To change the name of a data source file reference Use the redirection option for the following purposes ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT 123 To create alternative access routes to your data source files if the location has changed for many or all of your PDs This may occur when a system is restructured To create an alternative access route if a drive that was used to assign PDs e g Z is not available on your computer which may happen after migrating to another computer How ATLAS ti loads Primary Documents If a document cannot be found under its original reference file name and path two
468. ol retrieves the larger segment murderer description that does contain the behavioral clue But then you need to read more than you need if you are only interested in the behavioral clues If you are interested in the code alibi as reasons for having released a suspect in relation to the description of the murderer then you click reason released alibi murderer description overlaps If you want to find out about the name of the suspect related to behavioral clues you enter name of suspect reason suspected behavioral clues WITHIN ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 276 From the above example we have learned that a you begin with the codes whose content you are most interested in and b you first enter the codes and then you select an operator See is explained in more detail below in the section The Query Language Often when interested in the relation between two or more codes you don t really care whether something overlaps or is overlapped by or is within or encloses It this is the case you simply use the Co occuRE operator which is a combination of WITHIN ENCLOSES OVERLAPS OVERLAPPED BY and AND Nonetheless these very specific operators are also very useful for specific type of data Think of video data where it might be important wether action A was already going on before action B started or vice versa Or if you have coded longer section in your data like biographical time
469. om 3 the police files not long after the investigation ended Most people believe it was kept as a souvenir by one of the investigating officers It was returned anonymously to the Metropolitan Police in 1988 presumably by family members of the officer who had 38 Jack the Ripper_legend investigation_doubts ES investigation_stolen evidence 38 Jack the Ripper_legend RQ1 Suspects who might have been Jack the Ripper Figure 115 Text with switched on margin area The size of the margin area can be changed by dragging the split bar between the primary document pane and the margin area with the left mouse button Coding creates quotations for selected data sections if needed Coding results in codes linked to quotations Any number of codes may be assigned to a quotation and vice versa a code may refer to any number of quotations Coding implicitly creates quotations for data segments that do not already match an existing quotation You may activate the basic coding procedures either in the primary document toolbar the Copinc submenu of the Copes menu the Code Manager or the context menu of the data selection The coding options in the primary document toolbar Oren Copine CrrL SHiFT O Create a new code ask user for name of code Cope In Vivo Crri SHirt V 3 Creates a code from the selected text Cope ey List CrrL SHiFT L l o Selects existing codes from code list ATLA
470. on When increasing the size of the quotation you can simply highlight the text that you want If you want to reduce the size of the quotation you need to deselect the selection first by clicking somewhere above or below the highlighted area Then select a smaller section When resizing PDF quotations you can conveniently use the handles at the upper left and lower right hand corners Click the modify button located to the left of the text window or choose Mooiry Bounbartes from the main Quotations menu The quotation will be changed reflecting the new boundaries New boundaries match existing quotation A If the new boundaries match another existing quotation you are asked for confirmation to merge the currently modified and the already existing quotation The quotation resulting from the merge operation collects the references of both quotations For example if the modified quotation was coded with code A and the existing quotation with matching boundaries with code B the new quotation will be referenced by both code A and B If you modify a previously renamed text quotation you are asked for confirmation using the newly selected string truncated as its new name ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 187 Deleting Textual and PDF Quotations Quotations can be deleted Of course nothing is removed from the primary document s data source Deleting a quotation affects only its references Free qu
471. on may be used in combination with a GREP search The Auto Coding Tool Auto Coding Text Search Automatic Segmentation Coding The Auto Coding tool finds text passages selects a specified amount of text e g the exact match or spread to the surrounding word sentence or paragraph and then codes the passages with a previously selected code Auto coding is useful when coding structural information like speaker turns in group interviews or other sections that can easily be identified by a text search Auto coding allows you to quickly collect ideas that belong to a certain concept on the basis of words or patterns found in the text Concepts The Auto Coding Dialog The Auto Coding tool combines the Text Search tool with an automatic segmentation and code assignment mechanism To open the Auto Coding Dialog select Copes Copinc AuroCopiwc from the main menu ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 232 The New Code button allows you to create codes on the fly 6 AJ Auto Coding Dialog Select Code speaker 1 0 0 y NewCode Enter or select Search Expression E Case Sensitive ARTIFICIALLIGHT lamp lantern candle a V Use GREP CLOSERELATIVE father mother brother child COLORS green red blue yellow brown pink mi _ DAV 2 rlavi ninht nnanleueninnImnrnina E Confirm always Scope of Search Selected PD All current PDs S
472. onditions that a ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 269 quotation must meet to be retrieved e g all quotations coded with both codes A and B By selecting codes or code families and operators a query can be built incrementally which is instantaneously evaluated and displayed as a list of quotations This incremental building of complex search queries gives you an exploratory approach toward even the most complex queries The Query Tool Window i The Query Tool is launched by clicking the Query Tool button see left by i padl choosing Copes Ourrur Query Toot or Toots Query Toor from the HU Editor s main menu r x A ATLAS ti Query Tool LE X Families Query JCs 23 CRecalc undo Redo amp 3 Investigation 6 3 Letter 6 E 3 Modus operandi 5 2 4 amp 3 Murder 8 term stack pane amp i date of murder 13 0 5 a feedback pane Z historic context 4 0 3 Z name of suspect 28 0 Z name of suspect Cohen 6 6 Y name of suspect Feigenbaum 1 1 T amp i name of suspect Kaminski 3 0 x output view save or name of suspect Kelly 1 0 z F pri nt reports Es name of suspect Kosmiski 8 2 i Sti x name of victim 14 4 Z INVESTIGATION 4 0 investigation doubts 12 0 Yi investigation stolen evidence 4 0 Y amp investigation suspected by whom amp investigation theories
473. ons expanding those displays codes memos and other associated quotations Expanding the Codes branch displays all codes and their connections to other codes Following the code names the semantic relation connecting the code with its parent code is shown Each code appears at least once This means that all codes are listed directly under the Codes branch but may also appear further down in the hierarchy if they are connected to other codes The order in the hierarchy is determined by the kind of relation you have used If a directed i e a transitive relation like the is part of relation was applied codes are displayed hierarchically the target code becomes the higher order code and the source code s the lower order code s amp X amp i name of suspect Cohen 6 6 amp i murderer motive 1 1 why suspected amp i reason suspected behavioral clues 5 1 why suspected amp reason suspected could have been there 15 2 why suspected amp reason suspected fitting the profile 14 1 why suspected X reason suspected killed others 13 1 why suspected Figure 287 Display of codes that are linked via transitive relations When using symmetric relations the codes appear in at least two places since the direction causal relation cannot be determined 3 K name of victim 14 4 E modus operandi cut throat 7 2 is associated with x modus operandi mutilation 8 2 is associated with
474. oogle Earth quotations This sam n be 23 3 Eiffel tower Paris The Eiffel Tower is a puddle iron lattice tower located on the Champ de Mars in Paris Built in 1889 it has become both a global icon of France and one of the most recognizable structures in the world The tower is the tallest building in Paris 10 and the most visited paid monument in the world millions of people ascend it every year Named for its designer engineer Gustave Eiffel the tower was built as the entrance arch to the 1889 World s Fair to e steps a MI P23 Google Earth Ma 23 1 Hamburg Germany IQ 23 2 London Eye GB IQ 23 3 Eiffel tower Paris e Eiffel T isa puddle iron led on the C d in PalaglBuilt in 1889 it has Quotation 23 3 in PD P23 Google Earth Codes 0 none Memos 0 none Figure 113 Display of quotation comments in GE Modifying Google Earth quotations A To modify a quotation select it in the Quotation Manager F Double click on a new location where it should be moved to Select the revise quotation button from the vertical tool bar Or select Quorariows Mopiry Bounpartes from the main menu Deleting Google Earth quotations Select the GE quotation in the Quotation Manager right click and choose the min option Detete Alternatively click on the delete button Or select the quotation in the Object Explorer right click and select Detete Moving Around By default traveling to
475. oogle Earth quotatlons cese Pepe e ne itu pecie ed Rte d p te e ER e ER e EXER UM T ATE tA del ra e CURES Unlinking codes Describing GE quotations to Improve OUtpUls icai nter iie treten ce dr i i f c ed lr n e p e Ed acie Red 214 More Goding Related Functions torie test ee dide nhe eere dae pi e po su eee e tech 215 Free cM C 215 Why Create Free Codes s eade eder ntt dire de a nena NN 215 Creating a Free Gods EE 215 Importing Codes ter erem e ere ort tat data dede e annee navn gavin tater aed Atel t I PE Hd ee cA PR Ze aa eds 215 Creating Free Codes via the Batch Method 215 Transferring Codes from Other Projects 216 Avoiding Name Clashes when Importing Code Lists ee reer arca rene tret inneren Renaming and Deleting a Code s To Rename a Code Deleting Codes To delete Code ident remet dieser a cedi is etnia eed eda d e dung spies ag il ca Red ed a Pene BR aed Pee Unlinking Gon M To unlink several codes from a quotation To unlink a single code from a quotation i ii cea cic fedes ide iia cr id edenda dd ale edis MA c TET Merging Codes Using the List Method Merging odes ima Network Vii A e i t i ecc i e d ee bc n cela Suggestions for structuring the SO CODES 2 rst RI fel e i D a EEEE EESE eR RR Ie Adding structu
476. ook http facebook atlasti com Stay updated with the latest news on product updates special offers new training materials etc by joining us on Facebook We are also happy to hear from users via facebook Stop by and let us know about your projects and experience with ATLAS ti Twitter http twitter atlasti com ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL APPENDIX 431 Follow us on Twitter for the most essential bits of information and announcements version and service pack releases special offers training opportunities etc Newsroom http newsroom atlasti com The newsroom aggregates all pertinent company news conveniently on a single platform Press releases articles and comments from the various ATLAS ti profiles on social networking sites are agglomerated in real time In addition the newsroom lets you subscribe to available content via RSS so you re always up to date on what s going on with ATLAS ti The Help Menu You can access a number of resources via the ATLAS ti Help menu Hei ATLAS ti Help Quick Tour gt Open WelcomeWiz Tip of the Day Check for Updates Now Live Update Settings Open Manual About ATLAS ti Open Manual Addendum A6 Stuff New Features in A6 2 Stuff ATLAS ti Web Site ATLAS ti Registration The ATLAS ti Forum The MailingList Archive Contact Support The Download Site Update History Visit FAQ Check Workshops The Coding Analysis Toolkit Check MSXML Figure 330 Accessing res
477. ord Cruncher ceninge t nct de ette e poteet decente e erc t rege eet adt se e e ete ek tog ter Peta rre beste iva 264 Creating a Word Frequency Report come prctio de dnt dsl EETA edle cai odd canines cena da eed eran de 264 The stoplist T Working with the stop list Query TOO estet ttu eL vt ote NU d co P a DO uM E a Th Query Tool WiINdOW 5 Brees tea red ete cer tee eu c A toc esent a T e ctt dei sonar et Re dn 269 enc Basic Operands Complex Operands Ori REC UE Boolean Operators Semantic Operators ers cne TL 274 Embedding Operators Overlap Operators 274 Adjacency Operators 1 276 Adjacency Setting ncc maie to n E RHET OH e RD LO CERE ia 276 Th Co occurrence Operator RR n 277 The Query Language Operands First Operators Next An Arithimetic Example rin oerte tme et mero Cnr aser rr e e pede re eee d DAR ESE R AG atts Creating a Query with the Query Tool iei A Boolean QUE CM EA E aTa R E AEE VE AE EEEa a EAE EE E O T a a aS Output of Query Results 2 iA sace n eee cotone ed re RE E NENEA ENTE E AE ARAE R a Cont EEE Viewing results in context Creating a Report Cleaning up the Hit List re adc M M iin ede hiranas Creatina SUDE COC CS sre 6m con co do el le eae cade d occa uA cM EN Editing a super code Auto Optimization of Super Code Queries
478. ore on the Conflict Color Code below Size the total of the file sizes of the document file and its optional auxiliary files Last modification date Document type El No conflict detected Possible target conflicts are indicated by the colored square in the Use column Existing file can be overwritten E Version conflict detected Green is on for every document that can be installed without overwriting an existing version Yellow A compatible file was detected replacing this file does not harm the integrity of the HU Other HUs accessing this document will be synchronized when needed If you unpack a document with this magenta marker other HUs with references to it may no longer be able to access it Such documents will not be extracted in Migrate mode You can however include these documents in Restore mode ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL PROJECT BACKUP AND MIGRATION 134 li Path cannot be created j Red If a path does not exist on the target computer it is created when installing the bundle file if possible However not every path can be created If you install a bundle on your personal computer and a Z drive is required ATLAS ti can not create this drive on your computer If you see a red box you either need to change the location for the HU file in the HU Path field see above or you need to map the path see below for further information E Fallback path used j A d
479. ose slaec over it EDUCATION w THREATS emotions pit Rashe ia age ligeria Figure 126 Coding text within a column of a PDF document Coding Image documents Load an image document and select a rectangular area Proceed to code it as has been described for text segments To change the display type right click on the image quotation and select the option SeLecrion DispLaY TyPe INVERTED AREA Figure 127 Inverted display for quotations ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 210 Coding audio and video documents Coding audio and video files involves two steps First a quotation needs to be created and only then can you can link a code to it Step 1 Create an audio or video quotation Load an audio or video document In addition to the Code Manager open the Quotation Manager Re size the two windows so they fit next to each other Move the time line to a convenient position and expand it so it covers the full length of the screen Set a filter to the currently selected document so that the Quotation Manager only shows the quotes of the video you are working on From the main menu select Quotations Fitter Setectep PD The drop down list and manager show a pale yellow color indicating that a filter is set E a Q Jack the Ripper stage I 62 ATLAS 4 ES File Edit Documents Quotations Codes Memos Networks Views Tools Extras A Docs Windows Help 98Hj 4 A z u a o V di
480. otation In the Quotation Manager all selected quotations are printed All Quotations Prints all current quotations If any of the quotations have a comment you are asked if these are to be included in the printout All Quotations List Prints all current quotations in a compact format including only the quotations ID and display name This is a suitable option for audio video image and GoogleEarth documents when you have renamed the quotations to serve as title By default the quotation name has only 30 characters You can increase it in the General Preferences Window in the field List name size for quotes If you do this after the quotations have already been created you need to update all names via the option Quotations Miscettaneous Uppate Names r Q9 List of current quotations 21 Quotation Filter All File Edit Format Insert Help ars 11 B List of current quotations 21 Quotation Filter All HU Jackthe Ripper stage II 62 File CAProgramData Scientific Software ATLASti CommonDocumen Jack the Ripper stage II 62 hpr6 Edited by team Date Time 2011 09 14 20 48 02 7 1 Hanbury Street 29 in 1967 0 00 15 32 gt 7 2 the two entrances 6 96 3 24 7 3 The swinging door 23 50 3 70 lt gt 7 4 The wooden shed 31 47 6 34 lt gt 7 5 The swinging door and wooden fence 38 50 9 91 77 7 Place where Chapman was found 50 25 4 16 lt 7 8 Comment a
481. otations are deleted silently However if references to codes quotations or memos exist you are prompted for confirmation The option to delete quotations is available in a number of different places the main menu the Quotation Manager Quotations Detete the Object Explorer and the margin area To delete a quotation in the margin area right click on the quotation bar and select the option DeLere Deleting Quotation s in the Quotation Manager nia F Select the quotation s in question F Click the Remove button If references exist for the quotation confirm or reject the deletion process All quotations of a primary document are deleted when the primary document is disconnected from the Hermeneutic Unit Creating and Working with Graphical Quotations Creating Graphical Quotations Selecting graphical segments differs from the operations required for selecting segments within textual documents However the overall look and feel is sufficiently similar Move the mouse pointer to the upper left corner of the rectangular section that you are going to create Drag holding down the left mouse button the mouse to the lower right corner of the rectangle Release the mouse button You have now created a selection and the rectangle will be highlighted ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 188 Graphical quotations in a document appear as rectangles The selected quotation is emphasi
482. ources via the Help menu The options provided via the More Resources sub menu may change over time reflecting the up to date status on documentations available So it may be worthwhile to check this menu from time to time All options present links to internet web sites Thus you need to be online to access these resources Apart from the Coding Analyis Toolkit CAT all other options are self explanatory Therefore you find a brief introduction to CAT below on page Error Reference source not found ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL APPENDIX 432 Getting Support http support atlasti com The easiest way to contact the Support Center is via the main menu option Ha Mont Resources Contact Support Or access the Support Center directly via the above URL From the categories provided select the appropriate option so your request can be processed as quickly as possible Pricing and Licensing Orders Ordering Student Licenses Reseller Issues Bug System Report Newsletter Social Media Submissions and Applications Product Support Figure 331 List of support channels Frequently Asked Questions Frequently asked questions are collected in our knowledge base on our website To access the site directly from ATLAS ti select Herp More Resources Visir FAQ from the HU editor s main menu An active Internet connection is required to access this web page Forum http forum atlasti com ATLAS ti maintains va
483. out nuclear power plants after the accident in Fukushima Japan in the spring of 2011 You have codes like fear worries belief in technology change of focus towards renewable energies no change indifference The Codes Primary Documents Table can provide an overview of how often these codes have been applied to the various groups of documents see figure ref below ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 312 beliefin change of fear worries technology focus nochange indifference TOTALS P1 female location A 1 2 1 2 1 0 7 P2 female location A 0 1 3 1 1 0 4 P3 female location A 2 0 0 0 0 0 2 P4 female location A 0 0 al 0 0 al 2z P5 female location A 0 3 0 3 0 0 6 P6 male location A P7 male location A P8 male location A P9 male location A P10 male location A woonmwN ooorF orPNO FF oroor orRORR oro Ww ANANI P11 female location B P12 female location B P13 female location B P14 female location B P15 female location B orooo 200 omoro o 0 CONNOR worrRN wua eu P16 male location B 0 1 1 1 2 1 6 P17 male location B 0 1 1 T 1 0 4 P18 male location B 0 0 2 0 0 2 4 P19 male location B 1 1 0 1 0 1 4 P20 male location B 0 0 1 0 3 0 4 Figure 217 A possible outcome of creating Codes Primary Document tables for various PD families In order to create such a table you need four Super PD Families see Super Families on page 289 based on the four base families for gend
484. output target dialog select Fite Confirm the default name or enter a new file name and save the file to disk To export a list of selected codes ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT 421 Open the Code Manager and select one or more codes l Choose Export SeLecteo Copes XML from the Code Manager s MiscrLLANEOUS menu In the output target dialog select Fite Confirm the default name or enter a new file name and save the file to disk Importing Codes When you import codes in XML format additional information like the date of creation and modification the author and code comments in plain text only are also imported This is how you do it F Select Copes Miscettancous Import Copes XML from the main menu A file dialog window opens Select the XML file that you previously created and click the Oren button The code list including all comments is immediately imported and displayed in the Code Manager If conflicts occur you receive a warning and have the option to overwrite only the code for which a conflict was detected or all codes f Code Import Conflict with existing code date of murder Overwrite this code gt Overwrite ALL codes Cancel Figure 323 Options to resolve conficts when importing XML codes Code colors are not preserved in the XML file Thus if you import codes and their comments via the XML option you loose the coloring Exporting and Im
485. owever we strongly advise against making use of such multi mappings As we have already pointed out chances of accessing a wrong document with the same name increase with multiple alternatives To enter a path to be mapped Into the From entry field on the left side of the Path Map Editor type in either the full path select a path from the drop down list or click on the file browser symbol Generally useful options non accessible paths used in the current HU are already offered in the drop down list Once a path is entered or selected click on the Add Path button The path will be added to the list of currently mapped paths Now enter or choose from the drop down a replacement path into the To field on the right side of the Path Map Editor in the same fashion ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT 126 F Click on the Add Path button Repeat steps 3 to 6 for every path to be mapped Press Apply or Apply amp Close to store and activate the new mapping s Redirection Fallback A fallback path is used when a mapping does not exist or a valid path cannot be found In addition the fallback option must be switched on in the Path Map Editor The HUPATH is searched first and if the document cannot be found it looks into the TBPATH Change Paths for one PD at a time Using the Change Path option you can modify the reference of a single PD in a specific HU to its data source You can m
486. ows file functions Data protection If sensitive documents are part of the HU they are stored securely within the HU file Since this file is highly compressed the documents become fairly unreadable outside ATLAS ti Unauthorized access within ATLAS ti can be prevented by a password protecting the HU Drawbacks Increased loading and storage times and an increased demand for computer memory as the HU gets larger When using this setup for a team project the embedded documents should not be modified after the MASTER HU has been distributed to all team members ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT 121 Modifying the Project Setup Optimizing Paths In case you read the instructions on the HUPATH setup too late or you want to optimize the setup of an already existing project it is possible to turn absolute path references into special path references The option Optimize Paths does two things at the same time Translates a path into the HU or TBPATH if possible As both options are more flexible than an absolute path reference Replaces an invalid path that was redirected with its mapped path making this redirection obsolete Data sources Only those PDs with accessible data sources are included in the path must be optimization accessible for PEE a the Optimize Optimize Path can be applied to all or a selection of PDs If you select the Path procedure option Documents Data Source MA
487. page 287 Creating and working with super families see page 289 The Co occurence Table Explorer see page 300 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 104 Tell us a dream Open End Now how do make a que open ended This is a lengthy response to a ques answers 2 le EUA Open End 2 0 XX Tell us a dream 2 0 3 Open End 2 0 Tell us a dream 2 0 GELT SEES Now how do I make a question be interpreted as open ended aug Figure 51 The open ended questions are precoded and a code family for all survey items is created ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA MANAGEMENT IN ATLAS TI 105 Data Management in ATLAS ti The ATLAS ti Referencing Model The content of a file is not embedded but referenced via its path and name This connection must stay intact If it is not you are about to ask the most frequently asked question Where is my PD An HU or more precisely its PDs accesses documents via reference e g file name and paths Once a data source has been assigned to an HU it is mandatory that during the course of a project it always accesses this same document and not a different one The main consequence of an architecture made up of referenced files is that those files must always be at their original locations when you or your project need them Otherwise the files are not found creating a broken link However you do have the
488. parts of the network to the clipboard and then paste it into another application When pasting you need to select the paste special option in order to paste the network view as image If you select just the paste option the network view is pasted in text form This is the equivalent to the code hierarchy output see page 396 above Creating Reports with the XML Converter XML an Introduction XML the eXtensible Markup Language is a powerful standard for information exchange between applications and has been used by ATLAS ti since release 4 2 XML is increasingly used in any information technology related domains the mobile phone web language WAP transcripts created by open source transcription tool Transcriber and Microsoft Office all use or are based on XML In case you don t know what XML is the short explanation is that XML similar to HTML is a document markup language ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 401 XML concentrates on structuring information Structured information contains both content actual words pictures etc plus typically some indication of what role that content plays for example text content inside a heading has a different meaning from content in a footnote content in a figure caption differs from content in a database table etc Almost all documents have some structure and a markup language is a mechanism to identify this structure in a document The XML specification
489. pdating their references in EVERY referencing HU In other words if you move a document inform all HUs that use this document about its new address Editing the contents of documents used by any HU must always be done from within ATLAS ti Consequences of Accessing PDs via References The use of references offers flexibility and economy in handling large numbers of large sized documents and allows teams to work on shared data sources concurrently Below it is explained what it means to access documents via external references As we have discussed coding work on PDs does not affect the data source A quotation created during the process of coding is nothing but a reference including the file s path and name and the start and end position of the selection The quotations themselves are part of the HU and will always be displayed in the list To remind you the quotation is the ID the name by default consisting of the first 30 characters of a textual quotation or the file name if you work with other media types a reference via which you can access the content If the file to which the references refers to is not found when activating the quotation its content cannot be shown f you move files that you have assigned to an HU to another location something you should normally not do you need to update the references inside the HU see Modifying the Project Setup page 121 n order to copy all files that belong to a pro
490. porting Memos in XML Exporting Memos You can export selected memos or all memos To export all memos Choose Copes Miscettaneous Export Memos XML from the main menu ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT 422 In the output target dialog select File Confirm the default name or enter a new file name and save the file to disk To export one or more selected memos Open the Memo Manager and select one or more memo s Choose Export SeLecreD Memos XML from the Memo Manager s MisceLLANEOUS menu Select Fite as the output destination Confirm the default name or enter a new file name and save the file to disk Importing Memos I Select Memos MisctLLANEOUS Import Memos XML from the main menu A file dialog window opens Select the XML file and click the Oren button If a naming conflict occurs you can choose to overwrite all memos to NOT overwrite the memo for which a conflict was detected or to never overwrite an existing memo r Memo Import iQ Conflict with existing memo name Code memo Overwrite this memo Overwrite ALL memos Do NOT overwrite this memo Do not overwrite any existing memo Cancel Figure 324 Options to resolve a conflict when importing XML memos Exporting the Hermeneutic Unit in XML Instead of just exporting a small selected part of your project you can also export the entire HU as an XML file You may exclude primary documents
491. pproach makes sense not only for teamwork but is also feasible for a solitary researcher working on individual aspects of a problem See Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 171 for further details on her to merge projects Before splitting a project it is best to first create a Master version which already either contains or references all commonly used resources like documents and codes For details see the scenarios below From the Master project version a number of copies can be created to distribute to team members in a teamwork setting Merging HUS later requires a certain discipline with respect to the Master version For instance PDs must not be rearranged or they won t match in the merging process Scenario 1 recommended Working with One Project Folder for Single Users and Teams All data files related to your project and your HU will be stored in the same folder hierarchy Example You work on your own on a single project at one computer desktop or laptop Your project contains different media types like RTF and PDF files If you only have text files consider scenario 3 working with internal files see Scenario 3 Working with One Project File for projects that use text files exclusively on page 118 Project Set up Create a new folder for your project Copy all documents to be used by your project into this folder and use sub folders if you desire an added degree of structure Open ATLAS ti and as
492. preferred layout direction affects the layout of a network when ATLAS ti automatically arranges the nodes See Layout Procedures on page 340 Link vs Relation It is important to understand the difference between a relation or a link type and the link itself There is only one is part of relation but potentially many links using it In the Network View below the relation consequence is used only once while the relation strategy is used four times Another way to think of links and relations is to view links as instances of relations Links are well informed about the characteristics of relations which define their styles If a characteristic of a relation is changed e g line width color symbol these changes are propagated to all links using it PAIN consequence t temporary relief strategy strategy la strategy 4 Reading a book Splint leg i Taking pills Figure 227 Four links using two relations strategy and consequence The Role of Relations It is useful to understand the role that relations play in the construction of a theory The concepts codes that are linked using relations represent aspects of the problem domain under investigation On the other hand the relations used to link these domain concepts are part of the methodology used to analyze the phenomena As important epistemological tools they constitute the main questions that guide the development of a model or a theory The
493. process of querying the data By asking specific questions you gain more and more insights and start to see how things are related Memo writing is an essential accompanying activity as well T The network view function offers further possibilities to explore your data and to visualize your ideas and findings In a network view editor you can link all objects to each other Code code and quotation quotation links can also be named and commented Further a number of graphical elements like colored links the line width the node or background color can be set Image documents can be used as thumbnails see page 318 Another function discussed below is the creation of hypertext This is a network based on quotations thus you work on the data rather than on the more abstract coding level Through hypertext the original sequentiality of your data is de linearized broken down into pieces that are then reconnected making it possible to traverse from one piece of data to another piece of data regardless of their original positions see page 360 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 264 The Word Cruncher This feature offers word crunching capabilities for a simple quantitative content analysis It creates a list of word frequency counts for the selected or all currently filtered textual PDs A stop list and a list of ignorable characters can be used to control the analysis Creating a Word Frequency Repo
494. providing step by step instructions You will learn how to manage your data how to set up and start a project and how to prepare and edit documents After a project is set up the basic functions like coding text search auto coding writing memos etc become relevant Conceptual level functions like the Network Editor the Query Tool and Co occurence Explorer build on the data level work at least in most cases and are therefore described last The chapter Resources on page 429 offers some useful advice on how to get support and where to find further information on the software How to Use This Manual This manual is predominantly intended for ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL ABOUT THIS MANUAL 19 Those who have no prior knowledge of ATLAS ti Those who have worked with the previous version ATLAS ti 5 There is no need for users with prior knowledge to read through the entire manual However we highly recommend that they still read the following sections chapters Preparing Primary Documents page 71ff Working with Internal Documents for smaller projects containing only text files on page 40 Data Transcription on page 90 Working with Associated Documents on page 97 Data Management in ATLAS ti page 105ff Setting Up a New Project page 112ff Preparing Google Earth Documents page 76ff and Importing Survey Data on page 99 ff in case this is of interest to you Suggestions for structuri
495. ption Export HU ro XML or form the main menu select Toots XML Export HU ro XML or Extras Export to XML Select the amount of content that is needed excluding primary documents including meta information or including full content of quotations as well Select the output destinatino Editor Printer File or File amp Run see Output Destinations on page 391 If you select the File or File amp Run option enter a file name or accept the default name and select the folder where to store the XML file If you do not want to apply style sheets i e you need the output for archiving purposes or want to import your project into another applicatin you can save the resulting XML file to any location If you want to apply style sheets save the XML file in the suggested location the ATLAS ti XML folder ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT 413 Export amp Import SPSS Export The case for cases ATLAS ti exports quotations as cases You can use SPSS features to use primary documents as cases This chapter describes procedures to export import data and structures between ATLAS ti and other software The export procedures introduced in this chapter are not always clearly distinguishable from the chapter Generating Output on page 390 While the output options are generally display and print oriented export of the HU or parts thereof allows for analysis of data and structures cr
496. r 348 Drag Drop 375 Drag text from Wold seo eate ee tede ca cce E eh EEA E ed d Hire e pr Fendt einn E ada dn E tvi cil ut td dre G 328 Edit Flyperlinle ue reo dope rone encontrar abr e a hd c bli en ta Ets uic nt n doi EC ia Aaa 371 Import neighbors Eh DISPLAY ce sexta cna ape a Link nodes ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL INDEX 442 APPO Aran ss E 350 PO icut te a tors oco t np Ped E se atirss ce re ad aids osse vette aetna da dens x lordo Edda del forgot 327 nj O 338 pending changes e M 69 save as graphic Traverse Hyperlinks reed rend ta epo tng er itr medina set A ANO 369 Network View Mam a TRENT EN 327 338 378 NAUTAE ADM as contents table ag cru PTT nest eneseas I CT T Node types pali T Mero i NO 54 Quotations kis Selecting MEMS C EE 52 Order HOMES ESPRIT TTE TNR Parallel search Plain Text Preferences Primary eere rq ica nets Caching re Charige Position n cin rm o eer d d et E n E CO PL d ines LR CE Rn E aa aa PR FUE HE ahaa niin EE EE ay RR LA PERRA 82 DISCOFIIIG CES ee iret ceteras ssec rece m terco icon telat las MM TAPA P ADDE TE PUPA DM p
497. r needs You can customize the default values used for memo title and type via Extras PREFERENCES GENERAL PREFERENCES TAB Memos Attach a memo to a data segment Select the part of the primary document to which you want to attach the memo Select a memo in the Memo Manager and drag and drop the memo to the highlighted data segment or right click on the memo and select the option AttacH Memo ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH MEMOS 257 Attach a memo to multiple quotations One option is to drag a number of quotations from the Quotation Manager onto a memo in the Memo Manager By using the Quotation Manager one can comfortably browse and review display quotations before attaching them to the memo Another option is to select from a list of quotations In the Memo Manager select a memo Choose menu option Link Memo to Quorations from the context menu or the Memos menu A window pops up showing all quotations that are currently not linked to this memo Select the quotations to be associated with this memo Click OK As a third option you can connect a memo and quotations visually by using the Network Editor see To link more than two nodes on page 331 Memo Types Memos can be organized sorted and filtered by the type attribute Several standard memo types are offered by ATLAS ti currently commentary method and theory You can add new types or modify existing ones Memo types may either hav
498. r 1 if degree of fear 2 eq 1 degr of fear 2 if degree of fear 3 eq 1 degr of fear 3 etc You are not restricted to numerical values anything that follows the special symbol is interpreted as a value The width reserved in the Data List statement of the syntax file is the maximum width of the largest of all values collected for a variable code Name Christine Name Thomas Name SHal The variable code Name will have three values Christine Thomas and Hal The width reserved in the data list statement will be 9 determined by the maximum width value Christine A comment linked to such codes could be used as an explanation of the values to instruct researchers in coding the material ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT Do not assign mutually exclusive codes to the same quotation 417 Keep in mind that ordinal codes only have meaning in the context of being used by SPSS Within ATLAS ti the differently valued codes are treated like every other code dichotomously Horror 1 7 1 X Horror 2 6 1 3 amp Horror 963 5 1 amp Horror 4 10 1 3 amp Horror 965 7 1 Figure 319 Example of a scaled variable Check The Sample hpr6 for an application of an ordinal code You find the file in the samples folder which you can access via Extras ExPLORER Samptes FOLDER The name of the code is Horror split into Horror 1 to Horror 5 Do not assign more than one scaled variab
499. r common understanding of what a a particular code means and how it should be applied ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 317 Previous Next Change Code Filter Code s investigation_doubts Family Investigation Initially it was considered a hoax but when Eddowes was found three days after the letter s postmark with one ear partially cut off the letter s promise to dip the ladys sic ears off gained attention Valid G NotValid 856 annotations left to validate for this dataset Filename 1 Jack the Ripper Letters rtf Paragraph 16 16 Figure 223 Validation process Checking for differences Further resources You find detailed tutorials on the CAT website Quick start guide http cat ucsur pitt edu CAT_quickstart_final pdf Instructions for preparing ATLAS ti data for upload http cat ucsur pitt edu uploadinstructions aspx Video tutorial for preparing ATLAS ti for upload http www screencast com users stustu12 folders Default media ffea5d5 4 2487 4535 9f79 71421910ec14 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 318 Network Views Networks are more than just graphics The word network is an ubiquitous and powerful metaphor found in many different fields of research and application Flow charts in project planning text graphs in hypertext systems cognitive models of memory and knowledge representation se
500. r hyperlinks and quotations in the network view editor 369 To import the neighbors of a quotation tarn tecta cec t i a i n cr a HE ERR P DE E E n c Editing Hyperlink Comments sees To edit a hypertext link comment using the margin area To edit a hypertext link comment using the Hyperlink Manag r oonnnicninnnnnninninnnconnnncncnnanaci nana corran nana crac 370 To edit a hypertext link comment using the Network Editor 371 The Hyper Link Manager aic eint eode D isa st ea dee nre Ne p edere d ER E c IRE e PE tds 371 Creating new Relations for Hyperlihnks a rtr ttt tee o ge bcd et de reet ato ia 372 Special Tools eo tto e scm utet uU Sale M MC AE The Object Crawle t n oS oe cae eA ME LE A E How To Use the Crawler ct ttti m cete ette P ae e caca ead EO HO E RO Dd C a TR a Te ub E t Ecce tines The ODJecEEXplOIers i ern diti tiet dst td liarla cesses duis life Using the Object Explorer sa n tcr trece n ten Let bene dta ere ee e nd d at P re e e cesi tete era dud dads Expanding and Collapsing Branches AAA ER Using the Object Explorer for CodillB rettet ere rect qa ine PY HR AE Hite reed E dre pap EA Euskera TA 379 Renaming Objects Context menus of objects Displaying and Editing Comments The View Menu Code Trees E Eresin tb ut COT OR LH FERTILITY HEU aetna TDI HU DeL AD Redundant Coding Analyze kusiti
501. r merges all sub projects Merging Hermeneutic Units The Merge Tool reunites HU s that were originally divided for analytical or economical reasons Its main purpose is the support of teams It links together the contributions of different members of a research team A common scenario is the analysis of different sets of documents by different team members sharing a common code base Of course the single researcher can also benefit from this function using the merge facility to help organize large projects Examples of Application Text Corpus Reuse With only PDs to add and everything else IGNORED you can transfer all documents from any HU into a freshly created or already existing HU The PD comments and any existing quotations are also transferred Theory Import With only codes networks and code families selected a theory can also be migrated to another HU This is similar to the current Import Networks feature but also migrates Network Views and code families Team Work Add codes unify PDs This would be the strategy when the same set of PDs is utilized by different team members using different codes Unify codes add PDs Different PDs were distributed to team members using the same set of codes or mainly the same set of codes Codes that are different from the common set are not lost but added ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT Two PDs are considered equal for unification when three con
502. r merging Tasks of team members after merging Copy the new Master HU from the shared drive or the new Master file is sent to you by the project administrator Store the new Master HU file in your local project folder Rename the new Master HU file by adding your name or initials to the file name Continue to work on the project ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 169 GJ Project ABC August 25 2011 Mary hpr Figure 92 Project file of a team member after merging If documents are edited The project administrator needs to install the various copy bundle files sent or uploaded by the team members It is best to install all bundle files into a new project folder Add the date to the name of the new folder so that is clear to everyone which is the newest version of the project The old project folder can be moved to a backup folder In the Copy Bundle Install window the HU Path needs to be set to the location of the new project folder see figure before installing the bundle files Select Migrate a s unbundling strategy as then ATLAS ti controls that older files are only overwritten if a newer version exists After installing all copy bundle files the new project folder will contain all HU files of the team members all documents plus a log file for each modified document see Creation of Log files on page 139 The project administrator can now begin with the merge process or can first
503. r of Miriam Angel amp Event August 22th 1887 SEPTEMBER 1887 Michael Ostrog sent into Surrey Pauper Lunafic Asylum suffering from mania on September 30th 1887 Figure 73 Coding embedded objects as compared to inserted text The margin shows several codes for the Rich Text version and only one code for the object version below Editing Embedded Objects To edit an embedded or linked object Enter Edit mode Double click the object or right click on the object and select lt Opsect name gt Object Enit or Ogiecr name gt ObjecT Open from the context menu ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EDITING PRIMARY DOCUMENTS Objects can be activated and edited without the PD being in edit mode Such changes are not permanent 145 Idiosyncrasies Activating an embedded object is possible even when the embedding PD is not currently in edit mode For example you may want to play a video or recalculate a range of cells without making such changes permanent If you want to make changes and preserve the changes applied to an object in the ATLAS ti HU you need to enter edit mode before editing the object After deactivating an active object by clicking outside its border you might find that the object has reverted to its original size Resizing an object can only be done by grabbing its selection frame at any resize handle except those located on the frame s right border To get enough space to the left you might want to c
504. r to accomplish this visit chapter To export the code network on page 352 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS S Code Link Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage Il 62 Link Management 344 The Code Link and the Hyper Link Managers see page 371 offer a very efficient way to review and edit first class links code code links and quotation quotation link also referred to as hyperlinks Links can be edited flipped and removed and a Network Editor can be opened on selected links e g all nodes affected A comment can be viewed and edited for the selected link Last but not least and typical for all Object Managers links can be sorted by criteria such as the target or source object the relation used etc Changes made to the links are immediately displayed in any Network Editor that currently display the links The Link Managers The two figures below show a Code Link Manager and a Network View opened on two selected links In the left figure the two links are selected and Flip Link from the context menu is selected The right figure displays the effect lola Miscellaneous View Source Sb murderer_motive be reason released alibi reason released alive long after killing stopp gt 5 reason released lack of evidence Sb reason released mix up of names Sb reason released mix up of names reason released never taken seriously b reason
505. re a way to aggregate some of the data see How SPSS Export Handles Families on page 417 Use PD Family PD Family tables are an efficient means to create families and to assign PDs to tables to assign their respective families You can also use them to assign PDs and to generate PDs and variables in one step variables at the same time PD Family Table PD Family Tables can be exported or imported as tab delimited XLS or as comma semicolon separated value CSV files All three formats can be read by Excel as well as OpenOffice Calc Below you see an example of an exported file The gray colored columns have been added for readability Below each documents Name Path Origin Gender location Agegroup1 Agegroup2 Agegroup3 P1 Case8 F C Users generic Example Projects HUPATH Christine 44 rtf female Berlin 21 30 0 0 P2 Case6 F c Users generic Example Projects HUPATH Chris 88 rtf female London 21 30 0 0 P3 Case10_F C Users generic Example Projects lt HUPATH gt Donna_78 rtf female New York 21 30 0 0 P4 Casell F C Users generic Example Projects HUPATH Dorothy 69 rtf female Tokyo 21 30 0 0 P5 Case50 M C Users generic Example Projects HUPATH T Mr Leslie 63 rtf male New York 0 31 40 0 P6 Case2 F C Users generic Example Projects lt HUPATH gt ANGELA_372 rtf female Tokyo 0 31 40 0 P7 Case3_F Users generic Example Projects lt HUPATH gt Ann_C347 rtf female Berlin 0 31 40 0 P8 Case4 F c Users generic Example
506. re is helpful In combination with a few formatting rules documents can be created that can readily support auto coding quite a bit For the auto coding tool to yield useful results it is necessary to properly structure the source text using unique identifiers Simple examples are P or lt Peter gt for a respondent with the name Peter e 07 01 11letter for a letter written on the first of July 2011 The identifier should be used exclusively to mark passages in the text that indeed relate to the person or object identified The plain word Peter will likely also occur elsewhere in the text for instance when another person is referring to Peter The markup P or Peter however is unlikely to occur elsewhere In order for the Auto Coding tool to select a complete speaker section a section delimiter is needed As discussed above a speaker or section turn will start with the speaker s identifier markup The end of a section is best marked by an empty line By doing this you can still use single hard returns to segment a speaker section into paragraphs ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 236 When auto coding such a document you would choose Mutti Harp Returns for extending the matched text Using lt Peter gt as the search pattern would then yield a quotation including everything from lt Peter gt up to the empty line INT Ok so erm so you ve got the majority of the information anywa
507. re via the order in the Code Manager On the use of Code Families for adding structure to a code list sse nennen 222 On the use of the Network View function for adding structure to a code list sss 222 Retrieving Coded Quotations Activating a quotation for a code If there isonly one quotation orcinec tae ee po P RR RR IE QU rd e dain airs manna cada ge LN e e Rec If there are more quotations Created Report for Coded Quotations civic tea a te C e E EO ESO TCR EG LOTO DEED A ERE a eda 223 Reports on Quotations for Code COMbiNati0NS ooonononnnninnninnnninnnnnnccncnn cnc cnn rara 224 Other Places to Activate Quotations eim org t teer rip De rere be tart o voco tele epe tieni Ce e EVE ERROR Let ah Text Search amp Auto Coding ssessssssssssssssssseseseeeneeneeeneenerteenneerretreerretredrr sert ir itr e treni t rers dt rnrse reset acacia The TEXt SOArCH TO oido de Edna aa e AEE ETEA N EEE AO EAE NAE naan To open the Text Search tool Standard Search MOE cai NE EAEE GEEF NEEE EEEE REE E EE ENEE VEEE TO Startastandard Searcli i dd A Case Sensitive GREP Hm HM Category A NA Defining Categories Hierarchies of Search Categories attese A CO I TO CERO E EL B de ea Oe aac 227 How To Use Category Search ccm tere ceti e t D OT E TODO TERCER DUE CH EHE ER nta ate 228 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL 11 To define an
508. re you have created via code code relations see page 329 or via code families see page 252 Renaming Objects All objects excluding the top level entries like the name of the HU the container entries Primary Docs Codes Memos etc can be renamed using the in place technique This technique is also used by Windows Explorer and other Windows file dialog boxes to rename files and directories Context menus of objects Each object in the Object Explorer has a context menu These menus can be accessed in the usual manner with a right mouse click This selects the object if not already selected and opens the context menu which offers a few selected object specific operations Network Views 3 F RQ1 Suspects babe A Open Network Editor 2 5 RQ5 Who was Jack s Edit Comment S Scene of the second murucrenspmenymei inbury Street 16 Figure 290 Context menu for a netowrk view HU Review a short information and statistics about your project Edit the HU s comment or create install a copy bundle file see Copy Bundle Migrating and Backing Up Projects on page 129 PDs Codes Memos Open the object manager or expand to the respective object level PD Code Memo Families Open the family manager or expand to the family or member level Network Views Open the network view manager or expand to the network or node level Displaying and Editing Comments To edit an object s comment F Sele
509. reated Keyboard shortcut The current position determines the end coordinate of a quotation Keyboard shortcut gt Holding down the SHIFT key while clicking the button creates a quotation for the current selection and starts a new selection This facilitates fast creation of sequential quotations ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 193 Creates a free quotation from the current ai selection This button is disabled unless a valid segment is marked or if the segment already Create quotation matches an existing quotation Keyboard shortcut q note q also starts a new selection In combination with the CTRL key this button trims the current media quotation to the current selection Opening and Closing the Multimedia Control Window The multimedia control window opens automatically when you load a multimedia document When you switch from a media to a graphic or text PD the media control window is closed You can also close the control window manually To reopen the window open the context menu on the background of the multimedia document pane and choose the menu option Oren MepiaConTRroL Under Extras Prererences GeneraL Prererences gt tab HU Editor the following characteristics can be set for playing audio or video quotations Play multimedia PD when loaded Loop media clip Activating and Playing Audio and Video Quotations Audio and video quotations can be selecte
510. ree new codes Already existing codes are not created anew Coding via drag amp drop from the Code Manager The easiest way of coding is via Drag amp Drop from the Code Manager Select a data section Open the Code Manager F Select one or more codes in the Code Manager ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 204 Drag and drop the codes into the primary document pane If a quotation already exists you can alternatively drop the code onto a quotation bar in the margin area T Code Manager HU Cien end ferr Com tat troversial that having children T Code Manager HU Chidren and happi 53 1S T Coon El Pa Mnculenaeur Ons Vi parents are no happier and many N M aber then what are all these baby then what are all these baby Name egre it won t Ki focussing on the upside pide the coos tt sell Nelusion 1 0 ve figure it won t be as much of a Y amp focussing on the upside 3 reasons for deciding 0 ds apside the coos andthe smiles 3 self delusion 1 0 n believes we do delude ourselves actue Wes L pee x ted an culture that children bring bome boys k about either case even their current ones they tend to id will be parstalongdy difficult dsome boys or gorgeous looking athood which is wi t ihe case even when d iid will how fitted for us by nature There nthood whi why most of them viec 4 FECE SENE Whatever is highlighted gets
511. released allegation unproven doubti hi reason released does not fit characteristics tr reason released alibi Reason for discharge reason release a Relation Target Author name of suspect Cohen Susanne Reason for discharge team why suspected Reason for discharge team Reason for discharge team E Reason for discharge team SX Reason for discharge team F r Jack the Ripper legend Susanne Change Relation Reason for discharge team Miscellaneous F Reason for discharge team n i o Network Nodes Links Layout Display Specials Help doo dE Em x5 gn Figure 247 Flipping two links in the Code Link Manager The Relation Editors The two Relation Editors one for code code relations and one for hyperlinks quotation quotation relations allows the creation display and editing of relations Explicit relations can only be used when connecting codes to codes or quotations to quotations Connections between codes and quotations memos and quotations memos and codes and families and their members cannot be named and specified by the user The relations editors already include a set of default relations You can modify these entries at any time translate them to your language change the labels or the menu text modify the line color etc ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 345
512. reports web pages Criminology Analysis of letters finger prints photographs surveillance data Geography and Cultural Geography Analysis of maps locations e Graphology Micro comments to handwriting features Industrial Quality Assurance Analyzing video taped user system interaction Medicine and health care practice Analysis of X ray images CAT scans microscope samples video data of patient care training of health personal using video data Media Studies Analysis of films TV shows online communities Tourism Maps locations visitor reviews Many more applications from a host of academic and professional fields are the reality In fact we encourage all users to let us know about the specific use they are making of ATLAS ti in their area or work You can always reach us via the ATLAS ti Support Center at http support atlasti com The fundamental design objective in creating ATLAS ti was to develop a tool that effectively supports the human interpreter particularly in handling relatively large amounts of research material notes and associated theories Although ATLAS ti facilitates many of the activities involved in qualitative data analysis and interpretation particularly selecting indexing coding and annotating its purpose is not to automate these processes Automatic interpretation of text cannot succeed in grasping the complexity lack of explicitness or contextuality of everyday or scientific knowl
513. rge strategies Added Objects When objects are added that have identical names in both the source and target HUs the added object is renamed using an incremental numbering scheme Note that the PDs are not renamed This is because the prefix P x is a part of the name making equally named PDs distinct Adding 22 Primary Documents 1 Jack the Ripper Story Introduction mp3 Transcript Jack the Ripper Introduction 1 Jack the Ripper Story rtf 1 Jack the Ripper Letters rtf 2 Victim Mary Ann Nichols pdf 2 Victim Annie Chapman pdf 2 Victim Annie Chapman scene of the murder 1967 wmv Seni uuu E e Murde tes in Gooy e Earth GE x Victims Circle GE snapshot Victims location of murder doc Site Second Murder 1 Site Second Murder 2 Site Second Murder 3 Site Second Murder 4 Site Second Murder 5 Figure 97 Added primary documents using a unique identifier in form of the PD number The imported PD families are renamed using the numeric suffix 1 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 179 Adding 14 Primary Doc Families Description of Victims gt Investigaton all files gt Investigaton all files 1 Investigaton audio files gt Investigaton audio files 1 Investigaton video files gt Investigaton video files 1 Jack the Ripper_stage II gt Jack the Ripper_stage II_1 di Mur si 1 lype or data images gt Type of datu sages 1 Type of data PDF gt Typ
514. rget quotation ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 262 Data Analysis and Theory Building Tools Overview Analysis Tools In the first part of this section you find a description of exploratory and advanced analysis tools These are the word cruncher the query tool the co occurrence tools the code primary documents table super codes and super families Word Cruncher Creates a word frequency count for textual primary documents see page 264 Query Tool Finds quotations based on a combination of codes like Show me all quotations where both Code A and Code B have been applied Such queries can also be combined with variables in form of PD families Thus you can restrict a query to a certain sub groups of your documents Show me all quotations where both Code A and Code B have been applied but only for female respondents between the age of 21 and 30 see page 268 Co occurrence tools Different from the query tool where the results are quotations you can use the two co ocurrence tools to find codes The tree explorer list all codes on the first level of the tree and if there are more codes that have been applied to the same or overlapping quotations then you can open the tree branches to see those codes If you open the tree further the associated quotations are shown The second tool the table explorer shows a cross tabulation of codes and within the cells a frequency count of how
515. rious a large forum for peer to peer communication i e for users to virtually meet exchange experiences with the tool share tips and tricks and discuss technical and methodological issues that arise with the use of the program Mailing List Archive Like the forum the mailing list is another tool for peer to peer discussion advice and tips The complete mailing list archive can be conveniently accessed via Herr More Resources THE MailingList ARCHIVE ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL APPENDIX Troubleshooting 433 Help with Data Management Problems Documents cannot be accessed Please take a look at the mini manual which explains data management in detail See http www atlasti com uploads media miniManual v6 2011 pdf Or check out the chapter on Data Management in ATLAS ti on page 105 If you cannot solve a problem related to unloadable documents on your own please create an accessibility report see below and send it to out our support staff To create an accessibility report select Documents Data Source Manacement AcctssiBiLTY Report Save the output as file and then contact the support center e g via the Herp More Resources menu Embedded Objects Cannot be Activated In order to activate objects embedded in primary documents memos or comments the object s application e g Excel needs to be installed You might have received an HU created on another computer which had the application installed A
516. rk on a shared folder each team member needs to work within her or his own HU file These files then need to be merged from time to time into a MASTER HU See Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 171 for a more detailed explanation Scenario 2 Multiple Document Paths Not all documents can be accessed from a single folder hierarchy Some documents are located in distinct separate folders that cannot be incorporated under a common root Examples Legacy data archives that cannot easily be moved to more appropriate locations because of size or access restrictions Documents that are located on a variety of media such as CDs DVDs hard disks possibly on different computers Project Set up Store the documents in the desired folders Create the HU in an appropriate location See Creating a Hermeneutic Unit on page 66 Assign documents from their respective folders Drag amp Drop is an efficient technique here See Assigning Documents using Drag amp Drop on page 79 This procedure results in a project where all documents are assigned with their absolute paths see Absolute Paths on page 108 Project Migration The project cannot easily be migrated to a different computer unless the data files can be accessed via a shared location like a network drive and the absolute path references remains intact or can be recreated When the drives and the network are available on the target system a Copy Bundle file ca
517. rm a network ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 320 Network View logical structure visual layout 11 76 Figure 226 Code quotations links But you cannot name these links the code is simply associated with a quotation through the act of coding In a network view you can visualize these links In ATLAS ti all unnamed links are referred to as weak links all named links are referred to as strong links Strong and Weak Links Strong links or first class links are links based on relations Strong links are entities by themselves with names authors comments and other properties A strong link is only a link between a code and another code or a quote and another quote Weak links are links that do not have individual properties e g the links between quotations and codes between codes and memos between a family and its members Network vs Network View The difference between a Network and a Network View is an important distinction that is necessary to understand the way networks are handled within ATLAS ti An ATLAS ti network is the set of a objects and their links inside the Hermeneutic Unit HU It exists independently of any display oriented characteristics layout color line width etc It is the logical structure of the HU s objects It exists even before the first Network View is created A Network View is typically only a subset of this glo
518. roblems page 433 Language Settings ATLAS ti can handle documents in pretty much ANY language and character set although the program interface is of course in English only Requirements A first requirement is that language specific fonts are installed on the computer If you use special regional languages this might require that you install an appropriate language pack on your computer Next make sure that the correct language is set in the Language tab at the bottom right of the ATLAS ti window It is set to Default if nothing else is selected ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 72 Don t convert text Use Windows Language Bar setting Afrikaans Albanian Alsatian Arabic Azeri Cyrillic Azeri Latin Bashkir Basque Belarusian Bosnian Cy m Bosnian Latin Breton Bulgarian Catalan Chinese Simplified Chinese Traditional Figure 32 Bosnian Cyrillic is selected as language in this case After you have selected a specific language that is not the default language on your computer a two letter abbreviation is displayed in the language tab Font settings If characters are not displayed properly in all windows and lists you may need to adjust the font settings F Select Extras Prererences GeneraL Prererences and then the Font tab F Select one or more or all object types for which you want to change the font F Select a font and appearance
519. roximity embedded overlapping or if two or more codes are applied to the same quotation The proximity of coding applied to a text can also be exploited via the Query Tool s co occurrence proximity operator However while the Query Tool yields quotations for explicitly specified codes the import function brings in only the codes To import co occurring codes F Select one or more codes in the Network Editor F Choose Nobes Import Co occurrinc Copes from the Network Editor s menu Create Families from Network Views You can create code PD or memo families based on the nodes included in a network view Select the nodes that you want to include in the family see Selecting Nodes and Links on page 329 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 340 Shortcut Cra L From the network editor s menu select the option Specials Generate FAMILY and then the respective object type code memo or PD family Enter a name for the family and click OK Create network views from code families It is also possible to create network views based on code families A new code will be created from the code family name and all member codes will be linked via ISA relations Open the Code Family Manager Select a family and then the menu option Families Create Network A pop up message informs you that a new code will be created and that all member codes will be linked via ISA relations Confir
520. rred This strategy is also pursued for hyperlinks and other connections between objects ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 176 Target HU Source HU Merged HU Code B Code B o o o o U is associated is associated with with is apart of gt Code A CodeA Target HU Source HU Merged HU is apart of is apart of E Code A Code A Code A Figure 95 Merging HUs Link resolution The link between Code A and Code B in the target HU survives the merge process Migration of General Features Co authors are The comment of the source HU is appended to the target and the list of co also merged authors in the target is completed with those in the source HU Special Considerations for Quotations Quotations play a special role because they cannot be handled independent of the PDs When PDs are ignored so are quotations When PDs are added quotations are added The interesting case is when PDs are unified you can then select either UNIFY or ADD Add quotations ADDing quotations will create dublicate quotations in the target PD even if a if you want to matching quotation already exists This is a useful option if you want to calculate inter calculate inter coder reliability see CAT a free online tool that allows you to coder reliabiltiy calculate inter coder reliabiltiy You can access the tool via Herr More Resources THE Coping ANALYSIS TOOLKIT Mergi
521. rs will benefit from having this useful information available at all times HU comments are displayed in the HU Browser and also in HTML and XML output HU comments are also displayed when reviewing file properties with Windows Explorer To write an HU comment click on the comment button in the main toolbar Opening a Hermeneutic Unit The Welcome Wizard opens upon start up unless ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 67 e you have checked the option Loap Last usep HU upon start up under Extras PREFERENCES GENERAL Prererences Tab HU Editor e Or if you checked the box Don t display this screen again n the Welcome Wizard The Wizard offers options to work with a recently used HU create a new one etc No special actions are required to load an HU created with version 5 of ATLAS ti into ATLAS ti 6 See To open a Hermeneutic Unit using the standard Windows file dialog From the ATLAS ti main menu select Fie Oren shortcut Ctrl O The Open Hermeneutic Unit file dialog appears The default folder for ATLAS ti projects is the Textbank directory which is assumed to be your main repository for HUs and PDs but you can store your data whereever you want see Setting Up a New Project on page 112 Select a HU and click Oren To open a Hermeneutic Unit using the HU Browser The HU Browser is an alternative to the standard file dialog It offers the list of most recently used HUs This l
522. rt y From the main menu select Documents Toots Woro Cruncher or click the main toolbar s Word Cruncher button A property dialog opens offering a number of options that affect the procedure r Q Word Cruncher Settings 4 Indude Selected PD only Uncheck to indude ALL current textual PDs Disabled if no PD is currently selected Y Use Built In Tool Uncheck to create an Excel file Y Use Stoplist C Users Susanne AppData Roaming Scientific Y Clean text before counting ignore 100 9 V8 lt gt 2 Ignore case Figure 162 Setting properties to start a word frequency count You may specify a number of properties before starting the frequency count Include Selected PD only Select the scope of the count to be all textual documents or the selected one only Use Built in Tool If you want to output the frequency count in Excel compatible format uncheck this option The built in tool is a simple list window In addition to the frequency count size and percentage for each word is shown The built in tool can only be used for a selected PD ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 265 Use Stoplist Use a stop list to exclude words from the count Instead of enumerating every variant of a word you can specify patterns You can create powerful stop lists for different languages different topics and different levels of
523. rther information ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 56 Origin The original location of the PD s data source from where it was assigned to the HU Location The actual location of the data source file acquired via redirection Dashes indicate that Origin and Location are identical Quotation Manager This Manager offers you several display and sorting options A double click on a quotation loads its PD unless already loaded n and displays its content in context In this example quotation 11 23 is selected and its comment is displayed in the text pane Single click selects a quotation If you have written a comment for the selected quotation it is displayed in the text pane Single click pause single click or F2 activates in place editing of quotation names l E Quotation Manager HU Jack the Ripper stage I 62 Erm Quotations Edit Miscellaneous Output View CON IR T E ES Id Name Codes 11 17 Frederick Bailey Deeming 30 July 1842 23 May 18 name of 11 18 There is no reliable account of his activities or reason s E3 11 19 he apparently attempted to reconcile with his estr reason s Eg 11 20 He wooed Emily Mathers his landlord s daughter a reason s 11 21 He is said to have been an acquaintance of victim reason s Feigenbaum had admitted to having a hatred of wome role of th 1 2 Carl Feigenbaum was arrested in 1894 in New York f name of 11 24
524. rticular field of scientific or scholarly investigation Its emphasis is on qualitative rather than quantitative analysis i e determining the elements that comprise the primary data material and interpreting their meaning A related term would be knowledge management which emphasizes the transformation of data into useful knowledge ATLAS ti can be of great help in any field where this kind of soft data analysis is carried out While ATLAS ti was originally designed with the social scientist in mind it is now being put to use in areas that we had not really anticipated Such areas include psychology literature medicine software engineering quality control criminology administration text linguistics stylistics knowledge elicitation history geography theology and law to name just some of the more prominent ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL INTRODUCTION ATLAS ti offers support to the researcher without taking control of the intellectual process 24 Emerging daily are numerous new fields that can also take full advantage of the program s facilities for working with graphical audio and video data A few examples Anthropology Micro gestures mimics maps geographical locations observations field notes Architecture Annotated floor plans e Art Art History Detailed interpretative descriptions of paintings or educational explanations of style Business Administration Analysis of interviews
525. s VAR LABELS are taken from code and code family names VALUE LABELS for variables created from codes are Yes 1 code is assigned No 0 code is not assigned Every case is not only described by the codes but also by information about position primary document start and end position and date of creation Code and primary document families are handled using COMPUTE statements If applicable super codes can turn into non dichotomous variables The SPSS syntax output created with ATLAS ti is plain ASCII and can be edited before storing it as a file for further processing with SPSS Below you see an example syntax file TITLE ATLAS ti Jack the Ripper stage II 62 SPSS Syntax file generated by ATLAS ti 6 2 27 SPSS Generator Version 3 2 Date 2011 09 15T18 25 13 DATA LIST RECORDS 3 1 CASENO F6 0 PD F6 0 QU F6 0 SL F8 0 SC F8 0 EL F8 0 EC F8 0 TI F10 0 2 Kl to K77 1 77 3 K78 to K79 1 2 VARIABLE LABELS PD Primary Doc QU Q Index SL Start Line SC Start Column End Line EC End Column TI Creation Date K1 date of murder K2 historic context K3 name of suspect AMD CMS SAI FU PS I K78 victim last hours and death K79 victim marriage children VALUE LABELS K1 to K79 1 YES 0 NO Represent code families as computed variables COMPUTE KF1 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 ATLAS ti 6
526. s entr eec eere oc UI e e P DO QUO Een dd pe d ep Y PER geek XXE RUE LE E XR hu RT Associating two already existing documents cir neben d ec dg eer a i d Pa de re e DA eek dE E Importing documents transcribed in f4 Js Eo O Working with Associated Documents Play Selected Text Synchronization Mode F3 sss ue Activating and Deactivation Synchronous MOE occccicninnnonionnonnnnonccn norris Working with Synchrono s MOde 5 rte remercier a each DRE a fe d S B ddr Karaoke Mode Ctrl F4 a Importing and Exporting AssOciations aisis ne ones a Cia Ce PER ee s E ceder mien Cla tc c ne E d Importing Survey Data i tette tenete err en nh ee n nn a V n di re DE d d e Le n e dg How survey data is treated In ATLAS Usi ete ner can eer a i dedere tr to NE d rr vade rd cr e te een e e A da 99 Preparing an Excel Table Tord prt icici iia eerte ecrire te ee adas 100 How to import survey data i Analyzing Survey Dalai cete ctt ra tad icd e a OL E OH UM DAT HEAR A TC GINA Data Managementin ATLAS Asia AAA AAA sa Ere id The ATLAS Referencing Model eet oce Le AA ya tosta Referencing a Common Procedure ont Example 1 The World Wide Web Way c i eiie iiie atre nene eren rii nr gar ree chap eripe eed te leere ope etas Example 2 Word Documents with External References treten erste etne erac Basic Principles for
527. s Master and sub HUs can be moved to a backup folder Tasks of team members after merging anywhere on your computer and rename the file by adding your name or Save the new Master HU file that is sent to you by the project administrator initials to the file name F Continue to work on the project Backup all Team members After each work session the team members copy the HU file and store it at a secure location e g on their local drive a backup folder on the shared drive or an external device Keep three rolling copies of your backup files Project administrator The project administrator creates a copy bundle file directly after setting up the project and after each merge operation and stores it at a secure location see Create a Bundle on page 129 Repeat the above work flow until all data are coded and analyzed Benefits of this approach The HU is not tied to the location of its documents and may be copied and moved anywhere without losing functionality as long as the Textbank Path refers to the location of the documents Migrating or backing up your project using the Copy Bundle function is easy Drawbacks This scenario relies on the user configured textbank folder If the user wishes to work on different projects with documents stored in different folder hierarchies the textbank folder must be set to the path that was valid when the HU was created ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 165
528. s a snapshot will not change This is identical to creating snapshot from Super Codes Snapshots are a means to audit the process of your analysis By comparing Super Families with previous snapshots you can see how and in which direction your thoughts have developed ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 296 To create a snapshot family select a super family in a family manager Then select the menu option MisceLLaneous CREATE SNAPSHOT F By default the post fix SN a consecutive number is added to the name EJ Investigation Role of the media amp 3 Investigation Role of the media SN 1 Figure 193 Super family and its snapshot Additional Query Tool Functions Stack Management Several functions are available in pocket calculator style as a series of buttons Other functions can be activated by context menus opened in one of the list panes c Js Jl Recai Undo Redo Figure 194 Query tool stack functions Clear the complete term stack of expressions Swaps the two top elements of the stack Use if you mix up the input order Push a copy of the topmost element onto the stack in other words duplicate it This is a useful feature if you need to replicate a complex expression If you created new coding that affect the current query while the Query Tool is open you have to click Recatc to reprocess the query Uwpo removes the topmost entry from the stack This is conve
529. s or primary data selection For more detail see the section The Conceptual Level in the full manual ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN STEPS IN WORKING WITH ATLAS TI 42 General Steps when Working with ATLAS ti The following sequence of steps is not mandatory but describes a common script Create a project an idea container meant to enclose your data all your findings codes memos and structures under a single name We call this a Hermeneutic Unit HU A more detailed explanation is provided below Main Workspace The HU Editor on page 43 Next assign documents text graphic audio and video files and Google Earth as so called Primary Documents PDs to the HU The data files become the source material for your project s primary data and can be located anywhere on your computer or a network For ease of data management it is however recommend storing all data and the ATLAS ti project file the HU within one folder See Scenario 1 recommended Working with One Project Folder for Single Users and Teams on page 114 Read and select text passages or identify areas in an image or select segments on the time line of an audio or video file that are of further interest assign key words codes and write comments and memos that contain your thinking about the data We call this the Data Level working phase The Data Level Basic Functions page 181 Compare data segments based on the codes you have assign
530. s In Uganda for example 80 per cent of the 200 000 people forced from their homes were women and children When a family s home is destroyed they lose many of thei possessions including vital supolies such es clothing cocking equipment bedding and medicines A child s few precious possessions such as a toy or school supplies are also likely to be lost Such traumatic circumstances may undermine a family s ability to protect children from abuse and exploitation The impact ct natural disasters on family welfare and children s development can be catastrophic EDUCATION EVENTS_negative EV_flood WATER EDUCATION EV_drought EV flood EVENTS_negative Forced population movements more likely As habitats become unsustainable families or even whole communities may be forced to move For pastoralists this is already a way of life though there is some disagreement over whether this equis them better to withstand the pressures ct a more volstils climate However forced ponuistion movement is likely to become more common across settisc communities as well Drought severe flooding and other natural disasters are likely to force psopis to move with increasing frequency both within and between countries in search of secure shelter and livelihocds Such displacement has serous consequences for children it fragments families and disrupt social networks it interrupts children s sducstion and may result in them leaving the s
531. s are available in standard search mode to control the search Case Sensitive Check the Case Sensitive box if you want characters to match the searched text exactly If Case Sensitive is selected you will not find Love when you search for love GREP Mode Checking the GREP box enables GREP mode If unchecked the Search Tool is in standard mode You may use the standard wildcard character even without GREP More discussion on GREP searches is provided at GREP Search on page 229 Category Search The Category Search method combines two powerful techniques Parallel search is a sophisticated method that handles textual variations You may specify a number of patterns that scan the text simultaneously Secondly search expressions search swarms can be stored as a search category and later reused Besides being short and handy a further advantage of categories is that their contents can be modified later without changing a single character in other expressions using this category Categories allow abstraction from the search string itself and permit easy re use of complex expressions in later searches With the simultaneous use of wildcards a search request using a search swarm might look as follows caus why efore since ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 227 Create hierarchies of search swarms by embedding existing categories The individual elements of the search swarm are de
532. s are often used for filtering see Sorting and Filtering on page 384 and when formulating queries in the Query Tool see Creating a Query with the Query Tool on page 278 Example When conducting an interview study with respondents from various backgrounds and locations PD families can be created to classify the respondents into Female Male Location A Location B Location C Age Group 1 20 30 Age Group 2 31 40 Age Group 3 41 50 Blue collar worker White collar worker Management etc Families make effective user defined filters For example you can filter PDs to only view female respondents In the Query Tool PD families can be used to restrict the scope of the search For example you can ask for all quotations coded by Code A and Code B that occur in documents of white collar female respondents from location B The PD Family table function provides a convenient way to import and export variables see below for a detailed explanation ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL FAMILY LIFE 238 Code families can be used to loosely group codes that belong together Other than in Network Views where specific relationships between codes need to be defined in code families it is not necessary to specify the ways in which codes relate to each other Use memo families to sort filter and organize your memos Super Families Super Families are combination of other families including other Super Families You can
533. s as PDs Memos can be assigned as primary documents How you implement this option in your work depends on the nature of your project your creativity and methodological considerations F Select a memo in the Memo Manager Select the menu option MiscrLLANEOUs Ust as Primary Doc from the context menu or the Memos menu Or drag the memo into the PD Manager Consequences of using memos as PD Assigning a memo as primary document has two immediate consequences f you want to edit the memo s content you need to edit the primary document Once a memo has been assigned as a PD you can no longer edit the memo in the Memo Manager The reason is that as a PD s data source the memo may be referenced from quotations Only the PD editing technology guarantees the necessary synchronization after content changes All editing in the primary document also affects the memo The reason for this is that the data source for the Primary Document IS the memo ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL WORKING WITH MEMOS 259 The PDs column in the Memo Manager indicates whether a memo is used as primary document The number displayed indicates the number of PDs using the memo as a data source A dash indicates that the memo is not used as a PD Name P Grounded 4 Essay An examination of the final so 1 eT s n 4 References U Figure 159 Memo used as PD Miscellaneous Memo Goodies Memo Preferences You may specify a number of s
534. s described above you can use the HU merge procedure to gain more control over what components are to be transferred Code lists with rich representations of codes can be extracted from a given theory template HU Network Views memos and or PDs may be included This method also has the advantage that it is a one pass procedure and there is no need to create extra files containing the codes or networks to be transferred Unlike the Semantic Network Migration method described above it also allows you to assert more control over how conflicts with existing codes and links are to be resolved For details please refer to Merging Hermeneutic Units on page 171 Merging Codes using the Network Editor Below we describe how merging codes can be accomplished in a Network Editor The figures below illustrate that the merging of two or more codes is not a trivial task because all of their references links and comments need to be transferred to the target code in a consistent manner Using the network method is the inverse procedure of the list method described earlier see Merging Codes Using the List Method on page 219 Using the list method you select the target code first Then you choose the codes to be merged Merging codes in a network editor is the inverse You select the codes to be merged first and then you select the target code To merge codes using the Network Editor Open or create the Network View that contains
535. sa vaca de E T A eaa nti aah nati a T E E ET E eee dead deh aT AEA TEE rages eStats seivecan caste n Conflicts AB Greate BUM A A acca dvd ates ca use daze sch sii A AN 129 Install Bundles E Ai Ada pena eer nd e apa a uate dia viene uence ea naa SNE 131 Migrate Restore D sree Nodes eroi RE 319 Dimension dena p EH 435 Export network Extension Families 2 237 Add REMS Passe RT TEE IM 240 PS IL AO on O 243 Filter 386 Graph CY aia A A A A a A A Grounded Theory Hermeneutic Unit Load last used ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL INDEX 441 Hermeneutic Unit editor rec ee Rede cde denti Vas eerie ted dera en e Adv c a pe C db td cea d Antenne da 43 Hierarchical View E 375 HTM A A e s Filesize iii 426 including network views 426 HUME E A HE ROUES launching ObjectManaS Oracion 45 NA AA ONO NS 199 Status Bar O O NN Hypetlirik O NN Defining new relations cds Hypertexta batted bse te cite reir ecce rte ti ro T TE E olla llo depu ed crie ertet Lia nea ada 360 A cU 364 A NN In place 368 Import network 352 InzPl ce Editlnig cocer c te eer EE RE CREER ERE CETERO EX E TII To Ey ae OEA RE eee 141 Increm rntal Search rn e pr e tne n oe t i n E FE c HD o d i ii a LL ae nh idle
536. sage pops up informing you who is registered as co authors for the currently loaded HU To remove co authors Select Extras Co AutHors Remove Co AutHors You are presented the list of current co authors Choose the ones to be removed from the Hermeneutic Unit To display co authors Select Extras Co Aurnons DisPLAY Co Aurnons You see a list of the co authors currently assigned to the Hermeneutic Unit To filter by co authors To display only those parts of a Hermeneutic Unit created by a subset of the co authors involved choose the filter option Co autHors in any of the Object Managers The User Database All ATLAS ti users are cataloged in a special database file HERMENCR HDB located in the ATLAS ti system directory This file is loaded on program start up ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT Changes to ATLAS INI affect all computers in a networked environment 156 Never modify the user database file HERMENCR HDB from outside ATLAS ti as this will corrupt it and lock you out of the system After the initial installation of ATLAS ti there is already one dummy user with administrator privileges set up Account SUPER password USER Because automatic login is the default mode it is quite likely that you usually work under this default account Creating and working with different user databases To create a new data base save the standard data base HERMENCR HDB under a
537. selected nodes from the original code ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 357 RB EE a bn i S Mage 3 on links already cut Figure 260 Cutting the links that you do not want to keep 19 WT e iit vage rara Figure 261 Unlinking quotations from code Magic 3 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 358 mum uL pa L E E 12 e P x s 31 Ej E 118 i ttt E E 177 3 Si 230 E E 7 117 7 E 124 11 E E 88 Mage 2 3 u 22 3 132 33 Number magic 1 2 B e L3 Ej N 14 t 33 E E E t2 7 ses 129 14 Figure 262 Completed split code action To produce the above image the semantic layout option was used again to distribute the code and quotations nodes evenly within the network view editor Network Views as Graphical Tables of Contents If you use graphical PDs you can use Network Views to display thumbnails small sized copies of these PDs Create a new Network View by choosing Networks New Network View from the HU Editor s main menu Change the size Import some graphical PDs see Nodes on page 327 of the th mibnal I From the Network Editor menu choose Disptay FuLL Imace ron PDs images Rearrange the nodes in the Network View and save the network view You can configure the size of the thumbnails F Select Speciats Prererences tab Nodes The standard width is set to 20
538. ses Among his many dubious claims was that he had once been a surgeon in the Russian navy Figure 314 Excerpt from an output based on the style sheet Print codes in full with comments When exporting quotations from PDF documents you may have to correct the formatting in Word and delete unnecessary hard returns The original layout is of course lost as the table only contains plain text As mentioned above you can simply copy and paste the table s from the Explorer to a word processing program and edit them there ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 409 The above excerpt after a few corrections using the find and replace option in Word looks as follows m Code name of suspect http www casebook org suspects Quotation Nr 87 A man named James Thomas Sadler seen earlier with her was arrested Source 1_Jack the Ripper_Story rtf bythe police and charged with her murder and was briefly thought to be the Ripper himself Quotation Nr 5 Montague John Druitt 15 August 1857 1 December 1888 3 was Source 3 Investigation Suspects pdf born in Wimborne Minster Dorset England the son of a prominent Does not fit the profile local physician He was educated at Winchester College and New College Oxford He graduated from Oxford in 1880 and two years later Quality style of correspondence unlikely given was admitted to the Inner Temple He was called to the bar in 1885 and educational background practiced as a b
539. sh Recovery Automatic Backup As backup of files are only created from the previous HU when saving the current HU this functionality would not protect you from losing the work you completed since the last save in the event of abnormal termination of the program e g caused by system crashes or power failures For such situations an automatic periodic backup feature is provided that will store recovery information every 20 minutes or a period of time you can set via Extras Prererences GENERAL Prererences Tab Storace It is strongly recommended to keep this feature on Should ATLAS ti or Windows crash or in any other way be terminated irregularly the amount of work lost is only the work conducted since the last recovery backup or regular save When quitting ATLAS ti or after saving the HU the recovery backup file is removed automatically If you experience long delays at the scheduled auto saving times when working with large HUs increase the time intervals rather than turning this option off When you restart ATLAS ti after a crash it will ask you if you want to load a recovery backup of your HU if this backup is indeed newer than the one you last saved ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL PROJECT BACKUP AND MIGRATION 129 Any pending changes in open text or Network Editors are not saved by the recovery backup feature Saving such changes from time to time will preserve these changes Copy Bundle Migrating and B
540. sign the documents Documents Assicn AssicN To save the HU click on Fite Save and navigate to the main project folder as destination Enter a name for the HU and click on the SAVE button ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT i Project Folder ig Jackthe Ripper 1 Jack the Ripper Story Introduction ii 1 Jack the Ripper story w 1 Jack the Ripper letters x 2 Victim Annie Chapman x 2 Victim Catherine Eddowes 3 2 Victim Elizabeth Stride Wi 3 investigation location of murder El 3 investigation scene of the murder Chapmann 1967 3 investigation suspects 3 The Ripper Revealed Figure 55 One folder project set up with and without sub folders 115 Project Folder Jack the Ripper n Case description 14 1 Jack the Ripper Story Introduction iu 1 Jack the Ripper story i 1 Jack the Ripper letters 1 Jackthe Ripper letters rtf di Investigation E 3_investigation_location of murder B 3 investigation scene of the murder_Chapmann_1967 7153 investigation suspects 14 3 The Ripper Revealed Jj Victims D 2 Victim Annie Chapman x 2 Victim Catherine Eddowes 2 2 Victim Elizabeth Stride 9 2 Victim Mary Ann Nichols 9152 Victim Mary Jane Kelly This results in a project located in ONE folder All documents automatically receive the special lt HUPATH gt as reference You can check this in the Primary Document Manager Look for the column origin ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTIN
541. skills those who work alone or in teams those who work only at one location or at two or more locations etc Accordingly we have created various project scenarios to illustrate best practices in some of the most typical situations Each scenario illustrates a specific use case and describes strategies for setting up new projects This includes issues such as selecting the ideal location for data files and how to best move or backup entire projects The scenarios are presented in order of increasing complexity All scenarios include specific characteristics and easy to follow instructions for setting up the project For most projects however Scenario 1 will likely reflect the project management procedures that will be used Project Planning and Setup The scenarios below aim to provide concrete examples of how to create and maintain consistent projects In real life situations you may find that it sometimes makes sense to combine scenarios to achieve the best result Scenarios 1 to 3 below can be used by single users and teams However as team project management is somewhat more complex a special section for team project management has been included as well See Error Reference source not found on page Error Reference source not found Before starting a new project give some thought to the location of the documents and the HU Choosing a proper location can make your work significantly easier especially when it comes to team
542. sociated quotations on the second level a Cooccurrence Explorer HU Jack the Ripper stage I 62 E Codes 79 amp rimary Docs 22 expand to the code level EA Codes 09 8 date of murder Z historic context M name of suspect 38 name of suspect Cohen expand to the quotation level 5 38 namedof suspect Cohen 38 nanag of suspect o name of suspect Cohen E2 11 33 David Cohen 1865 1889 was a Polish Jew whose inc 6 2962 6 3045 E 11 163 David Cohen David Cohen 1865 1889 was a Polish J 6 2948 6 3053 Figure 199 Expanding to code and quotation level in the tree explorer ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 300 The same option is available for primary documents If you expand the branch for Primary Docs you can see which codes have been applied to this PD Further you can expand to the quotation level to look at the material coded there Let s take a look at a potential question that the Co occurrence Tree Explorer can answer a Cooccurrence Explorer HU Jack the Ripper stage II 62 z X Codes 79 5 8 date of murder a g historic context i name of suspect amp 3 amp name of suspect Cohen 4 38 name of suspect Feigenbaum co occuring amp 36i name of suspect Kaminski codes 8 3 name of suspect Kosmiski o name of suspect Kaminski 34 investigation theories o name of suspect Kaminski 38 investigation
543. spects Method v How are these calculated Hindude Codes that are not used in calculations J Suppress Overlaps if none exist Also show individual code pairing comparisons Run Comparison Figure 221 CAT comparison tool for calculating inter coder reliability Below you see an excerpt of a comparison results The results show a perfect match as two identical HUs only differing by author were merged Comparison of All Coders Code Berta Peter Exact Overlap Kappa Kappa inc Match Overlap 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 34 00 1 00 1 00 3 00 date of murder Family Murder 13 historic context 4 name of suspect Family Suspects 28 name of suspect Cohen Family Suspects name of suspect Feigenbaum Family Suspects name of suspect Kaminski Family Suspects name of suspect Kelly Family Suspects name of suspect Kosmiski Family Suspects name of victim Families 2 Victim Who Victims Investigation Figure 222 Result of an inter coder comparison Validation In a less than perfect world the coders will probably not agree one hundred percent Therefore CAT offers a validation function where the coders involved can look at each coded segments or only at those segments where the agreement was unsatisfactory This way coders can discuss the results and come to a bette
544. strategy for every object type Same PDs and Codes Choose this strategy when PDs and codes are mostly the same in the target and source HU All of the same PDs and codes are then unified Different PDs and codes will be added When unifying PDs please observe that PDs are unified by their P numbers P 1 P 2 P 3 etc and not by their names Therefore the order of the PDs need to be the same in all HUs to be merged Same PDs Different Codes Choose this strategy when target and source HU contain the same PDs but different set of codes If identical codes are found during the merge procedure the duplicate codes from the source HU are automatically renamed by adding a numeric suffix Original code name Alchemy Duplicate code Alchemy 1 Different PDs Same Codes Choose this strategy when target and source HU contain different PDs that have been coded with the same code set This is a common situation when working in teams and different team members have coded different PDs using a common set of codes If a few additional codes have been added to the common set these will be added Different PDs and Codes Choose this strategy when both PDs and codes are different The PDs and codes from the source HU will be added to the ones in the target HU If identical codes are found during the merge procedure the ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 175 duplicate codes from the source HU are automatically re
545. t Scope of Search O Selected PD 9 All current PDs PD Family Figure 141 Selecting the scope of search for auto coding If Selected PD is chosen the auto coding process starts at the current position of the text cursor Segment Size When a matched string is found the size of the segment to be coded can be specified as follows the Exact Match only the Word surrounding the matched string the Sentence surrounding the matched string the matched string expanded to paragraph boundaries Single Hard Return the matched string expanded to one or more paragraphs up to the next blank lines Multiple Hard Returns This option is useful if you have information that should be regarded as one unit but is separated in multiple paragraphs All Text of the PD containing a match When transcribing enter a blank line between speaker turns if you are going to to use the auto coding tool for coding speaker units Test your Search Expression The Auto Coding tool creates a new quotation for every matched text passage that is not yet a quotation A potentially large number of inadequate quotations could be produced by an imprecise search For this reason you should always test a search pattern by using the Text Search tool first see The Text Search Tool on page 225 or select the Confirm option and click Skip This test will give an indication if the final search will yield meaningful results The advantage o
546. t activities when working with ATLAS ti Clicking is done in many different ways such as single and double clicking and clicking with the left or the right mouse button The semantics of a mouse click are not perfectly straightforward and a few variations must be learned A single click with the left mouse button selects and highlights an item in each of the Object Managers Double clicking an item selects the object and invokes a procedure depending on the type and state of the object The effect of a double clicking is described for each of the Object Managers below For multiple selections you may use the standard Windows selection techniques ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL MAIN WORKSPACE THE HU EDITOR 53 The asterisk enables mid string matches for incremental search Sorting and Filtering The Object Managers permit comfortable sorting and filtering See Sorting and Filtering on page 384 for details Incremental vertical Tool Bar List Search This feature is available in the list pane of all Object Managers Select any item in the list and type in an arbitrary sequence of characters to jump to a subsequent list entry matching this sequence For example suppose a number of codes begin with em e g Emotions and others with ex e g External Reference typing em will jump to the first of the EMotion codes while entering ex will jump to EXternal reference Every other character typed
547. t all of the editing functions described for code networks can also be used when connecting two or more quotations Code code and quote quote links are the only types of network connections that allow you to assign a name to the connection that appears on the line or arrow that runs between the objects Representing the Rhetoric of Text While a code offers fast access to sets of data segments it defines only a simple relation between them namely equivalence Hyperlinks which directly relate data segments express more differentiated relationships between quotations contradiction support illustration etc Figure 265 Hypertext captures the macrostructure of a text No code is needed to connect quotation Q1 with one that it contradicts Q2 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 361 Today s largest hypertext system the World Wide Web Pure classification is not always adequate Hypertext makes text text relations explicit Cross references between text passages are very common even in conventional media like books just think of religious and juridical texts literature journals etc Footnotes and endnotes are another common deviation from the pure linearity of sequential text However in conventional media not much navigational support is provided for traversing between the pieces of data that reference each other Computer related hypertext applications incl
548. t necessarily restricted to the printer Many of the text related report procedures allow output to be directed to a text editor the printer or a file Other kinds of output are not necessarily intended to be printed directly but are to be processed by other applications like the SPSS export option several Excel compatible outputs and HTML and XML export You can find those procedures in chapter Export amp Import on page 413 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 391 General Procedure Output Destinations When creating textual output or when creating text based exports the following dialog is usually displayed in the course of the process You can send output to Send output to Editor Printer File File amp Run Figure 300 Common output options Editor The output will be displayed within a text editor This option is useful if modifications are needed before actually sending it to the printer or if you are unsure about the size of the result Printer If you select this option the output will be printed the printer dialog window opens where you may select the desired print options File If you select this option the output will be saved to a file a save file dialog opens File amp Run If you select the last option the file dialog window opens After it has been saved the file will be opened by the application registered for its extension e g a CSV or xls file will be open
549. t the request to convert the data If you accept the default name and create a second table make sure that a the previous table is no longer open in Excel otherwise you produce a protection violation error and b that you save the second table under a new name or otherwise you overwrite the first table Preparing tables to compare sub groups of data If you want to compare groups of data this means that you have to create PD families or Super PD families first see Creating Families on page 240 and How to create a Super Family on page 290 In addition in most cases you probably only want to look at a specific aspect described by a certain group of codees This means you also have to set a code family as filter as well To set PD family as filter select Documents Filter Families gt To set a code family as filter select Codes Filter Families ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 314 All filtered lists and managers appear in a pale yellow color so it is easy to recognize where you have set a filter Create the table by selecting Copes Output Copes Primary Documents TABLE gt and then select the option you need Quotation Count or Word count the internal or the Excel table The internal report looks best using a proportional font like Courier or Courier New The filter settings are listed in the report CODES PRIMARY DOCUMENTS TABLE CELL Q FREQ Report created by t
550. tail You need the adjacency operator settings if you want to search for codes near to each other see Adjacency Operators on page 276 Behind the Scope button you find another important feature When you click on the Scope button a second window opens showing the PD families see page 237 you have created These are often variables like age gender education profession location time intervals etc The scope function allows you to combine a code query with variables For instance you can ask for all quotations where you have applied code A and code B but only for females between the ages of 21 to 30 Operands Basic Operands Two sorts of basic or atomic operands may be used in a query Codes and code families A code represents a set of quotations while a code family yields the quotations of all the codes that its members have In other words a family is interpreted as its member codes connected by the Boolean operator OR Selecting a code family F1 which contains five codes C1 C5 is equivalent to the query C1 OR C2 OR C3 OR C4 OR C5 Complex Operands Operand does not only apply to basic descriptors An operand can be any expression that itself is used as an argument An expression A AND B may be used in a more complex query as an operand NOT A AND B A AND B OR C AND NOT D etc All types of operands can be freely mixed in a query using any of the operators described below ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA
551. tart PD Family Create quotation from match extended to Skip it Exact Match Word Sentence Single Hard Return Stop 9 Multi Hard Returns All Text Standard Search Mode GREP Figure 140 Auto Coding Dialog window Note the New Cope button which allows you to create codes on the fly for the auto coding procedure Based on the GREP search expression shown in the above figure all occurrences of string Speaker 1 located at the beginning of a paragraph in all textual Pds are found Next the whole speaker unit which could contain one ore more paragraphs will be selected before a quotation is created and the code Speaker 1 will be assigned The option Conrirm atways is deactivated as the search is unambiguous and is likely to yield the desired results Search Expression The top part of the Auto Coding Dialog window resembles the Text Search tool see The Text Search Tool on page 225 Search expressions can be entered or search categories can be selected The search mode can also be set in a similar way as for the Text Search tool Scope of Search Scope of Search can be all textual PDs the selected PD only or it may be restricted to a set of texts from a PD family When you choose All current PDs the search starts at the beginning of the currently selected primary text ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 233 Test search patterns with the Text Search tool firs
552. ted by the target object A corresponding quotation is one that resides in the corresponding primary document AND that has the same start and end position In this procedure attention is paid to deviations between two PDs to be merged that may result in a corrupt PD with misaligned quotations While most other objects are unified via their name PDs are treated differently A PD from the source HU is unified with a PD from the target HU if the following conditions hold Both PDs have the same ID e g P 1 Both PDs refer to the same data source f none of the PDs can access its data source the test uses ID and revision equality only Thus HU files can also be merged if the data source files are not available If two PDs found to be the same but at a different revision status the PD with the older revision status is synchronized Ignore Instances from ignored object categories are not transferred during the merge process For a finer grained exclusion you can use the ignore families option see next Ignorant families To exclude specific objects from the transfer like private memos or test codes etc you would create a special family with the name MERGEIGNORE into which you can move items to be excluded This can be done for all three family types ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT TA 173 How to Merge Hermeneutic Units When merging two HUs the Merge Wizard guides you throug
553. tenter one d erede nen danagin 360 Benefits of Hype nica cianiaaae hearin 361 Whatcodes Canno dotar t ea E t E EE Ed Doa t m E EU De RA aaa 361 Graphical Hyperlink Maps ut t rete cte mti tr rd a rc rt e and ER Ci Fe a EE E E F d casio 361 General Procedlres itecto secte tapted et LE e te teat etes e v e a me ii ester 362 Star or Chain connections 362 Hyperlinks in the Quotation Manager 363 Hyperlinks in the Margin Area iiec reiten arem Od cod eoa ie Re enne Ha E ERRAT PAPE 364 Creating Hyperlinks sss Rin 364 Creating Hyperlinks using the context men niusi i aa ia e i Ra EE E dc dn n e e rade i 364 Creating Hyperlinks in the Quotati n Managet isinisisi aiiiar deian aria arrancan 365 Creating Hyperlinks in Margin Area A te cre ei an d AR Lk ride ee PR Le Eee a ER tel d 366 Modifying Hyperlinks To modity links in the Nebtwork Editor m rotor ter rt HP rtp eer ceni ena dece ndr iis a 367 Defining New Hyperlink Relations ii uci ect dete terit ea e e te decr eina td enel eap ree ea ert 367 Traversing Hyperlinks To traverse hypertext links using the margin area eee cere nee enrenrtre trennen serena 367 The In Place Method for audio and video hyperlinks sse nnne 368 To display hyperlinked neighbors in place ssssssssssssssssesseeneneneneenneeenreneenenretrenetretetnitrenetritrtetretr trien ins 368 Useful options fo
554. text can be controlled in three places Via the PD Printing tab in the General Preferences dialog see below Setting PD Printing Preferences ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT Print selected parts of a document 394 By the current display settings in the HU Editor The printout resembles the screen display at the time of creating the output The margin or the numbering is only included if currently displayed Only those margin objects are included that were selected to be displayed in the margin By moving the splitter bar the ratio between document and margin area can be controlled To change the type of objects that are displayed and they appearance e g font size right click on a white space in the margin area to open the context menu The printing dialog under Fite Printer Setup Switching to landscape for densely populated margins may improve results Choose to print the one or more primary documents or a selected text passage only Setting PD Printing Preferences Depending on the size and layout of your document the number of objects in the margin and the fonts used in the document adjustments may become necessary To set PD Printing preferences select the main menu option Extras GENERAL PREFERENCES To print a primary document with margin F Load the primary document If you do not want to print the entire PD highlight the section that you want to print If you want to print several
555. the actors family might be friends parents siblings and partner Creating Code Families from Network Views This procedure assumes some acquaintance with the network view function see The Network Editor on page 323 Creating a code family from a Network View s code nodes might be useful when you need to print all quotations referenced by the codes in the Network View or to filter all codes contained in a Network View Open a Network View From the main menu in the Network Editor select Speciats Generate FAMILY You are prompted for a name The offered default name is the name of the Network View Accept the name or type in a new name and click OK Code Families add Analytic Power in Queries Code families can be used with codes to construct queries using the Query Tool Families are interpreted in queries as if all its contained codes were combined using the Boolean operator OR For example a code family containing the four codes water fire air and earth is interpreted in a query as water OR fire OR air OR earth Furthermore Code Families can be used as filters in combination with the Co occurence Tools They are quite effective in focusing your attention to just the subset of data you are interested in The Co occurence Tools are often used when you want to relate two code categories or two group of codes to each other Rather then running a query that contains all codes you create a code family that just contains
556. the Quotation Manager alongside the HU editor SE v Search t SG Sj OA E d BS x D 3 E ec a Ea E Quotation Manager HU Jack the Rip Quotations Edit Miscellaneous Output View B7 25 19 1 N 1220 a gt k eQ ld Name SS E231 The victims were women earning E351 About 11 p m 30 August Mary A v Places E 5 2 She was born Mary Ann Walker i J Siegess ule Enter or select a E25 3 Mortuary photograph of Mary An 5 pm x location E35 While her death certificate st E25 5 Eliza Sarah Henry Alfred The Eb 20 1 Site Second murder_3 Grand Canyon U VI Eiffelturm Paris Frankreich CN Tower Kahada Hamburg Deutschland iserpalast Tokio Japan istus der Erl ser Rio Brasil Vegas USA Lissabon Portugal Petersdom Vatikanstadt Basilika El Pilar Spanien London Eve GB Quotation Manager la g w Layers Earth Gallery E amp Primary Database a MP Borders and Labels E E Places 4 BM Photos EZ Roads P23 Google Earth gt GE 1 __Size 100 2 GEO Default _ Figure 110 Enter or select a location to fly to To create a new quotation position Google Earth to whatever location you want e g by entering a location in the Fty ro field or by selecting a location in the list of Places Double click to select the place where the quotation should be attached to If you have selected a location from My Places t
557. the codes to be merged here Magic 3 Magic 7 and Number magic Select all source codes to be merged into one target code Make sure that the target node is already visible in the Network Editor Choose Nobes Merce Cones from the Network Editor s main menu Move the mouse to the target node and click the left mouse button ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 354 Number magic 1 1 Number magic 20 1 merged code Figure 257 Merging codes in a network view editor After the merge The two former sub codes of Number Magic Magic 3 and Magic 7 have been merged into Number Magic All references to quotations other codes and memos have been inherited by Number Magic The target node inherits all the references i e quotations links to other codes and memos and comments into the incorporated node s Splitting Codes There is still some work involved in splitting a code and therefore it is called the Poor Man s Split Code function When clicking on Copes MisceLLaneous Spur Cope the following window opens providing a summary instruction on r Poor Man s Split Code Thanks to Joerg S for proposing this very useful function Unfortunately it is not yet fully implemented However here is a workaround First Duplicate the code you want to split This creates an exact clone of the selected code The clone i
558. the conceptual level The data level includes activities like segmenting and organizing data files coding data segments simple retrieval and writing memos while the conceptual level focuses on asking more complex questions about your data model building activities such as linking codes to form semantic networks In this chapter you will learn about the main procedures needed to begin your data analysis These include how to mark code and comment text graphic audio and video segments and how to write memos In addition you learn about the ATLAS ti family function This is a function for grouping objects i e documents codes and memo which can then be used as filters for various purposes Creating Quotations The most common operations on primary documents especially when starting a project are selecting data sections assigning codes and or memos to them Marking a segment does not by itself create a quotation though this is often the very next step after making a selection Creating and working with Textual and PDF Quotations Video tutorial http www youtube com watch v bU6nu aWhYM ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 182 For immediate feedback activate the margin area In most cases creating quotations is part of a higher level procedure like coding or writing memos described later There are a number of ways to create a quotation These options are available via the
559. the export of code lists see Transferring Codes from Other Projects or in SPSS jobs see page 413 On the use of the Network View function for adding structure to a code list Utilizing the network function to introduce a hierarchy in your coding system offers a way to structure your codes However you need to be aware that this is not yet conceptual level work When you use the network view function in such a way you simply use it to organize your data and your codes If you begin later to build models and to theorize about your data the hierarchical relations might be in the way To create a code hierarchy you link the higher level code and the lower level code via a transitive i e is a or is part of relation in a network view or via drag and drop in the Code Manager After you have linked the codes open the Code Forest Copes MisctLLANEOUS Cope Forest There you will see a hierarchical display of codes The code forest can be used for drag and drop coding But you cannot enter new codes or drag and drop codes to a different position The recommendation is experimenting with an alphabetical code structure to create a code hierarchy rather than using code families or the network view function for this purpose But as in most cases there is not a one option fits all best strategy ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 223 Retrieving Coded Quotations There are different ways to retrieve coded
560. theory by M Fido o name of suspect Kaminski 2 38 murderer description o name of suspect Kaminski amp murderer motive o name of suspect Kaminski 13 10 3 The Ripper Revealed mp3 0 02 43 43 0 01 13 56 13 11 Description of motive 0 02 56 48 0 00 08 71 X murderer serial killer o name of suspect Kaminski amp amp i murders potentially attributed to JR o name of suspect Kaminski 38 reason released alive long after killing stopped o name of suspect Kaminski amp 3 amp reason suspected could have been there o name of suspect Kaminski quotations in short form linking to data in 8 reason suspected fitting the profile o name of suspect Kaminski contend H reason suspected killed others o name of suspect Kaminski amp 9 amp 1 name of suspect Kelly 3 38 name of suspect Kosmiski 8 38 INVESTIGATION 3 98 investigation doubts E36 investigation stolen evidence lt o gt investigation doubts E 11 76 DNA analysis has been attempted on some letters th 10 3089 10 3723 11 77 The available material had been handled many times 10 3247 10 3488 38 investigation suspected by whom o investigatign doubts Figure 200 The Co occurrence Explorer Tree View With one click you can see which codes were used when the code name of suspect Kominiski was applied the description of the suspect his potential motive and a list of reasons why he was suspected If you exp
561. ther comparisons could be by circulation local versus national papers or by political orientation comparing papers that are more politically right or left oriented ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 288 For the results always look at the result pane of the query tool window The bottom pane of the Scope of Query window shows all quotations from the selected document group In mathematical terms the result pane in the query tool window shows the intersection between the code query and all quotations from a particular document group You can also combine a number of PD families or individual PDs using Boolean operators in the Scope of Query Window see Combining group of documents to restrict searchers below A scope is not stored as part of a Super Code s query specification When you process the query of a Super Code later the complete data base is queried by default Combining group of documents to restrict searchers A combination of document families like all females in age group II 31 40 from New York is clicked in the same way as you click a code query You first select two or more PD families and then you select one or more operaators Create a query F Click on the Scope button To create the above described subgroup you would double click on the three families female age group Il and City New York Then you click on the AND operator twice Seo of ooo NN Primar
562. tion of 1280 x 1024 If the network view does not fit your window you can adjust it to the current window size and resolution After you open the network select Layout Fit to Window If you still don t see the network view properly displayed on your screen you can adjust the font size to optimize your view To do this open the network view Then select Specials Preferences gt Fonts Adjust the font for nodes Nodes 16 CO reason released theory disputed 3 0 CO reason suspected fitting the profile 14 1 CO reason suspected attention seeking 4 0 CO reason released mix up of names 8 3 CO reason released alive long after killing stopped 5 0 CO reason released lack of evidence 3 0 CO reason suspected witness 4 0 CO reason suspected killed others 13 1 CO REASON SUSPECTED 0 0 CO REASON RELEASED 0 0 CO reason suspected could have been there 15 2 ME RQ1 Suspects who might have been Jack the Ripper 4 An Susanne QU 11 153 Characteristics of David Cohen 7 40 7 1379 QU 11 155 Carl Feigenbaum 6 40 6 832 QU 11 157 Robert Donston Stephenson 6 863 6 1717 QU 11 156 James Kelly 7 3028 7 3607 Figure 327 Network Views in HTML files To insert Network View images into HTML files At first you need to create a graphic file of the network view This file then needs to be linked to the generated HTML file ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EXPORT amp IMPORT 427 Open the Network View in a
563. tive not in synchro mode anchors visible in text Figure 44 Settings for transcription ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 93 The default setting is for anchors to be always displayed You can deactivate this option via the main menu A Docs Text Show Anchoss or in the Association Editor via the menu Text Suow Ancuors Start the playback of the associated multimedia file via the F4 key or click the appropriate button in the Association Editor as shown below Alternatively you can also use a foot switch that you can configure to the F4 key for starting and stopping the multimedia file Click here to start the multimedia file or press F4 Figure 45 Starting pausing multimedia playback Listen to whatever part you can remember then press the F4 key again Type what you heard the matching parts in the documents A red dot is displayed within your text Press the F8 key to set an association anchor The association anchor links and an entry is added to the Association Editor ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 94 4 P 2 Antonia interview tran v 4 Quotes EE 2 1 kind of thing w a Click here to set an anchor or press F8 Name TREVOR Part 1 mp3 Transcipt Trevor m 28 click to enter descriptio B 85 39 Figure 46 Creating an anchor Press F4 to play the audio file again Listen to whatever you can remember press F4 type the text press F8 then F
564. to a data segment z uode epe t te ulead ded ov n b t l Poena e eu led ea Aa 256 Attach a memo to multiple quotations 2 e cett teet ta iere Re p end nc A iD ec lere ia dide ice 257 Memo Typ6s x Sonet ai ud Tee TL NM Need T a e HL UM 257 Create a local memo type 4257 Add or remove global memo types 257 Make a local type global 258 USING MEMOS as PO e 258 CONSEQUENCES OF using memos as PD i castes edidic ederet esed lr ie Ped cerea d pete dera eec ner eade ce 258 Miscellaneous Memo Goodies id Memo PreferenGES EE Dragging a Memo to another Hermeneutic Unit sse enetretetnetr streets inseri 259 Using Memos to Create a Code List p Dr g amp Drop Text to Create a Memo cc cercati Ec HE LOT UL D LC ELE EET ER te Lu qu teca az 259 Margin Drag amp Drop cce eme te denn enti e e ceni rtr tit rec etre e dr ied i Dd e P a da Move Linked Objects ci tm pee tet cete debo re a T te re ente a Mte Detienen tenn Replace Linked Objects Copy Linked Objects ios Linking QUOTATIONS ANN Merging Quotationsis icant Data Analysis and Theory Building Tools ccecccsseeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeseeeseeeesneeeeeaeeeeas 262 OE VIEW LR EIE 262 Analysis Tools Ro I eroe ott a ase epa A m toe ote te derer ice be gue 262 Tools for Visualization and Theory Building rete rdc nice te et bi eid zi la adt a d cna rk niga d D ER 263 The W
565. to describe why and for what purpose a family was created This is especially useful when families are treated as attributes ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL FAMILY LIFE 243 Creating or Editing a Family Comment Open the Family Manager for the relevant object type e g by clicking the Family button in an Object Explorer F Select a family F In the text pane at the bottom of the window write or edit a comment Alternatively you can open a full fledged editor by clicking the Comment button in the toolbar Using Families as Filters Access the Filter Options via the Main Menu One added value of families is that you can use them as filters For example if you have created a code family including only Abstract codes you can use this family as a filter to reduce the total number of codes displayed in the drop down list in the Code Manager and the margin area Filter Items using the Family Manager Open the Family Manager Double click a family Watch how the display in the Object Manger and the margin area changes to display only items that are members of the selected family A El T Code Family Manager HU Jack the Ripp tele 5 Name S Murderer E Murderer Murder E Victim Who ames s 4 m Families Edit Miscellaneous View filter setting affects modus operandi_cut throat modus operandi_differences modus operandi_mutilation modus operandi_similarities 4 m
566. to the current source quotation For your information the quotation IDs for the current source and target quotations are listed in the menu Creating Hyperlinks in the Quotation Manager This method can be applied to connect one or more existing quotations to one target quotation ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 366 Select one or more source quotations in the Quotation Manager multiple selections can be done in the standard way Hold down the left mouse button and drag the quotation s to a target quotation in the Quotation Manager Release the left mouse button The Relation menu opens and you can specify the relation to be used for the hyperlinks Id 4 3 en Eddowes was found three day 16 16 4 4 le or in part 16 16 4 5 Dear Boss lette 21 21 74 6 eved this letter and the postc 25 25 5 1 About 11 p m 39 44 Link to quote 51 5 2 was born gt gt gt gt continued by E d if E35 3 ry photogr X contradicts 5 4 WI death c criticizes 5 5 Eliza Henr ss discusses 2 expands 5 7 she was found dei gt _ explains 5 8 Neither the police gt justifies 15 9 An hour later she 8 1 After separating ff Open Relation Editor 8 2 By 1865 she was registered by 1 1416 1 1486 Figure 273 Select quotations drag and click target quotation in the Quotation Manager The new hyperlinks are created Creating Hyperlinks in Margin Are
567. to the other more qualitative oriented analysis tools that ATLAS ti provides ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 306 The c coefficient should vary between 0 codes do not co occur and 1 these two codes co occur wherever they are used It is calculated as follows c n12 n1 n2 n12 n12 co occurrence frequency of two codes c1 and c2 whereby n1 and n2 are their occurrence frequency What you may experience is the following Out of range The C index exceeds the 0 1 range it is supposed to stay with Colored circles Cells can have additional visual cues e g a red yellow or orange circle Out of range The c index structurally resembling the Tanimoto and Jaquard Coefficient which are similarity measures assumes separate non overlapping text entities Only then can we expect a correct range of values However ATLAS ti s quotations may overlap to any degree Overlaps would only then bear no problem if there wasn t any coding redundancy the ones you can eliminate using the Coding Analyzer see page 381 for further detail Let s look at a few scenarios Case 1 Two differently coded quotations overlap we assume no more quotations available Let P1 be a textual document q1 and q2 be quotations and a b be codes q1 is coded with a q2 is coded with b Figure 208 Out of range example 1 Using the formula c n ab n a n b n ab we get n ab 1 one co occurrence
568. ton select a common relation that applies to all links You can modify the In case of code code and quotation quotations links you are prompted to relations later if needed To link code nodes using the list method Besides using the Network Editor for creating links between codes you can also use the Copes Link Cope ro option available from the main menu or the code context menu Select the target code i e the general broader concept in the Code Manager F Select Copes Link Cone ro Coves from the main menu F Select the source code s from the multiple choice list Select a relation that links the selected codes with the target code If needed the relation can be modified An immediate effect of linking can be noticed when the Code Manager is open the density counter for all linked codes is updated As a reminder Density counts all direct links to other codes For instance if six source codes are linked to one target code the target code is incremented by 6 each source code is incremented by one Using Copes Link Cope ro From the HU Editor s main menu memos and quotations may also be linked to codes Memos can also be linked to other memos quotations or codes via the menu option Memo Link Memo ro However no specific relation can be selected to link memos to other objects To create code code and quotation quotation links using the Object Manager This is not really a topic for this chapt
569. toolbar and menus and via drag amp drop For immediate feedback when creating quotations switch on the margin area if not yet activated Before a quotation can be created an appropriate selection must exist Selecting Text Segments In addition to the usual selection techniques known from text editors and word processors ATLAS ti offers an extended semi automatic double click selection technique for textual primary documents Here is how it works Double click selection sequence Paragraph Complete Text Figure 101 Text segmenting options Double click to select the word assuming it is not yet selected Double click on the selection to expand it to the sentence embedding the current selection Double click on the selection to expand it to the full paragraph surrounding the selection Double click again to select the complete text Double click once more to deselect the selected area For the semi automatic selection of sentences and paragraphs the currently used Paragraph Model plays a crucial role For instance if you have assigned a Legacy document with hard returns for every line selecting a paragraph will select a line unless you have switched interpretation to an Old Paragraph Model see ATLAS ti Version 5 manual Selecting PDF Segments Selecting PDF segments works essentially in the same way as selecting segments in text of graphic files If you select text in a PDF file you need t
570. trieval The act of comparing noteworthy segments leads to a creative conceptualization phase that involves higher level interpretive work and theory building ATLAS ti assists you in all of these tasks and provides a comprehensive overview of your work as well as rapid search retrieval and browsing functions Within ATLAS ti initial ideas often find expression through their assignment to a code or memo to which similar ideas or text selections also become assigned ATLAS ti provides the researcher with a highly effective means for quickly retrieving all data selections and notes relevant to one idea Read more detail in the section on the Data Level Basic Functions in the full manual Conceptual Level Work Beyond coding and simple data retrieval ATLAS ti allows you to query your data in lots of different ways combining complex code queries with variables exploring relationships between codes and to visualize your findings using the network tool ATLAS ti allows you to visually connect selected passages memos and codes into diagrams that graphically outline complex relations This feature virtually transforms your text based workspace into a graphical playground where you can construct concepts and theories based on relationships between codes data segments or memos This process sometimes uncovers other relations in the data that were not obvious before and still allows you the ability to instantly revert to your note
571. ts Service Pack MANAGER ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL APPENDIX Select the service pack below and dick the Start Install button to upgrade your current version of ATLAS ti Restart ATLAS ti directly after the upgrade NOTE Only service packs already downloaded are handled by this procedure and newer updates cannot be determined Name Updates to Applicable File Size Created AG Update 6 2 27 6 2 27 yes A602027 spk 862208 01 09 2011 17 This update lifts ATLAS ti 6 2 26 to 6 2 27 Changes Save comments without confirmation when switching items in hierarchical manaaers e a ObiectExblorer Mi Start Install Cancel Figure 335 The Service Pack Installer window f n 3 ATLAS ti Service Pack Installer E 439 Holding down the SHIFT key prevents the Service Pack Manager from trying to connect to our download server The update file s spk should be displayed Click Instatt to proceed and follow the instructions on your screen If multiple updates need to be installed you may have to repeat the procedure ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL INDEX 440 Index Absolute Paths dx ie tat S eee b LE e LU E LI e dl ah alt cn de 108 Administrator Automatic backup a A NOA 271 Bugs 434 Coi aaa HQ 155 Code WRT ON RT 352 Codes Free codes Renaming Commutativity sis O A A A asce
572. ts For instance if the primary document s filter is set to a specific family creating a report of All quotations yields only those quotations for primary documents within that specific family rs 95 All current quotations 40 Quotation Filter Hyper extended version File Edit Format Insert Help Eu T courierNew vill vB All current quotations 40 Quotation Filter Hyper extended version HU Jackthe Ripper stage II 62 File CAProgramDatalScientific Software ATLASti CommonDocumen Jack the Ripper stage II 62 hpr6 Edited by team Date Time 2011 09 14 20 28 06 P 2 Transcript Jack the Ripper Introduction 2 4 It is my pleasure to escort you now back to the Lo 8 8 Susanne No codes No memos Hyper Links shown in GE map 16 6 Victims circle GE snapshot Co orlinked quote 16 6 Figure 302 Output of hyperlinked quotations The figure above shows the report generated after setting the the quotation filter to Hyper linked The quotation filter is displayed in the header Restricting Output to Selected Objects Output options for selected objects available from the HU Editor s menus are restricted to a single object For example you can print one code at a time Output options within the Object Manager allow you to select multiple objects ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL GENERATING OUTPUT 393 and output each of them at the same time For example you can highlight three
573. ts were edited creates a copy bundle file see page 129 and stores it at a secure location Keep three rolling copies of your backup files folders The project administrator creates a copy bundle file immediately after setting up the project and after each merge operation and stores it at a secure location Repeat the above work flow until all data are coded and analyzed Benefits of this approach Facilitates team work and distributed work organization Team members are flexible and can work at different work locations Team members can work simultaneously at the same project If editing rights are negotiated this also includes simultaneous work on primary documents The project folder can be completely copied moved to another location and all documents remain accessible Migrating or backing up your project using the Copy Bundle function is easy Unpacking the copy bundle file can be done anywhere on the target computer ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL TEAM PROJECT MANAGEMENT 171 Drawbacks Negotiations between team members is essential Files need to be duplicated copied to the various project folders Sharing of all documents is only possible safely if the assigned documents are not edited As every sub project is stored in its own private data folder modifications to a document are not immediately propagated to other sub projects using the same documents This only takes place when the project administrato
574. tual quotations can be included in a Network View by simply dragging a piece of text from the PD Families as Nodes Families are a useful device to group codes memos or PDs that belong to one concept Instead of displaying all of the codes belonging to the concept the Code Family may be displayed The links between families and their members are depicted by a dotted red line ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 326 4 E i p nl e e eerste amp 3 CF Reason for discharge P 4 e aii T Figure 232 Families as nodes Network Views as Nodes The node icon and label for network views Scene of the second murder Chapman in Hanbury Street Figure 233 Network view as node Network Views as nodes allow the inclusion of Network Views in other Network Views The Network View s context menu offers the option to open the View in a separate Network Editor This is also available via double click with Ctrl pressed Basic Network View Procedures Creating Network Views Two methods for creating Network Views are available The first one creates an empty Network View into which objects are imported in sequential steps The other method creates a Network View from a selected object and its neighbors To create a new Network View Select Nerworks New Nerwork View from the HU editor s main menu or from the drop down list offered by the Network button in the main toolbar
575. u focused on the data and quite often the functions you need are just a few mouse clicks away ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL INTRODUCTION 22 Integration Another fundamental design aspect of the software is to integrate all pieces that comprise a project in order not to lose sight of the whole when going into detail Therefore all relevant entities are stored in a container the so called Hermeneutic Unit HU Like the spider in its web the HU keeps all data within reach Loading a project with hundreds of files is merely a matter of opening a single HU Version 5 further strengthens the idea of integration as it allows the inclusion of a larger variety of data types into the analysis Rich Text documents including Excel PowerPoint and other embedded objects can now be analyzed as easy as plain text was in the earlier versions of ATLAS ti ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL INTRODUCTION ser en dip i ty Pronunciation di p amp tE Function noun Etymology from its possession by the heroes of the Persian fairy tale The Three Princes of Serendip the faculty or phenomenon of finding valuable or agreeable things not sought for Webster s Dictionary 23 Serendipity Webster s Dictionary defines the word serendipity as a seeming gift for making fortunate discoveries accidentally Other translations are fortunate accidents lucky discoveries In the context of information systems one should add Fin
576. ude for example online help systems that display operational information in suitable small chunks compared to lengthy printed information but with a considerable amount of linkage to other pieces of information A well known hypermedia structure is the World Wide Web with its textual graphical and other multimedia information distributed world wide Benefits of Hypertext What are the advantages of direct connections between text segments compared to the traditional procedures of qualitative text analysis What codes cannot do Maybe we should ask a different question first How can you express that statement X in text A contradicts statement Y in text B or how can you retrieve all contradictory statements of a specific utterance if all you have is codes and their associations with the data The code amp retrieve paradigm which is so prevalent for many systems supporting the qualitative researcher is not adequate for certain types of analysis In formal terms attaching codes to chunks of data creates named sets of segments with almost no internal structure This is not to say that partitioning lots of text segments into sets is not useful On the contrary classification leads to manageable amounts of segments that later can be retrieved with the help of the attached code words But this may not be the only way you want to look at your data The concept of hypertext introduces explicit relations between passages These links hav
577. uired that you read the manual sequentially from first page to last Feel free to skip sections that describe concepts you are already familiar with jump directly to sections that describe functions you are interested in or simply use it as a reference guide to look up information on certain key concepts For users with no prior knowledge of ATLAS ti we do however recommend that you especially read through the first part of this manual in order to become familiar with the concepts used by ATLAS ti and to gain an overview of the available functions These are the chapters The VISE Principle on page 21 Main Concepts and Features on page 25and Main Workspace The HU Editor on page 43 Further to set up a project we recommended that you read about the Main Steps in Working with ATLAS ti on page 38 and Preparing Primary Documents on page 71 For all basic level work like creating quotations coding and writing memos consult the chapters under the main heading The Data Level Basic Functions on page 181ff Advanced functions are described under Data Analysis and Theory Building Tools on page 262ff The sequence of the chapters follows the steps that are necessary to start and work on an ATLAS ti project First the main concepts that ATLAS ti utilizes are explained then an overview of all available tools is provided These introductory and more theoretically oriented parts are followed by more practically oriented chapters
578. uter there is probably no need to change the location If your project uses the HUPATH setup all documents are copied to the location chosen in the field HU Path A check box lets you exclude the HU itself i e the HPR6 file from the installation ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL PROJECT BACKUP AND MIGRATION 133 Below the HU path the TBPATH of the target computer is displayed This pane is not visible in Restore mode If a data source is addressed relative to the TBPATH it is copied to the TBPATH named here List of Bundled Documents Name Target Location Use Es 2 Victim Mar lt HUPATH gt yes E 2 Victim Mar lt HUPATH gt yes E d Victims locati lt HUPATH gt yes lt HUPATH gt lt HUPATH gt lt HUPATH gt yes m fl 3 investigati yes H Size Log Modified Type 87 06KB 27 06 2009 10 pdf 38 58KB 27 06 2009 10 pdf 444 50KB 18 08 2009 18 text 313 73KB 21 08 2009 17 graphic 321 24KB 21 08 2009 17 graphic 519 52KB 27 06 2009 10 pdf Figure 66 List of documents to be unbundled The list of documents included in the bundle can be sorted with a click on the column header The following information is provided Name of the document Target location of the document including special paths A field indicating if this document is used when unpacking the bundle It also contains a small colored box indicating a possible conflict m
579. vantage is that you need to do this every time you download the table for instance because you are checking incrementally and not all respondents have filled out the questionnaire yet Mark all cells in the table and format them as Text right click on the highlighted table and select the option Format Cells Save the table as xls or xlsx file Close Excel or at least the document that you want to import Open ATLAS ti and select Documents Assicn Import Survey Data The import procedure starts and ATLAS ti informs you when all data are imported During the import one primary document is created from every row Unlike normal PDs who get their contents from files these primary documents need to have their content data source created as well These data sources are embedded within the HU see Reference for internal documents on page 119 The creation of the textual contents is done as follows Each row is scanned from left to right column by column Each cell s content belonging to an open ended question field is appended to the currently built document case In addition each piece of appended text is also referenced as a quotation automatically coded with the current question Special families are created for all imported PDs and codes to make filtering for the survey material easy See the section on Family Life on page 237 for further information Save the Hermeneutic Unit As default name the name of th
580. w conditions Colors Coloring helps in detecting co occurrences The following options are provided Cell colors You can choose among three colors for the table cells blue red and green To select a different color click on the color button in the tool bar Figure 212 Setting the color channel for table cells All cells showing that a co occurance exist are colored with the selected color Different color intensities are used to indicate the strength of the association The higher the c coefficient the lighter the color This is also the case if the c coefficient is not displayed Figure 213 Three alternative colors and their shades by size of c coefficient In order not to present a misleading image all cells displaying an out of range number gt 1 are colored in yellow ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 309 Figure 214 A yellow cell and a red circle indicate an out of range coefficient Passive View If you just want to get feeling for potential patters in your data try the passive view which is a detached image that only shows colors d bs z a E a mu ail Ifl I ot T E Eaa Figure 215 Example of a passive overview as an aid to detect pattern Data Export RTF qualitative You can either export a list of the co occuring codes or the list including quotation IDs and names in form of an rtf file The the full content of the quotations cannot be
581. work Maximum flexibility can be achieved by storing all associated documents in a common folder hierarchy For simple projects one would typically choose to store the HU and the documents into the same folder If a common location for the documents is not possible e g your documents are scattered across the file system or the local area network certain rules should be followed See Scenario 2 Multiple Document Paths on page 117ff However whenever feasible data source documents should be stored in a common location in the following referred to as the project folder Of course instead of piling all documents into a single folder you may create appropriate sub folders within the main project folder This allows for convenient separation of a potentially large number of files into different media types or sub topics However after a project has been set up this way sub ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SETTING UP A NEW PROJECT 114 folders should never be moved independently of the main project folder see figures 52 and 53 on page 109 Set up options for team projects are described in Team Scenario 1 The team is sharing the same data source files on a shared drive on page 157 and Team Scenario 2 Teams that do not always or never have access to a shared drive on page 165 Splitting a project and merging the split projects later can be accomplished in all of the scenarios presented Such a Split amp Merge a
582. xt Editors PD Printing Memos Figure 54 Setting the TBPATH to a user specified location All users working on the same local network can use a UNC path instead WServerTNCN ATLASti Data Each user wishing to access this folder needs to set their TBPATH identically ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA MANAGEMENT IN ATLAS TI Pros If this path is set appropriately on different computers projects can easily be carried back and forth e If the location of the data repository changes access can be easily managed by simply changing the TBPATH to the new location e Inalocal area network this folder is available to all ATLAS ti users if it was set to a central location i e one where all users have appropriate permissions Cons When the TBPATH is changed and the new location does not contain the files or the previous location or an exact copy of these files references of PDs using the TBPATH reference will fail As ATLAS ti has very strict version control features regarding the usability of files used as PDs access will be rejected if files found at the new location do not match the accessibility information each PD stores when accessing a data source Inaccessibility can be caused by a file that has been edited If the HU itself is stored in the TBPATH folder HUPATH wins If you want to assign documents using the TBPATH relevant for certain team scenarios you need to store the HU file at a different locatio
583. xt Format RTF See also Supported Formats page 74 for additional information Rich Text RTF Rich Text Format is a proprietary text data format developed and propagated by Microsoft and intended as an industry standard for exchanging documents between different applications It supports such extensions as character formatting bold italic color etc with different fonts and sizes paragraph formatting bullets indentation alignment etc embedded objects graphics tables video etc and more All textual documents are displayed on the basis of Rich Text within ATLAS ti Saving documents as rich text is a standard feature that can be found in most word processing programs In Word for instance this is an option that can be selected in the data type field when saving documents under a different name Save as We recommend storing documents as rich text right away even if they are currently plain text and do not contain any formatting However no miracles should be expected from a conversion into RTF The success of the conversion heavily depends on the characteristics of the converter used Bear in mind that the quality of such conversions usually does not reach the richness in appearance and procedures of the original Word etc documents e g multiple lines in tables from a Word document are not displayed identically within ATLAS ti Word doc and docx files For your convenience we also support the inclusion
584. xtual primary documents plain and Rich Text Rich Text file IDs RTF encoded primary documents Selected code PD Quotes Quotations coded with the currently selected code Abstract codes Codes Codes without quotations Less selective than Free PDs PDs PDs PDs Graphical primary documents PDs PDs PDs Pattern Searches as Filter Enter a GREP pattern to filter all objects with names matching this pattern For example if you have used names prefixed with ATT for all codes handling attitudes the pattern ATT would filter all those codes the caret character anchors the search at the beginning of the name ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL SORTING AND FILTERING Press CTRL and double click the filter field to remove a filter 389 Enter to filter all items containing arbitrary text in brackets An overview of the available GREP expressions is listed in the section GREP Search on page 229 To Reverse a Filter Choosing Toggle Filter from the menu or double clicking the filter field reverses the filter The tilde symbol indicates a negated filter in the status bar By reversing the codes filter Abstract you can display all codes that are not Abstract These are all codes that do have quotations associated with them In the filter field you see the entry Abstract negated filter Figure 299 Negate a filter by double clicking on the status bar To Remove or Reset Filters
585. y l mean primarily the most important thing really is that erm obviously y n withdraw at ay from the study apart from when it goes on to the inte EVOR It s too late then yeah J ET 1 INT Yes 4 TREVOR You re in trouble if you change your mind then laughs INT Exactly laughs But up until that point and we will sort of tell you when that point s gunna be J 1 TREVOR It s alright just won t watch my bit laughs J 1 Figure 142 Example transcript ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL FAMILY LIFE 237 Family Life Just as codes describe sets of quotations families cluster Primary Documents Codes and Memos One important objective is to manage large amounts of objects by classifying them into subsets e g all theoretical codes all PDs from respondents of a certain age group or location all memos related to a theme etc Purpose of Creating and Working with Families In the following the role of families as variables super families and for controlling the HU merge procedure are introduced While families are used to classify a group of objects the objects they classify can be members of more than one family Unlike Network Views which can contain objects of different types as nodes families can only contain one type of object For example a code can never be a member of a memo family Partitioning objects into families reduces the number of chunks requiring the researcher s attention Familie
586. y Doc Families v amp age group I 0 City New York circulation local 5 age group II gender female A Scope of Query E age group I 0 e circulation local 5 2 circulation national 4 E 4 m r Primary Docs P 1 Badische Zeitung onlin ZEP 2 Badische Zeitung Schw amp P 3 Be i 4 Figure 186 Combining document families to set the scope 2 AILA3 U USEK MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 289 Super Families Just like Super Super Families follow the same underlying logic as Super Codes cf Super Codes Super Codes on page 282 They are constructed by combining families or already Families re existing super families calculate their members on Their members are determined dynamically whenever you activate a Super demand Family Super families can be created based on primary document families code families and memo families Below an example is shown for primary document families Creating super code or super memo families works in the same way Using Super Families Example You are working in the Customer Department of an airline and have been given the task to analyze customer complaints As basis for your analysis you have a set of documents dealing with customer complaints about domestic flights and a set of documents dealing with customer complaints about international flights Your company is particularl
587. y come across some data that fits the category but there is no fitting subcode yet or you are unsure where to put it Then you can use the main category code to collect these instances Once a number of instances are collected you can review them and think some more about them By reading through or viewing listening to a couple of examples it becomes often easier to decide how to code it You may decide to create a new subcode or decide that an existing subcode fits after all CATEGORY A category A sub 1 category A sub 2 category A sub 3 CATEGORY B category B sub 1 category B sub 2 category B sub 3 A further possibility is to sort codes by numbers or numbers and letters 1 CATEGORY A 11 A sub 1 12 A sub2 13 A sub 3 2 CATEGORY B 21 B sub 1 22 B sub2 23 B sub 3 ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS and so on 221 The sorting order is 1 special characters _ etc 2 numbers and 3 letters Therefore it is NOT a good idea to use prefixes like 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 etc Such a numbering scheme will necessarily wreak havoc with your intended sorting order 10 will be sorted before 2 When using numerals always use 01 02 03 or and so on for sorting to be on the safe side The Jack the Ripper Quick Tour project shows a structured code list achieved by using alphabetically sorted prefixes You can access this project in ATLAs ti via Herp Quick
588. y interested in differences between domestic and international flights and differences between business and leisure travelers Important factors to analyze might be gender level of income and frequent flyer status The matrix below is based on the four customer groups Domestic Flights International Flights Business traveler Business traveler Leisure traveler Leisure traveler To represent these four groups in ATLAS ti you create primary document families Next you code the data For example you may use codes such as punctuality oj mon general service in flight services and human interaction to describe complaints customers had After coding you can use the query tool in combination with the scope function to find out how the four groups differ in terms of their complaint behavior F Open the Query Tool Double click on the code containing the information you are interested in e g complaints about in flight services Click Scope to restrict the search to a specific sub groups of your data e g business travelers on domestic flights Double click on the PD family Domestic Flights and on the PD family Business Traveler and combine them using the AND operator The result pane of the Query Tool now displays all quotations related to complaints about in flight services from business travelers on domestic flights ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 290
589. y load the content of a PD Activating it in the document drop down list or the PD Manager Activating a quotation in the quotation drop down list or the Quotation Manager Selecting a quotation for an activated double clicked code or memo Activating a hyperlink in the margin area e Using the Loap option from the context menu of a PD node in a Network Editor To load a PD using the drop down list F Click on the PD drop down list Select a PD by clicking on an entry in the list The selected PD is displayed in the PD pane If the list does not display all PDs assigned the scrollbar lets you navigate the list of entries ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION LOK files protect your documents from accidental modifications The HU is also protected against accidental concurrent editing 84 To load a PD using the PD Manager Open the PD Manager by clicking the button to the left of the PD drop down list Double click an entry in the PD Manager to load and display the PD File Locking When a document is loaded a lok file for this document is created e g interview rtf lok This file is the gatekeeper that controls access to the data Source Every user on every ATLAS ti workstation accessing a data source is registered in this LOK file It also registers the name of the user the name of the computer and the time access was granted None of this information is stored forever all
590. y selected parts of audio or video documents by moving the track bar slider Do this by clicking the navigation button of the media control window or by using short cut keys Play Pause Play p toggle Space Stop s ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 89 Disconnecting Primary Documents Removing unwanted PDs from an HU is called disconnecting If you disconnect a PD the data source the document file or memo to which it refers is not deleted or otherwise affected but disconnecting a PD does remove all of its quotations from the HU As a consequence all references to other quotations hyperlinks other codes and memos are also removed Select the PD to be removed from the HU Choose Documents Disconnect from the main menu Or select a PD in the Primary Document Manager right click on the document and choose Disconnect from the context menu ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA PREPARATION 90 Data Transcription The A Docs function introduced in ATLAS ti 6 allows you to not only transcribe your data within ATLAS ti but to also link documents to each other in such a way that you view them synchronously This means you can read your transcript and listen to the audio file hearing the original tone of voice or viewing the segment in the video file When in the midst of your analysis you can mark a segment or a quotation of an associated document and instantly listen to the original audio or view the video
591. yellow part of the node color note name of suspect in the figure below Density i e the number of links to other codes increases the blue part name of suspect Cohen is the winner in the figure below In the Code Manager high density codes are indicated in red high frequency codes in blue This makes codes that are heavily or seldom used for coding or model building easily identifiable To initiate the auto color mode in a network view click on the colored circle in the toolbar and activate Auro CoLon Morr In the Code Manager you find the auto color option under the Views menu ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL DATA ANALYSIS AND THEORY BUILDING TOOLS 350 gt Name Grounded Density Auth T date of murder Y historic context we ul ange name of suspect Coher T name of suspect Feigenbaum name of suspect Kaminski Y name of suspect Kelly YS name of suspect Kosmiski user defined colors auto color mode auto color mode in the Code Manager Figure 253 Auto color mode Fonts The font used for nodes and links can be set independently choosing Disptay Set Fonts from the Network Editor s main menu Display of Nodes Nodes can be displayed either in a flat or 3D view shaded or with rounded edges and a gradient fill Select any of the three options click on the Display button shown below na 3D Shadowed Nodes Rounded Nodes with Gradient Fill Figure 254 Display optio
592. ys we decided to be more generous in regard to giving you the possibility to revert to a previous state Once you find that everything works well feel free to remove all backup of files ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL EDITING PRIMARY DOCUMENTS 136 Editing Primary Documents PDs are often shared between different projects and or users team members A single file can be in use by more than one project Click the pencil to enter edit mode Objectives One of the core ideas of ATLAS ti is that PDs are shared and part of an archive As you already know all quotations codes and memos are actually not parts of PDs but are transparent layers that are stored within the HU Because of this editing is blocked by default when you view a PD in ATLAS ti However it may be necessary to edit the content of a PD For instance transcribed texts are often loaded with typos and other writing errors Documents might not be complete and text may need to be added after they were assigned Edit mode needs to be intentionally switched on for textual PDs This section introduces available editing options and the issues to be considered when editing PDs Two versions of a coded text are shown in the figure below one version before and one version after an editing session The added text is colored red When we refer to editing a PD we indeed mean editing the content thus the data source file on the computer hard disk is
593. z 12418 Pat Vim Cecile GE snapshot 100 e homm ie SE map e vicis circ GE snapshot 27 485 T my pleasure to escort you now hack to the London of 3888 and around the arva where the five murder toot place N Maune Quotaboss TAM o my pianure to escort you now back to Se Lo oer le GE map NS feia Mack the lipper n a pruemdonym green to an unidentifio d serial kifer active in the largely imponente d Whitechapel arsa mud achecert Grincts of London England m ise 1468 The name ongmated m a letter sent to the London Central News Agency by someone chimng to be the murderer Figure 266 A network of quotations General Procedures Star or Chain connections 2 3 continued by Comment The quote Inper sked to an huracan tram the magazine Puck tom 159 in Dus satirical depecion which Spiane on fe Rippers este a x rater uesavory hgere t 1309 ganng 5 a vanoa port als Cars tures shon pm e 114y1313 O 725 The Pinchin Ghost tender prompted u rmenali of interest in the caido Appa marderted in an Auw don from puck Puck showing te Apper from behind tcoking im a error at alerta tt recons embodying curreet speculation i to whom te might be a donor a dence woman s Jem bandt or a poleemas 924 Cover page Puck 09 1859 jpg When linking quotations you have the option to create a chain a star or a combination of both Below a chain and star connection are illustrated
594. zed Figure 106 Graphical quotation To create a quotation select the create quotation button in the vertical tool bar or right click on the selection then select Create FREE Quotation from the context menu or select this option from the main menu Quotations Create Free Quotation All quotations within a graphical document are numbered consecutively Activating and Displaying Graphical Quotations In addition to the general activation procedures described for textual quotations a graphical quotation can be activated by directly double clicking within its box in the document pane Where two or more quotations intersect you are presented with a list of quotations from which to choose All graphical quotations are indicated by borders A selected quotation is depicted either in inverse color or by a thicker border see above To change the display Right click anywhere within the graphical image and select Setection DispLay Type Figure 107 Inverted display of a graphical quotation Permanent display of graphical quotations frames can be toggled off and on To change the permanent display ATLAS ti 6 USER MANUAL THE DATA LEVEL BASIC FUNCTIONS 189 Right click an area on the graphical document and choose Toca Areas DispLay from the context menu Modifying Graphical Quotations The procedure is the same as for textual quotations Activate the quotation if not already selected Select t

ATLAS.ti 6 User`s Guide and Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents